o^ een A re 4 D P irat ps n ^ ee å > : a ] 74 9 ee quce nr ga ee pres IAE 7 UT aA ee PLANT Ern LAXE | T e: = ; Os a ive ^Y ING AV À " REN Ag ABU ST . 4 Je, Ds à, E ") 7 - à , N Di NYT MAGAZIN, .. À fw 7 Nm AA b. ~~, NATURVIDENSKABERNE GRUNDLAGT AF DEN PHYSIOGRAPHISKE FORENING 3 I CHRISTIANIA BIND 42. REDAKTION: H. Moun, Tu. HiortDAHL, W. C. Broccer, F. NANSEN, HoveDREDAKTØR N. WILLE. €—— SS — CHRISTIANIA I KOMMISSION HOS T. 0. BROGGER A. W. BROGGERS BOGTRYKKERI 1904 A t i Å E ae be d ^c Indhold. W. C. Broceer, Ueber die chemische Zusammensetzung des Xenotim 1 P. Hennines, Beitrag zur Pilzflora der Umgebung Christianias (Halb- rad Esude)s yrs es NE Ea te Tas 9 P. Scner, On some New Occurences of Titanite from Kragerø (Pl. I). 35 O. Scaurrz, Beiträge zur Gattung Papilio L. und Colias Leacu. 1—11 39 F. G. Gavr og J. HorwBor, Aarsberetning for det biologiske selskab * Frstone. TO - Fe 41 BK vrelivet 1 Drøbaksund (PL IL, I). ........... . 61 H.N. Dixon and W. E. NicHorsow, Bryological notes ona trip in Norway 91 E. STRAND, Beitrag zur Schmetterlingsfauna Norwegens. II . . . " 109 E. Srranp, Bemerkninger til Myntmester Münsters „Nye norske mane? 2 2 s DC MM NM MT 180 SØKES erre Om vegetationen 1 Granvin . =. « «cc L9 $4. 183 N. Wazze et V. Wirrrocx, Motion au Congrès international de Bo- tanique. Deuxième Session. Vienne 1905 ........... 217 K. Dann, A study on trout and young salmon. (Report on researches concerning the migrations of young salmon 1898— 1902). (With Ip. ame 1 SUD) S M Ce IS ML NE 291 J. Qviestap, Lappiske Navne paa Pattedyr, Krybdyr og Padder, Fiske, latter 2 Goose uo sem REI Gel n ns 339 canne dalser RER SE er RE re I—VI Forfatterne alfabetisk ordnede. W. C. Broccer S. 1, Knut Dart S. 991, H. N. Dixon S. 91, F. G. Gave S. 47, P. Hennines S. 9, J. HormBor S. 47, Hans Ksær S. 61, W. E. NICHoLSON S. 91, J. Qviestap S. 339, P. Scazr S. 35, Oskar SCHULTZ S. 39, S. K. SELLAND S. 183, EmBr. STRAND S. 109, 180, N. Witte S. 917, V. WirrrRock S. 917. 31453 Uber die chemische Zusammensetzung des Xenotim. Von Professor Dr. W. C. Bregger. In einer vor etwa zwei Jahren erschienenen Abhandlung: ,Hussakit, ein neues Mineral, und dessen Beziehung zum Xeno- lim“! haben die Verfasser derselben, E. H. Kraus und J. Rer- TINGER die Vermuthung ausgesprochen, ,dass das, was man Xenotim nennt, weiter nichts ist, als ein Hussakit, aus welchem durch Einfluss der natürlichen Wässer die Schwefelsäure aus- gelaugt und der so ın das Yttriumphosphat übergeführt wurde“; der sogenannte Xenotim wäre somit nur „eine Pseudomorphose nach dem Hussakit^, dessen Zusammensetzung nach einem ana- lysirten Vorkommen von Dattas bei Diamantina in Brasilien aus 9 R, O,. 3 P, O,. SO, besteht. Diese Auffassung der Zusammensetzung des Xenotim wurde von den Verfassern dadurch begründet, dass alle bisjetzt analy- sirten Xenotime an mehr oder weniger zersetztem Material aus- geführt gewesen wären, allein mit Ausnahme einer Analyse von BLoMSTRAND an dem von mir beschriebenen Xenotim von Aro, bei Langesund, Norwegen; für diese Analyse wurde aber an- 1 Grorn’s Zeitschr, f. Krystallographie und Mineralogie, B. 34, P. 268 ff. (1901). Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII. I. 1 9 W. C. BRØGGER. genommen, dass die Schwefelsaure übersehen worden sei, indem der Nachweiss derselben, bei der von BLomsTRAND angewandten analytischen Methode (Aufschliessung mit Schwefelsäure) nicht möglich war. Die Verfasser fanden auch eine Stütze ihrer Auf- fassung darin, dass in einem Xenotim von Hitterø Schwefelsäure durch qualitative Prüfung nachgewiesen wurde; die Abwesenheit von Schwefelsäure in anderen norwegischen Xenotimen (von Arendal, Raade bei Moss und Hilterø) wurde durch die oben genannte Hypothese von einer Auslaugung früher vorhandener Schwefelsäure erklärt. Diese Hypothese über die Zusammensetzung des Xenotim scheint mehreren späteren Verfassern als bewiesen zu gelten; so identificiert z. B. H. Röster! ohne weiteres den in Gesteinen vorkommenden Xenotim mit Hussakit. Da diese Hypothese über die wahre Zusammensetzung des Xenotim mir aber ziemlich fraglich vorkommen musste, schien es mir wünschenswerth die- selbe wenn móglich genauer zu prüfen. Von dem von BLoMSTRAND analysırten Krystall des Xeno- tim von Aro hatte ich noch eine kleine Quantität übrig; die- selbe wurde nach der von REITINGER angewandten Methode auf Schwefelsäure geprüft. Die Bestimmung wurde von Herrn Dr. O. HEIDENREICH ausgeführt. Es wurde dabei nur àusserst geringe Spuren von Schwefelsäure vorgefunden, jedenfalls bedeutend we- niger als 0.1 9/o wahrscheinlich kaum mehr als 0.01 %. Da für diese Prüfung nur 0.2 Gram angewandt werden konnte, war eine genauere Bestimmung ausgeschlossen; es schien in Betracht der ganz geringen Spur von Schwefelsäure, welche bei dieser Prüfung vorgefunden wurde, auch nicht ausgeschlossen, dass dieselbe vielleicht von einer Verunreinigung der Reagentien herrühren könne. Es schien deshalb wünschenswerth eine zweite Bestimmung ! Über den Hussakit (Xenotim) und einige andere seltene gesteinsbildende Mineralien, Z. K. B. 96, P. 958, ff. ÜBER DIE CHEM. ZUSAMMENS. DES XENOTIM. 5 mit sorgfältig geprüften Reagentien auf einer grösseren Quantität von Substanz zu erhalten. Glücklicher weise war nun vor eini- gen Jahren eine geringe Anzahl von Krystallen herstammend aus demselben Vorkommen, als das von BLomsTRAND untersuchte, einem der Inselchen bei Arö, für die Mineraliensammlung der Universität Kristiania erworben, und von diesen Krystallen wurde nun ein vollstándig frisches Bruchstück für die Analyse aufgeopfert; im Ganzen wurde dabei etwas mehr als 2 Gram für die Bestimmung gebraucht. Dieselbe, welche ebenfalls von Herrn Dr. ©. HEIDENREICH ausgeführt wurde, gab das Resultat, dass keine Spur von Schwefelsäure in dieser Probe nach- gewiesen werden konnte. Das Material dieser beiden M war, wie gesagt, voll- kommen frisch, bräunlich durchsichtig bis durchscheinend; das sp. Gew. war früher von mir für die von BLoMSTRAND unter- suchte Probe zu 4.62 bestimmt!. Der ganz kleine von Brow- STRAND nachgewiesene Wassergehalt (Glühverlust) von 0.23 %o dürfte nach dem Befund der mikroskopischen Untersuchung von mechanisch eingeschlossenen Flüssigkeitseinschlüssen herrühren können. Nach dieser Revision der BLomsTRAND'schen Analyse ist es somit sicher bewiesen, dass der Xenotim von Aro aus YPO, ohne Beimengung eines Sulphates besteht und dass der Xeno- tm somit nicht als eine Pseudomorphose nach Hussakit auf- zufassen ist, sondern eine selbständige gut charachterisirte Mineralspecies bildet. Nachdem dies als sicher festgestellt angesehen werden muss, fragt es sich dann ferner wie demnach das Verhältniss zwischen dem Xenotim und dem Hussakit aufzufassen sein dürfte. Die Krystalle des frischen unzersetzten Xenotimvorkommens von den Arg-Inselchen zeigt dasselbe Axenverhältniss als der gewöhn- liche Xenotim von den zahlreichen Vorkommen der südnorwegi- ! Für den Hussakit nach Kraus und REITINGER 4.587. 4 W. C. BRØGGER. schen granitischen Pegmatitgánge!, obwohl die Messungen keine sehr genauen Resultate erlaubten, da die Flächen meistens ganz matt sind; nur die Ausbildung ist etwas verschieden, indem die Krystalle von dem Inselchen bei Arg einen ausgesprochen pris- matischen Typus aufweisen, mit vorherrschenden Flächen von 1110}, theils mit 1001! allein, theils mit /001} und 1111! am Ende. Es muss demnach angenommen werden, dass der typische Xe- notim, das heisst das reine Yttriumorthophosphat, und der Hus- sakit sehr nahe dieselbe Krystallform besitzen. Da beide in ganz frischem Zustande bekannt sind, kann der eine nicht als eine Pseudomorphose nach dem anderen aufgefasst werden, weder der Xenotim nach dem Hussakit, noch der Hussakit nach dem Xenotim. Beide Mineralien müssen deshalb in Betracht der nahe verwandten chemischen Zusammensetzung und der völligen Übereinstimmung in physikalischer Beziehung (Krystall- form, Spaltbarkeit, optische Eigenschaften, sp. Gewicht etc.) als verschiedene Glieder derselben Mineraliengatiung betrachtet werden; der Hussakit ist somit wohl am einfachsten als ein Xenotim, in welchem dem Orthophosphat ein Sulphat in unter- geordneter Menge beigemischt ist, aufzufassen. Es fragt sich ob die Beimischung des Sulphates in dem durch die Analyse des Hussakitvorkommens von Dattas gefun- denen Verhältnis SO,: P, O, = 1:3 eine constante stöchio- metrische Verbinding repräsentirt oder nicht? Diese Frage kann selbstverständlich nicht ohne weiteres, sondern erst durch die Untersuchung mehrerer Vorkomnisse von unzersetztem Material beantwortet werden. ! Sieh meine Abhandlung über Xenotim von norwegischen Vorkommen in Geol. Fóren. i Stockholm Förhandl. B. 6, P. 747 ff. ÜBER DIE CHEM. ZUSAMMENS. DES XENOTIM. 3) Kraus und REITINGER haben die Ansicht vertreten, dass dem Hussakit die folgende symmetrische Formel zukäme: 02.0 O 00707750 O 0770 MES era Su RAR P rebum [iS PAPE NST NN 000000000 0 0000000 0 \ GET A N AA NED iv R IG dant Ro + QR R wobei zwei Phosphoratome als Bestandtheile von Pyrophosphor- säure, vier als solche von Orthophosphorsäure angenommen sind. Es dürfte aber vielleicht wahrscheinlicher sein, dass der Hus- sakıt von Dattas eher aufzufassen wäre als ein Xenotim, in welchem fünf Moleküle des gewöhnlichen Orthophosphates YPO, verbunden wären mit einem Molekül eines Metaphosphates eines Atoms von Yttrium, dessen zwei restirende Valenzen mit Schwefel- sáure gesättigt wären, also bestehend aus 5 Molekülen 7 OX ALL (Oy mit einem Molekül Dies dürfte um so wahrscheinlicher sein, als wie bekannt die Metatantalate und Metaniobate von Eisen und Mangan: Ta- piolit und Mossit, mit dem Xenotim geometrisch homoiomorph sind. Wahrscheinlich bildet dann auch die Verbindung 5 [YPO,]. (SO, Y). PO,) keine feste stóchiometrische Verbindung von eben 5 Orthophos- phat mit 1 Metaphosphat, sondern es ist a priori wahrschein- licher, dass zwischen dem wahren Xenotim (ohne Beimischung 6 .. W. C. BRØGGER. des Sulphatmoleküls) und dem sulphathaltigen Hussakit eine vollständige Übergangsreihe vorkommen dürfte, und dass dem- nach das Verhältniss 5:1 in dem Mineral von Dattas nur zu- fällıg gewesen ist. Wo in den genannten norwegischen Vor- kommen nur Spuren von H,SO, nachgewiesen wurden, braucht dies demnach vielleicht nicht auf eine eventuell stattgefundene Auslaugung bezogen zu werden, sondern es ist ebenso wahr- scheinlich, dass die Beimischung, des Sulphatmoleküls auch ur- sprünglich ganz gering gewesen ist. Diese Auffassung wird auch gestützt dadurch, dass gewisse unverkennbare, durch Mor- photropie verständliche, krystallographische Verwandschafsbezieh- ungen zwischen dem Yttriumphosphat, dem Xenotim, und dem Ceriumphosphat, dem Monazit, bestehen, wobei an der Monazit- tafel die Flächen von }100| den Flächen von {001{ des Xenotim entsprechen. Als ein einigermassen obwohl nicht genau analoges Beispiel einer der Xenotim-Hussakitreihe entsprechenden Mischungsreihe dürfte an die Reihe der Alkalıgranate hingewiesen werden: auch in dieser Reihe sind Glieder bekannt mit beigemischtem, an- gehängtem Sulphatmolekül (Nosean-Haüyn-Reihe) und solche ohne Sulphatmolekül (Lagoriolit); diese beiden Verbindungen sind geometrisch homoiomorph und dürften sich wahrscheinlich, wie die Untersuchungen von J. Morozewicz (sich Ref. in Z. K. B. 59, P. 510) lehren, in ganz beliebigen Proportionen mischen kón- nen; vielleicht findet somit ein ähnliches Verhältniss auch statt zwischen dem Xenotim und dem Hussakit. Von dem oben angefürten erhellt dann auch, dass es keines- wegs berechtigt sein dürfte, die gewöhnlichen braunen. Xenotime, welche z. B. an norwegischen granitischen Pegmatitgángen ja sehr verbreitet sind! ohne weiteres als Hussakite, welche durch ! Seitdem meine Abhandlung über das Vorkommen des Xenotim an norwegischen Pegmatitgängen erschien (l. c. 1883) ist eine grosse An- zahl neuer norwegischer Vorkommnisse dieses Minerals bekannt ge- worden. Ich werde dieselben bei späterer Gelegenheit erwähnen. ÜBER DIE CHEM. ZUSAMMENS. DES XENOTIM. 7 Zersetzung ihren Schwefelsäuregehalt eingebüsst haben, zu be- trachten. Ich möchte es im Gegentheil als wahrscheinlicher ansehen, dass sie in den meisten Fällen auch vor der Zersetzung schwefelsäurefrei gewesen sind. Mehrere Vorkommen können übrigens, wie die mikroskopische Untersuchung zu zeigen scheint, jedenfals nur wenig durch Zersetzung geändert sein. Gedruckt 12. November 1903. y ar NT AN LL MER. RE E» Ne í Beitrag zur Pilzflora der Umgebung Christianias (Halbinsel Bygdø). Von P. Hennings. Le Juni 1902 wurden von mir in der Umgebung Ohri- stianias nur eine Anzahl Micromyceten gesammelt, da bei der anhaltenden Dürre nur ganz vereinzelte Hymenomyceten ange- iroffen wurden. Desto reicher zeigte sich von Mitte bis gegen Ende August 1903 in Folge andauernder feuchter Witterung die Agaricinenflora daselbst entwickelt. Besonders zahlreich traten fleischige Hutpilze im Kongeskoven auf der Halbinsel Bygdø, in dessen unmittelbarer Nachbarschaft ich Wohnung genommen hatte, auf. Wegen des unbeständigen Wetters musste von aus- gedehnteren Ausflügen in der Umgebung Christianias Abstand genommen werden, um die unfreiwillige Musse auszufüllen sam- melte, beobachtete und notierte ich die besonders auf Bygdø vorkommenden Pilzarten. Es sind ausserdem nur vereinzelte Ausflüge nach Holmenkollen, Voxenkollen, Sarabraaten, Nord- strand von mir ausgeführt worden. Doch fand sich hier bei weitem nicht der Pilzreichthum wie im Kongeskoven und den benachbarten Waldbestánden. Auf Herrn Professor WirrE's freundlichen Wunsch habe ich alle Pilzarten, welche ich beson- ders auf Bygdo beobachtet und gesammelt habe, im nach- 10 P. HENNINGS. stehenden Verzeichnisse systematisch zusammengestellt. Selbst- folglich giebt dasselbe nur ein sehr unvollständiges Bild der Flora, zumal ich manche Pilze, so verschiedene /nocybe-, Cor- tinarius-, Russula-, Mycena-Arten ohne entsprechende Hilfs- mittel nicht am Ort und Stelle sicher zu bestimmen vermochte. Verschiedene anderswo gemeine Pilze z. B. Amanita muscaria, A. phalloides, A. Mappa, A. rubescens, A. pantherina etc. habe ich nirgends angetroffen, obwohl dieselben sicher auch hier vorkommen dürften. Im Ganzen wurden vor mir ca. 379 Pilz- arten beobachtet und ca. 240 Arten gesammelt, darunter 12 neue Fungi imperfecti. Von dem Präparieren grösserer fleischiger Hutpilze musste mit Rücksicht auf die feuchte Witterung abge- sehen werden. Myxomycetes. Ceratiomyxa mucida (PERs.). Oscarshall auf einem Baumstumpf bei der Wirthschaft. Tubulina cylindrica (Burr). Ebendort. Perichaena corticalis (Batscu.). Daselbst auf einem Pappel- stumpf. Hemitrichia clavata (Prrs.). Daselbst auf Baumstumpt. Lycogala epidendron (Lin). Kongeskoven auf Nadelholzstumpi. Fuligo septica (Lin.). Daselbst auf Nadeln und Holz. Peronosporaceae. Cystopus candidus (Pers). Auf Capsella bursa pastoris, Si- napis arvensis an Wegen u. s. w. C. Tragopogonis (PERs.). Auf Tragopogon pratensis beim Folke- museet, auf Centaurea Scabiosa am Strande im Kongeskoven nach dem Seebad. Phytophthora infestans (MowT.. Auf Kartoffeläckern beim Folkemuseet. Plasmopara nivea (Uxc.). Auf Pimpinella Saxifraga bei Oscars- hall. PILZENFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. {1 Bremia Lactucae Rec. Auf Lampsana communis, Oscarshall. Peronospora conglomerata Fucx. Auf Geranium pusillum beim Seebad. | P. effusa (Grev.). Auf Atriplex patulum im Schlosspark in Christiania Juni 1909. P. Urticae (Lr».). Auf Urtica dioica bei Oscarshall. PP. sordida (BERk..) Auf Scrophularia nodosa in Kongeskoven beim Seebad. P. Rubi RABENH. Auf Rubus fructicosus in Kongeskoven. P. alta Fuck. Auf Plantago major an Wegerändern Furu- baken. Protomycetaceae. Protomyces macrosporus UNG. Auf Aegopodium Podagraria in Gärten Furubaken. Ustilaginaceae. Ustilago Avenae (PERs.. Getreidefeld beim Folkemuseet auf Avena sativa. . U. Hordei (PERs.. Daselbst hinter Oscarshall auf Hordeum vul- gare. U. Scabiosae (Sow.). Auf Knautia arvensis daselbst. U. Tragopogonis (Pers). Gemein auf Tragopogon pratensis beim Folkemuseet u. s. w. Juni 1902. Urocystis Anemones (Prrs.). Anemone nemorosa bei Holmen- kollen Juni 1902. Eniyloma Ranunculi (Bow.. Ranunculus repens. Konge- skoven. E. Calendulae (OupEM.). Calendula officinalis in Furubaken im Garten. Tuburcinia Trientalis (BERK. et Br). Trientalis europaea bei Holmenkollen Juni 1902, Conidienstadium: Ascomyces Trien- talis Ber. 19 P. HENNINGS. Uredinaceae. Uromyces Fabae (Pers.). Lathyrus montanus bei Holmenkollen. Aug. 1903. U. Alchemillae (Pers.). Alchemilla vulgaris. Daselbst Juni 1902. U. Polygoni (Pers). Polygonum aviculare auf Bygdø überall, Nordstrand. U. Geranii (DE CAND.). Geranium palustre? Kongeskoven beim Seebad. U. Valerianae (Scaum.). Valeriana officinalis daselbst. U. Ervi (WALLR.) Ervum hirsutum bei Fredriksborg. U. Aconiti lycoctoni (D. C.). Accidium auf Aconitum septen- trionale bei Sarabraaten. Juni 1909. Puccinia Gali (Pers). Galium verum bei Oscarshall. P. Lactucarum Svp. Lactuca muralis. Kongeskoven, Oscars- hall. P. Lampsanae (ScHuLtz). Lampsana communis bei Oscarshall, Nordstrand. P. Crepidis ScHröt. Crepis tectorum bei Fredriksborg. P. Violae (ScHum.). Viola hirta, V. silvatica in Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. P. Pimpinellae (Strauss). Pimpinella Saxifraga bei Oscarshall. P. Menthae Pers. Mentha arvensis an Aeckern Furubaken, Calamintha Acinos daselbst u. s. w. P. graminis (Pers.). Aecidien vereinzelt auf Berberis; Puccinia gemeiner, besonders auf Secale cereale, dessen Halme stets sehr stark mit Rost bedeckt waren. Es ist überraschend dass die zahllosen Berberisstráucher, wie ich sie zahlreicher als lauf Bygdo nie gesehen, nicht ausgerottet werden, da doch ausgedehnter Getreidebau stellenweise stattfindet. P. coronata Corp. Phalaris arundinacea am Strande nach den Seebad. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 13 P. rubigo — vera (D. CG). Accidien auf Lycopsis bei Frederiks- borg. P. Poarum Niers. Accidien auf Tussilago Farfara überall auf Bygdo, Holmenkollen o, s. v. P. Magnusiana Körn. Phragmites communis am Strande zum Seebad. . suaveolens (PERs.). Cirsium arvense auf Bygdø häufig, . Hieracii ScHum. Hieracium umbellatum häufig an Wegen, nel del H. vulgatum Kongeskoven. . Cirsii LascH. Cirsium oleraceum bei Oscarshall. sf ek . Taraæaci. Taraxacum officinale überall gemein an Wegen auf Bygdø u. s. w. . Carduarum Jacky. Carduus crispus in Furubaken. . Echinopis Hazst. Echinops sphaerocephalus Fredriksborg am Tivoli. eh te P. bullata Pers. Libanotis montana bei Frederiksborg. . P. Polygoni Pers. Polygonum amphibium bei Oscarshall. P. Centawreae Mart. Centaurea Jacea u. Centaurea Scabiosa am Strande im Kongeskoven. P. argentata (Scaurz). Impatiens noli tangere auf Oscarshall spärlich. P.fusca RELH. Anemone nemorosa bei Holmenkollen. Juni 1902. P. Aegopodii (Scuum.). Aegopodium Podagraria bei Oscarshall. P. Arenariae (ScHum.). Moehringia trinervia auf Bygdø, Holmen- kollen. P. Valantiae Pers. Galium Mollugo hinter Oscarshall. P. Malvacearum Mont. Malva neglecta. Furubaken, Nord- strand. P. Glechomatis Dg Cann. Glechoma hederaceum, Kongeskoven. Phragmidium Potentillae (Pzrs.). Potentilla argentea auf Bygdø, Nordstrand an Wegen. Phr. subcorticium (Scur.). Rosa sp. im Garten am Kongeskoven. Melampsora Helioscopiae (Pers... Euphorbia Helioscopia auf Aeckern bei Folkemuseet. 14 P. HENNINGS. M. farinosa (Pers.). Salix Caprea bei Oscarshall. Melampsoridium betulinum (Pers.). Betula alba bei Oscarshall. Pucciniastrum pustulatum Pers. Epilobium montanum bei Holmenkollen. Thecopsora Vacciniorum (LINK.). Vaccinium Myrtillus. Konge- skoven. | Coleosporium Sonchi (Pers.). Sonchus asper am Strande nach Seebad. C. Campanulae (PErs.). Campanula rotundifolia daselbst, auf C. rapunculoides verbreitet. Oronartium ribicola Dietr. Ribes nigrum im Garten beim Kongeskoven. Aecidium leucospernum D.C. Anemone nemorosa auf Holmen- kollen. Juni 1902. A. Grossulariae Pers. Ribes Grossularia beim Folkemuseet. Juni 1902. A. strobilinum ALB. et Schw. Auf alten Zapfen von Picea excelsa überall im Kongeskoven, Oscarshall u. s. w. häufig. Ueberall findet sich hier Prunus Padus, die mit Accidien be- hafteten Zapfen fanden sich oft neben und unter diesen, aber nirgends habe ich hier, trotz vielen Suchens Thecopsora Padi, welches mit dem Aecidium in genetischem Zusam- menhang stehen soll, gefunden. Tremellinaceae. Exidia plicata Krorscu. Auf Erlenstumpf bei Oscarshall. Ulocolla foliacea (Pers... Auf Kiefernstumpf in Kongeskoven. Dacryomycetaceae. Dacryomyces abietinus (Pers). Ueberall gemein auf Fichten- stumpfen, auf Brettern u. s. w. Calocera viscosa (Pers). Auf Wurzeln und Stümpfen von Fichten und Kiefern im Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Holmen- kollen, Sarabraaten u. s. w. PILZENFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 15 Exobasidiaceae. Exobasidium Vaccinii Fuck. Kongeskoven auf Vaccinium Vitis ideae; sehr spärlich auf Arctostaphylos am Strande nach dem Seebad. Hypochnaceae. Hypochuus Sambuci (Pers). Am Grunde von Sambucusstamm im Garten. Thelephoraceae. Corticium comedens (NEEs). Auf Erlenzweigen bei Oscarshall. C. gigantewm (Fries). Am Grunde eines Fichtenstumpfes? in Kongeskoven. Peniophora incarnata (Pers... An der Rinde eines Ulmen- stumpfes am Kongsskoven. P. quercina (PERs.. An abgefallenen Eichenzweigen Oscarshall. Stereum hirsutum (WiLLD.). An Baumstumpfen, Pfählen häufig. St. purpureum Pers. c. form. lilacina. An Stumpfen von Bir- ken, Ulmen, Pappeln daselbst. St. rugosum (PERs.. An Erlenstumpfen Oscarshall. St. sanguinolentum Fries. An Nadelholz in Kongeskoven. Coniophora cerebella (Pers... Am Grunde eines Pfahles bei Fredriksborg Tivoli. Thelephora laciniata Pers. Kongeskoven am Grunde der Stämme. Th. terrestris Kuru. Daselbst in Wegen. Craterellus cornucopioides (Lin.). Oscarshall vereinzelt unter Bäumen. Clavarlaceae. Clavaria inaequalis Mitt. form. Kongeskoven am Wege zw. Moosen auf Nadeln u. Zweigen. Cl. pistillaris (Liv... Sarabraaten auf Erdboden vereinzelt. 16 P. HENNINGS. Cl. cristata (Horwk.) Oscarshall unter Bäumen bei Gols Kirke. Hydnaceae. Hydnum aurantiacum Batscu. Kongeskoven vereinzelt zw. Moosen. H. suaveolens Scor. Sarabraaten. Irpex fusco-violaceus (ScHRAD... An Fichtenstumpf in Konge- skoven. Polyporaceae. Poria Radula Pers. An einen Baumstumpf Oscarshall. Fomes ungulatus (SCHAEFF.). An Stämmen und Stumpfen von Picea excelsa häufig Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Holmenkollen, Voxenkollen. F.annosus FR. An Wurzeln von Picea excelsa? bei Gols Kirke, Sarabraaten. F. ulmarius (Sow.). Oscarshall an Ulmenstamm. F. igniarius (Lin.). An Pflaumenstamm in Garten Fredriks- borgvei. Polyporus fragilis FR. An faulendem Fichtenstumpf in Konge- skoven. P. borealis (W AuLENB.. Ebendort an Nadelholzstumpf. P. amorphus Fries. Ebendort an Nadelholzstumpfen. P. adustus (Wizzp.). An einem Birkenstumpf im Garten am Kongeskoven. P. fumosus (Pers.). An Laubholzstumpf bei Oscarshall. P. radiatus (Sow.). An einem Erlenstumpf, Oscarshall, bei Gols Kirke. P. betulinus (Buzz). An einer Birke daselbst. P. squamosus (Hups.). An einem Salixstamm bei Holmenkollen. Juni 1902. P. brumalis (Pers). An einem Birkenast bei Sarabraaten. Juni 1902. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 17 Polystictus abietinus (Dicxs.) An Fichtenstumpfen in Konge- skoven, bei Voxenkollen, Sarabraaten, auch in resupinater Form an umgefallenen Stämmen. P. versicolor (Lin. An Baumstumpfen bei Oscarshall. P. hirsutus (Wuzr). Ebendort bei der Kirche Gol. Daedalea wnicolor (Burr...) An einem Birkenstumpf im Garten am Kongeskoven. Lenzites heteromorpha Fries. An umgefallenen Fichtenståmmen bei Voxenkollen Juni 1902, Kongeskoven Aug. 1903. L. abietina (Burr) An Fichtenstumpfen gemein überall. Tylopilus felleus Burr. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall unter Fichten und Kiefern einzeln. Boletus scaber Butt. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall u. s. w. unter Birken häufig. BB. bulbosus Scuarrr. Oscarshall, Kongeskoven bei der Wald- kapelle, Holmenkollen. B. subtomentosus Lin. Ebendort vereinzelt. B. variegatus SCHWARTZ. Kongeskoven. Holmenkollen. B. badius Fries. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall vereinzelt. B. piperatus Burr. Daselbst. Holmenkollen. B. granulatus Lin. Ueberall heerdenweise besonders in Konge- skoven. Ein guter Speisepilz, der bei der ungeheuren Menge daselbst gut verwendbar wäre. BB. bovinus Lin. Kongeskoven sehr vereinzelt. Boletopsis luteus (Lin.). Waldrand bei der Waldkapelle spärlich. B. flavus (Wirre.). Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Fredriksborgvei in Gärten, Holmenkollen. Agaricaceae. Cantharellus cibariusFrizs. Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen spärlich C. amrantiacus (Wurrr). Daselbst vereinzelt. Paxillus Acheruntius (Huws.) Kongeskoven an einem Pfahl. P. involutus (Barscx.). Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, botan. Garten u. s. w. unter Birken. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXIL I. 9 18 P. HENNINGS. Coprinus plicatilis (Curt.). Kongeskoven, Oscarshall. C. domesticus (Pers.). Auf Rasenplatz im Garten am Fredriks- borgvei. C. micaceus Burt. Oscarshall am Grunde von Stämmen rasig. C. atramentarius Butt. Daselbst am Wege. C. porcellanus (SCHAEFF.). Daselbst auf Rasenplatz. Gomphidius viscidus (Lin) Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Skov- kapellet, Holmenkollen u. s. w. Hygrophorus psittacinus (SCHAFFF.). Kongeskoven, Holmen- kollen zwischen Moosen. H. miniatus (Scor.). Oscarshall auf Rasen. H. ceraceus (Wurr). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. H. comicus (ScoP.) Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Sarabraaten. H. ericeus (Burr). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. Limacium eburneum (Burr). Kongeskoven zw. Moosen. L. olivaceo-album Fries. Kongeskoven zw. Nadeln. Russula fragilis (Przrs.. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall. R. emetica (ScHAEFF.). Daselbst? Holmenkollen. KR. pectinata (Burr) Oscarshall unter Birken. R. cyanoxantha (ScHAEFF.. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Skov- kapellet, Holmenkollen. . foetens Pers. Daselbst. . rubra DE Cand. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall. . lepida Fries. Daselbst: . furcata (Lam.). Oscarshall unter Birken, auch in Gärten. . depallens (Prrs.). Kongeskoven. adusta (Pers) Kongeskoven in Wegen, Oscarshall. . integra (Lin.). Daselbst sehr häufig. . chamaeleontina Fries. Ebenfalls in verschiedenen Färbungen. . grisea Pers. Kongeskoven, Gols Kirke. : . alutacea Pers. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Holmenkollen. . lutea (Hups.). Oscarshall. . æerampelina (ScHAEFF.). Kongeskoven, Skovkapellet. D SU D D D D D D D cU mu SJ Lactaria subdulcis (Burr) Oscarshall. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 19 . seriflua (De Cann. Daselbst, Kongeskoven. . piperata (Scor.. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall. . pallida Pers. Oscarshall, Skovkapellet. . vellerea Fries. Kongeskoven. glyciosma Fries. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, in Gärten. . rufa, (Scor.. Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. . torminosa (SCHAEFF.). Oscarshall unter Birken am Ausgange am Wege. NNNNNNB . necator Pers. Gols Kirke, Kongeskoven unter Birken. . scrobiculata (Scor.). Kongeskoven am Wege zum Seebad. deliciosa (Lin... ^ Oscarshall, Kongeskoven. . Vorzüglicher NN N Speisepilz. | Marasmius perforans (Horrm.). Kongeskoven auf Fichtennadeln. M. cauticinalis (Sw.). Ebendort. M. androsaceus (Liw.). Ebendort, Holmenkollen. M. graminum (LiB.). Waldkapelle. M. scorodonius Fries. Kongeskoven und überall auch in Gärten in ungeheurer Menge zw. Kiefernnadeln, auch an Baum- stämmen. Der stark nach Knoblauch schmeckende Pilz wird als Gewürz an Saucen, Braten benutzt und getrocknet in den Handel gebracht, in Berlin als Muscheron bezeichnet, theuer bezahlt. M. Oreades Fries. Ueberall an Wegen, auf Rasenplåtzen oft in Hexenringen heerdenweise. Guter Suppenpilz. M. peronatus (Bort.. Kongeskoven, Skovkapellet. Psathyrella disseminata (Pers.). Oscarshall in ungeheurer Menge am Grunde alter Laubholzstämme, mehrere Meter hoch hin- auf in Wundrissen heerdenweise. Ps. gracilis (Pers). Kongeskoven, in Gärten unter Gebüsch. Panaeolus fimicota (Fries). Auf Dung an Wegen, in Gärten. P. foenisecü (PERs.) Oscarshall auf Rasenplatz, an Wegen. Chalymotta campanulata (Lin.). Ebendort. Psilocybe spadicea (ScHAFFF.). Am Grunde eines Birkenstammes Oscarshall. 90 P. HENNINGS. Ps. atrorufa (ScHAEFF.). Holmenkollen am Wege zwischen Moosen. Hypholoma appendiculatum (Burr). Am Grunde von Weiden- stämmen und Birken daselbst, in Gärten am Fredriksborgvei. H. fasciculare (Hups.. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall nicht häufig bemerkt. | H. lateritium (ScHAEFF.). Oscarshall an Laubholzstumpt. H. epixanthum Pavr. Kongeskoven auf Fichtenstumpfen. Stropharia Coronilla (Fries). In einem Garten am Fredriks- borgvei. Str. viridula (ScHAEFF.. —Rasig an einem Fichtenstumpf in Kongeskoven. Str. stercoraria (FRIES). Kongeskoven am Wege auf Dung. Psalliota campestris (Lin). Am Wege bei Folkemuseet. Ps. silvalica (SCHAFFF.). Kongeskoven sowie im Garten daneben. Crepidotus calolepis (Frizs). Oscarshall an Pappelstamm und Sorbus Aucuparia. Exemplare bis 4 cm. breit, oberseits braunschuppig, mit filziger Basis; Sporen ellipsoid, braun, 7—8 X 435 u. | Galera Hypni (Batscu). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen zw. Moosen. G. tenera, (SCHAEFF.). An Wegen und auf Rasenplätzen in Gärten am Fredriksborgvei. Hebeloma crustuliniforme (Burr). Kongeskoven an Wegen, in Gärten. Naucoria temulenta (Fries). Kongeskoven nach dem Seebad. N. pediades (Fries). An Wegen, in Gärten Fredriksborgvei, Holmenkollen. Flammula sapinea (Fries). Oscarshall an Stumpf von Picea. Fl. carbonaria (Fries). Kongeskoven auf einer Kohlenstelle nach dem Seebad. Inocybe geophylla (Sow.). Kongeskoven häufig, Oscarshall, Holmenkollen. I. sambucina (Fries). Kongeskoven. I. rimosa (BuLL.). Kongeskoven. I. cristata (Scor.. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall an Wegeråndern. I. scabra, (Mórr.) Daselbst. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 91 Cortinarius (Dermocybe) cinnamomeus (Lin... Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. C. (D.) anthracimus Fries. Daselbst. C. (Hydrocybe) acutus (Pers... Oscarshall, Skovkapellet. C. (H.) fasciatus Fries. Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. C. (H.) decipiens (Pers). Kongsskoven, auf Rasenplatz im Garten. C. (Telamonia) hemitrichus (Prrs.). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. C. (Myxacium) collinitus (Pers). Kongeskoven. Pholiota mutabilis (SCHAFFF.). Kongeskoven, Oscarshall bei Gols Kirke an Baumstumpfen. Ph. destruens (BRowp.. An einem liegenden Pappelstamm in Oscarshall. Claudopus nidulans (PERs.. Kongeskoven an Fichtenstumpf. Nolanea pascua, (Pers.). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. Leptonia solstitialis (Fries). Kongeskoven. L. serrulata Fries. Holmenkollen am Wegerand. Clitopilus prunulus (Scor.. Oscarshall auf Rasenplatz nahe dem Ausgange unweit der Gols Kirke. Entoloma sericeum (Burr.. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Holmen- kollen. Pluteus cervinus (SCHAFFF.). Oscarshall an Baumstiimpfen. Pleurotus ostreatus (Jaov.). Oscarshall am Sorbus Aucuparia. Omphalia fibula (Buzz). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen, Sara- braaten zwischen Moosen. O. umbellifera (Lin.. Kongeskoven, Sarabraaten an feuchten Stellen. Mycena corticola (Pers). Oscarshall an berindetem Pappel- stamm. M. epipterygia (Scor.. Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen. M. sanguinolenta (Ars. & Scaw.). Oscarshall bei Gols Kirke zw. Laub. M. filopes (Burr.). Oscarshall, Waldkapelle, im Garten zwischen Gebüsch. | ho INS] P. HENNINGS. M. stannea (Fries). Kongeskoven. M. alcalina (Fries). Kongeskoven am Fichtenstumpf. M. galericulata (Scor.). Kongeskoven an Birkenstumpf. M. rugosa (Fries). Oscarshall an Baumstumpf. M. flavo-alba (Fries). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen zwischen Moosen. M. rosea (Burr. Oscarshall bei Gols Kirke, Holmenkollen. Collybia dryophila (Burr). Kongeskoven, Oscarshall. C. tenacella (PErs.). Kongeskoven. C. cirrhata (Prrs.). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen aus gelben Scle- rotien auf faulenden Hutpilzen. C. butyracea (Burr.) Kongeskoven. C. clusilis (Fries). Kongeskoven zwischen Moosen. C. radicata (RELH.). Kongeskoven, Oscarshall. Clitocybe laccata (Scor.). Kongeskoven, Skovkapellet, Oscarshall. Cl. cyathiformis (Burr. Kongeskoven. Cl. geotropa (Burr.)? auf Rasenplátzen im Garten am Fredriks- borgvei truppweise. Fruchtkörper rein weiss, bis 25 cm. breit, fleischig, Stiel bis 15 cm. lang, 2 cm. dick. Cl. sinopica (Fries). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen, Sarabraaten. Cl. infundibuliformis (SCHARFE... Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Holmenkollen. Cl. odora, (Burr). Oscarshall m Gebüsch. Tricholoma sordidum (Scuum.). Im Garten am Fredriksborgvei. Tr. brevipes (Buzr.). Fredriksborg am Wege. Tr. melaleucum (Pers.). Oscarshall auf Rasenplatz. Tr. saponaceum (Fries). Kongeskoven, Holmskollen. Tr. terreum (SCHAEFF.). Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, im Garten an Fredriksborgvei. Tr. rutilans (ScHAerr.). Kongeskoven an Kiefernstumpf? Lepiota cristata (ALB. & Scuw.) Kongeskoven, Oscarshall. L. clypeolaria (Burr. Holmenkollen. L. procera (Scor.). Im Garten am Fredriksborgvei. Amanita esccelsa Fries? Bei der Skovkapellet. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 953 Lycoperdaceae. Lycoperdon pisiforme ScHaEFr. An Baumstumpfen Konge- skoven, Holmskollen. L. gemmatum Batscu. Kongeskoven, Oscarshall, Holmenkollen in verschiedenen Formen. L. pusillum Bartsch. Kongeskoven am Wege, Holmenkollen. Bovista plumbea Pers. Kongeskoven nahe dem Christian August Denkmal. Sclerodermataceae. Scleroderma vulgare Horn. Furubaken am Wege nach Oscarshall. Nidulariaceae. Crucibulum vulgare Tur. Frederiksborgvei nahe dem Tivoli an Stakettpfählen, Christiania Schlosspark an Pfählen. Cyathus Olla (Batsca.). Fredriksborgvei im Garten an Brett- rándern. Hxoascaceae. Exoascus betulinus (Rostr.). Betula alba, im Garten Fredriks- borgvei. Rhizinaceae. Rhizina inflata (ScHAEFF.) Kongeskoven auf einer kleinen Kohlenstelle mit Pyronema omphalodes. Helvellaceae. Helvella lacunosa Arz. Oscarshall unter Gebüsch. Gyromitra esculenta (Pers... Holmenkollen Juni 1902, soll bei Sarabraaten in grosser Menge vorkommen. Bulgariaceae. Coryne sarcoides Jaco. Conidienpilz auf Schnittflåche von Betula in Oscarshall. 94 P. HENNINGS. Dermateaceae. Dermatea Ariae (Pers). Auf Zweigen von Sorbus Aria. Oscarshall am Parkwege. Mollisiaceae. Mollisia minutella (Sacc.). Auf faulenden Stengeln von Bunias orientalis, nahe dem Folkemuseet. Pyrenopezizeae. Pirottea venela Sacc. Kongeskoven am Strande zum Seebad auf faulenden Stengeln von Verbascum nigrum und Arabis sp. Helotiaceae. Helotium citrinum (Hepw.). Auf der Schnittflåche eines Baum- stumpfes bei Oscarshall. Phialea cyathoidea (Burr.). Auf faulenden Stengeln am Strande im Kongeskoven von Libanotis, Heracleum, Ulmaria, am Wege nach Folkemuseet auf Stengeln von Bunias orien- talis. Ph. glanduliformis Reum? Auf faulenden Stengel von Aconi- tum septentrionale bei Holmenkollen. Juni 1902. Etwas unreif. | ; | Dasyscypha dryina Karst. Auf todtem Holz von Betula alba bei Holmenkollen Juni 1902. D. calyciformis (Wiitp.). Auf dürrem Fichtenast im Konge- skoven. Pezizaceae. Pyronema omphalodes (Burr.). Kongeskoven auf kleinen Kohlen- stellen beim Christian Augusts Monument. Humaria rutilans (Fries). Holmenkollen an Wegrändern. Plicaria pustulata (Hepw.) Holmenkollen bei den Teichen. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 95. Hypodermataceae. Hypoderma virgultorum (D. C). form. Euphorbiae. Kongeskoven am Strande unweit des Seebades auf vorjährigen Stengeln von Euphorbia palustris überall. Asken meist 70—90 X 9—10 u,, Sporen 18—22 X 21/o—3!/e u, kleiner als bei der typischen Art. Phacidiaceae. Phacidium repandum (Ars. & Scuw.). Bei der Skovkapellet auf Blättern von Galium Mollugo. Coccomyces coronatus (Scuum.). Auf faulenden Fichenblåttern im Garten am Fredriksborgsvei. Erysiphaceae. Sphaerotheca panosa (WALLR.. Im Garten am Fredriksborgs- vei auf Rasen. S. Humuli (D. C.). Oscarshall auf Impatiens noli tangere. Erysiphe Polygoni D. C. Kongeskoven auf Heracleum Sphon- dylium, Anthriscus silvester, Trifolium montanum u. s. w., an Wegen auf Polygonum aviculare. E. Galeopsidis D. C. Auf Galeopsis im Garten am Fredriks- borgvei. E. Cichoracearum D. C. Auf Artemisia vulgaris, Plantago major an Wegen, auf Cirsium canum ?, Valeriana officinalis im Kongeskoven. Microsphaera Evonymi D. C. Auf Berberis daselbst sowie überall verbreitet. Phyllactinia corylea (PERs., Auf Betula alba, Corylus Avel- lana in Gárten und Oscarshall. Uncinula Aceris D. C. Auf Acer platanoides Oscarshall. U. Salicis D. C. Auf Populus spec. im Garten am Fredriks- borgvei. 96 P. HENNINGS. Hypocreaceae. Nectria cinnabarina Topz.. Conidienstadien überall verbreitet. N. episphaeria (Tope). Auf Diatrype Stigma in Gärten auf Zweigen. Hypocrea citrina (PERs.). Auf Holz und Erde in Kongeskoven. H. fungicola Karst. Kongeskoven auf Fomes ungulatus. Trichosphaeriaceae. Coleroa Chaetomium (Kunze) Auf Blättern von Rubus idaeus im Kongeskoven. Melanommaceae. Melanomma Pulvis pyrius (Pers). var. Vaccinia P. Henn. Auf dickem Wurzelstock von Vaccinium Myrtillus am Wege bei Voxenkollen Juni 1902. Die Asken sind fast keulig, 60—80 X 5—6 u, die Sporen schiefeinreihig, oblong, beiderseits schwach verschmälert, stumpf, braun, mit 3 Septen, eingeschnürt, 13—20 X 31 41/2 u. Vielleicht ist der Pilz besser als Art aufzustellen, da er von M. Rhododendri REHM verschieden, ebenso von anderen Arten. Cucurbltarlaceae. Cucurbitaria Berberidis (Pers... An dürren Arten von Ber- beris hinter Oscarshall. C. Laburni (Pers). An Aesten von Cytisus Laburnum im Garten am Fredriksborgvei. C. Caraganae Karst. An Zweigen von Caragana arborescens daselbst, Oscarshall. Sphaerelloiedeaceae. Stigmatea Robertiani Fries. Auf Blättern von Geranium Ro- bertianum im Garten am Fredriksborgvei. PILZFLORA DER, UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 97 Mycosphaerella nebulosa (PERs.. An Stengeln von Solidago an Wegen. | Pleosporaceae. Leptosphaeria Libanotis (Fuck.) Ueberall an dürren Stengeln von Libanotis montana auf Bygdo, besonders hinter Fredriks- borg, Kongeskoven, L. doliolum (Pers... An trockenen Stengeln von Urtica dioica, Oscarshall; auf Artemisia campestris bei Seebad. L. modesta Drsm.). An Stengeln von Heracleum, Pimpinella, Agrimonia, Eupatorium am Strande nach dem Seebad u. s, w. -Pleospora vulgaris NizssL. form. monosticha. Auf trockenen Stengeln von Echinops sphaerocephalus am Fredriksborgs Tivoli, Hieracium umbellatum an Wegen daselbst. Gnomoniaceae. Gnomoniella idaeicola (Karst.. Kongeskoven auf trockenen Stengeln von Rubus saxitilis. Valsaceae. Maniania fimbriata (PERs.. Bei Oscarshall auf Blättern von Carpinus. Eutypa Acharii Tut. Im Garten am Fredriksborgvei auf Zwei- gen von Viburnum. E. subtecta (Fries). Daselbst auf Zweigen von Acer. E. spinosa Pers. Daselbst auf trockenen Eichenästen. Eutypella Sorbi (Ars. & Scaw.). Am Wege hinter Oscarshall auf trockenen Zweigen von Sorbus Aucuparia. Diatrypaceae. Calosphaeria princeps Tut. Im Pensions-Garten am Fredriks- borgvei an einem Pflaumenbaum unterhalb der aufgerissenen Rinde. Diatrypella favacea (Fries). Daselbst am Birkenästen. 98 P. HENNINGS. Diatrype disciformis (Horrw.). Daselbst auf einem abgefallenen Buchenzweig. Xylariaceae. Hypoxylon coccineum Butt. An Haselnussásten Oscarshall. Xylaria polymorpha (PeErs.) var. hypoxylea Nrrs. Am Grunde eines Baumstumpfes bei Oscarshall. Ustulina deusta (Horrw.). Ebendort. Dothideaceae. Plowrightia Berberidis (Sow.). Am Fahrwege hinter Oscars- hall zum Seebad vor dem Kongsgaarden auf dürren dünnen Zweigen von Berberis häufig. Rhopographus Pteridis (Sow.). An vorjährigen Stielen von Pteris aquilina Holmenkollen. Juni 1902. Sphaeropsidaceae. Phoma complanata (Tone). Am Wege nach Oscarshall auf trockenen Stengeln von Bunias orientalis, Tragopogon pra- tensis. Ph. Urticae ScHuLTz. et Sacc. Kongeskoven auf Stengeln von Urtica dioica. Ph. lirelliformis Sacc. Im Garten auf Zweigen von Viburnum Opulus. Ph. samarum (Drsm.). Auf Früchten von Acer in botan. Garten u. Oscarshall. | Ph. cryptica Sacc. Im Garten der kleinen Insel bei Fredriks- borg auf Zweigen von Lonicera Periclymenum. Ph. Viscariae P. Henn. n. sp.; peritheciis subepidermide nidu- lantibus, suberumpentibus, atris, poro pertusis, ca. 60—105 u, conidiis ellipsoideis vel oblongis hyalinis, continuis, eguttu- latis, 5—6!/» X 21/2—3 u. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 99 Kongeskoven am Strande nach den Seebad an trockenen Stengeln von Viscaria viscosa (GILL.) mit Ascohyta Vis- cariae. Ph. Valerianae P. Henn. n. sp.: peritheciis sparsis, lenticulari- bus, poro pertusis, atris, ca. 100—120 u, conidus ovoideis vel ellipsoideis, hyalinis, 1 guttulatis, 3—3!/2 X 2—3 u. Kongeskoven am Strande nach dem Seebad an trockenen Stengeln von Valeriana officinalis. Von Ph. herbarum ganz verschieden. Macrophoma ? Ariae P. Henn. n. sp.; peritheciis sub epidermide gregariis, depressis, astomis, subcarbonaceis, atris; conidiis oblonge ellipsoideis, vel subclavatis, intus nubulosis, hya- linis, 18—25 X 6—8 u, conidiophoris fasciculatis, hya- linis, 10—20 X 3—41/2 u. Oscarshall an trockenen Zweigen von Sorbus Aria in Gemeinschaft mit Dermatea Ariae. Ob der Pilz zu Macro- phoma zu stellen, ist etwas zweifelhaft. Cylospora ambiens Sacc. Im Garten am Fredriksborgvei an trockenen Zweigen von Cornus sanguinea. C. Oxyacanthae Ras. Daselbst an Zweigen von Crataegus. C. microsperma SAcc. Hinter Oscarshall an Zweigen von Pru- nus spinosa. C. leucostoma (Pers.) form. Cotoneastri. An trockenen Zwei- gen von Cotoneaster am Strande nach dem Seebad. Coni- dien stäbchenförmig gekrümmt, 4—5 X 0,5— 0,7 u, farblos. C. Syringae Sacc. Im Garten am Fredriksborgvei auf Zweigen von Syringa. C. leucosperma (Pers). Auf der Insel nahe Fredriksborg im Garten auf trockenen Zeigen von Pirus Malus. C. Abietis Sacc. Am Wald nach der Skovkapellet auf abge- storbenen Zweigen von Picea excelsa. C. Curreyi Sacc. Am Kongeskoven an trockenen Zweigen von Pinus silvestris. 30 P. HENNINGS. Ascohyta Viscariae P. Henn. n. sp.; peritheciis gregariis, de- pressis globosis hypodermieis, ostiolo prominente, atris, mem- branaceis, ca. 100—160 u; conidus oblonge cylindraceis, utrinque obtusis, medio 1 septalis, haud constrictis, hyalinis, 13—18 X 4 u. Kongeskoven am Shande zum Seebad auf trockenen Stengeln von Viscaria viscosa mit Phoma. Coniothyrium Cytisi P. Henn. n. sp.; peritheciis hypodermicis, sparsis vel aggregatis, lenticularibus, atris, pertusis, ca. 150 180 u; conidiis ellipsoideis vel ovoideis, fusco-brunneis, con- tinis, 5—7 X 43 u. Oscarshall an trockenen Zweigen von Gytisus nigri- cans. C, Grossulariae P. Henn. n. sp.; peritheciis hypodermicis spar- sis vel gregariis, atris, punctiformibus, sublenticularibus ca. 130—150 w;} conidiis ovoideis vel ellipsoideis, brunneis, 5—8 X 3l/e—Al/a u. Im Garten an Kongeskoven auf trockenen Zweigen von Ribes Grossularia. | Diplodia mamillana Fr. Garten am Fredriksborgvei auf trockenen Zweigen von Cornus sanguinea. D. ramulicola Westenp. Daselbst auf Zweigen von Evonymus latifolius. Septoria virgawreae (Desm.). Anhöhen bei der Skovkapellet auf Blättern von Solidago virgaurea. S. Lamii Pass. Auf einem Acker auf Blättern von Lamium amplexicaule. SS. Trientalis (Lasx.). Kongeskoven auf Trientalis europaea. SS. Convolvuli (Desm.). Daselbst am Strande auf Convolvulus. sepium. S. Urticae Desm. Im Garten auf Urtica dioica. Rhabdospora bygdoensis P. Henn. n. sp.; peritheciis innato- erumpentibus, punctiformibus, gregarus, atris, subglobosis, perforatis, ca. 120—160 u; conidus cylindraceis, utrinque PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 31 obtusis, rectis, 1—3 septatis, 16—30 X 21/2—31/2 u, hya- linis. Kongeskoven am Strande zum Seebad auf trockenen Stengeln von Artemisia vulgaris. Von R. Artemisiae Tram., R. tomispora Dnzs. R. Greshikei Bres. verschieden. CSS Caradutiae Kansr. Gärten und Oscarshall an trockenen Zweigen von Caragana arborescens. C. bygdoense P. Henn. n. sp.; peritheciis gregariis sub epider- mide nidulantibus, subglobulosis, atris, papillatis ca. 150— 200 u: conidiis ellipsoideis vel ovoideis, utrinque obtusis, 3-5 septatis, interrupte muriformibus, 12—17 X 6—9 u. Oscarshall sowie im Garten am Fredriksborgvei auf Zweigen von Spiraea cfr. crenata. Von C. Spiraeae ver- schieden. Leptostromataceae. Leptothyrium alnewm (Lev.). Oscarshall, Kongeskoven u. s. w. auf lebenden Blättern von Alnus glutinosa. L. Periclymeni (Desm.). Kongeskoven und in Gärten auf Blät- tern von Lonicera Xylosteum. L. litigiosum (Desm.). Kongeskoven, Holmenkollen auf abge- storbenen Wedelstielen von Pteris aquilina. Leptostroma Pinastri Drsm. Kongeskoven auf abgefallenen Nadeln von Pinus silvestris. Entomosporium Mespili D. C. Am Strande nach dem Seebad und bei Oscarshall auf lebenden Blättern von Cotoneaster vulgaris. Exipulaceae. Dinemasporium Tragopogonis P. Henn. n. sp.; perithecis gregariis, cupulatis, atris, ca. 100—180 u diam., setulis ri- gidis, erectis, aterrimis, acutis, usque 200 u longis; conidiis elongato-fusoideis, curvulis, 2—4 guttulatis, utrinque minute setulosis, hyalinis, ca. 15—23 X 3-42 u. 39 P. HENNINGS. Am Wege zum Folkemuseet auf trockenen Stengeln von Tragopogon pratensis. Mit D. hispidulum (Scurap.) var. herbarum Cook., verwandt, aber verschieden. Melanconiaceae. Gloeosporiwm Tiliae Qup. Oscarshall an Blättern von Tilia intermedia. Gl. acerinum West. Im Garten am Fredriksborgvei auf Blät- tern von Acer platanoides. - Coryneum rosarum P. HENN. n. sp.: acervulis hypodermicis atris, dein erumpentibus, disciformibus, 200 u; conidus oblonge ovoideis vel subfusoideis, 1 dein 3 septatis, haud constrictis, fuscidulis, septis atris, 5—8 X 4—5 u. An Wegen nach Oscarshall.auf trockenen Zweigen von Rosa sp. Pestalozzia monochaetoidea Sacc. & Err. Oscarshall an tro- ckenen Zweigen von Spiraea spec. Die Conidien sind 10— 12 X 4 u, 3 septiert, an der Spitze mit fadenförmiger bis 10 u langer Borste, an der Basis mit fast gleichlangem Stiel. Die Pilz ıst bisher wohl nur aus Nordamerika bekannt. Phragmotrichum Chailletii Kze. et Scum. Kongeskoven, Oscars- hall, Holmenkollen häufig auf abgefallenen Fichtenzapien. Mucedinaceae. Ramularia Geranii WEsTEnd. Kongeskoven nahe dem Strande am Wege zum Seebad auf Blättern von Geranium palustre. R. sambucina Sacc. Im Garten am Fredriksborgvei auf Blät- tern von Sambucus. R. calcea (Desm.). Kongeskoven auf Blättern von Glechoma hederacea. R. Primulae THöm. Oscarshall auf einem Blatte von Primula. R. Urticae Ces. Oscarshall und im Garten am Kongeskoven auf Urtica dioica. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CHRISTIANIAS. 33 Dematiaceae. Cladosporium herbarum. (Pers). Auf faulenden Stengeln von Bunias, Tragopogon, auf Eichenblättern u. s. w. verbreitet. Cercospora Epilobii ScHNEID. Holmenkollen am Wege auf Epi- lobium montanum. C. Geranii sanguinei P. Henn. n. sp.; maculis fuscis, apicibus : foliorum, hyphis fasciculatis, septatis, fuscis, 30—50 X 3—5 u; conidiis subeylindraceis, vel clavatis, rectis, apice obtusis, medio 1 septatis, hyalinis, 20—40 X 4—51/2 u. Kongeskoven am Strande nach dem Seebad auf Blättern von Geranium sanguineum häufig. Die Art ist von C. Gerani Kerr. et Sw. aus Nord- amerika verschieden, ebenso von Cercosporella Magnusiana ALL. Tuberculariaceae. Tubercularia vulgaris Topz. Gemein auf trockenen Zweigen u. Aesten überall. T. Sambuci Cord. An trockenen Zweigen von Sambucus im Garten am Fredriksborgvei u. s. w. T. Laburni Orız? An Zeigen von Cytisus Laburnum dort. Hymenula? Arabidis P. Henn. n. sp.; sporodocheis caulicolis; subpulvinatis vel discoideis, ceraceis, roseis, ca. 0,5—2 mm. diam., hyphis septatis ramosis, incarnatis, 4—6 u crassis, sporophoris fasciculatis, conidiis oblonge cylindraceis, conti- nuis, obtusis, 8—10 X 11/2—2 u. Kongeskoven am Strande nach dem Seebad an trockenen Stengeln von Arabis spec. cfr. stricta. Der Pilz dürfte an- scheinend in obige Gattung, nicht zu Tubercularia oder Illosporium gehören, wenn auch einzelne Merkmale abwei- chen. Nyt Mag. f, Naturv. XXXXIL I. 3 34 P. HENNINGS. PILZFLORA DER UMGEBUNG CRISTIANIAS. Pionnotis Biasolettiana (Corp.). Auf einem Birkenstumpfe vor Sarabraaten am Wege, rosenrothen, schleimigen Ueberzug bildend. Juni 1902. Gedruckt 20. januar 1904. On some New Occurrences of Titanite from Kragere. By P. Schei. (With Table I). Dus; the past two years the Mineralogical Institution of the University has obtained some pretty good specimens of ti- tanite from Kragerø. Together with older material from southern Norway, this makes a fine material for crystallographic examin- ation, and the Director of the Institution, Prof. Dr. W. C. Brøc- GER, has been kind enough to submit it to me for closer in- spection. At present, some few remarks on the crystallographic types and the mode of occurrence have not been deemed out of place, the more so because collections from all these localities has got abroad already. Titanite from Lindvikskollen. This one occurs at the same great granite-pegmatitic dyke that has yielded already the newly described mineral hellandite!. 1 Prof. Dr. W. C. Broccer: Uber den Hellandit, ein neues Mineral, in this Magaz. B. 41. H. 3. 1903. 36 P. SCHEI. Together with that mineral and likewise embedded in quartz mainly, with little or no feldspar, occur crystals of titanite of a type well known from alpine localities. The predominating forms are: {100{, 1111, 10011, 110}; re- ferred to the axial ratio of Descloizeaux—Dana. Two different types occur, the one represented by fig. 1 and characterised by the forms (1001, 110}, 111} & 1001! and the other with {100}, 1111! and (001), see fig. 2. 1 is identical with the combination figured by HESSENBERG from Zillerthal, and 2 likewise with v. Ratu’s Figur of crystal from St. Gotthard. Common to both is the constant twinning with tw-plane }100}, no single individual being as yet observed; almost as constant is the phenomenon that the faces of j111| only form the ter- mination at one end, while j001| only is to be found at the other. In one specimen, however, a small face of 1001! cuts off the point of the arrow head. Narrow faces of |111| are sometimes observed cutting the edges between |110| and 001. Besides these, in one specimen are seen 101 together with 119 and 1 12. The size is variable, mostly 30—50 mm. broad by 10—20 mm. thick and 20—30 mm. high, the greatest crystal measuring 80, 50 and 30 mm. resp.; a broken mass of a yet greater crystal has been obtained. The mineral from this locality is seldom found in unaltered condition — in that case dark brown and strongly resembling yttro- titanite; usually it is altered through the whole mass to a light grey substance, earthy-looking by weathering and containing grains of: quartz, muscovite, epidote, chlorite, etc. dispersed in the remaining titanite mass. Titanite from the West of Kammerfoselv. Of quite a different type are the crystals of titanite gathered from a chloritic schist west of Kammerfoselv. ON SOME NEW OCCURR. OF TITANITE F. KRAGERØ. 94 The type is shown in fig. 3, with the following forms: 1111], 1112), 1010! & {001} and fig. 4 with 110! & |111j also. Twinning seems to be rare, only two twins after the com- mon law: 100! tw.plane, being found among a great many single individuals. The faces are unsually dull but sometimes as 1f. varnished, of a redbrown colour, finely white-sprinckled: the thin section shows the cause of the sprinckling: once perhaps yellow or yel- lowish green and translucent to transparent, the titanite is now altered into a mixture of minute crystals of octahedrite (anatase) in a groundmass of allotriomorphic granular calcite, with a little quartz. The octahedrite (anatase) crystals are from 0:1 to 05 mm. long, well developed with j111}, 100! and sometimes {001}, of a redbrown or purple colour, very splendent. They have been identified by the angle 111 to 111, measured provisionally to 137” in medium and in thin-section by the cleavage parallel to |111! and {001}, and by the neg. optical character. One handspecimen from this locality contains, besides se- veral of these pseudomorphs, an individual not yet wholly altered, with part of yellowish translucent substance, strongly resemling the mineral from the third locality. Titanite from Frydensborg. This titanite is quite fresh, yellowish green to brownish yel- low, translucent, and occurs embedded with calcite, rutile, he- matite, etc., in a chloritic rock somewhat similar to the mother rock of the last named titanite. The rutile has been observed here in allotriomo:phic grains forming a nucleus in the midst of a titanite individual. Only single individuals have been found, which are of a very persistent type, represented in fig. 5. The following forms have been noticed: {141}, 1131}, 1111, H19], 13), Tail, 10211, 1701), 1001], 1010] and 11101, of which, to my knowledge, |121! is nowhere observed before. 38 P. SCHEI. ON SOME NEW OCCURR. OF TITANITE F. KRAGERØ. Almost every crystal shows these forms, with the only ex- ception of }101\ that is often wanting. Remarkable is the con- stant occurrence, in this and the last mentioned variety, of /010\, a rare form in titanite. The cleavage parallel to |111! is much pronounced, and pa- rallel to one face of |221| is observed a parting giving exquisite smooth planes —. The nature of the faces is very different: 10101, 131}, and |113| are usually dull or looking varnished, 111! and |001| strongly faceted and giving disturbed signals, 111), {191}, and |112| are often very brilliant, |119| & |113| both show vicinal faces. Printed 93. november 1903. Beiträge zur Gattung Papilio L. und Colias Leach. Oskar Schultz. 1. Papilio machaon L. ab. rubromaculatus ScHULTz. Ab. rubromaculatus: Al. post. supra rubromaculatis. Diese Form, welche in den Catalogen gewöhnlich als „ab mit rothen Flecken am Vorderrande der Hinterflügel^ aufgeführt wird und kürzer als ab. rubromaculatus bezeichnet wird, tritt in weniger ausgeprágten Exemplaren nicht selten überall unter der Stammart auf; Stücke, bei denen die rote Fleckung gróssere Ausdehnung erreicht, wie sie weiter unten erwähnt werden, dürfen als Seltenheiten angesprochen werden. Rote Schuppen finden sich oberseits in den gelben Saum- monden der Hinterflügel und zwar: in Mond 1 (sehr häufig), in Mond 1 und 2 (häufig), in Mond 2 und 3 (ziemlich selten), in Mond 1 bis 3 (ziemlich selten), in Mond 1 bis 4 (selten), in Mond 1 bis 5 (sehr selten), in Mond 1 bis 6 (sehr selten), in Mond 1 und 6 (sehr selten), in Mond 1, 2 und 6 (selten). Die rote Bestäubung kann demnach in sämtlichen 6 Saum- monden auftreten. Sie zeigt sich bald kráftiger, den ganzen 40 OSKAR SCHULTZ. lichten Fleck ausfüllend — bald schwächer, oft nur schattenhaft einen Teil desselben einnehmend. Des Weiteren tritt in seltenen Fällen auch rote Bestäubung (wie unterseits) oberseits an der inneren Seite des dunklen Sub- marginalbandes der Hinterflügel auf, entweder allein oder auch in Verbindung mit roter Bestäubung der Marginalmonde. Sie erstreckt sich dann längs des ganzen Submarginalbandes oder nur eines Teiles desselben. Bisweilen tritt die rote Färbung sogar auf die Submarginalbinde selber über. Bei einem Exemplar aus der Coll. Pilz-Heinrichau, welches vor dem inneren Rand der Submarginalbinde rote Bestäubnng zeigt (9), hat das Analauge die deutliche Bildung des Hospiton-Auges angenommen: zur Hälfte roth, zur Hälfte blau, dazwischen eine schwarze Trenungs- linie. Zwei Exemplare mit Characteren der ab. rubromaculatus aus meiner Sammlung zeigen das Auge einfarbig zinnoberrot, ohne jede Spur von Blau. Auch am Afterwinkel oberhalb des Augenflecks treten bis- weilen keilförmig rote Schuppen auf (Iris 1900 p. 104). Schliesslich möchte ich die Mitteilung eines Sammlers nicht unerwähnt lassen, nach welcher bei einem weiblichen Exemplar, das in mehreren Saummonden und vor dem Innenrand der Submarginalbinde der Hinterflügel rote Beschuppung aufwies, sich schwach rote Bestäubung auch auf die beidon untersten gelben Saummonde der Vorderflügel erstreckte: Die Merkmale der ab. rubromaculatus scheinen sich häufiger beim weiblichen als beim männlichen Geschlecht von Papilio machaon L. zu finden. | 2. Papilio hospiton GUENÉ ab. n. subrubicundus SCHULTZ. Ab. subrubicundus: Al. post supra rubromaculatis. Rote Beschuppung auf der Oberseite der Hinterflügel. Die mir vorliegenden Exemplare dieser Abart (Coll. Pfitzner- Sprottau 9; Coll. Pilz-Heinrichau) zeigen die beiden obersten BEITR. Z. GATTUNG PAPILIO L. U. COLIAS LEACH. 41 Saummonde am Vorderrand der Hinterflügel von dieser Erschei- nung betroffen, eins davon auch den untersten, dem Analauge zunäehst gelegenen (6. Saummond, indessen letzteren nur in sehr schwacher Weise. Bisweilen erscheint auch der Innenrand der dunklen Sub- marginalbinde (9) rostrot bestäubt (Coll. Pırz). Fluggebiet: Corsica, unter der Stammform. 9. Papilio xuthulus Brem. ab. miniatulus ScHULTz. Ab. miniatulus : Al. post. lunulis marginalibus supra ochraceo- tinctis : Die rotgelbe (ockergelbe) Farbung der Unterseite, welche oft sehr ausgebreitet auftritt, zeigt sich in seltenen Fallen auch auf der Oberseite der Hinterflügel. Mir hegt eine Form vor (ab. miniatulus), welche die gelben Saummonde der Hinterflügel (1—4.) stellenweise rötlich gelb gefárbt zeigt. Vom Amurgebiet. 4. Colias hyale L. ab. (n.) radiiformis SCHULTZ. Ab. radiiformis m.: Al. post. (et ant.) punctis ferrugineis subtus in radios effluentibus. Oberseite: Vorderflügel von typischen Exemplaren nicht verschieden; auch der dunkle Rand nicht breiter. Hinterflügel: ebenfalls typisch. Nur ein einziges Exemplar weicht insofern ab (9), als der schwarze Aussenrand völlig fehlt Unterseite: Hier zeigen sich die characteristischen Merk- male der neuen Abart: Schon auf den Vorderflügeln sind bei mehreren Exempla- ren entweder die obersten 2 Punkte der vor dem Saum befind- lichen braunschwarzen Punktreihe nach dem schwarzen Mittelfleck zu durch starke schwarze Striche erweitert oder es sınd die beiden untersten Punkte derselben in analoger Weise ausgezogen. Ein 49 OSKAR SCHULTZ. hierhergehóriges ó (cf. 6. Jahresbreicht des Wiener ent. Vereins 1895 p. 53) wird seiner Vorderflügelunterseite nach wie folgt beschrieben: „Auf der Unterseite der Vorderflügel stehen in Zello 1 b, 2 und 3 innerhalb der Saumpuncte grosse schwarze Mondflecke, deren convexe Seite die Saumpuncte berührt.“ Besonders aber treten die Merkmale der Abart auf der Unterseite der Hinterflügel hervor. Bald sind die rostfarbenen Punkte vor dem Saume sámmt- lich nach dem 8 förmigen Mittelfleck strichfórmig ausge- zogen, bald sind dieselben nicht peripher, sondern nach dem Saume zu längs den Flügeladern strahlenfórmig erweitert (so auch. l. c. p. 53: „Von den Saumpunkten der Unterseite der Hinterflügel ziehen rothbraune Strahlen zwischen den Rippen bis zum Saume^). - Diese Form, welche ich durch den besonderen Namen ab. radiiformis (wegen des strahlenartigen Ausfliessens der Saum- puncte) von der Stammart absondern möchte, wurde in Pommern (Zamzow, Gienow), Brandenburg (Berlin), in Nieder- und Mittel- Schlesien (2 Stücke im Heinrichau, Coll. Pilz, in Oesterreich (Sehneeberggebiet, Gutenstein), in der Schweiz beobachtet. Die Ab. raduformis tritt wohl überall da auf, wo die Stammform flegt, wenn auch nur selten. 5. Colias phicomone L. ab. elegans ScHULTZ, Forma obscurior. Ab. elegans: Al. amt. unicoloribus griseis, maculis sub- marginalibus via perspicuis; al. post. supra macula media rubra permagna. Schéne Form, auffallend durch die dunkle Farbung. Auf den Vorderflügeln ist im Wurzel- und Mittelfelde die grüngelbe Grundfárbung vóllig geschwunden und durch eine tief dunkel- graue Bestäubung verdrängt; der dunkle Aussenrand ist vor- handen; die lichteren Randflecken treten nur sehr wenig hervor, BEITR. Z. GATTUNG PAPILIO L. U. COLIAS LEACH. 45 Bei einem Exemplar sind dieSubmarginalflecken völliggeschwunden. Der Mittelpunct gross und tief schwarz hervortretend. Hinterflügel ebenfalls tief dunkelgrau, jedoch mit breitem licht grünlich grauem Saum. Der Mittelfleck auffallend gross, kräftig ziegelrot gefärbt. Die Unterseite von typischen Exemplaren ra verschieden. Aus der Schweiz. Coll. Pırz. 6. Colias myrmidone Ese. 9 ab. (n.) inumbrata SCHULTZ. Ab. inumbrata: Al. ant. supra margine immaculato nigro. Diese weibliche Form unterscheidet sich vom Typus dadurch, das der Saum der orangeroten Vorderflügel oberseits einfarbig schwarz und ungefleckt wie beim 6 (jedoch breiter als bei die- sem) ist. Die gelblichgrünen Hinterflügel zeigen dagegen den schmalen schwarzen Saum von lichtgelben (kleineren als beim Typus) Flecken begrenzt. Wegen der Verdunkelung des Vorderflügelsaumes móge diese Form ab. inumbrata heissen. 2 Exemplare in Coll. Pırz (aus Glatz?); eins in meiner Sammlung (Oesterreich). 7. Colias myrmidone Esp. 9 ab. Prächtige weibliche Aberration dieser Species. Die dunkle Färbung des Saumes der Vorderflügel sehr einge- schränkt dadurch, dass die hellen gelblichen Submarginalflecke an Grösse und Breite sehr zugenomnen haben und eine fast ununterbrochene Binde bilden. Die Hinterflügel mit schmalerem schwarzen Saum; vor dem- selben sehr grosse lichte Flecke. Der orangerote Mittelfleck kleiner als beim typischen Weibchen. Die Grundfärbung oberseits weniger lebhaft, orangefarben; unterseits mehr grünlich als gelb. Der 8-fórmige Fleck kleiner. Aus Nieder-Oesterreich. In meiner Sammlung. 44 OSKAR SCHULTZ. 3. Colias chrysotheme Esp. 9 ab. Unterseits auf den Vorderflügeln mit schwarzen Streifen zwischen dem dunklen Mittelpunct und den Saumpuncten. Provenienz unbekannt. Collect. Przz. 9. Colias edusa FABR. & ab. Der Vorderrand der Vorderflügel nicht orange gefärbt, son- dern breit schwefelgelb angelegt; ebensolche Färbung längs des Vorderrandes und im Analwinkel der Hinterflügel. Die übrige Flügelfläche typisch orangefarben mit breitem schwarzen Saume. Collection Pırz. Fundort: Breslau(?). Diese männliche Form gehört vielleicht zu der ab. chrysotheme St. (= ab. aubwissoni Car. 9.) welche in der Färbung als in der Mitte zwischen der Stammform und ab. helice stehend besschrieben wird und alle Flügel mehr oder minder orangefarben übergossen zeigt. Auf- fallend bleibt immerhin der mir angegebene Fundort Breslau, da die ab. aubuissoni CAR. nur in Südeuropa, Kleinasien und Nord- Africa vorkommt. | 10. Colias edusa Farr. 9 ab. Pråchtige Aberration. Vorderflügelfläche in ihrer ganzen Ausdehnung bis zum dunklen Saum nicht orangefarben, sondern schwefelgelb. Die Hinterflügel grüngelb, durch zahllose schwärzliche Atome dunkel bestäubt; dieselben zeigen einen schönen bläulich-grün- lichen Anflug. Unterseits: normal gefärbt. Fundort: Langenbielau Kreis Reichenbach. — Coll. Pırz. 11. Colias edusa FABR. gyn. Gynandromorphes Exemplar. Grósse die eines kleinen typischen Weibchens. Rechte Ek tb KES EEG Lou o RE BEITR. Z. GATTUNG PAPILIO L. U. COLIAS LEACH. 45 Flügel weiblich, etwas grösser als die linken; linke Flügel männlich. Linker Vorderflügel: 94 mm. gross, männlich, schlan- ker, weniger breit, mit breitem schwarzem Saum, letzterer ohne lichte Flecken. Linker Hinterflügel: männlich, etwas kleiner als der rechte. Rechter Vorderflügel: 25 mm. gross, weiblich, breiter, mit etwas breiterem dunklen Saum; letzterer mit mehreren grossen hellgelben Flecken. Rechter Hinterflügel; weiblich. Leib nach Gestalt und Färbung weiblich. Die äusseren Genitalien dem Anscheine?nach rein weiblich. Von Laghouat. ci. Berliner ent. Zeitschrift XLVIII p. 270. Gedruckt 27. januar 1904. Aarsberetning for Det biologiske selskab i Kristiania 1903. Ved F. G. Gade og Jens Holmboe. bienes antal var ved aarets begyndelse 54. I aarets lob har ét medlem traadt ud af selskabet, medens samti- dig 3 nye er indvalgte: dr. med. LYDER BoRTHEN, prof. dr. med. F. HanBrTZ og stud. med. P. W. K. Bøckman. Bestyrelsen bestod af: prosektor dr. med. F. G. Ganz, for- mand, prof. dr. E. Pourssow, viceformand, og amanuensis JENS HorwBor, sekretær. Der blev holdt 6 moder med ialt 10 foredrag. I moderne deltog fra 7 til 10, gjennemsnitlig 8 medlemmer, samt fra 4 til 35, gjennemsnitlig 12, gjæster. Møde torsdag den 22de januar. Amanuensis THekLa R. ResvorL holdt et af lysbilleder ledsaget foredrag om den nye vegetation paa skredet i Værdalen. Ved det store lerfald i mai 1893 dannedes et betydeligt ny- land, idet der gled ud et areal af ca. 2,9 km.?, og de udgledne masser oversvømmede dalen 1 en længde af 8 km. nedover. I den allerførste tid efter den voldsomme naturbegivenhed havde dette omraade et overmaade goldt og nøgent udseende; men det 48 F. G. GADE OG JENS HOLMBOE. varede ikke ret lenge, før en ny vegetation begyndte at indfinde sig. Allerede 1 1898 — kun 5 aar efter ulykken — havde storre dele af skredet en ganske grøn farve, og ved nærmere underso- gelser, som da blev anstillede, viste det sig, at endog noget over 100 plantearter voksede paa den nye jordbund. I det store og hele taget var dog den nye vegetation tiltrods for det forholdsvis betydelige artsantal meget ensformig, idet kun ganske faa arter beherskede pladsen. Væsentlig var det kun 2 planter, heste- hoven (Tussilago farfara) og akersnelden (Equisetum arvense), der begge 1 sine rigt grenede underjordiske dele har ypperlige spredningsmidler, som kunde siges at danne tætte bevoksninger. De øvrige arter fandtes ikke i synderlig stort individantal og havde en spredt forekomst. For en stor del syntes planternes fordeling at være bestemt af jordbundens fysiske forhold og fugtighedsforholdene. Der, hvor bunden bestod af grus, havde den sin særegne vegetation, ligesom ogsaa der, hvor den bestod af ublandet ler. Paa steder, hvor det var fugtigt nok og leren passelig opblandet med sand, fandtes saavel det tætteste som rigeste planteliv. Et saadant sted var f. eks. Follobekkens nye leie, hvor der 1 en tæt bundvegetation af akersnelde voksede omtrent 70 andre arter. Særlig opfriskende var plantelivet ved nogle smaa tjern, hvor der enkelte steder var udviklet temmelig rige vandplantesamfund. Tjernene var hyppig kransede af en tæt sumpvegetation, hvor især elvesnelden (Equisetum fluviatile) og endel siv- og stararter var fremtrædende, mens Potamogeton- og Sparganium-arter samt endel andre vandplanter voksede ude i selve vandet. De paa skredomraadet indkomne planter var almindelige skog-, myr-, eng- og ugræsplanter, som øiensynlig stammede fra skredets nærmeste omgivelser, og havde vistnok for en stor del spredt sig ud fra de mange flag af den gamle overflade, som under udrasningen havde flydt ovenpaa lermas- serne. For at kunne erholde materiale til fremtidigt studium af arternes indbyrdes kamp om pladsen, blev nylandet ved udstukne linjer opdelt i smaa omraader og de forskjellige planter inden — DET BIOLOGISKE SELSKAB. 1903. 49 hvert af disse optalt og opskrevet. Nye undersøgelser, anstillede sommeren 1902, viste, at der 1 lobet af 4 aar ikke var foregaaet særdeles store og væsentlige forandringer med vegetationen. Kun var plantedækket blevet tættere, idet enkelte arter havde spredt sig stærkt. I det store og hele taget syntes vegetationen i de forløbne aar væsentlig at have fortsat i den retning, som var paabegyndt ı 1898. (Cir. Den nye vegetation paa ler- faldet i Værdalen. N. Mag. f. Natv. Bd. 41). — Foredraget. gav anledning til en diskussion, hvori deltog brigadelæge C. ÅRBo, professor dr. N. Witte og amanuensis Jens HoLwBor. Den sidstnævnte bragte, 1 tilknytning til foredraget, nogle korte meddelelser om Vegetationen paa Hamar domkirkes ruiner. Paa den odde, som mellem Akersviken og Furnæsfjord skyder ud i Mjøsen, paa Storhamar gaards grund, ligger de be- rømte ruiner af Hamar domkirke. Den gamle, i middelalderen opførte kirke led stærkt ved svenskernes herjing under Syvaars- krigen (1567), og store dele af den forfaldt i løbet af det følgende aarhundrede!) Rester af dens mægtige buer tegner sig dog endnu mod himlen som et ærværdigt minde om svundne tiders kultur. Oppe paa de gamle mure og buer vokser der en ganske rig vegetation af forskjellige høiere planter. Ved et besøg den 23de juni 1901 noterede jeg ialt følgende 44 arter blomsterplan- ter og bregner: Acer platanoides L. Sparsomt. Achillea Millefolium L. Temm. sparsomt. "Alchemilla vulgaris L. *pubescens Lam. Sparsomt. * Anthriscus silvestris Horrm. Sparsomt. * Anthyllis Vulneraria L. Sparsomt. * Arenaria serpyllifolia L. Temm. talrig. Artemisia Absinthium L. Sparsomt. 1) Gustav Storm, Om det gamle Hamar, p. 131— 133. (Histor. Tidsskr. 3 R. 1 Bd. Kristiania 1890). Nyt Mag. f. Naturv, XXXXII I. 4 50 F. G. GADE OG JENS HOLMBOE. *4. campetris L. I mængde, selv paa de høieste buer og pillarer. Atriplex patula L. Sparsomt. Betula alba L. Unge expl. sparsomt. *Calamintha Acinos BENTH. 'Sparsomt. Campanula rotundifolia L. I maengde. *Cerastium vulgare Hartm. "Temm. sparsomt. Chelidoniwm majus L. Sparsomt. Chenopodium album L. Fleresteds. *Cystopteris fragilis BERNH. Fleresteds. *Draba incana L. Fleresteds. *Hrysimum hieraciifolium L. Temm. talrig. *Festuca ovina L. Temm. talrig. * Fragaria vesca L. Sparsomt. *Galeopsis Tetrahit L. Temm. talrig. *Galiwm verum L. Sparsomt. Geranium silvaticum L. Sparsomt. “Hieracium murorum L. Sparsomt. Leontodon autumnale L. Sparsomt. Linaria vulgaris L. Sparsomt. * Myosotis arvensis L. Sparsomt. *Pimpinella Sacifraga L. Temm. sparsomt. *Plantago media L. 'lemm. sparsomt. "Poa nemoralis L. "Temm. talrig. "Potentilla argentea L. Sparsomt. Rubus idaeus L. 'lemm. sparsomt. RH. saxatilis L. Temm. sparsomt. “Rumex Acetosa L. Sparsomt. Salix caprea L. Kimplànter, temm. talrig. “Sedum acre L. I mængde. “Silene inflata Su. I mængde. “Taraxacum officinale Wes.. Talrig. “Trifolium pratense L. Sparsomt. *T. repens L. Sparsomt. DET BIOLOGISKE SELSKAB. 1903. 51 Urtica dioica L. "Temm. sparsomt. Verbascum nigrum L. "Temm. sparsomt. * Vicia Cracca L. Temm. sparsomt. * Viola Riviniana Reus. Sparsomt. Blandt disse arter iagttoges 29 med blomst eller frugt (eller for bregnernes vedkommende med sporer); disse er i fortegnelsen mærkede med en stjerne (*). De fleste arter voksede oppe paa selve murene og afsatserne: andre stak frem fra sprækker og revner mellem bygningstenene. Rigest saavel paa individer som arter var vegetationen paa murernes lavere del (dog brød jeg mig ikke om at notere nogen lavere end 05 m. over marken). Kun følgende 13 voksede 1 større høide end 3 m.: Anthriscus, Artemisia campestris, Campanula rotundifolia, Draba incana, Festuca ovina, Leontodon, Pimpinella, Plantago media, Sedum acre, Silene inflata, Taraxacum, Trifolium pratense og Vicia Cracca. Ai disse 15 fandtes de 12 i blomst. og den eneste, som jeg kun saa steril, var Leontodon, hvis blomstringstid endnu ikke var inde. Hvad angaar den maade, paa hvilken fro af de fundne planter maa antages bragt op til de usædvanlige voksepladse, kan følgende anfores. Foruden de arter (Betula, Salix. flere compositer, etc.), hvis fro og frugter er forsynede med fnok, vinger, o. |, maa ogsaa en stor del af de andre ansees vel skikkede til spredning ved vindens hjelp. paa grund af froenes lidenhed. Exempelvis kan nævnes Campanula rotundifolia, Sedum acre, Urtica dioica, m. fl. Saftfulde frugter har vist- nok kun 5 (Fragaria vesca og de to Rubus-arter), men efter prof. R. CoLLETT's og mine egne undersogelser forterer forskjellige fugle fro og frugter af langt flere arter (Achillea Millefolium, Arte- misia campestris, Atriplex patula, Chenopodium album, Galeop- sis Tetrahit, Trifolium pratense, Urtica dioica og Vicia Cracca).*) !) Jens HormBor, Notizen über die endozoisehe Samenverbreitung der Vögel. (N. M. f. N. Bd. 38. 1900). 59 F. G. GADE OG JENS HOLMBOE. Ved myrers hjætp spredes saavel i Norge som i Sverige Cheli- doniwm majws!); talrige myrer saaes at vandre omkring paa runerne. Ingen af de fundne arter behøver at være fort hid fra nogen stor afstand; de fleste voksede i mængde paa de tørre silurberge ved Mjesens bred nedenfor ruinerne. Alene Draba incana lykkedes det ikke at finde i de nærmeste omgivelser, men ogsaa den forekommer ifølge Jon Rup?) ikke langt fra Hamar. Lignende iagttagelser som de her meddelte foreligger fra flere andre lande, der er rigere paa ruiner end Norge. Hvad vore nabolande angaar, har H. Mortensen 5) givet oplysninger om plantevæksien paa den gamle marmorkirke-ruin 1 Kjøben- havn, hvor han fandt 23 arter karplanter. Endvidere har C. A. M. LINDMAN”) undersøgt vegetationen paa Visby ruiner (96 arter), og R. SERNANDER*) plantevæksten paa ruinerne af Kastellholms slot og Bomarsunds fæstning paa Ålandsøerne (73 arter). Det kan have sin interesse at sammenligne artlisterne fra disse hid- til undersøgte ruiner; det viser sig, at Hamar domkirke har 3 arter fælles med marmorkirken 1 Kjøbenhavn, 23 med ruinerne ved Visby og 18 med dem paa Åland. alt er 30 af de ved Hamar fundne arter kjendt fra andre skandinaviske ruiner, og kun følgende 14 kan opføres som et tillæg til den skandinaviske ruinvegetation: Alchemilla vulgaris, Anthyllis Vulneraria, Betula alba, Cystopteris fragilis, Draba incana, Erysimum hieraciifolium, Galeopsis Tetrahit, Geranium silvaticum, Li- naria vulgaris, Plantago media, Rubus saxatilis, Salix ca- 1) R. SERNANDER, Den skandinaviska vegetationens spridningsbiologi, p. 289. Upsala 1901. 2) Jon Run, Mjøsegnens flora, p. 25. (Indbydelsesskrift til eksamen ved Hamar off. skole 1884). 3) H. Mortensen, Marmorkirkens Flora (Botan. Tidsskr. 3. R. 3 Bd. Kjebenbavn 1879). 4) C. A. M. Linpman, Kärlväxtfloran på Visby ruiner. (Öfv. af K. Sv. Vet. Ak. Fórh. 1895. No. 4). 5) SERNANDER, |. c., p. 375, flg. | i | | DET BIOLOGISKE SELSKAB. 1903. 53 prea, Verbascum nigrum og Viola Riviniana. Flere af disse er paa de andre ruiner erstattet af nærstaaende arter. Ligheden mellem de undersøgte ruiners vegetation maa — 1 betragtning af den store afstand mellem dem — siges at være temme- 1 X lig stor. Møde torsdag den 26de marts. Professor dr. S. Torup holdt foredrag om ionelæren og dens betydning for nogle biologiske processer. — Til foredraget knyttedes bemærkninger af prof. dr. E. PouLsson og dr. med. F. G. GADE. Møde lørdag den 12te september. Mødet blev holdt paa den biologiske station i Drøbak. Dr. med. K. E. SCHREINER holdt foredrag om genera- tionsorganet hos Myxine glutinosa (L.). Foredragsholderen gav først en almindelig karakteristik af generationsorganets bygning og udseende hos Myxine og viste, hvorledes dette ved sin længde, sin udvikling alene paa dyrets ene side og sin hermaphroditiske natur adskiller sig fra den almindelige type af generationsorganer, som man finder hos de fleste øvrige hvirveldyr. Eiterat foredragsholderen derefter havde givet en fremstilling af den nu almindelig herskende opfatning af hermaphroditismen hos Mysxine som værende af protandrisk natur, saaledes at dyrene først fungerede som hanner og senere som hunner — en opfatning, som er grundlagt af skotlænderen (CUNNINGHAM og vor landsmand, professor NANSEN — refereredes de resultater, til hvilke foredragsholderen og hans hustru var komne efter undersøgelse af et betydeligt materiale (nemlig ca. 2500 eksemplarer). Disse resultater gik ud paa, at herma- phroditismen hos Myxine ikke er effektiv, men rudi- 54 F. G. GADE OG JENS HOLMBOE. mentær, idet en del af de tilsyneladende hermaphroditer er at opfatte som hanner og en del som hunner. Hos de første fandt man generationsorganets testisdel;mer eller mindre vel udviklet, medens den proximalt liggende ovarialdel er rudimentær, viser pathologiske forandringer af forskjellig natur og aldrig udvikler sig videre. Paa samme maade finder man hos hunnerne bagen- for det vel udviklede ovarium et hanorgan, som er hemmet i sin udvikling eller viser tydelige degenerative forandringer. Over- gange mellem disse 2 former, som den tidligere opfatning af hermaphroditisme forudsætter, forekommer 1 virkeligheden ikke. Foruden hanner og hunner forekommer der desuden et ikke ringe antal sterile eksemplarer, hos hvem der i kjønsorganet enten aldeles ikke findes æg eller testisfollikler anlagt, eller hos hvem kjønsorganet som helhed viser hemmet eller abnorm ud- vikling. Forskjellen mellem de 2 kjøn er i almindelighed tydelig udtalt hos dyr paa en længde af 24 cm. og derover (dyrene naar sjelden en længde af 40 cm.); men den kan ogsaa ikke sjelden paavises hos dyr, som er ca. 20 cm. lange, i ganske enkelte tilfælde muligens allerede hos 17 cm. lange dyr. Efter en skildring af de mange variationer, som kjønsorganet hos Myxine kan opvise baade hvad lengde angaar og med hensyn til udvikling og fordeling af den hanlige og hunlige kjonskjertelsubstans, omtaltes en række tilfælde, hvor kjønsorga- net var fundet at være parret. Samtlige ovenfor skildrede forhold demonstreredes paa et betydeligt antal udstillede eksemplarer. De kjendsgjerninger, som de refererede undersøgelser af Myscines biologi og kjønsorgans bygning havde bragt tilveie, talte, sammenholdt med tidligere undersøgeres resultater, for sandsynlig- heden af, at Myxinoidernes forfædre har fort et mere omstreifende liv og besiddet et parret hermaphroditisk kjønsorgan, som produ- cerede talrige blommefattige æg. Eftersom Myxinoidernes levevis lidt efter lidt er blevet forandret, og dyrene som saprophyter er blevne mere bundne til bestemte lokaliteter, har samtidig med DET BIOLOGISKE SELSKAB. 1908. 55 larvernes forandrede levevis æggenes blommerigdom tiltaget. Denne tiltagen i masse har saa fort til en aftagen i antal og til en forsvinden af den ene sides kjonsstreng. De talrige varia- tioner, man finder i det gjensidige forhold mellem testis og ovarium, forklaredes som for en væsentlig dels fremgaaet ved en udvikling fra en tidligere eksisterende effektiv herma- phroditisme til diócisme. (Udførligt referat af foredraget vil blive trykt i ,Biolog. Centralbl.*). — Foredraget gav anled- ning til bemærkninger af prof. dr. G. A. GULDBERG, prof. dr. F. HanBrTZ, prof. dr. N. Witte og dr. med. F. G. Gane. Mode torsdag den 24de september. Dr. S. ScHMIDT-NIELSEN redegjorde i tilknytning til et tid- ligere foredrag om "cellens kemiske værktøi* for en af ham op- stillet hypothese om de intracellulere enzymers virke- maade, hvorefter denne skulde vare intermitterende, saaledes, at der i en celle samtidig ikke behøvede at være mere end et enzym i virksomhed. Eiter nogen tids forlob vilde dette paa grund af ophobede stofvekselsprodukter sættes ud af virksom- hed, mens samtidig de fysikalske forhold blev bragt tilveie, som gjorde det muligt for et andet enzym at virke. Paa denne maade vilde efter hverandre et tredie og fjerde og flere enzymer kunne trade i virksomhed. Naar saa i mellemtiden de først dannede produkter var transporterede bort, kunde det forste enzym atter begynde sit arbeide. Fordelen ved denne forkla- ring var efter foredragsholderens opfatning den, at man ikke be- høvede at forudsætte nogen anden struktur hos protoplasmaet end den allerede kjendte, at den altsaa i modsætning til HoFMEISTER's kunde antages saavel af botanikere som zoologer. — Foredraget gav anledning til en diskussion, hvorunder pro- fessor dr. N. WILLE og veterinærdirektør dr. O. Maru i flere punk- ter sluttede sig til den i foredraget udviklede tanke, mens kon- servalor KRISTINE BONNEVIE tog afstand derfra. 56 F. G. GADE OG JENS HOLMBOE. Dr. ScHMIDT-NIELSEN refererede dernæst nogle forsøg over lysets virkninger paa enzymer, som han med understot- telse af Nansenfondet havde foretaget i Kjobenhavn ved Finsens lysinstitut. Det havde vist sig, at saavel sollys som lyset fra en buelampe og det koncentrerede lys, der anvendes ved lupus- behandlingen, virkede ødelæggende ikke alene paa enzymerne selv, men ogsaa paa deres uvirksomme forstadier (proenzymer) og paa visse stoffe i blodserum, der neutraliserer enzymerne (antienzymer). Det viste sig at være lysets ultraviolette straaler, hvem denne virkning skyldtes, hvorimod den synlige del af sol- spektret saa at sige ingen indflydelse havde. — Foredragsholderen omtalte tilsidst nogle forsøg, som han havde udført over Röntgen- og Becquerelstraaler. Mens de første havde vist sig uvirk- somme, kunde de sidste i nogen grad svække en enzymopløs- ning. I det hele taget syntes lyset at maatte kunne anvendes som en reagens til at studere baade enzymer, proenzymer og antienzymer. — I tilslutning til dette foredrag fremholdt profes- sor dr. N. WiLLE enskeligheden af, at den enestaaende anled- ning, som vi om sommeren i den nordlige del af vort land har til at studere de forskjellige sider af lysets virkning, 1 større ud- strækning end hidtil maatte blive benyttet. Dr. med. F. G. GADE demonstrerede dernæst Grayson's prøveplade og andre prøveobjekter for mikroskopet. Møde lørdag den 7de november. Amanuensis THEKLA R. ResvoLL holdt foredrag om vege- tationen i Schweiz, som hun havde studeret paa en reise sidste sommer. Saavel de lavtliggende dalførers vinberge og kastanjeskoge som bergregionens naaleskoge og høialpernes fro- dige græsmatter og urtelier blev nærmere skildret. Under fore- draget fremvistes talrige lysbilleder samt pressede eksemplarer af de for hvert enkelt plantesamfund mest typiske arter. DET BIOLOGISKE SELSKAB. 1903. Dil Møde torsdag den 3die december. Konservator Sie THor meddelte nogle iagttagelser an- gaaende Cellekjernens forhold til ergastoplasmaet, væsentlig efter nyere franske undersøgelser. „Man tillægger gjerne B. Songer æren for 1 dyriske cellers cytoplasma først (1894) at have beskrevet og afbildet visse traadformede, hémateinofile formationer, som han kaldte basal- filamenter. Det var i menneskets tungespytkjertler. Samme- steds gjenkjendte CH. Garnier (1897) de nævnte filamenter og gav dem det specifike navn ergastoplasma, omtrent samtidig med, at M. og P. Bonin (1898) indførte samme navn 1 botani- ken. Ergastoplasmaet kjendes, efter GARNIER, paa basal be- liggenhed i glandulære celler, filamentær form, gruppering i bundter etc., samt paa sin kromatiske affinitet for safranin og jern-hæmatoxylin. Man har ogsaa konstateret en tydelig kro- matisk variation, stemmende med visse forandringer i kjernen. Siden har flere forskere omtalt disse formationer 1i forskjellige celler (f. eks. THEOHARI, LAGUESSE, JOUVENEL, LEGER, DUBOSCQ, REGAUD, BensLey. Vıcnon, M. Lovgz, RENAUT, Launoy). K.C. SCHNEIDER kalder dem. „Sekretfibrillen“. Det er tvivlsomt, om BENDA's ,mitochondria* og M. HEIDENHAIN's „pseudochromosomer“ kan henfores til samme gruppe. PRENANT har omtalt dem under fællesnavnet: „protoplasma supérieur“. Foredragsholderen havde fundet ergastoplasma i kjertelceller hos visse Acarina. Der er fremsat forskjellige opfatninger af disse filamenters rolle og op- rindelse. Enkelte anser dem for at være af cyptolasmisk, andre af nucleær, atter andre af dobbelt oprindelse. Foredragsholderen refererede et par nyere franske undersøgelser, der kaster et vist lys over sagen. Dr. Conte og dr. Vaney (i Lyon) fandt (1902) i en i vandsalamanderens tarmkanal snyltende protozo, Opalina intestinalis, safranofile korn, der gjennem visse aabninger i 58 F. G. GADE OG JENS HOLMBOE. kjernemembranen trengte ud af kjernen og spredte sig 1 cyto- plasmaet. Denne proces benævner C. og V. , emission nucléaire“, Siden oploser kornene sig 1 smaakugler, der antager en mere rødlig teint, svulmer op og opløser sig senere i cytoplasmaet. Kornene svarer til zymogen-korn, som å. eks. findes i ølgjær og sammenlignes med lignende dannelser, iagttagne 1 insekters, tusenbens og pattedyrs æg. I en anden meddelelse (trykt ?/3 1903 i “Comptes R.“, Paris) omtaler Conte og Vaney hestebremsens larve, i hvis trakeceller de finder lignende kromatofile masser, dels spredt 1 cytoplasmaet, dels indesluttet indenfor kjernemembranen. Denne viser sig undertiden dobbelt. Den ydre kjernemembran dannes delvis af det cytoplasmiske net, den indre, stærkt kromatofil, be- staar undertiden af korte stykker; den kan ogsaa mangle. De nævnte stykker viser sig paa heldige præparater dannet af kjer- nens kromatiske tener. Disse lægger sig dels hen til den ydre membran og danner saaledes helt eller delvis en indre, dels trænger de gjennem kjernemembranens aabninger ud i cytoplas- maet, hvor de forgrener sig. I de omtalte trakéceller ee altsaa kjernen et intimt for- hold til de omtalte elementer, idet den danner eller ialfald del- tager i dannelsen af de nævnte korn og kromatiske stykker. Kjernemembranen synes mindre solid og simpel, end man ofte har fremstillet den.“ — Til foredraget knyttedes bemærkninger af prof. dr. E. PouLsson og dr. med. K. E. SCHREINER, hvortil foredragsholderen replicerede. Konservator KRISTINE Bonnevie holdt foredrag om sper- miernes dannelse hos en lavtstaaende, parasitisk levende snegl, Enteroxenos Östergreni, og fremviste tegninger af de for- skjellige stadier fra deres første anlæg til færdige udvikling. Hun sammenlignede dette dyrs spermier med de øvrige snegle samt høierestaaende dyr og paapegede den ved vor tids udviklede mi- kroskopiske teknik paaviste store overensstemmelse i spermiernes dannelse inden forskjellige dyreklasser. (Foredraget vil blive DET BIOLOGISKE SELSKAB. 1903. 59 trykt i „Biol. Centralbl.^. — Foredraget gav anledning til en diskussion mellem dr. med. K. E. SCHREINER og foredragsholderen. Cand. philos. HJ. BRocH gav endel spredte meddelelser fra „Michael Sars“s togter sommeren 1905. Han skildrede det rige dyreliv 1 havet, som skibets fortrinlige udrustning med moderne fangstapparater gav saa god anledning til at studere. Med et eneste trek af det saakaldte ,tobisvad^ kunde man hente indtil halvanden hektoliter dyr op fra dybet. Særlig fiskeyngel og manæter samt den vakre, lyserode hydroide Tubularia larynx forekom i største mængde. I Danmarkstrædet stødte man paa store stimer af ægte *islandssild*, som gik lige i vandskorpen; i den knappe tid, som kunde afsees, blev der gjort en rig fangst. Sankthansaften fik man se en flok store haier; 1 løbet af en times tid kunde man fra skibets dæk tælle 12 à 13 stykker. I Mjofjorden paa Island blev en netop skudt nordkaperhval under- søgt; den var eiendommelig derved, at dens bug var hvidfarvet. En kaskelot, som var bragt ind til brødr. ELLEFSEN's etablisse- ment, havde været i kamp med en 25—26 fod lang kjæmpe- blæksprut (Architeutes); og at den ogsaa tidligere havde stodt paa slige, kunde sees ai, at tre fjerdedele af dens maveindhold bestod af blæksprutnæb. Trykt den 27de januar 1904. Navneregister. SA ADOS ACIER Nee Aet ES Ree PCS T ICT RS PS) Bonnevie Kristne å secum Teen ØRN GE ED MES Borden TY DCP as Mr SOL d GE S igo m mr SE Broder S13 GIBT LOB Pee M GR TE) Beckman, P. W. JE SMT CT DE 250 MAU acie 6 og ul Gabe CEN E OR RN SS DA LIMEN S dL qs Ex S5 Guldberg «GH SHE ste Eh Le N ee EEE WKO NR ENT GE GE I m eg A, DE Holmboe Jon sme es GRS NE Mom MO IS. S C BUE mueve cs ON ep EE Poulsson, E. . Wu ER ES -Resvoll. Thekla R. AM ME IN LOL ng care. b db NG i5chwadtsNaelsens Seo « os ee RINT RE er UE ERO BO Schreiner «Kc KJOS AS SS cv MUERE SEO TROFISE Vi ve SSE SETTE TR ae EM E TOK U PE MN Rage das eu SA ae” at eco te RETIRE male Ness: Sv SIES TN SEE VENER Dyrelivet i Drebaksund ved Hans Kiær. (Med PI. II, III). lu at udfore biologiske undersogelser 1 Drobaksund havde jeg sommeren 1899 stipendium af det Rathkeske legat. Under disse undersøgelser, der delvis er udført med dr. PETERSENS interessante afhandling om dyrelivet i Holbækfjord i Danmark som monster, har dr. J. Hsorts velvillige bistand og raad været mig til stor nytte, ligesom ogsaa folgende videnskabsmænd delvis har hjulpet mig med bestemmelsen af enkelte dyregrupper, nemlig prof. G. O. Sars, frk. K. Bonnevie, dr. J. Kiær og cand. A. WOoLLEB&K, hvorfor det her er mig en trang at udtale min tak for den modtagne hjælp. Jeg maa ligeledes tillade mig at bringe hr. prof. R. CorrETT min tak for den adgang jeg har haft til universitetets samlinger. De folgende undersøgelser omfatter dyrelivet og dets sammen- setning paa enkelte udvalgte lokaliteter ved Drobak, specielt de forskjellige dyregruppers og arters forekomst og mængdeforhold samt naturforholdene og disses indflydelse paa dyrelivet. Inden de forskjellige dele af Kristianiafjorden hersker der særdeles vexlende naturforhold, der forøvrigt synes at kunne henføres til nogle faa hovedgrupper. Ved at undersøge lokaliteter, 62 HANS KLER. hvis naturforhold svarer til hver af disse hovedgrupper, vil man saaledes kunne faa et begreb om naturforholdene 1 fjorden 1 det store og hele taget. Mine undersøgelser ved Drøbak skulde derfor tjene til at belyse dyrelivets sammensætning og økonomi ikke alene paa de enkelte undersøgte lokaliteter, men ogsaa paa de dele af hav- bunden, hvorpaa disse lokaliteter er typer. Desuden troede jeg, at ethvert bidrag til forstaaelsen af naturforholdene i Drøbak- sund vilde være af interesse for de undersøgelser, der drives ved den biologiske station 1 Drøbak. falt undersøgtes 5 forskjellige lokaliteter, der med hensyn til naturforhold kan karakteriseres paa følgende maade: 1. Mudderbund 0— 12 meter (Sandspollen). 9. " ca. 100 , (mellem Haa- og Graaøen). 3 5 ca. 200 „ (syd for Drøbak). 4. Sand- og fjeldbund med Laminarier (mellem Storskjær og „Vestlandet“). 5. Fjeldbund med koraller og alger (Drobaksgrunden samt fjeldet nord for den biologiske station). Jeg har væsentlig blot taget hensyn til de almindeligst fore- kommende laverestaaende dyrearter, men det er paa ingen maade min hensigt at levere en fortegnelse over alle disse paa hvert enkelt sted. Omend dette arbeide 1 mange henseender er meget ufuld- stendigt, er det dog mit haab, at mine undersogelser over det lavere dyreliv som tillæg til dr. HJORTS fiskeriundersogelser, maa have nogen betydning til forstaaelse af, hvordan dyrelivet idet- hele arter sig paa de nævnte lokaliteter. Thalamophorerne er ikke specielt nævnt her, da disse af mig er behandlede i en egen afhandling: ,Synopsis on the Norwegian marine Thalamophora*. Af redskaber benyttedes en otertrawl, en skrabe, samt enkelte gange et finmasket vad og en planktonhov. DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. | 63 Beskrivelse af de undersogte lokaliteter og deres dyreliv. 1. Sandspollen. Dybde: 0—12 meter. Mudderbund. — EF Sands- | pollen er et indelukket bassin, der blot ved et smalt sund staar ı forbindelse med fjorden udenfor. Sundet har omtrent samme dyb- — 27,5, Jer de som selve pollen, der dels er omgivet af steile fjeldknauser, dels af flade marker, hvis fortsættelse danner pollens mere eller mindre jevnt skraanende havbund. I august maaned var temperaturen paa 10 meters dyb 11—12° C. medens overfladetem- peraturen 18725 fandtes ned til en dybde af 7 meter!. Den inderste bugt af Sands- pollen danner inderst inde et lang- Fig. 1. Dybdekart over Drøbaksund. 5 ‘an en 200 10 5o o 1 Ifølge dr. Hsorts undersøgelser d. 11. aug. 1897. 64 HANS KLÆR. grundt bælte uden vegetation. Her findes talrige tuer frembragte af Arenicola piscatorum. med lange bugtede strenge af opslyngede excrementer, af og til sees ogsaa de eiendommelige aabninger (1 sandet), som skyldes Mya arenaria. Paa begge sider af den inderste bugt er der steile fjeld- knauser med nedrasede klippestykker, hvorpaa findes Littorina littorea i talrig mængde og i forskjellige størrelser. Langs stran- den svømmer enkelte exemplarer af Cottus scorpius og Palae- mon fabricit stødvis frem og tilbage. Enkelte smaa krabber ( Carcinus maenas) sees ogsaa af og til. Fig. 2. Profil af Sandspollen. D I en dybde af ca. 0.5 meter begynder SÅ Zostera-vegetationen og fortsætter udover E] fant. mudder til ca. 7 meters dybde. Overalt paa Zoste- raen lever i talug mangde Rissostomia octogona og ikke faa af Rissoa albella, begge arter 1 forskjellige udviklingstrin. Abra alba forekommer ogsaa af og til, men hører egentlig hjemme paa lerbunden udenfor, medens de 2 forstnævnte arter er karakterformer for Zostera-bæltet. Enkelte smaa individer af Littorina littorea (af 7—12 milimeters længde) paatreefies ogsaa. Endvidere kan nævnes Nassa reticulata, Cylichna sp., begge enkeltvis og udvoxne, Asterias rubens, ganske smaa og enkelte halvstore exemplarer, Strongylocentrotus drøbachiensis, Bala- nus balanoides samt Crangon- og Palaemon-larver, Mem- branacea og Spirorbis, hvilke arter dog aldrig optræder i nogen forholdsvis stor mængde, derimod forekom der af og til en mængde exemplarer af Mytilus sp. 1 de første udviklingsstadier fastheftede til eller mellem sammenklæbede blade af Zostera. Til hvilken art disse Mytilus-unger hører, lader sig ikke afgjore. M. edulis DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. 65 forekommer blot af og til langs stranden paa denne lokalitet, men da den indsamles og bruges til agn, er det umuligt med bestemthed at have nogen mening om dens udbredelse. Imidler- tid synes Zosteraen her at være et gunstigt levested for Mytilus- yngelen, hvad man paa forhaand ogsaa kunde slutte sig til, da der paa Zosteraens blade ofte findes et rigt mikrospisk dyreliv, bestaaende af smaa Arachnider, Crustaceer, specielt Ostracoder, samt Hydroider, Anguillula sp. og Infusorier. Disse mikrosko- piske dyr opholdt sig især mellem hobe af sammenfiltrede alger. Af planktonformer findes i Sandspollen de samme som 1 fjorden udenfor. Saaledes optraadte der i juni maaned og tid- ligere i Kristianiafjorden og i Sandspollen, lige til de inderste bugter af denne, uhyre masser af Ctenophorer' og senere af Noctiluca sp. En dag i juli maaned var de inderste bugter af Sandspollen opfyldt af Meduser (Aurelia aurita). | Mellem rødderne af Zostera fandtes af og til et enkelt exem- plar af Ophioglypha lacertosa og af Aporrhais pes pelecami. I mudder fra bunden Insektlarver, Acariner, Turbellarier, An- guillula sp., smaa Crustaceer, saaledes Ostracoder, Infusorier og Diatomeer. Ved ca. 7 meters dyb begynder barbunden, der bestaar af blod, graa lere med sorte streif, som skyldes forraadnende dele al Zostera, hvoraf der altid kom meget op med skraben. Der fandtes ogsaa næsten altid en hel del tomme skaller af Molluscer, enkelte træstykker, barnaale, bark, smaasten, slagger, grus og sand samt rør af Annellider 1 forskjellige størrelser. De almindeligste større dyreformer paa barbunden er følgende: Ophioglypha lacertosa, O. albida, Aporrhais pes pelecami, Abra alba, Corbula rosea, samt Nephtys ciliata. I den ydre del af pollen paa ca. 12 meters dyb er Amphidetus cordatus ikke sjelden, de fundne exemplarer var udvoxne og kjønsmodne 1 august maaned. | Mnemia (Bolina) norvegica., enkelte: Beroe (Idya) cucumis. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XX XXII. I. D) 66 HANS KIÆR. Mere sparsomt forekommende var folgende arter: Abra mitida, Nassa reticulata, Macoma baltica, Cultellus pelucidus, Asterias rubens, Cardium edule, Strong. droebachiensis, Pagurus sp. Cyprina islandica, Littorina littorea, Virgularia mirabilis, Ascidia sp, Buccinum undatum, Boreochiton marmoreus, Cylichna sp, Saxicava pholadis, Xylophaga dorsalis, Balanus porchatus, Teredo norvegica, Mytilus modiolus. Pectinaria sp., Alle disse arter fandtes levende paa barbunden. Saxicava pholadis fandtes i tomme skaller af Cyprina islandica og Mytilus modiolus. Udenpaa skallerne levede Boreochiton mar- moreus og Balanus porchatus. Paa skaller af Aporrhais saaes talrige Hydroider og en enkelt liden Aktimie. Alle de nævnte dyreformer fra barbunden fandtes altid blot som fuldt udvoxne med undtagelse af Nephtys ciliata, Asterias rubens og Stron- gylocentrotus droebachiensis samt Cyprina islandica, dog heller ikke af disse fandtes ganske smaa individer. Af Cyprina islandica fandtes ingen fuldt udvoxne. Ophioglypha lacertosa var kjonsmoden ı juli maaned, mange af de fundne exemplarer holdt da paa at afsætte sine æggekapsler, hvoraf endel fandtes paa træstykker og andre gjenstande (specielt 13. juli). For at illustrere, hvad der normalt kan bringes op ved et enkelt træk skal her anføres efter journalen enkelte typiske træk: 24. august. Trak med skrabe i den inderste vig af Sands- pollen, fra 4—2 meter 1 Zostera-regionen. Rissostomia octogona . . . en mængde exemplarer. Rissoa albella . . . . . . endel - Littorina littorea. . . . . . enkelte smaa ” Asterias rubens, Radius 12 og 15 mm. enkelte „ DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. 67 Mytilus sp., uhyre mængde ganske smaa exemplarer. Osmacader. sus osse enkelte ñ 19. juli. Træk med finmasket vad 1 den inderste bugt paa mudderbunden fra 8—10 meter, op paa stranden. Ophioglypha lacertosa . . . . . . 126 exemplarer. » CLOT ue ne ac AD) å Asterias rubens, 6—11 cms. adlet 3 3 Aporrhais pes pelecani, levende. . . 2 Å 5 x i dedero 27.18 x Abra alba, levende . . . . . . ca. 30 : * "ar OT ORNE 110 à Corbula rosea, levende . . . . . 7 4 5 t dede DÅ x Bartorinalttiorea =, ww , ... 3 - Nassa reticulata , ...... 1 " 17. juli. 2 trek med skrabe i den ydre del af Sandspollen paa ea. 12 meters dyb. Mudderbund. Ophioglypha lacertosa ...... 2 exemplarer. så add CRECEN ETSI - Amphidetus cordatus, levende . . . 12 å Asterias rubens, 14.5 cms. længde . . 1 Å Aporrhais pes pelecami, levende . . 26 » * : å døden war, 12 å Abra alba, levende. . . . . . . . 40 5 * 3 døde ey) 150 å Gaula vosen 1 1 ei 4 M Buccinum undatum, levende . . . 4 = Turritella terebra, dede . . . . . . 4 à Nassa reticulata NS UA. 1 - Littorina littorea Rater cs |e tess oe 4 " Boreochiton marmoreus, levende. . 5 5 Pectinaria sp. levende . . 2... 1 " » Pum adenine Laks 4 i 68 HANS KLAR. Nepthys ciliata, levende . . . . . . 2 exemplarer. Cyprina islamdica, levende . . . . 1 À 2 a døde Mr 34 Mytilus modiolus, levende. . . . . 1 å Indholdet af de enkelte træk var ofte særdeles vexlende, hvilket tyder paa at de fleste arters forekomst er meget spredt, dog synes der idethele ikke at være nogen forskjel i faunaen paa mudderbunden i den indre og den ydre del af Sandspollen med undtagelse af, at Amphidetus cordatus blot fandtes i den ydre del og at Ophioglypha lacertosa og albida var talrigst i den indre del. Nephtys ciliata var undertiden talrig tilstede, saaledes fandtes 1 et enkelt træk 22 for det meste udvoxne indi- vider. Virgularia mirabilis fandtes blot i den indre del af Sandspollen paa 10—12 meters dyb og blot en sjelden gang. Neesten altid fandtes en hel del tomme skaller af mollusker i mudderet fra bunden. Skallerne var 1 regelen forenede og fyldt med mudder, undtagen Cyprina-skallerne, der som oftest var faldne fra hinanden. De tomme skaller tilhørte de samme arter, der fandtes levende, med undtagelse af Macoma calcarea, Pecten septemradiatus og Turritella terebra. Disse subfossile arter var forholdsvis sjeldne. Af smaa og mikroskopiske dyr indeholder mudderet en stor mængde. En halv bøtte mudder fra 8—10 meters dyb siltes først gjennem sigtedug af 1 millimeters maskevidde for at fjerne alle grovere partikler, derpaa gjennem sigtedug af 0.5 millimeters maskevidde. Det residuum, der blev liggende paa den fineste sigtedug, udgjorde efter et løseligt skjøn 150 à 200 cm.? Heri fandtes en hel mængde levende Nematoder, endel Ostracoder, Gasteropoder, Annelider, Insektlarver og Thalamophorer. 2. Mudderbunden mellem Haa- og Graaøen. (ca. 100 meters dyb). I den nævnte dybde findes et særdeles blodt, graat slam, der indeholder en hel del forraadnede vegetabilske substanser, DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. - 69 saasom Fucus, Zostera, trestykker, bark og lov, der er drevet ud fra grundt vand, af og til mindre stene, grus og sand samt i regelen en stor maengde lerror af Annellider. Bundtemperaturen fandtes i juli maaned at vare 7” C., medens temperaturen i overfladen var 20*. Dyrelivet er særdeles ensartet. De almindeligste arter er: Stichopus tremulus, | Laetmonice filicornis, Ascidia obliqua, Maldane biceps, Bolocera longicornis, | Pecten septemradiatus, Pandalus borealis, » abyssorum. Clymene sp., Mere enkeltvis fandtes følgende arter: Astropecten andromeda, | Crangon Allmanni, Archaster sp., | Ponthophilus norvegicus, Mesothuria interstitialis, | Hippolyte securifrons, Ophioglypha albida, | 2 polaris, Saxicava pholadis, Nemertes sp., Scaphander puncto-stratius, — Philine sp. Desuden fandtes enkelte exemplarer af Molluscer af 4—14 mms. længde, forskjellige fra de ovennævnte arter samt et par tomme skal af Cyprina og Pectinaria. De talrige ror af Annei- lider havde en tykkelse af fra 1—12 millimeter. De fineste rør var ofte beboede, medens de grovere, af en kaliber af mindst 3 millimeter meget sjelden husede Annellider. Af den groveste kaliber fandtes blot et par brudstykker. En enkelt gang bemærkedes smaa Crustace-larver og Nema- toder i mudderet, der altid indeholdt en stor mængde Thala- 4mophorer. Af fiske forekom folgende arter: Gadus argenteus, | Drepanopsetia platessoides, Merluccius vulgaris, | Pleuronectes cynoglossus, Motella sp. | m. fl. 10 HANS KLER. Som prove paa, hvad trawlen kunde fange, anfores her resultatet af 2 trek den 29. juni: Stichopus tremulus . ....... 24 exemplarer. Bolocera longicornis ....... 8 å Laetmonice filicornis . . . . . . . 3 s "SI O1 ONT SE 3 3 NMoaldane bec ps ME 2 » Ghinenessp ed SAA S OS å Pecten septemradiatus. . . . . . . 11 i » abyssorum . .... M NOTI » Scaphander puncto-striatus . . . . 7 å Crangon Allmanni........ 3 5 Pontophilus norvegicus . . . . . . 2 Hippolyte securifrons . ...... 4 < s OLG S: o re Tee ae 1 d Pandalus borealis ........ 43 " Gadus argenteus, 11.5 cm. 1 B Merluccius vulgaris. . . . . . 1 » Drepanopsetta platessoides . S4 VG E Plewronectes cynoglossus, (10. 530 cm.) 4 " Holothurierne var for en stor del befængte med parasitiske Molluseer i tarmkanalen. Ved et træk indeholdt af 24 Stichopus tremulus de 11 parasiter. En Holothurie indeholdt mange, de fleste blot en eller nogle faa parasiter. Ved et andet træk inde- holdt nogle Holothurier en, mange 6—8, en 20 parasiter i for- skjellige udviklingstrin. Hver 4 Holothurie havde parasiter, i gjennemsnit kom 3—4 parasiter paa hver af disse. Holothuriernes tarmindhold var mørkt graat mudder. 3. Mudderbunden mellem Drøbak og Hvidsten. Dybde,: ca. 200 meter. Paa denne lokalitet lykkedes blot 2 træk, som her hensigts- mæssigt anføres i sin helhed. DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. 71 19. Juni. Trek med trawl paa ca. 200 meters dyb ved Hvidsten. Uhyre portion mudder af brunlig kulor, hvori mange ror af Annellider, forraadnende tangrester, slagger og smaasten, de sidste tildels med fastsiddende smaa Molluscer og Ascidier. Pandalus borealis ........ 25 exemplarer. Bolocera longicornis . . . . . . Dies ^ Stichopus tremulus . . . + . . . . 40 å Pecten septemradiatus. . . . . .. 4 3 Sim obhgua. +22 14 j one SO do mini iiis heu ie mange , Desuden fandtes nogle tomme skal af Oyprina islandica og Scaphander punclo-striatus. Holothurierne var meget mindre end de paa 100 meter levende. Blot 5 eller 6 var be- fægte med parasitiske Molluscer. En Holothurie havde blot en, nogle 4 parasiter. 15. September. Træk med skrabe mellem Drøbak og Hvid- sten. Dybde: ca. 200 meter. Omkring nettets nederste del var syet en finmasket pose for at hindre det lose mudder fra at sile ud under optrækningen. Nenend obesa ss "exemplar Portlandia lucida ....... nogle exemplarer. AUTOS TSU 5 mange å Sazicava pholadis . . . . . Mex x Pecten septemradiatus . . . . . . enkelte a Nepthys ciliata. . . .. Melia nogle S Trophonia plumosa. ...... Terebellides strömü . . . . . . . E 5 Wozenella ep Cc SE » = MACE SP u. e. ore ee å Phascalosoma Sp... . ox > RO DS IS typen de 1 s VATU SOMOS V. ET ree nogle " 72 HANS KIER. 4. Sand- og fjeldbund med Laminarier (mellem Storskjær og Vestlandet?). Langs Vestlandet strekker sig en temmelig betydelig sand- afleiring bestaaende af fin mursand, hvori der paa et par steder er gravet meget dybt ind. Sandet indskibes 1 lægtere. I disse sandtag findes ıalmindelighed ingen subfossiler, dog er der i et af sandtagene i en hoide af ca. 6 meter over havspeilet et svagt fossilførende lag af grov sand og grus. Langs stranden ender sandafleiringerne 1 en høide af ca. 4 meter over havfladen 1 en næsten lodret styrtning. Lige under græstorven, der hænger ud over den øvre rand af denne styrtning, strækker der sig et stærkt fossilførende lag af ca. 30 cm.s mægtighed. De vigtigste subfossiler er her Cyprina islandica, Cardium edule, Mya truncata. Styrtningen ender nedentil i en lav strand, dannet af rulle- stene, der i almindelighed varierer fra et menneskehoveds til en knytnæves størrelse. Her findes enkeltvis tomme skal af de ovennævnte Mollusker. Længre ude, hvor bølgerne slaar over stranden, sidder en mængde Gasteropoder og Balaner (Littorina littorea og Ba- lanus porchatus) paa stenene. Af Gasteropoderne er det for det meste blot udvoxede exemplarer, der ved lavvande sidder over vandspeilet. Langs stranden svømmer talrige individer af Palaemon fabricii. Paa stene ude i vandet sees en mængde exemplarer af Littorina littorea 1 alle størrelser. I almindelig- hed er de mere eller mindre graaagtige, blot enkelte har antaget en lysegul kulør, der er almindelig hos den forholdsvis sjeldne L. obtusa. Enkelte stene er aldeles bedækket af Balanus por- chatus eller af Mytilus edulis. "lager man og vender en af de større stene, vil man i regelen se et mylder af smaa Isopo- ! Vestlandet er den gjængse betegnelse for Kristianiafjordens vestre bred, DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. 73 der (lara marina) og Amphipode-unger (Gammarus locusta), der hurtigt kryber afsted i alle retninger. Enkelte udvoxne Amphipoder (G. locusta) følger ogsaa med stenene op över vandfladen. Lidt længre ude, paa ca. Y2 meters dyb begynder blære- tangen, der voxer 1 tætte tuer, kun af og til afbrudt af aabne partier med fin graa sand, hvor de eiendommelige forhøininger, der skyldes Arenicola piscatorum, af og til sees. Paa sanden sees ogsaa undertiden et enkelt større exemplar af Asterias rubens. | Lige ud for de omtalte sandtag arbeider en muddermaskine paa ganske grundt vand. I den fine sand, der faaes op af muddermaskinen forekommer blot enkeltvis større, afrundede stene samt tomme skal af Mya urenaria og Cyprina islan- dica i forskjellige størrelser, ligeledes af og til store eller mid- delstore exemplarer af Nereis virens. Selve muddermaskinen er under vandfladen tæt overgroet af blaaskjæl (Mytilus edulis) i alle størrelser saaledes at de mindste, et par millimeter store, sidder øverst, derefter følger større og større exemplarer og nederst kommer de største, der dog ikke er aldeles udvoxne. Paa stene paa ganske grundt vand, 1 ca. 1/2 meters dybde, forekommer ogsaa af og til halvstore og smaa exemplarer af Mytilus edulis (ca. 0.2—4°™), Yngel saaes hele sommeren i mængdevis paa blæretang lige under havfladen, ligeledes en mængde smaa alger og Ser- tularier (S. pumila), hvilke ogsaa fandtes i stort antal paa Chorda filum, der paa et enkelt sted voxer sammen med Zostera . marina paa ca. 2 meters dyb. Paa Zostera levede Rissostomia octogona og Rissoa albella 1 forskjellige udviklingstrin. Paa ca. 4 meters dyb begynder Laminarierne. Blot L. sachharina voxer her og ofte i kjæmpemæssige exemplarer, som oftest tæt overgroet med mængder af Membranipora og Spirorbis samt enkeltvis af Balanus balanoides og Planorbu- lina lobatula. 74 HANS KIÆR. En mængde ganske smaa individer af Asterias rubens saaes hele sommeren paa Laminarierne. Fra slutningen af juni til begyndelsen af august havde hovedmassen en radius af 1—1.5 millimeter og vexten syntes saaledes i dette tidsrum at have været umerkelig Den 7. august noteredes følgende stør- relser, beregnet efter individernes radius, hver prik betegner et exemplar. PS AE EE ee 16 Gen a I | FE IT DRAN RUDI 18 DE 8.5 19 3 RER: 90 SÅ | 95 ipe Tem 2000] 10 | 99 4.5 . TE Rd 5 1 30 5.5 ja | Dee: | 44 . | 6.5. 155 PORTO Den 2. september fandtes individer af folgende storrelse: Radius: ; Radius: mm mm 1 — nogle exemplarer 6 — mange exemplarer 2 — uhyre mængde 7 — male » Sera » » == » » Á — » » 9 — » » D — » » 10 — et exemplar Da disse optegnelser er gjort efter individer, som fandtes nogenlunde paa samme sted, maa man være berettiget til at slutte, at Asterias-yngelen paa dette sted i tidsrummet fra den 7. august til den 2. september var voxet fra 1 å 1.5 muilli- meter til 2—5 millimeter. DYRELIVET I DRØBAKSUND. 75 Yngletiden for Asterias rubens synes i Kristiamafjorden at være slutten af april eller begyndelsen af mai. lalfald ynglede nogle exemplarer i akvarierne paa den biologiske station i slut- ningen af april. Havbunden mellem Storskjær og Vestlandet kan karakteri- seres som en jevn og ensartet sandbund, der fra Vestlandets flade rullestenskyst langsomt synker ned til en dybde af 12—14 meter, for derpaa ligesaa langsomt at have sig hist og her af- brudt af efterhaanden mer og mer udbredte partier af nedrasede klippestykker, indtil Storskjærs glat afskurede granitfjeld lidt efter lidt befries fra den løse sand og tilsidst kommer tilsyne over havfladen som en langstrakt afrundet holme. Ress pe stykker a 5 Ü £^ Sand 4 slfrende A pes 3h Futleskene | 7 Fig. 3. Profil af sundet mellem Storskjær og Vestlandet. Det mikroskopiske dyreliv, der fandtes ved hjælp af en til skraben fastbundet planktonhov, syntes paa hele strækningen mellem Storskjær og Vestlandet at være temmelig ensartet, og bestod af smaa Annellider, Turbellarier, Gasteropoder, Crusta- ceer, spec. Ostracoder, Acariner, Insektlarver, Nematoder, Thalamophorer, spec. Planorbulina lobatula. I en bugt med fint sand, der ved ebbe næsten ligger tør, ved nordpynten af Storskjær, saaes talrige snevre huller i san- den, af 2—4 millimeters diameter. I hvert hul fandtes 1 en dybde af 5—15°% 1 regelen et 3—10™ langt exemplar af Nereis 76 HANS KIÆR. virens. I sandet saaes ogsaa sandormens tuer og eiendomme- lige dobbeltaabninger, som skyldes Mya arenaria, dog blot enkeltvis. Nogle smaa exemplarer af Arenicola piscatorwm og Mya arenaria fandtes, begge arter 1 ca. 30 centimeters dybde. Som exempel paa, hvad skraben kunde bringe op, kan pas- sende anføres folgende typiske trek: 10. juli. 3 trek med en let skrabe fra 3—3 meter langs Vestlandet. En mængde Laminarier, noget Zostera samt en hel del forraadnede plantedele, smaasten, grus og sand. La- minarierne var fastheftede til tomme skal af Mytilus modiolus og Cyprina islandica. Mytilus modiolus, levende . . . . - 3 exemplarer à i tomme skal . . . 8 enkelte, 2 dobbelte Cyprina islandica, , De NEL dr 9 E Saxicava pholadis, levende — . . . 4 exemplarer Anomia ephhippium, 1—5™, levende 12 å Aporrhais pes pelecami, døde . . : 3 3 Nassa reticulata sia Mec. UE 3 Boreochiuonmumen OC m S s Ld 5 à MARMOREUSS NE ae 5 » Balanus porchatus, levende . . 4 På a " dode 4 5 Ophioglypha albida . WR PS D = Strong. droebachiensis, store. . . . 2 a s D cay 2am S) à Asterias rubens, 17 og 28e" . . . 2 E enkelte af 2°™’s størrelse mange smaa, 3™™, paa Laminarier Lepidonotus squamosus . . . . . . 1 » Noreesunelauseo nn. EE 6 ^ Alcyonium digitatum, smaa . . . . 4 5 5 Å middelstore . 1 = JEWIOXPTIS CIS Ce ee. D d DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. YE Desuden fandtes enkelte smaa exemplarer af Mollusker og Annellider, hørende til 2 eller 3 arter, forskjellige fra de foran- navnte. 14. juli. 3 trek med skrabe fra 12—10 meter, sandbund. Cyprina, islandica, levende . . . . . 1 exemplar 5 i "ucc castoübtemmenskal ISO tous ee a a eG a N Saxicava pholadis, 2—3°™, levende . 7 exemplarer ^ arctica = å S 4 4 Anomia epphippium, 1—2°™, levende 30 3 Cultellus pellucidus . . . . . . . . et tomt skal (dobbelt) Gibbula cineraria, levende . . . . . 7 exemplarer Balanus porchatus , 9I eod Rea) x Nassa reticulata SNUL EA MAL Lats 2 " Buccinum undatum , ..... 3 s Boreochiton ruber ats Washed tal E Tuc 12 5 x MOLMLOTCUS ss ws 8 5 EQUIS CIONES fer a nee 3 5 Lepidonolus squamosus . . . . . . 3 5 NØS (WATT a a à AT. 8 5 Sugrala. TREO a à ie due 7 å Corella paralellogramma . . . . . . 3 5 Aleyonium digitatum ....... 2 - Strongylocentrotus droebachiensis, an slevendes .. . Men. 0 21 5 VISJEKLAS VUOCUS, Diem . o. QU v4. 1 x å " Gill. PME o OR 4 : y » Car rg der mange paa Laminarier, hvorpaa ogsaa saaes en mængde Spirorbis og Membranipora. Skallerne af Mytilus og Cyprina var ofte overgroede af ror af Pomatocerus triqueter. Af denne Annellide fandtes mange exemplarer. 78 HANS KLER. Hvor bunden bestaar af sand, indeholder den næsten over- alt fra en dybde af 4 meter en stor maengde tomme skaller hovedsagelig af Cyprina islandica, men ogsaa delvis af andre Mollusker, saasom Mytilus modiolus og edulis samt Mya truncata. Skallerne af Cyprina og Mya har som oftest et meget gammelt præg. Disse Mollusk-skaller er af stor betyd- ning for dyrelivet, thi en mængde dyr findes enten i eller paa skallerne eller paa de Laminarier og andre alger, der ofte voxer paa skallerne. I hvert Cyprina-skal fandtes i regelen flere, undertiden 4—5 skaller af Saxicava pholadis og arctica 1 for- skjellige størrelser samt nogle exemplarer af Nereis pelagica. Cyprina-skallerne var ofte aldeles overgroede med Serpula-rør, saa blot en ganske liden aabning var tilbage, meget mindre end Saaicavaerne, der altid fandtes levende inde 1 de saaledes vel tllukkede Cyprina-skal. Cyprina-skallerne var desuden ogsaa i regelen halvt fyldt med mudder. I og paa Cyprina-skal fandtes desuden følgende dyrearter: Corella paralellogranuna, Gibbula cineraria, Styela rustica, Balanus porchatus, Boreochiton ruber, Anomia ephhippium, å marmoreus, Alcyonium dágitatwm, Lepidopleurus cinereus, Pomatocerus triqueter, Tectura virginea, Lepidonotus squamosus, Lepeta caeca, Ophiopholis aculeata. Meget almindelig forekommende var folgende arter. Saxicava pholadis, | Doreochiton marmoreus, Å arctica, Å ruber, Balanus porchatus, | Nereis pelagica, Styela rustica, Anomia ephhippium, Tectura virginea, | Strong. droebachiensis, Lepeta calca, Asterias rubens, Gibbula cineraria, Lepidonotus squamosus. Pomatocerus triqueter, DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. 79 Mindre talrige var: Mytilus edulis, Nassa reticulata, modiolus, Lepidoplewrus cinereus, Aporrhais pes pelecani, Corella paralellogramma, Buccinum undatum, Ciona intestinalis, Alcyonium digitatum, Pagurus sp. Som sjeldne kan folgende former nævnes: Ophioglypha albida, | Laetmonice filicornis, Ophiopholis aculeata, | Littorina liltorea, Cyprina islandica, Trochus sp. 5. Fjeldbund med uddede koraller og alger. (Drøbaksgrunden samt fjeldet nord for den biologiske station). Drebaksgrunden er en næsten kredsrund undersøisk fjeld- knaus, der har sin basis paa den høideryg, der lidt nordenfor Drøbak strækker sig tvers over Kristianiafjorden. Denne hoide- ryg, der i seilløbet ligger omtrent 40 meter under havspeilet, begrændses mod nord og syd af dyb paa ca. 100 meter. Dro- baksgrunden adskilles fra fastlandet ved en 20—30 meter dyb rende, dens top ligger omtrent 5 meter under havspeilet. De regelmæssige strømninger 1 Kristianiafjorden, der er en følge af flod og ebbe, kan være meget voldsomme og viser sig især paa Drøbaksgrunden, hvor vandet undertiden fosser afsted som stryg i en bred elv og næsten umuliggjor skrabning. Disse strømninger, der bringer friskt havvand med et rigt pelagisk dyre- og planteliv ind i fjorden, er af stor betydning for dyrs og planters trivsel. Paa Drøbaksgrunden findes en mængde rød- og brunalger, specielt Laminaria saccharina, samt et rigt dyreliv. Afrundede stene og skal af Mollusker, der faaes op med skraben, er olte aldeles overgroede med dyr og planter. Paa enkelte steder af $ grunden findes subfossile rester af en koral, Oculina prolifera, saaledes paa den nordvestlige skraaning 1 en dybde af 7—25 meter, samt paa den sydlige skraaning paa 20—40 meters dyb. 80 HANS KLÆR. Undertiden kan man faa op koralstykker paa ca. 30% 'længde, men som regel er koralstokkene smuldret op 1 mindre stykker fra 1 til 5”centimers lengde. Resterne af denne koral er yndede opholdssteder for en stor maengde dyr, der dels er fastvoxede paa korallens grene, dels lever mellem eller inde i de hule grene. ZZ ronderipynt P 2 Fig. 4 Dybdekart over Drøbaksgrunden. De almindeligste dyreformer paa Drobaksgrunden er folgende: Alcyonium digitatum, | Strong. droebachiensis, Ophiopholis aculeata, | Asterias rubens, + Saæicava pholadis, | Nereis pelagica. M arctica, |. Crania anomala, DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. 81 Anomia ephhippium, Tubularia larynx, Styela rustica, Halecium halecinum, Lepidopleurus cinereus, Plumularia pinnata, Balanus balanoides, Pomatocerus triqueter, » porchatus, Membranipora sp., Boreochiton ruber, Spirorbis sp. 5 marmoreus, Mere sparsomt optrædende var følgende arter: Leodice norvegica, Evdendrium rameum, Lepidonolus squamosus, Campanularia verticillata, Mytilus edulis, Ascidia conchilega, » modiolus, Ciona intestinalis, » phaseolinus (?), Corella paralellogramma, Astarte sulcata, Ophiotrix fragilis. Buccinum undatum, Stichaster roseus, Der fandtes ogsaa enkelte smaa Aktinier, Nemertiner, ganske smaa Annellider, Crustaceer, Nematoder, Acariner, Thalamophorer samt et enkelt exemplar af Dendronotus arbo- rescens, af Lima Loscombii og al Peclen tigrinus. Inde i de hule koralstokke levede Saxicava pholadis og arctica, Mytilus phaseolinus (?), Nereis pelagica og enkelte Nemertiner. Mellem koralgrenene forekom Ophiopholis aculeata i talrig mængde. Det var ofte vanskeligt at faa disse dyrearter frem i uskadt stand, da korallerne maatte klippes itu stykke for stykke. Korallerne var undertiden fuldstændig overgroede med rør af Pomatocerus triqueter, saa det ved første oiekast var vanske- lig at se, hvilken gjenstand alle disse rør var fæstede til. Asterias rubens forekom i alle størrelser fra 3 millimeter til 40 centimeter. Den 18de august havde hovedmassen en længde af 3—6 millimeter. Af de talrige skrabninger skal anføres følgende typiske træk: Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII. I. 6 82 HANS KIÆR. 17. august. Fra 15—5 meter paa den nordvestlige skraaning. 2 stykker koraller, hvert paa 30 centimeters længde og 10 centi- meter i gjennemsnit. Nereis pelagica . . . . . . . . 10 exemplarer Leodice norvegica . . . . . . . 3 : Saxicava pholadis 7 3 2 arctica ME CEDE " Mytilus phaseolinus (9) . . . . 2. Å Lepidonotus squamosus 8 ^ Strong. droebachiensis . . . . . 15 5 Asterias rubens, 2—12™.... 6 ^ Tubularia larynæ . . . . . . - nogle „ Plumularia pinnata . . . ... 2 å Campanularia verticillata . . . 2 å Halecium halecinum . . . . . . 5 5 Aimee © NON ST ae å ^ Ophiopholis aculeata . . . . . mange „ 17. august. 30—20 meter paa den nordvestlige skraaning. Uhyre mængde smaa løse stykker af koraller. Ophiopholis aculeata . . . . . 20 exemplarer Nereis pelagica .. . PE N Boreochiton ruber |. . . . . . 10 in WS marmoreus . . . . 7 å Lepidopleurus cinereus . . . . 6 4 Anomia ephhippium . . . . . 6 d Balanus balanoides . . . . . . 30 Alcyonium digitatum ..... 4 5 Plumularia pinnata : . . . . nogle „ Tubularia larynæ . Eudendrium rameum . — Halecium halecinum Gibbula cineraria . DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. 83 Lepeta caeca . : . . . . . . . nogle exemplarer Astarte sulcata : . . . . . .. et exemplar. Desuden en mængde Serpula A triqueter ), Bryozoer, Spirorbis, Nematoder, enkelte Nemertiner og Thala- mophorer. Paa Hydroiderne var der et rigt liv af smaa Cru- staceer, Nematoder og Infusorier. Mellem den biologiske station og Drobaksgrunden og ad- skilt fra den sidste ved en 30—40. meter dyb rende synker grunden langsomt udover til en dybde af ca. 20 meter. Her findes det samme dyreliv som paa Drobaksgrunden med und- tagelse af de dyreformer, der specielt er afhængige af koral- lerne. Inde ved land er der paa flere steder braadybt, idet fjeldet undertiden synker lodret ned til en dybde af 6 meter. I blæretangen, der som et uafbrudt bælte gror langs fjeldet, lever umaadelige mængder af Calliopus rathkii, Gammarus hyale og nilsonii, Idothea granulosa, andre Idothea-arter samt Copepoder. I begyndelsen af september fandtes de forskjellige Idothea-arter blot som unger. Paa blæretangen saaes desuden en meengde forskjellige fastsiddende dyrearter, saasom Spirorbis, Membranipora, Balanus balanoides, Mytilus edulis, Cam- panularia flecuosa, Clava squamata, Sertularia pumila, samt Spongier. Nogle expl. af Asterias rubens og S. droeba- chiensis fandtes af og til. I planktonhoven, der droges gjennem tangen fra 5—4 meters dyb, saaes enkelte smaa Crustaceer, specielt Ostracoder, An- guillula sp. og Acariner. Langs fjeldet voxer i talrig mangde Balanus balanoides tildels indtil 1 fod over tanggrændsen og paa afstand sees disse dyrs skaller som et uafbrudt bælte med hvide pletter mod fjel- dets mørke baggrund. Søger man at komme til klarhed over de biologiske forhold 1 Kristianiafjorden, maa man først og fremst betænke, at denne fjord oprindelig har havt en langt større dybde end nu. De for- 84 HANS KIÆR. andrede dybdeforhold synes at have veeret meget uheldige for mange dyrearter. Som bekjendt er den langs vor kyst levende koral Oculina prolifera, omtrent uddød ved Drøbak. Enkelte Thalamophorer synes ogsaa at være uddøde. Andre dyrefor- mer forekommer væsentlig blot som subfossile, saaledes Cyprina islandica og Macoma calcarea. Da disse sidste lever paa grundt vand, kan det formodentlig ikke være forandrede dybde- forhold, men andre omstændigheder, der holder paa at bevirke deres uddeen. Oyprina islandica findes subfossil dels i ringe dybde paa havbunden, dels paa land indtil en høide af 150 meter over havet. I Kristianiafjorden findes for tiden meget sjelden fuldvoxne exemplarer, derimod oftere smaa og middel- store individer. | Paa den anden side synes de omtalte dyrs uddeen at have bidraget til andre dyrs udbredelse. Thi netop tomme skaller af Mollusker og uddøde koralstokke er yndede tilholdssteder for mange dyr, ja endel dyrearter synes paa enkelte steder at være fuldstændig afhængige af de subfossile dyrelevningers forekomst. Undersøger man nemlig dyrelivet paa sandbunden ved Storskjær, vil man finde en hel del dyrearter, der ikke er skikkede til at leve paa løs bund, men udelukkende knyttede til de tomme Mollusk-skallers forekomst. Det samme er delvis tilfældet med mudderbunden 1 Sandspollen. I saadanne indelukkede poller er stromningerne meget svage. Som folge deraf faar de talnge fine Jordpartikler, der svæver om i vandet, tid til at bundfældes. Bunden i saadanne poller be- staar derfor af et blødt slik, der eftersom det afleires, dækker de gjenstande, der befinder sig paa bunden. Alle bunddyr be- finder sig i en stadig kamp for ikke at kvæles af mudderet. Eftersom afleiringerne tiltager i mægtighed, hæves det niveau, hvorpaa dyrene lever. Man vil derfor paa dette løse mudder kun finde faa dyrelevninger sammen med de levende dyr. Naar man alligevel faar adskillige tomme Mollusk-skaller op med skraben, er dette et bevis paa, at denne trænger dybt ned i mudderet. DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND. 85 I stromhaarde fjorde vil der ialfald paa grundt vand ikke kunne foregaa nogen afleiring, idet de jordpartikler, der fores af- sted med strommen 1 alle vandlag, ikke faar tid til at afleires undtagen hvor gjenstande paa havbunden formaar at holde slam- met tilbage. Saaledes vil man ofte kunne finde Mollusk-skaller mer eller mindre fyldte med et fint mudder af samme konsistens som 1 indelukkede poller. Paa grund af den stride strom vil der paa sandbund med forholdsvis grundt vand 1 tidernes lob ophobe sig større eller mindre masser af skaller af Mollusker, eftersom disse der. Desuden kan ogsaa endel af de mængder af skaller, man finder, være udskyllede af subfossilførende gruslag paa land. Ser man nemlig paa profilen gjennem den af mig undersøgte lokalitet ved Storskjær (se nærmere fig. 5 med forklaring), ligger det nær at tro, at der nedenfor første terrasse (ved b) paa fast- landet maa være fjernet en betydelig strækning af gruslagene langs fastlandets kyst (partiet nedenfor terrassen ved b paa pro- filet. Da nemlig det fossilførende lag b indeholder en stor mængde af samme sort subfossiler, som findes paa 6— 12 meters dyb udenfor stranden, medens selve stranden er saagodtsom blottet for saadanne og er en typisk rullestensstrand, synes der at være rimelighed for, at al sand, grus og subiossile dyrelev- ninger, der engang har udgjort hovedmassen af den omtalte ter- rasses fortsættelse, maa være (af is eller havet selv) bragt ud paa dybet, medens de : eller under sand- og grusmassen lig- gende stene er blevet igjen og nu danner landets rullestenskyst. Sammenligner man de 5 af mig undersøgte lokaliteter, vil man finde, at der, omend disse delvis kan have meget tilfælles 1 dyrelivets sammensætning, dog inden hver af dem raader saa mange forskjelligartede forhold, at hver enkelt af dem maa be- tragtes som et eget eiendommeligt omraade, der 1 biologisk hen- seende skarpt maa adskilles fra ethvert af de øvrige. Det dyre- liv, der hersker paa ethvert af disse omraader maa med god grund kunne kaldes et fra de øvrige forskjelligartet ko-operativt samfund, 86 HANS KLER. Denne forskjel i biologisk henseende er mest iginefaldende mellem de lokaliteter, hvor forskjellen i dybde er størst. Man har saaledes paa den ene side mudderbunden paa 100 og 200 meters dyb og paa den anden side de omraader, hvor dybden er mindre end 20 meter. Men ogsaa inden enhver af de en- kelte lokaliteter hersker der en dyb og gjennemgribende forskjel, der skyldes de naturlige forhold, som er raadende paa hvert enkelt sted. Hvis man begynder med det grunde vand, vil man allerede fra den littorale region af se, hvilken indflydelse bundforholdene har paa dyre- og plantelivet. En sandet strand og en rulle- stenskyst er stadig udsat før at overskylles af bølgerne, der sæt- ter sanden og stenene i bevægelse og hindrer dyr og planter 1 at faa fodfæste. Derfor er der altid langs saadanne let bevæge- lige kyster et bælte, hvor saagodtsom ingen alger kan gro og hvor dyrelivet er svagt udviklet. Og alligevel træffer man paa sanden ingen af de dyr, der kan trives paa rullestenene, med undtagelse af drivende og fritsvømmende dyr, som hører hjemme paa de langgrunde, solvarme strande uanseet bundens beskaf- fenhed. Den faste klippekyst er derimod langs vandlinien bevoxet med et sammenhængende bælte med Fucus, hvor et rigt dyreliv kan trives. At hele dette intense dyreliv hører hjemme paa Fucusen, viser sig bedst derved, at de dyrearter, der findes i denne, naar den er dækket af sjøen, ogsaa sees i den, naar den ved ebbe er høit over vandspeilet. Lidt nedenfor ebbegrændsen er det løse bundmateriale ikke saa udsat som i den littorale region for at sættes i bevægelse af bølgerne og strømningerne. Derfor begynder vegetationen først paa 0.5—1 meters dyb paa los bund. Paa sandbund stræk- ker Zosteraen sig som bølgende agre ud mod dybet, undertiden afbrudt af en enkelt Fucus fæstet til en sten. Paa rullestens- bunden voxer Fucus tildels blandet med Zostera og Chorda | filum. Den rene fjeldbund er lige fra havspeilet af dækket af DYRELIVET I DROBAKSUND, 87 F'ucus, der paa 2—4 meters dyb afloses at Laminarie-bæltet, dette igjen af rødalgerne. Vegetationen optræder altid i bugnende overflødighed, bare den kan faa fæste. Dette rige plantedække, der saaledes er karakteristisk for det grunde vand, har, som dr. PETERSEN fremhæver, en overordentlig stor betydning derved, at det saa at sige multiplicerer havbunden og giver plads og næring for et yderst rigt dyreliv, for størstedelen bestaaende af smaa og delvis mikroskopiske former. Lidt større dyreformer findes i regelen ikke paa tangen, da de paa grund af sin tyngde træk- ker tangen ned mod bunden. Det mindste, specielt det mikro- skopiske dyreliv er rimeligvis det samme paa Zostera som paa Fucus. Vi finder saaledes et mylder af Infusorier, smaa Cru- staceer, Mytilus-yngel samt flere Rissoa-arter paa alslags vegeta- tion lige 1 havspeilet noget udenfor den nedre littorale grændse. Derimod er den store mængde af Hydroider, Gammarider og Spongier eiendommetig for Fucus. Helt ned til vegetationens nedre grændse er saavel Fucus som især Laminarierne og del- vis rødalgerne og Zosteraen bevoxet med en stor mængde smaa dyrearter som Hydroider, Serpulaer, Spirorbis, Bryozoer og Thalamophorer samt ogsaa tilholdssted for Nemertiner, smaa Annellider, Crustaceer og andre dyr samt yngel, specielt af Asterias, Strongylocentrotus, Annellider etc. Indtil en dybde af ca. 7 meter er mudderbunden bevoxet med et tæt bælte af Zostera, medens den udenfor denne dybde danner en svagt hældende vegetationsløs stette med forholdsvis fattigt dyreliv. Sandbunden samt især den faste fjeldbund ud- mærker sig ved et rigt planteliv, der 1 ho1 grad bidrager til at udvikle det bugnende dyreliv i det smaa, som ovenfor er skildret. Paa mudderbunden paa 4—12 meters dyb (i Sandspollen) er Coelenteraterne paafaldende daarligt repræsenteret, idet blot en ganske enkelt Alcyonium!, endel Virgularier samt nogle ' Her sigtes til de enkelte exemplarer, ikke til arter, 35 HANS KIÆR. smaa Hydroider fandtes paa Mollusk-skaller. Det er ogsaa ganske rimeligt, at disse og andre fastsiddende dyr ikke kan trives i mudderbundens grumsede vand, men elsker de’ friske planktonrige strømme ude i fjorden. Desuden er der for faa gjenstande paa mudderbunden at voxe paa, idet de stene og Mollusk-skaller, der findes, oftest er mer eller mindre dækket af mudder. Ude paa sandbunden paa samme dyb (ved Storskjær) er derimod Coelenteraterne noget rigere tilstede, om de ogsaa her savner gunstige voxesteder, Den faste fjeldbund er Coe- lenteraternes hjem. Her udfolder de sig 1 sin fulde yppighed og danner hele undersøiske skove, der delvis dækker fjeld- siderne og danner buskadser paa stene og Mollusk-skaller. Drøbaksgrundens faste fjeld er derfor ved sin bugnende over- flødighed af Hydroider og Alkyomier vidt forskjellig fra den lose bund. Ophiuroiderne trives derimod udmærket baade paa mud- derbund og paa fjeldbund, derimod er de ikke paa langt nær saa talrige paa sandbunden. Slegten Ophioglypha er eneraadende paa mudderbunden, medens slægten Ophiopholis blot findes paa fjeldbund og del- vis ogsaa 1 sandbundens Mollusk-skaller. Echinoiderne forekommer nogenlunde talrigt overalt;paa 4—12 meters dyb. Paa mudderbunden er Amphidetus tal- rigst, medens Strongyglocentrotus er den eneste slægt paa andenslags bund. Asterias rubens findes overalt, derimod mangler Holothurierne aldeles. De ovrige dyregrupper findes omtrent i samme procentvise mængde overalt paa grundt vand. Dog er der i den inde- lukkede Sandspol andre arter end ude i den aabne fjord. Saaledes lever især Nephtys, Abra, Aporrhais, Corbula i mudderet, medens Saxicawa, Balanus, Styela, Boreochiton, Nereis og andre slægter er talrig i den aabne fjord paa 4—12 meters dyb. DYRELIVET I DRØBAKSUND. 89 Paa storre dyb bliver dyrelivet aldeles anderledes. Mud- derbunden paa 100—200 meters dyb er Holothuriernes og de store Aktiniers hjem. Forevrigt er flyndrer og ræger især al- mindelige paa 100 meter dybet, medens forskjellige Vermes- arter blot findes naa 200 meters dyb. Anm. Naar der i de foregaaende fortegnelser over dyrearter ikke spe- cielt er nævnt, at en dyreart er fundet 1 død tilstand, menes der, at den er fundet levende. Figurforklaring. PII Fig. 1. Strandparti fra Sandspollen. » 2. Sandspollen. Aalehaandvadet drages. BIS Fig. 3. Rullestenskyst. Vestlandet ved Drobak. » 4 Fjeld med Balaner og indhugget vandstan dsmærke, lidt norden- for den biologiske station. Trykt den 9de februar 1904. Bryological notes on a trip in Norway by H. N. Dixon and W. E. Nicholson. The mosses enumerated in the following list were collected during a short holiday in western Norway in the summer of 1900 between the 18 July, when we landed at Stavanger, and the 11* August, when we sailed for England from Bergen. From Stavanger we took the boat to Sand on the Sand fjord and followed the overland route to Odde on the Hardanger fjord through the beautiful Bratlandsdal and over the Horre pass. At Odde we rested for a few days and explored the neighbourhood, especially the valley leading to the Buar Brae and its terminal Moraine, leaving on the 24*^ July for Vik on the Eidfjord, whence we explored the sombre Simodal and the Maabødal up to the magnificent Voringfos. From Vik we travelled by way of Ulvik and Vossevangen to Gudvangen on the narrow Nærøfjord, whence we took the boat to Lærdalsøren at the head of the Sognefjord, and after spending two days there we proceeded to Maristuen on the Fillefjeld, where we stayed for ten days and which we found to be a very fair centre for mosses. As one leaves the 92 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. coast in western Norway the climate and especially the rain- fall becomes modified very rapidly; thus at the mouth of the Sognefjord there is an annual rainfall of about 80 inches, while on the Nærøfjord, 60 miles from the mouth, it is 31 inches, and at Lærdalsøren, 87 miles from the mouth, 16 inches only. We had hoped that Maristuen, which is only about 32 miles inland from Lærdalsøren, to some extent shared its climate, but since it rained more or less every day of our visit, we could not but think that we had met with an undue proportion of the rain- fall. To the small annual rainfall, however, was probably due the fact that we noticed so few mosses growing upon the tree trunks at Maristuen: practically none of the common species of Ulota or Orthotrichum were observed, while nearer the coast the trunks are often thickly clothed with these mosses. Although the genus Grimmia is generally more partial to siliceous rocks, we were very much struck by their extraordinary development on the dry limestone rocks near Lærdalsøren, where if we include Coscinodon, ten species were observed after a very eursory examination. On the moister parts of the same rocks Barbula icmadophila, ScHP. was very abundant and was frui- ting, though poorly, in places. It should be added. that the Sphagna of the district were not at all exhaustively studied. We are much indebted to Dr. Hagen, Herr Kaataas, Mm. REnAULD and Carbor and Dr. Best for assistance in the identi- fication of some of our specimens. Sphagnum teres Àxasr. Lower slopes of Suletind near Mari- stuen — a fuscous form with hardly a trace of green. S. acutifolium Euru. var. fuscum. Scar. Common about Maristuen, often growing with Rubus chamæmorus. S. Lindbergii ScHP. Common in very wet ground near Maristuen. Andreæa Rothii, W. & M. Var, grimsulana B. & S. Wet rocks on the Horre pass c. fr. Robust but scarcely so reddish BRYOLOGICAL NOTES ON A TRIP IN NORWAY. 95 as the var. often is. A. nivalis, Hook. Horre pass and Mari- stuen, common in alpine streams. Catharinea tenella, Rout. Near Odde and Maristuen; the c? plant and old fruit. It was much commoner near Maristuen than C. undulata. Polytrichum sexangulare, Kura. Common on the moun- taıns near Maristuen and often with fruit: fruit. small. P. commune var. perigomiale, Scar. Bratlandsdal and Slutemyr near Maristuen. — The pericheetial bracts and general habit of the variety well marked, but with the apical cell of the lamelle distinctly grooved and in the Slutemyr plant almost typical. Buxbaumia aphylla, L. Wood by the Laera, Maristuen, very sparingly. Ditrichum tenwifolium, Los. Bleja and the Nærodal. The Bleja plant fruiting in company with Dicranella secunda, Los. the Nærodal plant more robust, but sterile. Rhabdoweisia denticulata, Brin. Odde c. fr, a rather robust form. Cynodontium gracilescens, Scar. Maristuen, c. fr. Leaves sharply papillose; some of them rather obtusely pointed; the capsule pale, erect, striate on a straight seta. — C. torquescens, Live., and C. fallax Lame. both c. fr. These two species which are very closely allied to C. gracilescens were found very spar- ingly near Maristuen. Some doubts might be raised as to their value as species, but the specimens agree well with the deseription given by Limpricht. C. lascirete, (Dixon) GREBE, (C. polycarpum var. levifolium, HAGEN). Rocks in the valley below the Buar Brae, Odde c. fr. Dicranella secunda, Los. Bleja, c. fr., not very common. Dicranoweisia crispula, Los. Maabødal, Maristuen &c., c. fr.; very fine near Maristuen, often with the leaves markedly secund. 94 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. Campylopus atrovirens, DE Nor. Bratlandsdal, a very green form with the upper cells of the leaves rather shorter than usual. Dicranodontium longirostre, B. & S. Wet rocks by the Laatefos: a very tall robust form quite eight inches high. Dicranum fulvellum, Sm. Bleja c. fr., apparently rare near Maristuen. D. hyperboreum, C. M. Rocks by the Maristuen- fos and on the summit of the Saddel c. fr., the plant from the Saddel poor, the other much finer. Our specimens differ very markedly from D. fulvellum, Sm. in the more robust habit larger leaves ending in a rigid, highly glistening bristle point, and much larger stouter capsule, deeply furrowed and pachyder- matous. The calyptra also is large, inflated, and very glossy, and the spores which in D. fulvellum range from 15 to 20 u., reach the size of 30 u. in D. hyperboreum, averaging about 25 to 27 u. The British plants referred to Arctoa hyperborea by the authors of the Bry. Eur. and other writers all belong to D. fulvellum. The confusion between the two has probably arisen for the most part from the description of the latter species in the Bry. Eur. and elsewhere, as having smooth capsules, whereas they are in reality always or nearly always more or less striate or furrowed. D. elongatum, ScHLEicH. Maabedal c. fr., Maristuen c. fr. Common and fruiting freely on rocks by the Maristuen fos. Var. Sphagni (WanLEN.) an attenuated form with the upper cells of the leaves more elongate. D. fuscescens Turn. A form occurred on the Saddel with the cells more porous in the upper part of the leaf, which was almost smooth. D. Bergeri, BLAnp. Common in bogs, often sterile, but c. fr. at Slutemyr. Grimmia apocarpa var. alpicola H. & T. Wet rocks Maristuen c. fr., well marked. Var. gracilis W. & M. Fine & well marked near Odde; nerve rough at the back. @. conferta Fuwck. Sımodal, c. fr.: a small delicate form. G. funalis, BRYOLOGICAL NOTES ON A TRIP IN NORWAY. 95 ScHp.; with abundant fruit near Borgund, Lærdal. G. torquata, Hornsca.; Maristuen. not infrequent. G. decipiens, Los. Simo- dal, Maabedal &c, c. fr.; in smaller greyer more cushion-like tufts than @. elatior. G. elatior, B. & S. Maabødal & Lærdal c. fr. In large blackish spreading patches; very fine and abundant in the Maabodal. G. Doniana, SmiTH. Type, and var. sudetia Wits. Rocks about Maristuen, c. fr. G. anomala, Hz. Loose stone walls at Seljestad, Eide, Vossevangen, Vinje and Stalheim; also on rocks near the Buar Brae; widely distributed in the district which we first visited, with a few capsules at Seljestad. "The capsule is shortly cylindri- cal, smooth, irregularly wrinkled when dry; operculum with a long straight beak; peristome teeth bright orange-red, entire or slightly divided above, highly papillose in the upper three fourths; smoother below; spores - 010 to - 016 mm. Careful comparison of these capsules (the first discovered in Europe) with fruiting specimens of G. Philibertiana, E. G. Britton, Bull. Torr. Bot. Club, 18, 51, (1891) by European bryologists and by Mrs. Britton herself has established the identity of the two plants. G. Philiber- tiana must therefore be suppressed in favour of Hampe's name, published by Schimper (Syn; Ed. II) in 1876. G. ovata, Schwzc.: and var. cylindrica, B. & S. Rocks Sımodal, e. fr. Common. G. commutata, Hts. Rocks by the Jordalsvand, Odde, c. fr. poor. Not uncommon in the Leer- dal, but either sterile or with very poor fruit; a slender form of the 3 plant with attenuated stems and short leaves occurred near Husum. G. leucophea, Grev. Common in the Lærdal, fruit poor. G. elongata, Kautr. Rocks near the summits of the mountains round Maristuen; hair points of the leaves very variable and sometimes almost absent; a form occurred low down near the old bridge below Maristuen, growing in yellowish tufts and the leaves having a rather larger more elongate and clearer areolation. Dr. Hagen writes that he has the same form 96 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. from other localities in Norway, Telemarken (st.) and Knutsteteo (c. fr.) and also from Styria, leg. Breidler; the plant may deserve varietal rank. G. atrata, MieL. On an outcrop of copper- bearing rocks about 3 Kilometers below Maristuen, growing in large blackish tufts, greener when young, with old capsules and immature fruit. G. umicolor, Hook. Lærdalsøren and Maabø- dal; in smaller denser blackish tufts. Rhacomitrium ramulosum, Lops. Rocks, Maristuen c. fr.; with short pale capsules and the leaves with the areolation longer throughout than in R. heterostichum, but variable. Coscinodon cribrosus, SPR. Not uncommon in the Lærdal, occasionally fruiting. Hedwigia ciliata, Enng. Var. leucophæa, Scar. Lærdals- oren and rocks near the old Bridge, Maristuen — Fairly well marked. Pottia truncatula, Lps., near Blaaflaten, Lærdal. Leaves of the type, but with the columella adherent to the lid, as im specimens which I have seen from N. America. Vide also Leso. & JAMES. Desmatodon latifolius, B. & S. Not infrequent about Maristuen c. fr. Columella sometimes exserted after the fall of lid, but not D. systylius from which it is readily separated by the papillose areolation of the leaves (var. brevicaulis, SCHP.). Tortula aciphylla, Hartm. Seljestad, Maristuen &c. A Tortula also occurred at Maristuen with the lower portion only of the hair point bright red, which tended to connect aciphylla with ruralis; var. mucronata, Sendt. Gudvangen; very like a form of ruralis without a hair point. T. mucronifolia, SCHWER. Wall near Husum, Lærdal, c. fr. Barbula icmadophila, Scar. Maabodal sterile, Lærdal from Lærdalsøren to Maristuen on limestone rocks c. fr. and & plant. Occurred sparingly at Maristuen, but quite abundantly near Lærdalsøren, where it was also fruiting. The fruit was rather poor having the appearance of being dried up by the Per Nyr Mac. r. Naturv. B. 42. Fig. Fig. 1. "XC R Nyt Mac. Fr. Naturv. B. SD 49. I. Nyt Mac. r. Naturv. B. 49, Pin. WML BRYOLOGICAL NOTES ON A TRIP IN NORWAY. 97 unusual drought of the early summer. It was found in fruit at Lardalseren some years ago, by Dr. Bryun. Trichostomum fragile, Dixon. Widely distributed near Maristuen, but generally rather poor. Encalypta brevicolla, Schr. By the old bridge Maristuen and other parts of the Lærdal c. fr., but rather poor. Maabødal. The papillosity of the back of the nerve, which can be seen with a pocket lens, may help to distinguish this species from E. ciliata, which it closely resembles in the field. Zygodon lapponicus, B. & S. Rocks by the Laera, Mari- stuen c. fr. A tall form with an illusory resemblance to Z. Mougeotti. Z. Mougeotii, B. & S. Maristuen &c. Always sterile. Ulota Ludwigii, Brin.; near Eide, fruiting well on alders. U. Drummondii, Brin. Nærodal &e. c. fr. Rather common near the coast, but rarer inland: only a single tuft was noticed near Maristuen. U. curvifolia, Brio. Maabodal and Maristuen, €. ir. Growing in loose blackish spreading tufts with shorter rounder and darker capsules than U. Hutchinsice; we noticed also that the tufts of this moss were usually coherent when gathered, while those of U. Hutchinsice somewhat readily fall apart. Orthotrichum rupestre, SCHLEICH. var. Sehlmeyeri, B. & S. Rocks near the Maristuen fos, c. fr. Generally growing away from the light; a rather well marked variety with the capsule somewhat exserted and a very hairy calyptra. A few long hairs also on the vaginula. 0. anomalum, Hepw. Walls near Husum in the Lærdal c. fr. O. Schubartianum, Lon. Rocks about 5 kilometers below Maristuen c. fr. Habit of O. cupulatum, but with a hairy vaginula and a very rudimentary , Vorperistome“. O. alpestre, Hornscu. Rocks, Maristuen. In very short bluish green tufts richly fruiting; the peristome teeth less markedly strate than I have seen them in Swiss specimens. 0. pallens, BrucH. On ash near Vossevangen c. fr. O. obtusifoliwm, SCHRAD. Vossevangen. In small sterile tufts. Nyt Mag. í. Naturv. XXXXII. II. 7 98 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. Oedipodium Griffithianum, Scuwer. Near Eide and Ulvik "in hollows in a rocky bank c. fr. and gemma. Splachnum vasculosum, L. Slutemyr c. fr. not infrequent. Tetraplodon mnioides, B. & S. Bleja and the Saddel near Maristuen. A small closely tufted form with a pale strongly urceolate capsule bearing some resemblance to that of T. wrceo- latus. This plant is a very marked form which Dr. HAGEN is disposed to recognize as identical with T. paradoxus, (R. Bn..!) It is apparently the plant referred to by SCHIMPER, Synopsis: Edit. 2 page 366 as Splachnum urceolatum, Hepw. T. angustatus, B. & S. Maabodal, c. fr. In large robust tufts. Dissodon Frochlichianus, Grev. & Ary. Fissures of rocks and rather dry peaty ground on Bleja c. fr. D. splachnoides, Grev. & Arn. Stutemyr and other places near Maristuen, c. fr. Meesia trichoides, Spr. var. alpina, Boutay. Bleja, c. fr. the long narrow leaves of the variety fairly well marked. Paludella squarrosa, Brin. Moorland bogs near Mari- stuen, common, but sterile. Aulacomnium turgidum, Scuwer. Peaty ground near Maristuen, generally sterile, but fruiting sparingly on Blejà. 4. palustre, Scawer. var. imbricatum, B. & S. Slutemyr. Timmia austriaca, Hepw. Simodal, Borgund and Mari- stuen. Fairly common, but generally rather poor; a few capsules near Maristuen. J. bavarica, Hessı. st. Lærdal. Philonotis fontana, Brin. Wet rocks near Odde. Perigonial bracts sometimes pointed and sometimes obtuse, showing an approach to Ph. cæspitosa, Wis. .A slender plant from Mari- stuenfos has the perigonial bracts often subacute & is probably the var. gracilescens Scup., (Musci Gallia No. 530) from which also P. alpicola Jur. is scarcely if at all distinct. 1) Dr. Hagen also mentions that his 7 pallidus is the same thing as T. paradoxus, an identity overlooked at the time of description. BRYOLOGICAL NOTES ON A TRIP IN NORWAY. 99 Webera acuminata, Scup. Stutedal c. fr. W. longicolla, Hzpw. Eide and Maristuen c. fr. W. gracilis, DE Nor. Road side by the Horre Pass, Moraine of Buar Brae. Very fine and richly fruiting; bulbils scarce. W. Ludwigii, Scar. Bratlands- dal. Very variable in size and general appearance but com- pletely sterile, Horre pass fruiting richly. W. Schimperi, C. M. Near the Maristuenfos. A very distinct and pretty species. Bryum viride, Pas. Near the Maristuenfos. A species close to B. arcticum, R. Brown; identified by Dr. HAGEN. B. micans, Kaur. A synoicous species with a shining capsule somewhat shape of that of Leptobrywm pyriforme and rather obtuse peristome teeth and leaves with a longly excurrent nerve, which grew near the Maristuenfos in very small quantity has been doubtfully referred to this species. B. purpurascens, B. & S. Slutemyr, c. fr. Distinguished from B. arcticum etc. by the transversely striated peristome teeth as pointed out by Limpricht although according to PrirriBERT this character is not constantly present in B. purpurascens. B. Jørgensenti, KAURIN, Slutedal. Another synoicous species belonging to the section Ptychostomum identified by Dr. HAGEN. B. cuspidatwm, SCHP. Slutemyr, c. fr. B. Sauteri, B. & S. Buar Brae. c. fr.; iden- tified by Dr. Hacen. B. elegans, Nees. Dry wall, Seljestad. B. cirratum, H. & H. Bratlandsdal, Buar Brae moraine, and rock crevices by the road between Vossevangen and Vinje c. fr. A form occurred on the Buar Brae moraine with a rather longer paler capsule. B. pallescens, Scheich. Blejå, c. fr. B. alpi- num, Hups. A small greenish form having rather obtuse leaves with wide cells. Rocks, Sand; possibly an extreme form of the var. viride, Huss. B. Miihlenbeckii, B. & S. Sand, Bratlands- dal, Odde, Maristuen &c. Common and variable, but rare in fruit, Buar Brae c. fr. Maristuen, c. fr. (poor). A remarkable form was gathered at Sand and in the Bratlandsdal which is entirely green; in colouring analogous to the var. viride of B. alpinum. B. claviger, Kaurin. Rocks in streams; Buar 100 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. Brae; Laera near Maristuen; in small tufts on rocks occasionally overflowed by water; with somewhat the aspect of an aquatic form of B. argenteum. Two more Brya, one collected between Husum and Borgund, the other on Blejà, Maristuen, are still sub judice, they are re- garded by Dr. HAGEN as hitherto undescribed species. Mnium affine, BLAnp. Odde and Maristuen. Very fine but sterile. M. orthorrhynchum, B. & S. Maristuen, poor. M. lycopodioides, Hook. Simodal and Maristuen; the Simodal plant had one capsule which is curved in the neck like that of M. serratwm and has the cells of the exothecium much larger than they are in M. orthorrhynchum, as pointed out by the late Prot. PHILIBERT in his excellent study of the species in Rev. Bry.: 1895, p. 2. M. medium, B. & S. Near the Maristuenfos c. fr. The leaf cells are very distinctly collenchymatous and porous in these specimens. M. spinosum, ScHwGR.: Simodal and Maristuen; fairly common, but sterile. M. stellare, Reıcn. Maristuen, under bushes of Betula nana. M. Blyttii, B. & S. Peaty ground under Salix &c. Blejà. This moss has a tendency to turn blue when bruised, like M. stellare. A single immature capsule was noticed. M. hymenophylloides, Hüsen. Near the vein of copper below Maristuen and Blejà. When growing from the light the leaves have a marked tendency to appear distichous. M. cinclidioides, Brvrr. Maristuen, abundant, but sterile. M. subglobosum, B. & S. Maristuen c. fr. Cinclidium subrotundum, Los. Slutemyr, c. fr. Fontinalis dalecarlica, B. & S. Stones in a stream near Vinje c. fr. Dichelyma falcatum, Myrix. Rocks by the Laera, Maristuen; fine and abundant with a few capsules mostly immature. Neckera oligocarpa, B. & S. Rocks by the Laera, c. fr, The capsule is rather more exserted than in the figure in the Bry. Eur. It may be remarked that N. oligocarpa is regarded BRYOLOGICAL NOTES ON A TRIP IN NORWAY. 101 by american bryologists as a var. of N. pennata. N. pumila, Hepw. Limestone rocks, Lærdalsøren; a rather robust form with numerous short deciduous branches with small acute leaves. Homalia trichomanoides, Bri. Rocks, Lærdalsøren; a robust form with rather strongly nerved leaves showing some approach to H. lusitamica, Scar. Leucodon sciwroides, Scuwer. var. morensis, B. & S. Rocks near Husum, Lærdal, c. fr. Myurella julacea, B. & S. Lærdalsøren, c. fr. M. apicu- lata, B. & S. Maristuen, mostly in tufts of Zygodon Mougeotii. Leskea nervosa, Myrın. Simodal, Maristuen &c.; on rocks and walls often bearing gemmæ on the apices of the smaller branches. Anomodon attenuatus, Hts. Rocks near the Buar Brae, poor and sterile. Heterocladium dimorphum, B. & S. Slutedal. Pseudoleskea patens, Lımpr. Not infrequent near Odde c. fr. and more constant in its characters than P. atrovirens, B. & S. By the Old Road, Maristuen; Simodal. Ptychodium decipiens, Lime. Rocks in a wood near the Breifond Hotel, Horre, c. fr. "This specimen was submitted to Herr KaaLaAs who confirmed the identification. The capsules unfortunately were very old with only fragments of the peri- stome left. Thuidium Blandowti, B. & S. Damp wood by the Man- stuenfos; fine but fruiting very sparingly. Th. delicatulum, Mitt. Birch. wood, Blejà. Lescuræa striata var. saxicola, B. & S. Rocks, Simodal, and several places near Maristuen. The Simodal plant and one .gathering from Maristuen is more slender than usual with the branches less curved, approaching the type. Dr. BRAITHWAITE indeed writes that he considers it to belong to the type. Camptothecium nitens, Scar. Maristuen; rather poor & often mixed with other mosses. 102 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. Brachythecium Starkei, B. & S. Simodal. B. glaciale, B. & S. Blejà. c. fr. Rather variable. B. reflexum, B. & S. Rocks in woods, Odde and Maristuen c. fr. B. populewm, B. & S. var. amoenum. Rocks near Lærdalsøren. Plagiotheciwm | silesiacwm, B. & S. Rotten pine trunk Eide c. fr. P. striatellum, Los. Rotten birch stumps, Eide. P. denticulatum, var. obtusifolium, H. & T., Blejà, c. fr. P. Miillerianum, Scar. Odde, Simodal &c. A few capsules in the Simodal. The moss was growing at Odde on the rotten stump of an alder (Alnus incana) in company, with P. latebri- cola. P. latebricola, B. & S. Odde, c. fr. P. piliferum, B. & S.; Rocks below the Saddel, Maristuen. Amblystegium Sprucei, B. & S. Cavern in the Simodal; a slender bright green form. Hypnum fluitans (exannulatum) var. brachydictyon, Ren. A remakrable form of this plant occurred fruiting in the bog at Slutemyr. It was for the most part dioicous, but some fruiting stems bore 3 flowers also. The leaves on the g^ stems and on the branches of all the plants were short, shortly pointed and subobtuse, erect or nearly so (as in f. orthophylla, Ren., var. orthophyllum, MirpE), and with scarcely any differentiation of the leaves from H. pseudo-stramineum, Mitt, The lower leaves of the fertile stems were however falcate, and of the normal form and structure in the exannulatum group. Mons. RENAULD thinks it may probably deserve varietal rank, and in that case suggests for it the name var. Nicholsoni. IT. incurvatum, Scurap. Near Husum, c. fr. H. Patientiæ, Los. Common in many places. H. pratense, Kocu. Marshy ground, Blejå, rare. H.revolutum, Los. Blejå, rare; acumen of the leaves rather more serrate than in British specimens. H. hamulosum, B. & S. Not infrequent on rocks; also found on tree trunks in the Nærødal and at Maristuen. H. badium, Hart. This pretty and distinct species occurred in several places above Maristuen at an altitude of 4 to 5000 feet. H. arcticum. BRYOLOGICAL NOTES ON A TRIP IN NORWAY. 103 SOMMER. Stream near Maristuen c. fr. H. alpestre, Sw., steams near Maristuen. A. Goulardi, Scar. Blejà, c. fr. Very distinct in the platter-edged margin of the leaves. H. molle var.: Schim- perianum, Scup. Blejà, c.fr., a very slender form. A. dilata- tum, Wits. Slones in streams near Odde and other places c. fr. H. ochraceum, Turn. Vinje, c. fr. var.: flaccidum, Mine. Stream in the Nærødal. H. polare, Los. Sandy detritus by the stream in the Nærødal; a form with short julaceous branches and the leaves not at all secund. H. Breidleri, Jun. Wet sandy ground by the Lower Smedalsvand, Maristuen; an unsatisfac- tory plant betwen H. cordifoliwm aud H. giganteum. These specimens are near to H. cordifolium in the areolation of the leaves. Specimens which I have examined from Carinthia show a closer approach to H. giganteum. The following species and varieties are additions to Møller and Binstead's ,, List of Mosses collected in the neighbourhood of Maristuen“ (Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne XXXI. p Sphagnum teres Äncsır. Suletind. Catharinea undulata W. & M. Maristuen, cfr. Polytrichum commune var. . perigoniale B. & S. Slute- myr, cfr. | Rhabdoweisia fugax B. & S. Old Bridge, cfr., a robust form. Cynodontium fallax Liwen. Maristuen, cfr. Dicranella heteromalla Scupr. Old bridge, a tall form. Dicranum fulvellum Sm. Bleja. cfr. D. hyperboreum C. M. Maristuenfos, cfr. Saddel, cfr. D. molle Wis. Suletind. D. elongatum var. Sphagni (Mörcens.) Maristuen. Campylopus flexuosus Brip. Maristuen. Dicranodontium longirostre B. & S. Maristuen. Grimmia elongata Kautr. Maristuen. Gr. Doniana var. sudetica Wis. cir. What appears to be a fairly well marked form of this var. was found near the ,old bridge". 104 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. clr. Hedwigia ciliata var. leucophæa B. & S. Near ’old bridge’ Fairly good var. Coscinodon cribrosus Sen. cfr. Old bridge. Barbula icmadophila Scupr. Maristuen. Zygodon Mougeotii B. & S. Maristuen. Ulota Drummondii Brin. Maristuen. A single tuft only, Orthotrichum rupestre var. Sehlmeyeri B. & S. Man- stuenfos. but Tetraplodon paradosxus (B. Br.) Hacen. Bleja, ctr. Meesia trichoides var. alpina BouL. Bleja, cfr. Aulacomnium palustre var, imbricatum B. & S. Slutemyr. Timmia austriaca Hepw. Maristuen. A few capsules found, mostly barren. Philonotis seriata Mitt. Old bridge. Webera acuminata Scuprn. Slutedal, cfr. Webera Ludwigii Scar. Suletind and Saddel. Webera Schimperi (C. M.) Scupr. Maristuenfos, cfr. Bryum viride Paris. Maristuenfos, cfr. [B. micans Kaur. Maristuenfos, ctr.]. B. purpurascens B. & S. Slutemyr, cfr. B. Jörgensenii Kaur. Slutedal, cfr. B. claviger Kaur. Old bridge. Mnium affine var. elatum B. & S. Maristuenfos. Meadow near 'old bridge”. M. lycopodioides Hook. Maristuen. M. punctatum var. elatum Scupr. Maristuenfos, cir. Neckera oligocarpa B. & S. Maristuen, on rocks by the river, cir. Lewcodon sciuroides Scuwer. Maristuen. Heterocladium dimorphum B. & S. Slutedal. Pseudoleskea patens Limpr. Old road, Maristuen, cir. P. radicosa Lrsg. & James. Maristuen. P. rigescens Lips. Bleja, cir. Thuidium delicatulum Mitt. Bleja, in wood. BRYOLOGICAL NOTES ON A TRIP IN NORWAY. 105 Brachythecium glaciale B. & S. Bleja, cfr. B. albicans B. & S. Maristuen. Eurhynchium prælongum var. Stokesii (Turn.) Maristuen. Plagiotheciwm | denticulatwm var. obtusifolium H. & T. Bleja, ctr. P. piliferum B. & S. Saddel, ctr. Hypnum revolutum Linps. Bleja. H. arcticum Somm. Maristuen, cir. H. Goulardi Scupr. Bleja, ctr. H. molle var. Schimperianum ScHpr. Bleja, ctr. This list adds 41 species to the 240 recorded in the article above cited. Of the 26 Filefjeld species included in list, but not definitely recorded for the limited district around Maristuen worked by Miss MerrzR & the Rev. C. H. Binsrean, two, viz. Cynodontium gracilescens and Andreæa nivalis were verified by us within that area, so that 257 species have now been definitely recorded from the 48 square kilometres lying within the limits | defined by them. It may be added that in our case, as "with them, the weather was unpropitious for any careful examination of the higher grounds. Dr. G. N. Best who has published a Revision of the N. American species of Pseudolekea (Bull. Torrey Bot. Club 27, May 1900) has paid much attention to the plants of the atrovirens group, and in the course of his investi- gation has studied the types of several of our European species. The result has been to elucidate several somewhat difficult points and to throw some welcome light on a very obscure group. What has come out most clearly is that under the term , Pseudo- leskea atrovirens B. & S.^ have been grouped, and confused, a number of forms, some at least of which are clearly specifically distinet from one another. The first to be separated was the plant described as Leskea? patens by LixpBERG, (Soc. pro Fauna et Flora Fenn. 1880), subsequently defined and described by Limpricht as Pseudoleskea patens (LinpB.). This plant has proved to be widely distributed over the European and North 106 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. American continents, and it transpires that it was the original of the H. atrovirens Dicks., and the plants usually passing as Ps. atrovirens among European Bryologists belong to a quite distinct species (or group of species). Dr. Best therefore follow- ing the law of ’specific’ priority retains the name of P. atrovi- rens for the plant to which Lindberg gave the name patens; but the accuracy may be questioned of citing the figure in the Bry. Eur. as the authoritv for the name „Pseudoleskea atrovi- rens (Dicks) Bryol. Eur. 5: 2. pl. 477, 1852*. It appears evident that some at least of the. figures there given (e. g. 1,3) do not represent Dickson’s type, i. e, Ps. patens Limpr,, and that the citation should at least be limited by „pro parte“. However that may be, the limits of the original H. atrovirens Dickson (Ps. patens Limpr.) are clearly enough defined and easily under- stood. This species however represents but a small proportion of the European & American plants that have until recently passed under the name of P. atrovirens, and the more difficult task arises how to deal with the remainder. The most usual European form, such as that found on Ben Lawers and other Scotch mountains in company with Ps. patens Lımpr. and more frequently in Scandinavia & other continental countries, has not been found (in its typical form at least) in North America, and it has not therefore, unfortunately for us, fallen to the lot of Dr. Best to investigate this plant fully, nor to point out the distine- tions between it and others of the group with the same minu- teness that he has applied to the description of the North American forms. He suggests however that an examination of the type of Leskea incurvata Hepw. may probably show its identity with the above plant and settle the question of the earliest specific name. In addition to this typical or at any rate common plant there are certain forms differing in more or less important points, as to which opinions may vary whether they should hold specific rank, but at any rate forming groups separated off from BRYOLOGICAL NOTES ON A TRIP IN NORWAY. 107 one another and from the type by a fairly well marked tout ensemble of characters. Two of these at least, which find names in Dr. Best's Revision as P. radicosa (Mrrr.) Lese. & JAMES, and P. rigescens(W irs.) LinpB. (= Ps. stenophylla Ren. & Canp.), are European and Scandinavian plants, both of which we gathered during our visit, and it is principally in connection. with these and to draw the attention of European bryologists to them, that these remarks have been made. P. radicosa Lrso. & James differs from the typical European plant in the paler, brighter green colour, often yellowish green, seldom blackish, the more robust habit, larger less falcate leaves and branches, and the larger, more pellucid cells, much less strongly papillose and frequently practieally smooth. I have little doubt, from an examination of the leaves of the type spe- cimen of Leskea brachyclados Scmwan. from Herb. Boissier, a slide of which was kindly lent me by Dr. Best, and from his description of the plant, that he is quite justified in conclu- ding that Schwaegrichen's plant and H. radicosum Mitt. (Ps. radicosa Lese. & JAMES) are practically identical. The plant which LimpricHt describes as P. atrovirens var. brachyclados Dr. Best considers to be a different plant from Schwaegrichen's. Ps. rigescens LinD». is allied to and perhaps connected with P. radicosa, but is on an altogether smaller scale. The whole plant is more slender, and the leaves are not only smaller but distinetly narrower in outline with a longer acumen, the cell structure similar, the capsule smaller, suberect and almost straight, the segments of the inner peristome narrow linear instead of oblong-lanceolate as in Ps. radicosa. We gathered Ps. radicosa in three localities, viz. fruiting on à stone wall by the roadside at Seljestad, and also near the Maristuen Hotel; and sterile on boulders below the Buarbrae glacier, Jordal, near Odde. Specimens from the first named locality have been submitted to Dr. Best, who while admitting our plant to be identical with the American P. radicosa, points 108 H. N. DIXON AND W. E. NICHOLSON. out that it differs from the ordinary form of that species in being more rigid with straighter leaves more abruptly and more finely acuminate with shorter and usually somewhat wider cells, and comes close to his var. compacta of that species. Mons. Cardot writes that be possesses P. radicosa, identical with the American plant, from the Pyrenees. The recorded distribution of Leskea brachyclados SCHWGR. (as P. atrovirens var. brachy- clados) must no doubt be accepted with some hesitation, as other forms of the group have no doubt passed under this name. Ps. rigescens Linoe. or P. stenophylla Ren. & Card. was gathered twice on rocks on the side of Bleja, Maristuen, at 4000—5000 ft., cfr. Dr. Best confirms the identification, remarking that it only differs from the type in its broader endostomial band and somewhat stouter leaves. Printed 24th February 1904. Beitrag zur Sehmetterlingsfauna Norwegens. IM. Von Embr. Strand. lea. ich hiermit meinen lepidopterologischen Collegen den dritten Theil gegenwärtiger Arbeit übergebe, bemerke ich, dass derselbe, der das ım Jahre 1902 gesammelte Material be- handelt, ein Beitrag zur Fauna des südlichen Norwegens ist, während die zwei ersten Theile sich hauptsächlich mit arktischen Arten beschäftigten. Es ist jedoch nicht meine ganze Ausbeute von 1902, die hier besprochen wird; wegen Mangels an Zeit habe ich nämlich vorläufig einen grossen Theil der schwierigeren Gruppen unbearbeitet lassen müssen; so ist meine Ausbeute an Coleophoren, Elachisten, Nepticulen u. m. a. ganz oder wenig- stens grösstentheils hier nicht mitgenommen worden. Darüber werde ich hoffentlich bei einer anderen Gelegenheit berichten können. Aus demselben Grunde, Zeitmangel, habe ich bei der Bearbeitung der ,Macros* mich oft mit dem Bestimmen der Art begnügen müssen, ohne den eventuell vorliegenden Varie- täten und Aberrationen besondere Untersuchungen zu widmen. — Wie zuvor, erinnere ich noch daran, dass das lepidopterolo- gische Material nur einen Theil meiner Sammelausbeute bildet ; wegen des Sammelns auch von anderen Arthropoden habe ich den Nachtfang so ziemlich ganz vernachlässigen müssen, wess- 110 EMBR. STRAND. halb besonders die Nachtfalter spärlich in meinem Verzeichniss vertreten sind. Besondere Aufmerksamkeit habe ich jetzt wie zuvor den „Microlepidopteren“ gewidmet. Die Localitåten, wo gesammelt wurde, liegen wie gesagt alle im südlichen Norwegen und zwar ungefähr bei 59° n. B.; nur Norefjeld ist ein wenig nördlich vom 60sten Breitengrad gelegen. Es wurde gesammelt: In Smaalenenes Amt: Bei Fredrikstad 23.—27. April und 15.—17. Mai. Auf Hvalöerne bei Bölingshavn (Kirkeöen) 17. —22. Mai, bei Skibstadsand (Asmal) 31. Mai—7. Juni. In Lister und Mandals Amt: Bei Sireosen 26. Juni—1. Juli und 12.—17. Juli. In Siredal 1.—12. Juli. In Stavanger Amt: Bei Tou 18.—20. Juli. In Erfjord 20. Juh —7. August. In Nedenæs Amt: Bei Ose (Austad in Sætersdalen) 10.--18. August und 25.—24. August. Bei Heegstoil (eine ziemlich hoch im Gebirge gele- gene Sennhütte in Austad m Sætersdalen) 18.— 23. August. In Buskeruds Amt: Bei Norefjeld (theils im Gebirge overhalb der Waldgrenze, theils bei Sandumsæter in der Nadelholz- region) 29. August— 6. September. Bei der Ausarbeitung vorliegender Abhandlung bin ich nach demselben Plane wie früher vorgegangen. Zuerst ein Verzeich- niss sämmtlicher gesammelten Arten (wo ich Arten, ‘die! nur beobachtet, nicht gefangen, wurden, mitgenommen habe, ist darauf ausdrücklich aufmerksam gemacht worden), dann Bemerkungen über die interessanteren Arten und zuletzt eine Liste der citirten Litteratur, worauf im Texte durch beigefügte Zahlen jedesmal hingewiesen wird. Kristiania, März 1903. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 111 A. Verzeichniss der beobachteten Arten. me z E 2 E ZU a SE am [wem Pieris ScHRK. 1. P. brassicae L. BE ner 2b napr L. . + Aporia Hs. 3. A. crataegi L. ; x ie Colias F. “eC. palaeno L.. . > Md 4n Gonepteryx LEACH. 5. G. rhamni L. . 2 | 42) se) 44] ets RTE Parnassius Latr. 6. P. apollo L. + Vanessa F. EV urtieae L . EE ur er (EE 8. V. antiopa L.. IH + Melitaea F. 9. M. athalia Rott. . 4 Argynnis V. 10. A. selene Schiff. SEL aL 11. A. euphrosyne L. stl AL 12. A. pales Schiff. . Ws 19. A. arsilache Esp. . s Aie Spp | ete 14. A. ino Rott.? . a Ar ee 15. A. adippe L.? : + Be 16. A. niobe L. c. v. eris Meig. V pa MW (ee 17. A. aglaja L. ae esee fe ! Nur gesehen, nicht gefangen. 9 3 Sehr häufig bei Hægstöil, bei Sireosen nur ein Stück. Selten, indem nur je 2 Stück gefangen wurden, während miobe bei Ose sehr háufig war. 119 EMBR. STRAND. = DONNE A32 |: |22 3 = 9 $ = 3 o E : SEA EESTI: | 1SNNA Tathonia eL RE a + 195 A-Ipaphıa. Ls NE SS A PA up |t Erebia DALM. | AD, Woes lappona Bsp SE Ses red een. la DAW mollis gea LE ne Nea el eee TR T Pararge Hs. | ODE Pera Ep | OS ery lea ar ul. sese il Epinephele Hs. ihe Adis TCU, Wists BG Blt cM eg ale + Coenonympha Hs. 290.02 pa nap Sit 2 6 6c 5 2 |.) 44H Je ab. biocellata Strand n.ab. . .|.|.|.|.|.|4 ab. caeca Strand n.ab. . - «= - ded | Callophrys Bis. : | e DOM Cabri. pur aes NE ASE AU pane fe ote Chrysophanus Hs. TG phlaeas ls. a qum SE EE GE fd See jan f. coeruleopuncta SUED HEN SEE na Bug ee 285 iGhesvirgaunede KLAN Je EEE Lycaena F. | 2906 (AGUS TA EL EE. eee 30. L. argyrognomon Bergstr. . . PUE eren cb cine une LET dr Is Top ile tei T a oc i CUR EN EE 522, 1. semarsus Rott «|. + Boy ACM IONE were EE duc De | Sv |G e ES Cyaniris Dawn. Sd Cs arcioluspls,. xo OJ NES fe | ate ! Nur gesehen, nicht gefangen. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 113 = o ale SS HAN gl DE Augiades Hs. 5. Ao GOL b l.l. He uu de SORAN Svlvanus Esp... 69 e s ds e Be Hesperia F. KR uemalvae AE 5. ee peel Thanaos B. | 25 Me os. I uj uns Mimas Hs. (Dihna Dalm.) | 39. M. tiliae L. ab. maculata Mütz. aC LECT uu oui. j| Choerocampa De. (Chaerocampa aut.) do Selpenor L so. s oe E Hemaris DALM. | 41. H. fuciformis L. beg Lophoptery& STPH. | Ex esmehnarL.. «oc 2. I 195 Pygaera 0. Ic mesHim 5.:...---. ms Eriogaster GERM. el lanestns L 1612. sh 25 Lasiocampa SCHRK. 45. L. quercus L. Bae ad 4 Macrothylacia Rn. AGE, ML HIDE ya) Drepana Scurx. re Ditaetana e m loeis E ! Nur eine Puppe gefunden. Nyt Mag. f, Naturv. XXXX, II. 8 114 EMBR. STRAND. — ZI | nlE eg E ER = 38/2 |e] |22 S|] 2 2 312, o| Å AAAÉEÈEE Acronycta O. | 48. A. euphorbiae F. v. obscura Strom + IE Ar auncoman ia ‘ob T DRE Agrotis O. | 5305, Asnsuda Tb en en 5 bk) SX RARUS ORI DAS T Be ELA LE Be e s Aid dt 528 Aeiniericans: LAST MR SNE see 53. A. primulae Esp. v. conflua Tr. . un In ete 54. A. hyperborea Zett. v. norvegica Strande son yore ee Pd Dee je Charaeas STPH. DOM (Che gramınas Be EE . [+ Hadena Scurx. 56. H. gemmea Tr. . Eidskogen DI aly eivemiash bli wa ie see | Dasypolia Gn. en IDS isn AO E Sk Caradrina Hs. | 29. Cquadripunetala LP | Xanthia 0. 60. X. lutea Strom . . . . Eidskogen Anarta Hs. 61. Amr aru tue Ba er Se Plusia O. 62 På interrogahonisyh, AEE + Prothymnia He. 63. P. viridaria Cl. ab. modesta Car. Set. Bomolocha HB. AB. fontis Bhbe > VA „4 ! Bei Ose wurde nur ein todtes Stück gefunden. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 115 zn 255, [= [SS "s ege rm S EEE BE AEE P mH |H|A|A|H|B OTIS Hypena ScHRK. 65. H. proboscidalis L. . . . . NN, + Cymatophora Tr. | oue duplans li...) soie AES IR Dee Nemoria Hs. 57 VWEdala. ME Roo EM ers : Thalera Hs. | GSR putata, I! > ME Acidalia Tr. Dee meamata be. 2 ...= . . lat] GORA Emma ta Sh... o, HELE pm wbiseiia Hio 2020. ape urNWormmalasiw. i... 0... sia da ee yorANemularia Hb. 5. - 2. ++ > sje Ortholitha Hs. EEG dia Seal. 10 (er Pee Anaitis Dp. fperamaludata, Thbg. . . . > : : : A a HOSTA plagiata D. 12.5 Sl el, Lobophora CURT. ite earpınata Bkh.. . > . e er Lygris HB. | DIE Xpepulaàita Lo... a E e Ae ab. musauaria BEDS . - 2... ee Larentia Tr. 79. L. juniperata L! Ss taenmatarStpla ss sc. oeste MESES Sal truneatavkm ea m 0: PRIE 1 Todte Exemplare Ende Decbr. in Aal gefunden. 116 EMBR. STRAND. = | 2:5 |. leis E = 3 E = 2 © Rr SERBER 2 NILE Sm unitata atl ba E SEE Sa pl ÖVA SOM ee E Gs PEE virdarm uA ce NE. E Sor ML didymata LEE IE AS sc SALAM (bk M E E |. s ee e Br TROU EDI tam eX DIUI n o ror m. es följa eres ue pete Se SS PEINE E ee 89. L.ferrugata Cl. ab. spadicearia Bkh. RUE : DAS umidentantay ANAL Cs als a oc E | 91. L.caesiataLang v.norvegicaStrand |. |. |+|. |. | 41 +++ BAHT Pesoclatar ilb lt we ee ON la Be sn 93; PLA hastata ch wo CM o ane ES | | ET min öra tå sb Re hea es EE 95. L.albulataSchiff. v.dissoluta Strand spat: bel bilineatal BEST Tupac 97. L. sordidata F. c. ab. infuscata Stgr., ab. fuscoundata Don. et ab. constricta Strand n. ab. + Tephroclystia Hs. 95. ll VED OSAKA PEN - oo sa EUER + 39. DET RS UGN La Sd eee re Le. Se me 100 DS subiulvatar Av EE SE usse 1017 FT nanata Einen ee SEE 102. T. plumbeolata Hw. . . . . .. er BPM RES RES Geo EE A ees 104: FT helyeneamasbBı vege EE Mg ED HS NT vue ARE ER AP at 106. T. conterminata Z. ate Chloroclystis Hs. 107. Ch. rectangulata L. ab. nigroseri- Beat Fw. o BET RARE: er BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 117 |" £|2 m rela ENE eal cS d ön 2 2] Fle!) ol a wa] 8| © gina Bao NZ Abraxas LEACH. Ae Emmasmata.. 0 0. |. d el ate t. naevarıa Hb., ab. pollutaria Eben coma Stand s c. lhe os D Ps Deilinia He. | dug pusaria bo 2.0. EIE EEE exanthemata Sc: s s.s. ple Ere: MEE Numeria Dur. i Ne pulveraria Log . 2 ös . & S Ree en cs Metrocampa LATR. ae marsartata DL: voveo le p Gonodontis HB. uou bidentata Cl... ... ee EN oe Opisthograptis HB. ke eluteolata Lå uox scm gb els Semiothisa Hs. ios mmurala OL oc. .». à tus pe ee Boarmia Tr. OSS punciularia Hb. do | + Ener repandata L. 2... . 2°... | e tapes etr Gnophos TR. 118. G. obscuraria Hb. ab. bivinctata Fuchs... UR a 119. G. myrtillata Thbg. A pO EA MER ae ab. anastomosis Strand n. Ab Aae Pygmaena B. LED Pose eeo e um ee | e abe destmieata Strand mabe Gale benene Stkrandm- able Se 118 EMBR. STRAND. EEE Fredrikstad Hvalöerne Hægstöil Norefjeld Sireosen Erfjord Ose Ematurga Lp. 191. E. atomaria L. . Bupalus LEACH. 122. B. pimarius L. . Thamnonoma Lp. 123. Th. brunneata Thbg.. Phasiane Dp. 124. Ph. petraria Hb. Scodiona B. 195. S. fagaria Thbg. Sarrothripus CURT. 126. S. revayana Sc. v. degenerana Hb. Phragmatobia Sten. | 127. Ph. fuliginosa L. v. borealis Stgr. |. Parasemia He. 128. P. plantaginis L. Diacrisia Hs. 199. D. sanio L. Arctia SCHRK. 190. A. caja L!. Endrosa HB. 191. E. irrorella Cl. . Lithosia F. 132. L. lurideola Zinck. Zygaena F. 133. Z. exulans Hochw. & Reiner . «|: Te Nemes Delt ss I o els Nur gesehen, nicht gefangen. Nur ein todtes Exemplar gefunden, +" BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 119 $ = = | i = BEREEREEE Ino LEACH. EE Wes DL. $5 coe. s fer PL Acanthopsyche Hxyvr. 136 | AC GENE ESS be fe Rel Pachytelia Westw. 196. P. unicolor Hin. s. villosella 0.1 |. |. |. |+ Sterrhopteryx Hs. fores ehusutella Bb?! 2. 27. 2 0), fuit quiche Phalacropteryx He. SRE Grasinella BI v 5 och sleek sla Hepialus F. 10805 TE DSG I 20. oen Crambus F. ieee apascuelis LA I 9. Il RP ES) ts 141. GC. ericellus Hb. +). 4 149. GC. alienellus Zk. ae AT AA | Ba Ie ratellus! Fa 2 VEN En. GT ia dumetellus Hb. 9. oc 1.1. 3L 145. C. hortuellus Hb. c. ab. cespi- fellis, 2100 GSE p teed Mcr no OA APR "IMMO X ralsellus? Schill. Ne CO EE DE A 147. C. pinellus L. ++ | 148. C. myellus Hb. . ++ 149. C. margaritellus Hb. . ie ++ ++ 150. C. culmellus L. . p. e + + +++ 151. C. inquinatellus Schiff. . Ae sepe ab. ambiguellus Strand n. ab. a4 bu ! Nur Sácke gefunden, 190 EMBR. STRAND. za E pd | So EEE BEI Fei AAA OI 152. C. tristellus Schiff. ab. fusceli- | nellus Stph. . "X ab. culmella Hb. , de es 159. C. perlellus Se. . RN ell oe | EE ab. warringtonellus Stt. . +/+}. | +|+ Platytes Gn. 154. P. cerusellus Schiff. + Ephestia Gn. 155. E. elutella Hb. . | 2e + Salebria Z. 156. S. fusca Hw. + + Scoparia Hw. 157. S. ambigualis Tr. . lee. je 158. S. murana Curt. ill, || zt 159. S. crataegella Hb.. uc 160. 5S. sudetica Z. SEHE EE Diasemia GN. 161. D. litterata Ser | + Pionea Gn. | 162. P. pandalis Hb. . + 163. P. decrepitalis H. S. a Pyrausta SCHRK. 164. P. fuscalis Schiff. . Er ets 165. P. cespitalis Schiff. Sc) ae f. sordidalis Hb. de +| + 166. P. purpuralis L. + I. ostrinalis Hb. SEE ES 167. P. porphyralis Schiff. el 1 Geflogenes, zweifelhaftes Stück. ? Siehe unten, — BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 191 EF E 3E E |e! 28 ee d eeu s 2| Fl |.) SIE |a| 81 6 RIC ni na|a OH Z Oxyptilus 2. 168. ©. hieraen Z. (?) + Platyptilia Hs. 169. P. tesseradactyla L. . le + 170. P. acanthodactyla Hb. ++ Pterophorus GEOFFR. 171. P. tephradactylus Hb. + 172. P. osteodactylus Z. + Stenoptilia Hs. 173. S. bipunctidactyla Hw. . + Acalla Hs. 174. . GR | DRG ontinuella 2.0 . . 2 sls Kole | | pe Sela Thbg. - . . . c | |), |.) Do fins Hwa 269. G. (Lita) leucomelanella 2... |. 0)" aed Na 266. G. (Lita) atriplicella F. R. v. in- n fervente RR | Pug Pelei) notatella Hb... Ge | 268. G. (Teleia) proximella Hb.. . .|. . «l.l | Acompsia He. | | imu EN omexella Cl... hi N | Xystophora HEIN. ee | Pun tenehrella Hb. ea Endrosis Hs. | | a acteella Schill... s ed Plevrota Hs. : ÖN ER Ba bicostella CI Ss sss HE 2) Ca) 24 El Semioscopis HB. m Serre Schiff SEE 196 EMBR. STRAND. $2 | a FA AEE BEE Epigraphia STPH. | || 274. E. Steinkellneriana Schiff. . + Depressaria Hw. | 275. D. arctica Strand . ES + 276. D. heracliana D. G. SEEN EE 277. D. applana F. Aal | ++ 278. D. ciniflonella Z. Aal | Borkhausenia He. Fee 279. B. flavifrontella Hb. . er) | 280. B. pseudospretella Stt. ll + | 281. B. fuscescens Hw. S tense: | 282. B. similella Hb. BEIM Epermenia Hs. | 283. E. chaerophyllella Goeze + | Scythris Hs. | 284. S. disparella Tngstr. . | > 285. S. variella Stph. + a Pancalia STPH. | | 286. P. Leuwenhoekella L. | Coleophora He. | | / 287. C. anatipennella Hb. . MIL 288. C. gryphipennella Bché. . upon ail Elachista Tr. KS | 289. E. Gleichenella F. . fee | 290. E. albidella Tgstr. + | Gracilaria Hw. | 291. G. auroguttella Stph. . e AES | 292. G. elongella L. . + | | | | 299. G. syringella F. oy Gel ela re am ES 294. G. alchimiella Se... . | degn 295. G. phasianipennella Hb. n: | mh BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 197 E E gia |" [Sls HEHE EGP 5 EEG E Bom Ornix Tr. 296. 0. avellanella Stt. . +) 297. 0. torquilella Z. ee Lithocolletis Hb. | 998. L. Cramerella F. ES 299. L. alniella Z. a 300. L. alpina Fr. +| 301. L. strigulatella Z. . espe] eaque 302. L. ulmifoliella Hb. ab EE ret | 303. L. spinolella Dp. xut Fe | 304. L. Blancardella F. c. ab. cap: | | | tella Sorh. (confluella Strand). JE E d 905. É junoniella Z. . RT: | ll a 306. L. quinqueguttella Stt. S 307. L. quercifoliella Z. S 308. L. betulae Z. ee Js 309. L. stettinensis Nic. c. ab. bistri- | gella Strand n. ab. + Lyonetia Hs. 310. L. Clerekella L. c. ab. aereella Tr. ES Opostega HB. 911. O. salaciella Tr. EE Talaeporia Hs. | 319. T. tubulosa Retz. . + Solenobia D». 313. S. pineti Z. . + Acrolepia CURT. | 914. A. cariosella Tr. 5 Roesslerstammia Z. 315. R. Erxlebella F. + 128 EMBR. STRAND. El = \ | a EJ EEE EPER PAL GR EIEJEAEATSIESISIESIEE Scardia TR. | | | | 316. S. boleti F. Das | | Monopis HB. | | | 317. M. rusticella Hb. | ay + + Ps E. Trichophaga RAG. DIL, | 318. T. tapetzella L.. : | re Tinea L. | Rett 319. T. fuscipunctella Hw. | | E | 320. T. granella L. | Tt | Aus E | 391. T. cloacella Hw. | esr et 322. T. pellionella L. | de mo rH ET Phylloporia Hein. | Kan 323. Ph. bistrigella Hw. | EN Incurvaria Hw. | | 324. I. pectinea Hw. + 325. I. muscalella F. IE Nemophora Hs. | 396. N. Swammerdamella L.. E 397. N. Schwarziella Z. E Adela Latr. | 328. A. cuprella Schiff. . JE) Eriocrania Z. | 329. E. Sparmannella Bosc + 330. E. fastuosella Z. + Micropteryx Hs. 391. M. aureatella Sc. . + i Nur ein todtes Exemplar gefunden. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 129 B. Bemerkungen über schon bekannte und Beschreib- ungen neuer Formen. 1. Argynnis euphrosyne L. Diese Art ist mir sehr spärlich vorgekommen, indem nur 9 Stück erbeutet wurden; das eine ın Siredal, das andere bei Hægstøil. Das letzterwähnte Stück, das also nach Mitte August gefunden wurde, war dennoch ziemlich frisch und dürfte dess- halb entweder einer zweiten Generation angehóren oder auch sehr verspátet worden sein. 2. Argynnis pales SCHIFF. Auf Norefjeld wurde ein einziges Stück erbeutet. Dies Stück ist insofern erwähnenswerth, als die Oberseite desselben mit HöBners Fig. von napaea, die Unterseite mit derjenigen von isis stimmt; die Flügelspannung ist 37 mm. 3. Argynnis arsilache Esp. Auch von dieser Art wurde auf Norefjeld nur ein Unicum erbeutet; die Flugzeit war ja schon weit vorgerückt, und ausser- dem war die Witterung fir die heliophilen Arten keine giinstige. — Bei Hægstøil flog arsilache zahlreich; keines der davon mit- gebrachten Exemplare misst mehr als 35 mm., die durchschnitt- liche Grösse ist 33—34 mm. Arsilache ist durchgehends kleiner als pales, wenigstens ist dies bei norwegischen Exemplaren der Fall; WALLENGREN (1), wohl nur älteren Verfassern (TREITSCHKE (2), HERRICH-SCHÄFFER (3) u. m.) nachschreibend, giebt dagegen an, dass sie grösser sei. Uebrigens kann arsilache in Betreff der Grösse ziemlich varirend sein; die diesbezüglichen Angaben ausländischer Verlasser lauten etwas verschieden. Während Frey (4) schweizerische arsilache als „klein... . norwegischen Stücken sehr nahe kommend“, beschreibt, erwähnt er gleich- Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII. IL. 9 130 EMBR. STRAND. zeitig, dass norddeutsche Exemplare bedeutend grösser sind; die arsilache-Exemplare NoLckens (5) übertrafen alle pales in der Grösse; HrNsEL (6) hat dieselbe Erfahrung wie NoLckEn gemacht und ebenso die meisten anderen mitteleuropäischen Verfasser; schon der alte EnGRAMELLE (7) bezeichnet arsilache als „la pales grande espèce“, pales dagegen als „la pales petite espèce“. Bei norwegischen Exemplaren ist dagegen wie gesagt arsilache kleiner als pales; das ist die Regel, die ich sowohl durch meine eigene Sammlung als diejenige des Kristiania Museums bestätigt finde, und die auch mit den Angaben in der norwegischen Lit- teratur stimmt. (Cfr. SPARRE SCHNEIDER (8, 9)). 4. Argynnis niobe L. v. eris Meig. Flog zahlreich auf den Wiesen bei Ose, wo sie bei weitem die häufigste Argynnis-Art war. Die Hauptform war selten; unter den mitgenommenen Exemplaren gehört nur ein Zehntel der Hauptform an, die übrigen sind unzweifelhafte v. eris. 5. Argynmis lathonia L. cum ab. obscurascens STRAND n. ab. Ist nur in zwei Stücken gesammelt worden und zwar auf Kirkeóen und in Erfjord. In der Lepidopteren-Sammlung des verstorbenen HAUPTMANN GRÜNER, welche Sammlung mir vor Kurzem zur Determination, bezw. Revision anvertraut wurde, fand sich eine eigenthümliche, erwähnenswerthe Aberration dieser Art. Dieselbe fällt mit keiner der in STAUDINGER-REBELS Cataloge aufgeführten Abänderungen zusammen, ebenso wenig mit ab. paradoxa Fuchs, die im Cataloge fehlt. Was die Oberseite betrifft, könnte sie mit ab. valdensis Esp. zusammenfallen, aber die Silberflecke der Unterseite sind anders. Ich werde sie dess- halb beschreiben, indem ich sie mit dem Namen ab. obscura- scens STRAND bezeichne. Auf der Unterseite der Hinterflügel sind keine anderen Abweichungen bemerkbar, als dass die zwei grossen Silberflecken BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 131 in Zelle 8 zusammengeflossen sind, und dass die Silberflecken in Zelle 1 c aussen und innen deutlicher schwarz begrenzt sind. Die schwarzen Flecken der Unterseite der Vorderflügel sind viel grósser als gewóhnlich. Die Oberseite beider Flügelpaare schwarz; die Vorderflügel mit der Basalhälfte des Vorderrandes, einem schmalen, mondförmigen, quergestellten Flecken innerhalb der Mitte der Mittelzelle und einer schmalen Einfassung der Flecken der äusseren Reihe (der Bogenreihe) und der zwei Mittelflecken der nächst àusseren Fleckenreihe mehr oder weniger deutlich röthlich; ausserdem die Rippen z. Th. gelblich bestäubt. Mit Ausnahme der genannten sind alle Flecken zusammengeflossen und desshalb nicht zu unterscheiden. Auf den Hinterflügeln sind die vier Mittelflecken der äusseren Querreihe durch eine gelbe einfassende Linie deutlich, ebenso sind die Flecken der Bogenreihe durch gelbliche Aufblickung angedeutet. Sonst schwarz gefärbt. Gelegentlich der Beschreibung seiner ab. paradoxa weist Fucus (10) nach, dass Arg. lathonia bisweilen als Imago über- wintert. Dies wurde jedoch auch schon von älteren Verfassern angegeben; so von MEıcen (11), der mit dürren Worten sagt, dass „Spätlinge überwintern“, während vow Prittwirz (12) glaubt, dass dies der Fall sei, es jedoch nicht mit Bestimmtheit behaupten darf. 6. Erebia lappona Esp. Diese Art wurde auf Natlandsnuten in Erfjord, weit ober- halb der Waldgrenze, am 27sten Juli beobachtet, aber nicht gefangen. In Stavanger Amt nicht zuvor gefunden. 7. Coenonympha pamphilus L. abb. biocellata, albula et caeca, STRAND nn. abb. In Erfjord wurde eine eigenthümliche Form gefunden, welche sich dadurch auszeichnet, dass die Vorderflügel auf der Unter- 139 EMBR. STRAND. seite mit zwei Augen versehen sind. Neben und hinter dem gewóhnlichen Auge findet sich nàmlich ein zweites, kleineres Auge, welches jedoch keine weisse Pupille hat. Der Zwischen- raum. der zwei Augen ist ein wenig kleiner, als der Durchmesser des kleineren Auges. Beide werden von demselben gelben Ring eingeschlossen. Innerhalb des kleineren Auges, zwischen dem- selben und dem gelben Ring, finden sich eine oder zwei schwarze Schuppen. Ich schlage für diese Form den Namen ab. biocellata STRAND vor. — Das Vorhandensein eines solchen zweiten Auges wird übrigens auch von älteren Verfassern z. B. Herssr (VIII, P. 41) (15) erwähnt. Eine andere Form, wovon ich ein Stück aus Sireosen besitze, und welche im Kristiania Museum u. a. durch Exemplare von Ogne vertreten ist, zeichnet sich dadurch aus, dass die Augen der Oberseite der Vorderflügel vóllig fehlen. Dieselbe möge als ab. caeca, STRAND bezeichnet werden. Auch diese Form findet bei Hersst Erwähnung. Noch eine bemerkenswerthe Aberration dieser Art, bei der die Grundfarbe gelblich weiss statt ockergelb ist, wird erwähnt und beschrieben von Esper Tab. 78, 4, Hergsr Tab. 187, 3 u. 4, und MEIGEn Pag. 153. Dieselbe möge den Namen ab. albula m. führen. 8. Callophrys rubi L. Nur ein einziges der gesammelten Exemplare hat 6 deutliche Augenpunkte auf der Unterseite; bei den übrigen Exemplaren findet sich nur einer oder zwei, indem derjenige am Vorderrande immer, einer bei der Mitte bisweilen, vorhanden ist. 9. Hesperia malvae L. Diese gemeine Art wurde, wie oben angegeben, an vielen Orten gesammelt. Alle Exemplare sind ganz wie gewöhnlich BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 155 gefärbt und gezeichnet; weder ab. Moryi STRAND, noch andere nennenswerthe Abänderungen finden sich darunter. Bemerkenswerth ist, dass die Art so spät als im Juli (Siredalen), ja sogar im August (Ose), angetroffen wurde. Man möchte hier eine zweite Generation vermuthen. Zwar ist das einzige Exemplar, das ich von Ose besitze, stark geflogen (Jedoch sicher bestimmbar), dass es aber der Frühlingsgeneration hätte angehören sollen, ist wenigstens zweifelhaft. Auch die im Juli gefundenen Exemplare, die obendrein ziemlich schön waren, können kaum im Frühjahre entschlüpft sein. Aber als sichere Beweise einer zweiten Generation kónnen diese Funde nicht anzusehen sein; wissen wir ja, wie oft die Entwicklung der Schmetterlinge verspátet wird, so dass die Imagines nach den gewöhnlichen Zeiten erscheinen. Die Ansichten der Verfasser über die Flugzeit dieser Art sind sehr verschieden. Von nordischen Autoren geben Avunr- VILLIUS (14) und Bane-Haas (15) bestimmt eine Generation an (Mai—Anfang Juni). — WALLENGREN (l. c.) giebt den Mai als Flugzeit an, fügt aber hinzu, dass der Falter bisweilen auch im Juni angetroffen wird, nur bei SreBkE (16) wird eine zweite Generation vermuthet, indem er einmal den Falter in August erbeutet hat. Von mitteleuropäischen Autoren werden 2 Genera- tionen behauptet von u. a. Bramson (17) („Mai, August“), MEIGEN (l. c.) („fliegt im Mai und im Sommer“), BERGE (18) (im April und Mai und wieder vom Juli an“), Scumip (19) („ım Mai, hin und wieder auch im August“), Hormann u. HERRICH- SCHÄFFER (20) („Mai; Anfang Juni bis August“); Hauper (21) hat in Oberösterreich nur eine Generation (April, Mai) beo- bachtel, aber er fügt hinzu: „eine II Generation soll vom Juli bis September fliegen“. Dagegen wird nur eine Generation erwähnt von Meyrick (22) (Mai, Juni), Frey (I. c.) („vom Ende April bis Ende Mai und lànger in dem Tieflande; hóher im Gebirge noch bis tief in den Juli"), Knurrkowsxr (23) („Mitte Mai bis Juli"), Teien (24) und Nozcken (l. c.) („April—Juni*) u. s. w. 134 EMBR. STRAND. Es geht hieraus zur Genüge hervor, dass die Biologie dieser Art noch lange nicht völlig erforscht ist, trotzdem sie eine so gemeine Art ist. Es sei desshalb die Aufmerksamkeit der Lepidopterologen auf diese Frage gelenkt. 10. Agrolis hyperborea ZETT. v. norvegica STRAND N. v. Von dieser Art, die im südlichen Norwegen bisher nur auf Dovre von Wocke (25) gefunden war, wurden zwei Exemplare erbeutet, das eine (4) am Gipfel des Gebirges Natlandsnuten in Erfjord, das andere (9) bei Hægstöil in Sætersdalen. Beide Exemplare gehóren einer von der Hauptform so abweichenden Form an, dass sie eine nähere Besprechung ver- dienen. Ich werde mich darunter am meisten an das Erfjord- Exemplar halten, da das andere Stück etwas abgeflogen ist. Bekanntlich sind von dieser Art zwei Localvarietåten be- nannt und zwar v. alpina HumeHr. et Westw. aus Schottland und Irland und v. carmica Her. von den Kärnthner Alpen. Dazu kommt die von Hier als Agrotis Iveni beschriebene Form, die jedoch nach seiner Beschreibung und Abbildung (26) von der Hauptform von hyperborea, wie diese im arktischen Norwegen vorkommt, sich nicht trennen lässt. Der einzige Unterschied scheint derjenige zu sein, dass Jveni ein: wenig grósser sein soll; letztere Form wird als in der Grósse mit Agrotis sincera, übereinstimmend angegeben, also wohl zwischen 36 und 42 mm. (das Typeexemplar von Iveni war ein Weibchen). Die im Kristiania Museum vorhandenen Exemplare von hyper- borea messen 52 —33 (aus Kistrand), 36 (aus Südvaranger), 37 (von Dovre) und 39 mm. (aus Vesteraalen); man sieht also, dass hyperborea ebenso gross als Zveni sein kann. — Von den beiden anderen genannten Formen ist e. carnica Her. als in Norwegen vorkommend angegeben worden und zwar von War- LENGREN (27) und nach ihm von SIEBKE (I. c.), ScHÖYEN (28) und Lampa (29) Sie ist jedoch, trotzdem auf Dovre viel gesammelt BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 135 wurde, nie wiedergefunden, und die WALLENGREN’sche Angabe, die sich auf ein einziges, von BoHEMAN erbeutetes und von ZETTERSTEDT als Hadena alpicola beschriebenes (30) Stück grün- det, muss am besten bis auf weiteres ganz unberücksichtigt gelassen werden, da es gar nicht erwiesen ist, dass diese Hadena alpicola mit carnica synonymisch ist; wahrscheinlich ist alpicola eine Abänderung von hyperborea, wohin sie auch ım neuen Lepidopteren-Cataloge (mit ,?^) gezogen wird, aber sicher gedeutet worden ist sie noch nicht. Mit vollem Recht werden daher alle Angaben über das Vorkommen von carnica in Skandinavien unberücksichtigt gelassen sowohl von AURIVILLIUS l. c. als von ScHevEN in einer seiner neueren Arbeiten (31). WockEg, der Agrotis hyperborea auf Dovre in Mehrzahl sam- melte (I. c., bemerkt ausdrücklich von seinen Exemplaren, dass „sie gleichen durchaus den aus Finmarken“. Uebrigens werden nordische Exemplare von Agrotis hyper- borea, die mit carnica Aehnlichkeit haben, meines Wissens nur von ScHOYEN (32), TENGSTRÖM (93) und REUTER (34) erwähnt. ScHOYEN beschreibt em Stück aus Vesteraalen, TENGSTRÖM und REUTER ein finnisches; die Beschreibungen zeigen zur Genüge, dass die betreflenden Exemplare derselben Form wie mein Erfjord-Exemplar angehórten. Zu der Beschreibung TENGSTRÖMS bemerke ich nur, dass „fränvaron af den tydliga serien af svarta pilflacken å brämfältet“ (das Fehlen der deutlichen Reihe schwar- zer Pfeilflecken im Saumfelde), welche Flecken auch bei meinem Exemplare, wenn auch nicht ganz fehlend, so doch hóchst un- deutlich sind, nicht als für diese Abänderung characteristisch angesehen werden kann, indem diese Flecken oft auch bei ganz typischen Exemplaren von hyperborea iehlen. Das Exem- plar aus Vesteraalen, welches zu untersuchen ich Gelegenheit gehabt, sowie die Beschreibung ScHøykns, stimmen mit meinem Exemplar. Die kleinen vorhandenen Verschiedenheiten be- schränken sich auf folgendes. Während die dunkelbraune Fär- bung des Erfjord-Exemplars in der Mitte und am Vorderrande 136 EMBR. STRAND. (welcher nur schwach gelichtet 1st) sich bis zur Wurzel verbreitet, so dass nur das Innenrandsfeld die grauliche Grundfarbe behält, ist das Wurzelfeld des Vesteraals-Exemplars grau, nur in der Mitte verdunkelt, und am Vorderrande dehnt sich die graue Grundfarbe bis zur Nierenmakel aus. Auch im Saumfelde ist die graue Färbung die vorherschende beim Vesteraals-Exemplar, nur ist das Saumfeld ein wenig dunkler als das Wurzelfeld, und die Pfeilflecken sind gross und deutlich, wenn auch nicht schwärz- lich, sondern mehr braun oder gelblich braun. An meinem Exemplare dehnt die braune Färbung sich über das ganze Saum- feld, dessen Zeichungen kaum bemerkbar sind; die äussere Hälfte des Flügels ist übrigens stark röthlich angeflogen. Bei beiden Exemplaren ist die Flügelfläche innerhalb und hinter der grossen Ringmakel, deren grauweisse Färbung gegen die dunkle Um- gebung scharf absticht, am dunkelsten. Uebrigens ist das Vesteraals-Exemplar mehr geflogen als das meinige, so dass dessen hellere Färbung wohl zum Theil darin begründet ist; vielleich auch darın, dass sie nicht gleichen Geschlechts sind. Mit der Varietåt alpina Humrnr. et Westw. kann die [nor- wegische Form nicht zusammenfallen. Der am meisten in die Augen fallende Unterschied dürfte die bei v. norvegica grosse, scharf markirte, weissgrau ausgefüllte Ringmakel sein, welche auch vorn, aber undeutlich, dunkel begrenzt ist. Dieselbe ist bei v. alpina sehr wenig auffallend; man vergleiche nur die Figuren Jenner Wetr’s (35). Auch die Nierenmakel ist bei v. norvegica sehr deutlich, scharf begrenzt, rostgelb ausgefüllt ohne dunklen Kern, am Rande schmal gelichtet. Durch die deutlicheren Makeln unterscheidet sich v. norvegica sowohl von der Hauptform als von v. alpina. Die letztere ist weder am Vorder-, noch am Innenrande auffallend heller gefärbt, was wenigstens am Innenrande bei v. norvegica der Fall ist; auch ist die dunkle Färbung der Flügelfläche bei morvegica mehr zusammengeflossen, nicht so gestreift, wie bei alpina. Die bei letzterer so scharf hervortretenden, langen, schwarzen Pfeilflecken BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 137 im Saumfelde sind bei ve. norvegica nicht mehr angedeutet als bei der Hauptiorm. Was den röthlichen Anflug von v. norve- gica betrifft, so kann dieser als ein Unterscheidungsmerkmal gegenüber der Hauptform dienen, dagegen nicht gegen v. alpina, wo er bisweilen noch stárker ist; bisweilen fehlt er bei letzterer auch ganz. V. alpina ist nach allen Verfassern eine sehr vari- irende Form (cfr. z. B. WHEELER (36), Jenner Weir (I. c.), „Ihe Entom. Monthly Mag.“ XIII (1876), Pag. 110), wesshalb es schwer ist, ihr gegenüber Distinctionsmerkmale anzugeben, die für alle Fálle stichhaltend sind. — Die Hinterflügel sind bei v. norvegica em wenig dunkler, mehr bräunlich grau als bei der Hauptform und wohl auch als bei v. alpina. Von v. carnica dürfte die norwegische Form sich u. a. dadurch unterscheiden, dass die kleine Basal-Querlinie bei v. nor- vegica ebenso wie bei der Hauptform deutlich sichtbar ist. Uebrigens wird sie wohl durch die oben gegebene Beschreibung ohne Schwierigkeit von carnica unterschieden werden können. In wie weit die neue Form als Aberration oder als Local- varıetät auftritt, mögen weitere Untersuchungen entscheiden. Da das Exemplar von Hagstöil, sowohl was Grösse (39 mm. Ex- pansion) als was Färbung und Zeichnung betrifit, mit dem Erfjord-Exemplar gut übereinstimmt, dürfte man vielleicht schlies- sen können, dass die neue Form im südwestlichen Norwegen als Localvarietät auftritt. Ueber die Biologie von Agrotis hyperborea liegen schon mehrere Beiträge vor, so von STAUDINGER (37), SANDBERG (38), Harris (39), Merk (40) u. m. 11. Hadena gemmea Tr. Von dieser Art gibt SPARRE SCHNEIDER in seiner neuesten lepidopterologischen Arbeit (41) an, sie sei bisher nur in’Kri- stians und Akershus Amt beobachtet. Er hat dabei übersehen, dass ich sie zuvor sowohl in Lærdal (42) als in Aal (43) gefunden hatte. 138 EMBR. STRAND. 12. Dasypolia templi THBG. Diese Art führt Herr ScuwEmER in der soeben genannten Abhandlung als neu für Buskerud auf. Er hat dabei vergessen, dass ich sie schon zuvor in Hallingdal gefunden hatte, was er sogar selbst in einer anderen Abhandlung erwähnt hat (44). 19. Prothymnia viridaria Cu. ab. modesta, Can. Diese Form war bisher nicht in die Fauna Norwegens eingeführt worden, trotzdem die Art im südlichen Norwegen keine seltene ist. 14. Cymatophora duplaris L. Das Erbeuten eines schönen Exemplars so spät als im Sep- tember kann wohl nur durch die Annahme einer zweiten Genera- tion erklärt werden. Eine solche muss aber bei dieser Art sehr selten entwickelt werden, denn nur die wenigsten Verfasser wis- sen etwas davon zu berichten. Nur Frey |. e. sagt ausdrücklich: „Falter im Tieflande mit doppelter Generation, im höheren Gebirge mit einfacher“. 15. Acidalia incanata L., bisetata Hrn. und inornata Hw. Alle drei Arten sind neu für Stavanger Amt. 17. Lygris populata L. c. ab. musauaria FRR. Viele der bei Sandumsæter pr. Norefjeld erbeuteten Exem- plare sind ausgeprägte ab. musauaria Frr., dunkel rauchfarbig, mit undeutlichen Zeichnungen. Trotzdem die Flugzeit so weit vorgeschritten war, waren die Falter noch ziemlich schön. 18. Larentia bicolorata Hrn. In Grüners Sammlung fand sich diese Art angeblich aus der Umgegend von Kristiania, woher sie bis jetzt nicht bekannt war (nach ScHoYEN (31); in Siesre (16) steht sie als „In Tøien* gefunden. | BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 139 19. Larentia taeniata Sten. Die bei Ose gesammelten Exemplare waren stark abgerieben, so dass die eigentliche Flugzeit anscheinend schon vorüber war. Dieselbe soll aber nach den meisten Angaben auch den August umfassen. — Neu für Stavanger Amt. 90. Larentia olivata SCHIFF. Von dieser sehr seltenen Art, die bei uns bisher nur bei Kristiania und in Geiranger gefunden war (ScHoYEN (45)), wurde - ein einziges Stück in Erfjord erbeutet. Wahrscheinlich ist es gerade in den Westlandsdistricten, dass diese Art bei uns am häufigsten ist. — | 2. Larentia montanata Scmwr. Bemerkenswerth ist es, dass diese Art in einem, obendrein schönen, Exemplar bei Norefjeld, also im September, gefunden wurde. Als Flugzeit wird ja gewóhnhch Mai— Juli angegeben; in diesem Falle flog also das Thier mehr als einen Monat nach dem Ende der gewóhnlichen Flugzeit. Aus südlicheren Gegenden werden zwar zwei Generationen angeführt, so z. D. von TREITSCHKE und Hormuzaxi (46), bei uns dürfte davon wohl kaum die Rede sein. — In Stavanger Amt muss die Art selten sein, da es mir nicht gelungen ist, sie dort zu finden; ebenso wenig führt Lir- PETTERSEN (47) sie in seiner Liste (von Jæderen) an. 22. Larentia quadrifasciaria Cr. Ein einziges, etwas geflogenes Stück wurde bei Ose erbeutet. Im südwestlichen Norwegen bisher nicht beobachtet. 95. Larentia unidentaria Hw. Auch diese bei uns seltene Art wurde nur in einem Stück gesammelt. Ihre Aehnlichkeit mit ferrugata hat früher vielleicht Verwechslungen verursacht, so dass sie in der That häufiger als angenommen vorkommt. 140 EMBR. STRAND. 24. Larentia caesiata LANG v. norvegica STRAND. Weder aus Lister und Mandal noch aus Stavanger Amt war diese gemeine Art bisher verzeichnet. — Sie wurde meist ganz vereinzelt und sparsam angetroffen; so fing ich bei Sireosen 1 Stück, bei Ose und Hægstøil je 2, bei Norefjeld 3 Stück; in Erfjord wurde sie zwar in mehreren Exemplaren gesammelt, war aber auch da bei weitem nicht häufig. — Ueber die Varietäts- rechte vergleiche man den zweiten Theil dieses „Beitrages“ (48). 95. Larentia hastata L. Diese Art war in der Grüner’schen Sammlung angeblich als bei Kristiania gesammelt vertreten. Ihr hiesiges Vorkommen wurde zwar schon von SIEBEE |. c. angegeben, aber im Ver- zeichniss von ScHovEN (31) ist sie nicht als in Akershus Amt vorkommend aufgenommen. — Jedenfalls muss sie hier sel- ten sein. 96. Larentia sordidata F. cum ab. infuscata STGR., ab. fusco- undata Don., et ab. constricta STRAND n. ab. Von 6 Stück aus Krodsherred gehört eins zu ab. infuscata Stgr., drei zu ab. fuscoundata Don. (übrigens wenig ausge- prägt), und eins, das sich durch die in Flecke aufgelóste (abge- schnürte), helle Mittelbinde auszeichnet, bezeichne ich als ab. constricta n. ab., ganz ähnlich wie bei ab. constricta STRAND von Larentia autwmnalis STR. 97. Tephroclystia subfulvata Hw. Bei Ose wurde ein Unicum dieser bisher nur bei Næs Værk und Kristiania gefundenen Form erbeutet. 28. Tephroclystia nanata Hs. Von dieser spärlich vorkommenden und wenig verbreiteten Art wurde ein schönes Stück bei Sireosen und zwei weniger BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 141 schóne, aber ch sicher bestimmbare Stücke m Siredal gefunden. Bisher auf Jæderen (Scuoyen), Dønna (STRAND) und bei Bergen (ScHnEiDER) beobachtet. | 29. Chloroclystis rectangulata L. ab. nigrosericeata Hw. Unicum aus Siredal. Die Art wurde bisher nur in Akers- hus, Smaalenene und bei Bergen beobachtet. 30. Chloroclystis chloérata Mas. v. hadenata Fucus. Diese Art war in Skandinavien bisher nur aus Tysfjorden bekannt (STRAND (49). Sie scheint aber im nördlichen Norwegen weit verbreitet zu sein, denn nach gefålliger brieflicher Mittheilung von Dr. Einar WAHLGREN (Stockholm) hat er im vorigen Som- mer die Art in Rombaksbotn erbeutet, und Custos SPARRE SCHNEIDER theilte mir mündlich mit, dass er sie auch gefunden hátte. In wie weit die von den Herren WAHLGREN und SCHNEIDER gesammelten Exemplare alle der v. hadenata angehörten, weiss ich nicht, aber wahrscheinlich war dies der Fall; Herr SCHNEIDER, der meine Exemplare sah, bemerkte ausdrücklich, dass die sei- nigen ganz ähnlich aussähen. 31. Abraxas marginata L. Die unter den gesammelten Exemplaren vertretenen Formen waren die folgenden: ab. conflua STRAND und ab. pollutaria He., je ein Stück; f. naevaria He., wozu auch Exemplare gerechnet wurden, die von der Figur HüBners dadurch abweichen, dass sie ein oder zwei kleine schwarze Flecken in der Mitte der Vorderflügel besitzen, durch sechs Stück vertreten, die alle aus Siredal waren. Die übrigen Exemplare (3 aus Siredal, 1 aus Sireosen) haben ein Paar kleine schwarze Flecken auf den Vorderflügeln und ebenso auf den Hinterflügeln und unter- scheiden sich auch von HöBneErs Fig. 79 dadurch, dass die Saumbinde der Hinterflügel in der Mitte unterbrochen ist. 142 EMBR. STRAND. Hvene (50) beschreibt und bildet eine ab. mediofasciata dieser Art ab. Da aber dieser Name schon von Hörner ange- wandt worden ist, muss die von Huene beschriebene Form, falls man sie als distinct auffassen will, neu benannt werden. Ich schlage den Namen ab. Hwenei STRAND vor. 39. Boarmia punctularia Hs. Diese seltene Art wurde in einem Stück auf Hvaløerne erbeutet. — Nach Lampa |. c. gebührt dieser Art der Thunberg’sche Name scopularia. Die Beschreibung Thunbergs giebt jedoch keinen sicheren Aufschluss, und seine Art wurde desshalb bald för Larentia didymata L. (von WERNEBURG), bald für Boarmia glabraria Tr. (von WALLENGREN) erklärt. 33. Gnophos obscuraria Hp. ab. bivinctata Fucus. Bei Sireosen wurde ein Stück dieser bei uns sehr seltenen Spanner erbeutet. Die Stammform war einmal bei Kristiania (Scnøyen (51)) gefunden, die Aberration ist neu für die Fauna. 94. Gnophos myrtillata Ture. cum ab. anastomosis STRAND n. ab. Bei Ose wurden zwei gewöhnliche Exemplare gesammelt. Bei Sireosen fing ich ein Stück, das eine nähere Besprechung verdient. Es ist eim Männchen von gewöhnlicher Grösse und Grundfarbe; die beiden Querlinien der Vorderflügel sind aber sehr scharf schwarz und hinter der Mitte zusammenhängend, indem sie scharf gegen einander gebrochen sind. Die beiden Querlinien bilden in dieser Weise eine Acht (8-fórmige Figur), die vorn und hinten offen ist, und deren vordere Hälfte die grössere 1st. Die Wellenlinie, wenigstens auf den Vorderflügeln, sehr deutlich und innen sehr breit, tief schwarz, begrenzt; diese BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 143 Begrenzung setzt sich auch auf den Hinterflügeln deutlich fort. Die Mittelmakeln gross. — Ich nenne diese Form ab. amasto- mosis STRAND. | 35. Pygmaena fusca THBG. cum ab. destrigata STRAND m. ab. et ab. unistrigata STRAND n. ab. Von Erfjord “brachte ich nur ein Unicum mit, das ich im Gebirge Natlandsnuten erbeutete. — Trotz der weit vorgechrit- tenen Flugzeit waren die auf Norefjeld gefangenen Exemplare ziemlich schön. Von Hægstöil besitze ich eine interessante Aberration, welcher ich den Namen ab. destrigata STRAND gegeben habe. Sie zeichnet sich dadurch aus, dass die schwarzen Querlinien sowohl an Vorder- als Hinterflügeln ganz fehlen; nur der Mittelpunct ist deutlich. Das Exemplar ıst ganz frisch, so dass das Fehlen der Querzeichnungen nicht durch Abreiben entstanden ist. — Eine andere Aberration wurde auf Norefjeld erbeutet. Bei dieser ist nur die äussere der zwei Querlinien sichtbar; die innere ist ver- schwunden. Die äussere Querlinie ıst aber sehr deutlich an den beiden Flügelpaaren. Der Mittelpunct wie gewöhnlich deutlich (ab. unistrigata STRAND). Die von Hisner als venetaria abgebildete Form (mit ein- farbigen Hinterflügeln) scheint überall häufiger zu sein als die Form, bei der die Hinterflügel mit schwarzer Querlinie versehen sind. Es ist desshalb wenig berechtigt, wenn HERRICH-SCHÄFFER (l. e. III. P. 103) die HöBner'sche Figur tadelt, weil diese nicht die letztere Form darstellt. 36. Phasiane petraria Hs. Ein Stück auf Hvalöerne gefangen. — War bisher bei Kragero (Ullmann sec. ScHevEN (52), in Akershus (Scuoyven (31)), Øde- mark (STRAND (53), Ulefos (STRAND (42)) gefunden. — 144 EMBR. STRAND. 31. Scodiona fagaria Tue. Ebenfalls ein Unicum von Hvaléerne. Neu für die Fauna Norwegens. — Da die Art ım südlichen Schweden vorkommt, war ihr Vorkommen in den angrenzenden norwegischen Districten eigentlich kein auffallendes. Sie ist jedoch auch in Schweden sehr selten; Lampa |. e. kannte nur den von THUNBERG ange- gebenen Fundort Halland; seitdem ist sie auch in Skaane gefunden (AURIVILLIUS |. e). — Die Raupe an Erica, Calluna und Globularia. 38. Sarrothripus revayana Sc. v. degenerana Hs. Wieder eine der seltneren norwegischen Arten und auch nur in einem Stück erbeutet. In Smaalenene bisher nicht gefunden. 39. Lithosia lurideola Zinck. Das eine der bei Ose gesammelten Exemplare ist monstrós, indem der eine Hinterflügel nur als ein sehr kleines, rundes Läppchen entwickelt ist. Eine ähnliche Monstrosität findet sich an dem einen meiner Exemplare von Crambus inquinatellus SCHIFF. ab. ambiguellus STRAND (aus Erfjord). Es ist hier der eine Vorderfliigel, der nur als ein Läppchen (ca. "1 der Länge des normalen Flügels) entwickelt ist. — Eine interessante Ab- handlung über dergleichen Monstrositäten und deren Entstehung bei Lepidopteren verdanken wir TRoUVELoT (54). 40. Crambus alienellus Zinck. Das Vorkommen dieser Art in Siredal war insofern von Interesse, als sie bisher nur im östlichen Norwegen, sowie in Saltdalen (ScuovEN (55)) gefunden war. Ich fing nur ein Stück. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 145 41. Crambus pratellus L. War sehr zahlreich bei Sireosen und wurde auch häufig in Siredal gefunden. Von Erfjord brachte ich nur ein Stück mit und ebenso von Ose, aber die Flugzeit war ja schon weit vorge- schritten. Einige wenige sehr hell gefärbte Exemplare dürften der ab. angustellus Wp. zuzurechnen sein, während 4-5 Stück von Sireosen sowie das Ose-Exemplar allerdings ab. obscurellus Mn. nahe stehen. 49. Crambus dumetellus HB. Auffallend ist, dass diese Art in Ryfylke nicht angetroffen wurde. Dass sie dort fehlen sollte, ist wenig wahrscheinlich. — Bei Sireosen und in Siredal war dieselbe ziemlich håufig; bei Ose dagegen wurden, wohl der vorgeschrittenen Flugzeit wegen, nur zwei Stick erbeutet. 49. Crambus hortuellus Hs. c. ab. cespitellus Hs. Auch diese Art wurde in Ryfylke nicht gefunden, war dagegen bei Sireosen, in Siredal und bei Ose sehr håufig. — Während die Aberration bei Sireosen häufig war, wurde bei Ose nur ein Unicum davon erbeutet; dagegen wurde die Hauptform daselbst in Menge gesammelt. Die kleinsten Exemplare messen 17, die gróssten 22 mm. 44. Crambus falsellus SCHIFF. Diese Art scheint in Ryfylke ziemlich háufig zu sein; ich habe sie daselbst überall angetroffen (auch in Suldal (48), nie aber in grosser Anzahl. — In Nedenæs nicht zuvor gefunden. Nyt Mag. f Naturv. XXXXII. II. 10 146 EMBR. STRAND. 45. Crambus pinellus L. Von dieser seltenen Art, die bisher bei Kristiania (SIEBKE), Geiranger, Lister u. Mandals Amt (Scugyen), Lærdal, Stryn (Liz-PETTERSEN (56, 57), Lavik (STRAND) gefunden war, wurden 2 Stück bei Tou und 1 in Erfjord erbeutet. — Aus den bisherigen Localitätsangaben scheint hervorzugehen, dass die Art am West- lande am meisten verbreitet ist, kommt aber wohl überall spärlich vor. Ihre mehr nächtliche Lebensweise (cfr. LEEcH (38)) ist viel- leicht zum Theil die Ursache dazu, dass sie so selten ange- troffen wird. 46. Crambus myellus He. Weder in Nedenes noch Stavanger Amt zuvor gefunden. Beider Orten fing ich nur je zwei Stück; von den Ose-Exem- plaren war das eine ganz frisch, das andere stark abgeflogen. — In den Westlandsdistricten war die Art bisher in einem Unicum in Valdalen (Romsdal) (Scmevew (45) und selten bei Bergen (SP. SCHNEIDER (44)) gefunden. 47. Crambus margaritellus Hs. Noch im Anfange September wurde diese Art fliegend gefunden (Norefjeld) aber in einem etwas abgeriebenen Exem- plar — In der GRÖNER'schen Sammlung steckte ein Stück als bei Kristiania gefunden; die Art war zuvor nicht aus Akers- hus Amt bekannt. 48. Crambus inqwinatellus SCHIFF. c. ab. ambiguellus STRAND n. ab. Diese Art war bei Ose und in Erfjord sehr häufig, und eine grosse Anzahl Exemplare wurden mitgenommen. Die kleinsten Stücke messen 20, die grössten 26 mm. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 147 In Erfjord wurde eine eigenthümliche Form, welche ich als ab. ambiguellus m. bezeichne, gefunden. Die Grundfarbe der Vorderflügel bleich ockergelb wie bei der Hauptform, anscheinend ohne irgend andere Zeichnungen als einen kleinen dunklen Längs- fleck in der Falte in dem Punkte, wo dieselbe bei gewóhnlich gezeichneten Individuen vom inneren Schrägstreif geschnitten wird. Dieses Fleckchen ist keilförmig, mit der Spitze gegen die Wurzel. Sieht man genauer nach, bemerkt man, wenigstens mit Hülfe einer Loupe, Andeutung beider Schrägstreifen in der . Innenrandshálfte der Flügel. Dieselben sind jedoch so undeutlich, dass sie mit unbewaffnetem Auge kaum zu sehen sind. Ueber das Varuren dieser Art findet sich in der Litteratur nur wenig. Jedoch erwähnt schon Trerrscuxe Abänderungen, so u. a. auch unsere Form, welcher er ganz richtig viel Aehnlich- keit mit paleella HB. zuschreibt. Ueber eine Monstrosität dieser Form siehe No. 39. Lithosia lurideola Zinck. 49. Crambus tristellus Scuirr. ab. fuscelinellus STPH. et ab. culmella He. Diese Art war an den besuchten Localitäten selten, indem bei Ose zwei Stück von ab. fuscelinellus, in Erfjord und Tou . je ein Stück von ab. culmella angetroffen wurden; die Haupt- form (Hs. 404) wurde gar nicht gefunden. 50. Platytes cerusellus SCHIFF. Bei Sireosen wurde diese Art, die bei uns bisher nur von EswAnk in den Jahren 1845 und 1848 bei Kristiania gefunden war, nicht selten angetroffen; ebenso besitze ich ein Stück aus Siredal. Sie flog an dürren, beinahe vegetationslosen, sonnen- warmen Localitäten, besonders auf sandigen Anhóhen. Das 148 EMBR. STRAND. Weibchen scheint sehr selten zu sein, wenigstens fand ich nur 1 Weibchen bei 44 Männchen. Mit der Zeit wird die Art wohl an vielen Orten im südlich- sten Norwegen aufgefunden werden; aber ein so kleines, un- scheinbar gefárbtes Ding entzieht sich ja sehr leicht der Auf- merksamkeit. Ihre Färbung fällt auch so gänzlich mit derjenigen des Bodens der Flugplätze zusammen, und da sie auch sehr kurz und niedrig fliegt, ist es schwer sie zu sehen. — In Schweden ist sie in Skaane und Gotland ziemlich gemein (WALLENGREN (59)). 51. Ephestia elutella Hs. Diese Art wurde sehr spärlich gefunden und zwar je zwei Stück von Sireosen und Siredal und eins von Erfjord. Sie ist bekanntlich sehr variürend; das Exemplar aus Erfjord hat Aehnlichkeit mit E. cautella Wux. (fissulella (BARR.) LEEcH), ist jedoch sicher elutella. Das eine der Siredal-Stücke misst nur 13 mm. (Expansion). Diese Art war bisher nur in Akershus, Lister u. Mandal, und in S. Bergenhus gefunden. 59. Salebria fusca Hw. An höher gelegenen Localitäten bei Sireosen und in Siredal kam diese in der arctischen Region so gemeine Art stellenweise häufig vor. War im südlichen Norwegen bisher nur in Akers- hus, Smaalenene und bei Bergen beobachtet worden. 53. Scoparia sudetica Z. Wurde bei Ose und in Erfjord haufig gefunden; bei Sandum- sæter pr. Norefjeld ein Stück, das trotz der späten Flugzeit noch schön war. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 149 54. Scoparia crataegella Hs. Wurde in Erfjord in vielen Exemplaren gesammelt. Was ihr Verhåltniss zu S. frequentella Stt. betrifft, so muss ich letztere als eine Varietåt von crataegella ansehen, wenigstens kann ich nach einer sorgfältigen Prüfung der vielen im Kristiania Museum, sowie in meiner eignen Sammlung, vor- handenen Exemplare beider Formen, kein einziges stickhaltiges Unterscheidungsmerkmal finden. Alle Verschiedenheiten gehen allmählich in einander über. Auch die Raupen sehen nach den vorliegenden Beschreibungen ähnlich aus oder weichen nur in ganz unwesentlichen Punkten ab. Ebenso ist das Raupenleben nach Scumip |. c. bei beiden Formen gleich. In Betreff der behaupteten Verschiedenheiten zwischen den Faltern stimmen die Beschreibungen nicht überein, so z. B. ist nach deutschen Autoren crataegella, nach englischen frequentella die grösste Art. Auch sind ja schon vielfach die Artrechte von frequentella von berufener Seite bestritten worden, so z. B. von STAUDINGER (60), oder wenigstens angezweifelt worden, so z. B. von FREY l. c., ScHMID |. c., LAHARPE (61), STEUDEL (62) u. a. Im Cataloge führt aber REBEL beide Formen als distinkt auf. 55. Pionea decrepitalis H. S. Im Gebirge bei Espetveit in Siredal fing ich ein leider etwas geflogenes Exemplar, das wahrscheinlich der angegebenen, bisher nur im arktischen Gebiete gefundenen Art angehört. 56. Pyrausta cespitalis SCHIFF. c. f. sordidalis Hp. Während die Hauptform mir nur in zwei Stück (von Hval- oerne) begegnet ist, habe ich von sordidalis 26 gesammelt, wovon 2 von Hvaløerne, 1 von Tou, die übrigen aus Erfjord. 150 EMBR. STRAND. Auch nach meinen früheren Erfahrungen ist sordidalis die bei uns háufigste Form. — Ausserdem beobachtete, fing aber nicht, die Art bei Fredrikstad. 57. Pyrausta purpuralis L. Da diese Art im Mai und August gefunden worden ist, muss man wohl zwei Generationen annehmen. 58. Pyrausta porphyralis SCHIFF. Im kahlen Gebirge bei Hegstoil fing ich am 22. August eine Spinne (Tarentula aculeata Cu.), die im Maule die Ueber- reste einer Pyr. porphyralis trug. Sowohl die Vorder- als Hinterflügel waren so gut erhalten, dass die Bestimmung sicher ist. Sonst ist mir die Art diesmal nicht begegnet. 59. Oxyptilus hieracii Z. (?) Bei Ose fing ich, leider nur in einem einzigen, jedoch gut erhaltenen, Exemplar eine Oxyptilus-Art, die jedenfals neu für die Fauna ist, und die unter den bekannten Arten mit hieracii am nächsten verwandt ist. Ich werde ein anderes Mal auf diese Sache zuruckkommen. 60. Platyptilia tesseradactyla L. War in den Westlands-Districten bisher nur bei Bergen gefunden. Scheint im arktischen Norwegen am häufigsten zu sein. 61. Acalla mixtana Hs. Von dieser für die Fauna neuen Art fing ich mehrere Exemplare auf Hvaler. Da die Art schon aus Skäne bekannt BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 151 war (WALLENGREN (63) war ihr Vorkommen auch im südlichsten Norwegen kein überraschendes. Die Raupe lebt an Heidekraut. 62. Amphisa prodromana Hp. Das Erbeuten dieser Art bei Fredrikstad war ein interes- santer Fund, da sie bisher nur in Odalen (Scuoven (64), und bei Odnes (STRAND (4S) gefunden war. Da die Art im ersten Frühjahr fliegt, entzieht sie sich leichter der Aufmerksamkeit der Sammler. 63. Dichelia rubicundana H. S. Die Heimath dieser Art ist eigentlich die arktische Region, wo sie weit verbreitet ist. Im südlichen Norwegen war sie bisher nur in Kristians Amt (ScuovEN), Hol und Aal (Hallingdal) (STRAND) gefunden worden. Es war daher interessant, noch eine Localität aufzufinden, indem ich ein Stück auf Norefjeld erbeutete. 64. Cacoecia piceana L. Kristiania war bisher der einzige norwegische Fundort dieser Art. Dazu kann ich, wie oben angegeben, Erfjord hinzufügen, indem ich dort ein Stück erbeutete. 65. Eulia politama Hw. Auch noch eine für die Fauna neue Art von Hvaløerne. Es gilt übrigens von dieser Art dasselbe wie für Acalla mixtana Hs., dass ihr Vorkommen auch bei uns zu erwarten war, da sie schon aus Skáne bekannt war. — Die Raupe ist polyphag, und zwar ist sie an Potentilla, Ranunculus acris, Ledwm palustre, Calluma etc. gefunden worden. Bürrner (65) hat in 152 EMBR. STRAND. Pommern zwei Generationen beobachtet, was auch schon von TREITCHKE angegeben wurde; MEYRICK |. c., HEINEMANN u. a. erwähnen nur eine Generation. 66. Tortrix Forsterana F. Das Vorkommen auf Norefjeld von dieser im südlichen Norwegen nur an wenigen Localitäten beobachteten Art war an und für sich interessant genug, und ebenso bemerkenswerth ist es, dass sie so spät als im September und obendrein in einem schönen Stück gefunden wurde. Die gewöhnliche Flugzeit ist ja der Juni und Juli. Das Norefjeld-Exemplar wäre also mehr als einen Monat verspätet worden. 67. Conchylis nana Hw. Wurde in Mehrzahl bei Sireosen und Siredal gefunden. Nur an wenigen Localitåten im südlichen Norwegen beobachtet. 68. Conchylis ciliella Hs. Die einzige in Scu@yens Verzeichniss aufgeführte Localıtät für diese Art ist Akershus, und zwar wie an einer ande- ren Stelle (64) berichtet wird Kristiania Umgegend. In der letzteren Arbeit wird aber auch Randosund als Fundort ange- geben. Jedenfalls ist also ciliella eine unserer seltensten Arten, so dass ihr Auffinden in Siredal nennenswerth ist. — In Schweden scheint sie nach WarrENGREN l. c. überall bis zu den Lappmarken verbreitet zu sein; sie wird jedoch nicht in einer von FREDBERG (66) publicirten Liste aufgeführt. 69. Conchylis Hartmanniana Cr. Nur ein einziges, ziemlich geflogenes Exemplar wurde bei Ose erbeutet. Im südlichen Norwegen spärlich vorkommend. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 153 70. Conchylis dubitana HB. v. discordana STRAND N. v. Alle norwegischen Exemplare dieser Art, die ich gesehen habe, weichen von der Figur Hüsner’s darin ab, dass der schwarze Innenrandsfleck nicht in zwei Flecken, einen grössern wurzelwärts und einen kleineren am Innenwinkel aufgelöst (getheilt) ist. Letzterer (derjenige am Innenwinkel) fehlt immer an norwe- gischen Exemplaren, allerdings findet sich dann und wann an dessen Stelle ein olivenfarbener Fleck, der wie derjenige bei Hüsner dargestellte gestaltet ist, nur ein wenig breiter; aber auch dieser Fleck ist immer undeutlich und fehlt oft ganz. Das Fehlen dieses schwarzen Fleckes giebt unseren Exemplaren der Art ein von Hüsner’s Form so abweichendes und characteri- stisches Aussehen, dass sie mit vollem Recht einen eigenen Varietätsnamen verdienen (v. discordana STRAND). 74. Eusanthis angustana Hs. Diese Art war bisher nur im südöstlichen Norwegen gefun- den und zwar bei Kristiania, Sarpsborg und auf Helgoen (Mjosen). Bei Sireosen und in Siredal fing ich sie in Mehrzahl, und ein Paar Stück wurden auch aus Erfjord mitgebracht, so dass ihr Vorkommen auch im südwestlichen Norwegen nachgewiesen ist. 19. Evetria duplana He. Ein einziges, aber sicheres, Exemplar wurde bei Fredrikstad erbeutet. Bisher war sie nur in Odalen, Akershus Amt (SCHOYEN (52, 31) und bei Larkollen (STRAND (48)) gefunden. 73. Olethreutes dimidiana Sop. In der arktischen Region weit verbreitet, war diese Art im südlichen Norwegen bisher nur aus Hedemarken (ScHoYEn) und 154 . EMBR. STRAND. bei Bergen (SCHNEIDER) bekannt. Ich fing sie in Siredal ziemlich häufig, dagegen wurden bei Sireosen und Hægstail nur Unica erbeutet. Die weit vorgeschrittene Flugzeit war wohl die Ursache dazu, dass sie so selten bei Hagstoil gefunden wurde. 74. Olethreutes arbutella L. Kam sehr zahlreich sowohl auf Asmal (Hvaløerne) als bei Sireosen vor; an einigen Stellen wimmelte es von diesen schönen Thierchen. In Erfjord fing ich nur ein Stück. 75. Olethreutes metallicana He. Weder in Lister und Mandal, Nedenæs noch Stavanger zuvor gefunden, demnach neu für das südwestliche Norwegen. 76. Olethreutes palustrana 2. Ebenso neu für das südwestliche Norwegen. In der ark- tischen Region anscheinend häufiger. Ti. Olethreutes Schulziana F. Diese gemeine und weit verbreitete Art kam diesmal sehr spärlich an den betreffenden Localitåten vor, indem ich nur ein einziges Stück (bei Sireosen) auffinden konnte. In wie weit die Art wirklich so spärlich im südwestlichen Norwegen vorkommt, mögen künfüge Untersuchungen klarlegen; die vorliegenden An- gaben bieten wenig Aufschluss darüber. Jedenfalls ist die ark- tische Region die eigentliche Heimath der Art. 48. Olethreutes rivulana Sc. cum ab. Stangeana Teıca. Bei Ose wurden mehrere Exemplare der Hauptform erbeutet; in Erfjord kam mir ausser einem ‚Stück der Hauptform auch BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 155 eins von 9. Stangeana TeıcH vor. Letztere Form, die bei uns wohl als Aberration auftritt, ist neu für die Fauna. 79. Olethreutes lacunana De. Diese gemeine Art kam mir spärlich vor, indem in Siredal 5 Stück, in Erfjord und bei Norefjeld je eins erbeutet wurden. Bemerkenswerth ist, dass die Art noch 1m September flog; zwar war aber das Exemplar ziemlich abgerieben. 80. Olethreutes lucivagana Z. Nur ein Stück bei Ose gefangen. Neu für Nedenæs und gehört unter die wenig gemeinen Arten. — Fucus (67) hat eine zweite Generation beobachtet; bei uns dürfte sie wohl immer nur einmal fliegen. 81. Olethreutes cespitana He. Trat an allen oben angegebenen Localitáten in grosser Anzahl auf, so dass er wahrscheinlich der häufigste der dort vorkommenden Wickler war. 92. Stegamoptycha cruciana L. (Gyllenhaliana aut.). Neu für Lister und Mandal, Nedenæs und Buskerud. Eben- falls eine der dies Jahr sehr spät auftretenden Arten, indem sie noch im September flog. — Kam mir überall in 1—2 Exem- plaren vor. 89. Steganoptycha vacciniana L. Einer unserer seltensten Wickler, der auch bei Sireosen und in Siredal spärlich vorkam, indem ich nur je zwei Stück auffinden konnte. 156 EMBR. STRAND. 84. Steganoptycha ustomaculana Cun. Diese ebenfalls sehr seltene Art wurde nur in einem Stück erbeutet. 85. Bactra lanceolana HB. Auf feuchten Waldwiesen in Siredal und bei Hægstøil stellen- weise in grosser Anzahl. 86. Epiblema cana Hw. Bei Odnes pr. Randsfjord erbeutete ich 1901 ein bis jetzt unbestimmt dastehendes, weil beschadigtes, Exemplar dieser selten vorkommenden Art. 87. Epiblema nemorivaga TENGSTR. Bei Sireosen wurde diese Art zahlreich gefunden, auf dürren Heiden stellenweise in Menge fliegend, aber die kleinen, unschein- baren, niedrig fliegenden Thierchen waren desungeachtet nicht immer leicht zu erbeuten. Aus Lister und Mandal war die Art schon zuvor bekannt, dagegen nicht aus Smaalenene. Sonst ist sie nur in Kristians Amt (Dovre (Wocke (25), Ringebo (ScHoyEn)) gefunden. 88. Epiblema bilunana Hw. Von dieser bisher nur Bei Kristiania (SIEBRE) gefundenen Art wurde ein Stück bei Sireosen erbeutel. 89. Epiblema crenana He. Ein Unicum von dieser, wie es scheint, immer spärlich vor- kommenden Art wurde auf Hvaloerne gefunden. Ihr Vorkommen BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 157 in Smaalenene habe ich aber schon zuvor (48) nachgewiesen, ebenso dasjenige in Ryfylke (Suldal Scnøvyen (31) giebt sie von Akershus, Hedemarken und Kristians Amt an. Sie ist demnach, wenn auch spärlich vorkommend, weit verbreitet. Da sie im ersten Frühlinge fliegt, entzieht sie sich leicht der Auf- merksamkeit. 90. Ancylis uncana He. Vier Stück auf Hvaler erbeutet. In Scnøyrns Verzeichniss steht sie aus Hedemarken, Kristians Amt und — Finmarken angegeben. Seit dieser Zeit ist sie in Aal, Aasgaardstrand und Hatfjelddalen (STRAND (43, 48, 53)) nachgewiesen, und mit der Zeit wird sie wohl auch in den zwischenliegenden Districten aufgefunden werden. — Die Raupe soll von JouRDHEUILLE (68) auf Heidekraut gefunden worden sein; von Weston (69) wird sie jedoch auf Birken und Weiden (Salix repens) vermuthet. 91. Ancylis siculana Hs. Zusammen mit der vorigen Art gesammelt. Zu den wenigen älteren Fundorten sind neuerdings hinzugekommen: Ulefos, Røikenviken (STRAND (42, 48)). 92. Rhopobota naevana He. Ein Unicum bei Tou; im südwestlichen Norwegen zuvor nur in Suldal (STRAND) gefunden. Uebrigens neuerdings bei Bergen (SCHNEIDER (44)) nachgewiesen; am nördlichsten in N. Trondhjems Amt (nicht S. Trondhjem, wie SCHNEIDER |. c. an- giebt) beobachtet. 93. Simaethis diana Hs. Ein einziges Stück wurde bei Sandumsæter (Norefjeld) gesammelt. Trotzdem es so spät flog, war es ganz frisch; die 158 EMBR. STRAND. Flugzeit wird übrigens von WALLENGREN (59) als Juli— August angegeben, von anderen Autoren wird nur der Juli genannt. 94. Glyphipteryx Haworthana STPH. Das Vorkommen dieser Art auf Hvaleerne war etwas über- raschend, da sie bisher nur in der arktischen Region, sowie auf Dovre, gefunden war. 95. Yponomeuta Stannellus Tasc. Nur ein Stück bei Sireosen erbeutet. Bisher nur in Akers- hus und Kristians Amt gefunden. 96. Argyresthia retinella 2. Ich fing zwei Stück in Erfjord, zahlreiche bei Hægstøil. Die letzteren wurden sämmtlich an Birken gefangen; Weiden kamen in der nächsten Nähe nicht vor. Ich möchte desshalb BöTtTtner (65) beistimmen, wenn er die Raupe eher an Birken als an Weiden vermuthet. Auch giebt Meyrick |. c. an: „Larva in shoots of birch“; Weiden nennt er nich. Die alte FREY- Wocke’sche Angabe von Sahlweiden als Raupennahrung dürfte desshalb nur ausnahmsweise richtig sein. Sie gründet sich viel- leicht nur darauf, dass ZELLER (70) die Art an Sahlweiden beo- bachtet hatte und daraus geschlossen „dass sie ohne Zweifel auch als Raupe daran lebt“ (I. c.), also ohne den Falter erzogen und den Beweis für seine Vermuthung gebracht zu haben. 97. Argyresthia Goedartella L. c. ab. litierella Hw. et ab. oppositella STRAND n. ab. Unter den 42 Stücken, die ich von Tou mitbrachte, gehörten 11 der ab. litterella Hw. an; dieselbe kam demnach ziemlich BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 159 häufig am Orte vor. — Auch in den baltischen Provinzen ist diese Form (von Notcken |. c.) ziemlich häufig beobachtet wor- den; andere Autoren geben sie als selten an. Ausserdem fand ich einige Exemplare, die der von ZELLER l. c. als var. d. beschriebenen Form angehören. Sie zeichnet sich dadurch aus, dass der hintere Ast der goldbraunen Gabel- binde in der Mitte sich mit der Saumbinde verbindet, wodurch der schräge bindenförmige Raum der weissen Grundfarbe in zwei Gegenflecke getrennt wird. Diese Form, die bei uns anscheinend nicht selten ist, dürfte einen eigenen Namen ver- dienen; ich nenne sie ab. oppositella m. Drei Exemplare von Tou, sowie das einzige bei Ose gefundene, gehóren der neuen Aberration an. Nach den Angaben anderer Verfasser sollte sie sehr selten sein; so kannte ZELLER nur ein einziges Stück davon und Norcken hatte sie nie gefunden, trotzdem er die Art ,in manchen Jahren in ungeheuren Schaaren* (l. c.) beobachtet hatte. Arg. Goedartella wird hier zum ersten Mal aus Nedenæs und Stavanger angegeben. 98. Argyresthia arceuthina 2. Wurde sowohl bei Sireosen als in Siredal nicht selten angetroffen und in vielen Exemplaren mitgebracht. War bisher nur von SIEBKE bei Kristiania gefunden worden (ScHovEn (64)). In Schweden ist sie auch selten beobachtet worden: Skåne, Gotland (Warrer. (71), Dal (FREDBERG |. c.). 99. Argyresthia praecocella Z. Auf Hvaleerne wurden mehrere Exemplare dieser Art gefan- gen, was um so interessanter war, als die Art bisher nur mit Zweifel für Norwegen angegeben (ScHöYEN (64)) und in Schweden meines Wissens gar nicht beobachtet worden ist; aus Finnland 160 EMBR. STRAND. wurde sie jedoch aufgeführt (TExcsrRów (72). — Nach Herne- MANN (73) lebt sie an Wachholder. 100. Cedestis Gysseleniella Dr. c. ab. lativittella STRAND n. ab. Bei Sireosen wurden zwei Stück gesammelt. Das eine bildet eine eigenthümliche Aberration, indem die zweite, hell goldbraune Binde stark erweitert und zwar bis zum Querast ausgedehnt ist, so dass sie ungefähr die Hälfte der Flügellänge bedeckt. Sie ist saumwárts gerade abgeschnitten und nicht besonders scharf markirt. Ich nenne diese Form ab. lativittella m. Bisher war Ced. Gysseleniella nur bei Kristiania (EsmMARK sec. SCHOYEN) und in Suldal (STRAND) gefunden. 101. Cedestis farinatella Dr. Wurde zusammen mit der vorigen Art und zwar in mehre- ren (8) Exemplaren gefunden. Sonst nur von Kristiania bekannt. 102. Plutella maculipennis CURT. f. major STRAND m. f. Bei Norefjeld wurde ein Stück (also von II. Gen.) gefangen, das auf den ersten Blick an P. annulatelta erinnerte, indem es so gross wie letztere war (18 mm. Exp., bei genauerer Unter- suchung sich jedoch in allen Puncten als zu P. maculipennis gehórend erwies. Es ist dunkel, selbst am Innenrand dunkel- braun gefärbt; die Zeichnung ist dennoch deutlich. Für diese auffallende Form möchte ich den Namen f. major m. vor- schlagen; dieselbe ist wahrscheinlich für die zweite Generation characteristisch. 103. Cerostoma vittella L. Von dieser bisher nur bei Kristiania gefundenen Art fing ich ein Stück bei Sandumsæter (Norefjeld). BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 161 104. Cerostoma parenthesella L. Zwei Stück bei Ose erbeutet. — Bisher war sie bei Kri- stiania (SIEBKE |. c), Bodø (Wocke (74)), in Hatfjelddalen, Lavik und Suldal (STRAND (42, 55, 48)) gefunden worden. 105. Bryotropha terrella SCHIFF. In Erfjord wurden zahlreiche Exemplare, bei Tou und Sıre- osen einige wenige, in Siredal und bei Ose ein Paar Stück gesammelt. Die Exemplare von Ose sind übrigens so abgerieben, dass die Art nicht mit voller Sicherheit bestimmbar ist; nur so viel ist abgemacht, dass es eine Bryotropha von der Grösse der terrella gewesen ist, und es ıst dann wahrscheinlich diese Art gewesen. Bryotropa decrepitella H. S. ist mir nicht vorgekommen. Nach SIEBRE |. c. soll sie bei Næs in Nedenæs von SCHNEIDER gefunden worden sein. Aus Schweden ist sie erst neuerdings angegeben worden (ANDERSSON (75); WALLENGREN (71) kannte sie nicht. 106. Bryotropha umbrosella 2. Bei Sireosen wurden ein Paar Stück dieser Art gefunden. Sie war bisher nur aus Beiern, Maalselvdalen (SCHNEIDER (8, 76)), Saltdalen (Scnøyen (55)) und Tysfjorden (STRAND (42)) bekannt und ist demnach neu für das südliche Norwegen. 107. Gelechia distinctella Z. Bei Ose wurden mehrere Exemplare dieser für die Fauna neuen Art gesammelt. Da sie schon längst aus dem südlichen Schweden bekannt war (WALLENGREN (71), war es ja kein Wunder, dass sie auch in Norwegen gefunden wurde. Auch aus Finnland, den Ostseeprovinzen, Norddeutchland, Dänemark, Nyt Mag, f. Naturv. KXXXII. II. 11 162 EMBR. STRAND. England, also aus allen Nachbarlàndern Norwegens, war sie seit lange angegeben. — Ueber die Raupe ist anscheinend nichts sicheres bekannt; Frey |. c. vermuthet: „vielleicht an Thymus serpyllum*, Scamm |. c. berichtet, dass „die Raupe soll im April in einer Seidenröhre im Moss an Steinen leben“. 108. Gelechia ericetella He. Auf Hvaleerne wurden zahlreiche Exemplare dieser Art erbeutet. Die meisten gehören f. ramentella He. an. Einige Stücke fing ich bei Sireosen und viele, meist stark geflogene, in Siredal. Während @. ericetella zahlreich auf Hvaleerne vorkam, begegnete mir daselbst von @. velocella Dur. nur ein Unieum. 109. Gelechia galbanella Z. Nur zwei Stück in Erfjord gefunden. — Es ist eine über das ganze Land verbreitete, aber spärlich vorkommende Art, die bisher an folgenden Localitäten beobachtet wurde: Kristianıa (SIEBEE), Romsdal, Saltdalen (ScHovEN), Alten (Wocke), Hatfjeld- dalen, Kaafjord und Komagfjord (STRAND). — Aus den bisherigen Beobachtungen scheint hervorzugehen, dass sie in der arktischen Region am häufigsten ist; im südlichen Norwegen kommt sie besonders in den Westlandsdistrieten vor. 110. Gelechia continuella 2. Ebenso spärlich über das ganze Land verbreitet; aber in den Westlandsdistrieten bisher nicht beobachtet. — Ihre euro- päische Verbreitung ist im ganzen genommen eine östliche; so fehlt sie in England und Frankreich, kommt dagegen in Deutsch- land, in den Alpen, den Ostseeprovinzen ete. vor. Im östlichen Russland fehlt sie nach den Arbeiten KruLıkowsky’s. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 163 111. Gelechia virgella Tuse. Wurde auf Hvaleerne und in Siredal häufig gefunden, bei Sireosen und Hægstøil dagegen in bezw. ein und zwei Exem- plaren. Bemerkenswerth ist es, dass sie noch bei Hægstøil (d. h. nach Mitte August) flog. Ihre eigentliche Flugzeit ist ja im Vorsommer, selbst in der arktischen Region fliegt sie nur ausnahmsweise so spät als im Juli. Ich habe sie dort nur dreimal im Juli angetroffen und zwar im Gebirge Sandskarfjeldet (Susen- dalen) am 25. Juli 1899 (55), auf Hammerø in der ersten Hälfte von Juli und in Tysijorden Mitte Juli 1900 (42); in Finmarken fand ich sie nur im Juni (48). SCHNEIDER hat sie, soweit ich aus seinen Schriften herausfinden kann, nur einmal nach dem 1. Juli gefunden, und Scuoyen fand sie in Saltdalen Anfang Juli. Von ausländischen Verfassern weiss, so viel ich erinnern kann, nur Frey l. e. davon zu berichten, dass sie noch im Juli und August fliegt; dies ist aber nur in den Hochalpen der Fall. — Jedenfalls ist der Fund bei Hægstoil von Interesse; wären nicht die zwei Stück ein wenig geflogen, könnte man versucht sein, sie als einer zweiten Generation angehörend anzusehen. Nach unserem jetztigen Wissen fehlt die Art dem West- lande ganz. Mit der Zeit wird sie jedoch wohl auch dort auf- gefunden werden. 119. Gelechia (Lira) leucomelanella Z. In Siredal und Erfjord selten angetroffen (bezw. 1 und 3 Exp.). — Im westlichen Norwegen bisher in Romsdal (ScHøyen (45), Lavik und Suldal (STRAND (77)) gefunden. 113. Xystophora tenebrella Hs. Diese bei uns nur selten beobachtete, aber sicherlich weit verbreitete, Art wurde in Siredal und bei Sireosen in Mehrzahl, 164 EMBR. STRAND. an den anderen angegebenen Localitäten in Unica erbeutet. Ein Viertel der Exemplare war Weibchen. Im westlichen Norwegen bisher nur aus Romsdal ange- geben. 114. Semioscopis strigulana SCHIFF. Drei Stück auf Hvaleerne erbeutet. — Zuvor nur aus Salt- dalen (Scaøyen (85) und Hallingdal (STRAND (43)) bekannt. — Dass die Flugzeit in den Frühling fällt, ist oft die Ursache dazu, dass Arten als ,selten^ angesehen werden, die es gar nicht sind. 115. Depressaria arctica STRAND. Es war mir eine grosse und angenehme Ueberraschung, diese bisher nur im hohen Norden (78) gefundene Art in zwei Exemplaren auf Norefjeld zu erbeuten. Es ist ein neues Zeug- niss davon, wie eng die arktische Fauna mit derjenigen der Hochgebirge des südlichen Norwegens verbunden ist. — Die Exem- plare sind ein wenig geflogen, jedoch nicht mehr, als dass die Bestimmung zweifellos richtig ist. Sie weichen in nichts von meinen Typenexemplaren ab. Nach mündlicher Mittheilung des Herrn SPARRE SCHNEIDER hat auch er die Art in der arktischen Region angetroffen. 116. Depressaria heracliama D. G. Bei Bølingshavn (Kirkeoen. Hvaloerne) wurden mehrere Exemplare erbeutet. Sie war bisher nur bei Kristiania (SIEBKE) und in Nedenæs (SCHNEIDER) gefunden worden. 117. Depressaria einiflonella Z. Wurde im December 1902 in mehreren Exemplaren in Aal erbeutet. Sie überwinterten unter der Rinde von halbverfaulten BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 165 Espen (Populus tremula). — Ebenso wurde in Aal zu derselben Zeit D. applana gesammelt, theils unter Rinde von Kiefern und Fichten, theils unter Steinen. Depr. ciniflonella ist bis jetzt nur an wenigen Mes beobachtet worden, geht aber gegen Norden sogar bis zu Süd- varanger (SCHNEIDER (79)). 118. Borkhausenia pseudospretella STT. Bei Tou wurde ein Stück erbeutet, das dritte. das bis jetzt in Norwegen gefunden worden ist. Es ist von normaler Grösse und weicht in nichts von dem gevöhnlichen Aussehen der Art ab. (Cfr. STRAND (48). — Die anderen Fundorte der Art sind Kristiania (ScHøyrn) und Stavanger (STRAND). 119. Borkhausenia fuscescens Hw. Ein Stück in Erfjord gefangen. — Bisher nur in Geiranger, sowie in Kristians und Akershus Amt (ScHøyen) gefunden. 190. Scythris disparella 'TExcsrR. Ich fing ein Stück bei Sireosen von dieser für Skandi- navien neuen Art. Nach STAUDINGER-REBELS Catalog kommt sie in den Alpen, Holland, Livland und Finnland vor. Sie wurde aber auch aus Württemberg (SreuneL |. c.) angegeben. 191. Seythris variella Ster. Bei Skibstadsand auf Asmal (Hvaløerne) sammelte ich zahl- reiche Exemplare dieser Art. Auf sandigen Abhängen in der Nähe des Meeres ,hüpften^ sie in Menge, paarten sich und liessen sich ganz ruhig einschachteln. Einige waren ganz frisch, andere etwas geflogen. — Die Art ist neu für die Fauna 166 EMBR. STRAND. Norwegens. WALLENGREN führt sie (71) als in Schweden vorkommend auf die Autorität ZELLER's him an; dagegen giebt er die nahestehende Scythris siccella Z. als in Skåne und Gotland gefunden an. In Resets Catalog wird aber diese letztere nur als in Mitteleuropa, Italien und fraglich in Finnland ange- geben, während Sc. variella als in Schweden vorkommend auf- geführt wird. Demnach hätte WALLENGREN die Arten verwechselt. 122. Coleophora anatipennella Hs. Unicum in Siredal gefunden. Neu für die Fauna. — Aus Schweden schon längst bekannt und daselbst weit verbrei- tet. Die Raupe an Sahlweiden, Prunus spinosa, Tilia und verschiedenen Waldbäumen. 125. Coleophora gryphipennella Bon. Ebenso nur ein Stück erbeutet (Tou) und gleichfalls neu für die Fauna. — Die Raupe soll die Blätter von Rosen aus- miniren. — Auch diese Art ist seit lange aus den Nachbarländern bekannt. 194. Elahista Gleichenella F. Wurde bei Sireosen in einem Stück gefangen. In Norwegen bis jetzt nur aus Tysfjorden bekannt (STRAND). 195. Ælachista albidella 'TENGSTR. Drei Exemplare wurden bei Sireosen gefangen. War bei uns bisher nur in Ørskog (Romsdal) (Scuovew (45) gefunden; in Schweden kommt sie ziemlich weit verbreitet vor. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 167 196. Gracilaria syringella F. In Erfjord wurden 3 Stück dieser zuvor bei Kristiania (SIEBKE), Romsdal (SCHOYEN), Bergen (SCHNEIDER), Sande in Jarlsberg, Kristiania, Lavik (STRAND) gefundenen Art erbeutet. 197. Gracilaria alchimiella Sc. Ein Stück auf Hvaleerne gefunden. Sonst ist sie von Kri- stiamia (SIEBKE), Suldal und Kristiania (STRAND) bekannt. 198. Gracilaria phasianipennella Hs. Zwei Stück auf Hvaløerne gesammelt. War zuvor in der Aberration quadruplella Z. von SANDBERG in Aurdal gefunden (ScHoven (64). Die Hauptform wird demnach jetzt zum ersten mal in die Fauna eingeführt. 199. Ornix avellanella Str. Auf Hvaløerne wurden zwei Stück dieser für die Fauna neuen, in Schweden aber weit verbreiteten, Art gefunden. Die Raupe soll in Haselnussbláttern leben. 190. Ornix torqwilella 2. Ein nicht ganz reines Stück aus Siredal scheint dieser eben- falls für die Fauna neuen Art anzugehóren. Aus Schweden giebt sie WALLENGREN l. c. nur aus Skåne an; ebenso wird sie aus Finnland aufgeführt. (Tenestrem (72). — Die Raupe lebt an den Spitzen der Schlehenblätter. 191. Lithocolletis Cramerella V. Mehrere Exemplare wurden auf Hvaleerne gesammelt. Sonst ist sie bei Kristiania (Scuoyen (80), Kristiania, Skien, Ulefos (STRAND (42)) gefunden worden. 168 EMBR. STRAND. 132. Lithocolletis alniella Z. Wurde in zahlreichen Exemplaren auf Asmal (Hvaler) an Erlengehélz gesammelt. — In Norwegen ist sie sonst nur bei Valle (STRAND (48)) gefunden; im südlichen Schweden ist sie nach WALLENGREN eine der häufigeren Lithocolletis- Arten. 133. Lithocolletis alpina FREY. Ein bei Ose gesammeltes Stück gehört wahrscheinlich dieser Art an. 194. Lithocolletis strigulatella Z. Viele Exemplare bei Ose gesammelt. In Resets Catalog wird L. alpina Frey als sichere norwe- gische Art angeführt, dagegen wird für strigulatella Z. unter den Patria-Angaben ,? Scand. (an alpina Frey ?)" notiert. Die Auffassung von alpina als sichere, sirögulatella als unsichere norwegische, bezw. skandinavische, Art gründet sich wahrschein- lich darauf, dass ZELLER s. Z. ein von SCHoYEN erhaltenes Exemplar als Lith. alpina Frey bestimmte, unter welchem Namen auch das Stück in Scuoyen’s Uebersicht der arktischen Lepidopteren erwähnt wird. Aber wie Scrøyen später (55) kon- statiren konnte, war diese ZELLER’sche Bestimmung nicht richtig: das Exemplar war in der That eine strigulatella. Diese Be- richtigung ScH6YEN's hat wohl REBEL nicht gesehen oder sie auch als unzuverlässig angesehen, wenn er oben angeführtes in seinem Cataloge schreibt. Gewiss ist es dennoch, dass wie von Wocke (74), SIEBKE, SCHOYEN, WALLENGREN (81) und mir ange- geben, die in Skandinavien weit verbreitete und gemeine Art der ,Formenkreis* strigulatella-alpina wirklich strigulatella 2. ist; ob auch alpina Frey hier vorkommt, ist noch nicht ganz abgemacht; jedenfalls ist sie hier viel seltner als strigulatella Z. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 169 Die Patria-Angaben im Cataloge wären daher dahin zu verbessern, dass strigulatella als die sichere, alpina als die unsichere skan- dinavische Art anzugeben wäre. 195. Lithocolletis ulmifoliella Hs. Gesammelt wurden 3 Stück [in Siredal und eins auf Hval- gerne. Letzteres ist nicht ganz rein, so dass die Bestimmung nicht ganz sicher ist. Die Art ist zuvor von Dovre (Wocke), Tromsø (SCHNEIDER), Alten (Wocxe), Kristiania (STRAND) ange- geben worden. 136. Lithocolletis spinolella Dr. Nur ein Stück von Hvaløerne; dasselbe ist obendrein ein wenig zweifelhaft, weil nicht ganz rein. Das Vorkommen auf Hvaløerne ist übrigens ein wenig überraschend, indem nach den bisherigen Angaben diese Art in der arktischen Region Skan- dinaviens ihre Heimath haben sollte. Sie wurde in Norwegen bisher bei Rognan (ScHILDE sec. SCHØYEN (55), in Alten (W ockE), bei Sopnes (STRAND) beobachtet. Von WALLENGREN wurde sie s. Z. (71) nur aus ,Lapponia Sueciae^ angegeben; in seiner Monographie dieser Gattung (81) giebt er sie als über das ganze Land verbreitet an. Die letztere Angabe ist wohl die richtigste. 197. Lithocolletis Blancardella F. Ausser einigen zweifelhaften wurden 4 Stück dieser Art bei Skibstadsand (Hvaløerne) erbeutet; ausserdem 2 Stück der ab. conjunctella Sort. (confluella Strand). In Siredal fing ich ein Stück. — Bisher war sie nur bei Kristiania (SCHOYEN, STRAND) gefunden. 170 EMBR. STRAND. 198. Lithocolletis junoniella Z. In Erfjord wurden zwei sichere Exemplare, bei Tou ein zweifelhaftes (geflogenes) gefunden. Sonst ist die Art aus Alten (Wocke), Tysfjorden und Susendalen (STRAND) bekannt. 199. Lithocolletis quwinqueguttella Str. Diese war einer der besten Lithocolletis-Fünde von Hval- gerne, indem die Art, soweit ich herausfinden kann, neu für Skandinavien ist. Nur zwei Stück wurden erbeutet. Im Lepidopteren-Cataloge wird die Verbreitung der Art als Nord- deutschland, Holland, Schweiz und England angegeben. Sie wurde aber auch aus den baltischen Provinzen (Tricx 24) ge- meldet. Jedenfalls ist der Nachweis ihres Vorkommens in Skandinavien interessant. Die Raupe miniert nach SoRHAGEN (82) in den Blättern von Salix repens und S. fusca in unter- seitiger Mine. | Die von SoRHAGEN |. c. gegebene Abbildung gewährt guten Nutzen zur leichteren und sicheren Bestimmung der Art. 140. Lithocolletis quercifoliella 2. Mehrere Exemplare auf Asmal gefangen. Sonst war sie nur bei Kristiania (STRAND) gefunden. 141. Lithocolletis betulae Z. Ein einziges, aber zweifelloses Stück in Siredal gefunden. Zuvor war die Art bei uns nur in Saltdalen von SCHILDE ge- funden worden. WALLENGREN giebt sie nur aus dem südlichen Schweden an (81). BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 171 149. Lithocolletis stettinensis Nic. cum ab. bistrigella STRAND N. ab. Wieder eine für Skandinavien neue Art. Sie kam auf Asmal häufig vor, so dass ich zahlreiche Exemplare ein- sammeln konnte. Ein Paar Stück davon, die in allem übrigen mit stettinensis übereinstimmen und auch zusammen mit zwei- fellosen Exemplaren letzterer gefunden wurden und desshalb wohl nur eine Aberration davon bilden, zeichnen sich dadurch aus, dass die Anzahl der Costalflecke zwei statt drei ist, indem der áusserste (derjenige, welcher der Spitze am nächsten stehen sollte) verschwunden ist. Ich nenne diese Aberration bistri- gella m. Mit Ausnahme von Schweden wird die Art sonst aus den Nachbarländern Norwegens angegeben. Die Raupe miniert in Almus glutinosa in oberseitiger Mine. 143. Opostega salaciella Tr. Bei Sireosen wurden mehrere Exemplare, in Siredal, Erfjord und Ose Unica erbeutet. In Norwegen nur einmal zuvor ge- funden und zwar bei Porsgrund (STRAND). In Schweden nur in Skäne gefunden (WALLENGREN (83)). 144. Talaeporia tubulosa Rerz. Aus einem auf Kirkeøen (Hvaløerne) am 20. Mai gefunde- nen Sack schlüpfte der Falter am 20. Juni. — Zuvor nur an ein Paar Localitäten im südlichsten Norwegen (Kragero, Mandal (ScHOYEN (85)) gefunden. Unsere zweite Talaeporia-Art, T. borealis Wx., ist dagegen über das ganze Land verbreitet. 145. Acrolepia cariosella Tr. Zwei Stück in Siredal gefunden. — Nach den vorliegenden Beschreibungen scheint es mir, dass die Exemplare mit wenig- 172 EMBR. STRAND. stens ebenso viel Recht zu A. arnicella Heyp. zu ziehen wären. Da ich inzwischen von letzterer Art kem Vergleichsmaterial besitze und von A. cariosella nur mit einem einzigen Stück vergleichen kann, ziehe ich bis auf weiteres meine Exemplare zu der sowohl bei uns als in den Nachbarländern gefundenen Art A. cariosella Tr. 146. Rösslerstammia Erxlebella F. Neu für die Fauna. Ein Stück aus Sıredal. Diese Art ist meines Wissens in Skandinavien seit THuwBERG's Tagen nicht gefunden. WALLENGREN (71) giebt sie nämlich als schwe- dische Art nur auf die Autorität THUNBERG’S hin an. Oben- drein wird die THUNBERG sche Beschreibung seiner Tinea Erx- lebella von WERNEBURG (84) als sich auf Nemotois cupriacellus Hp. beziehend gedeutet; falls diese Deutung die richtige, wäre also die Art nie zuvor in Skandinavien gefunden worden. Da aber À. Frælebella in allen Nachbarländern, wenn auch überall spärlich, vorkommt, wäre es auffallend, falls sie in Skandinavien gänzlich fehlen sollte. 147. Scardia boleti F. Ein Stück bei Sireosen. Sonst nur bei Kristiania und in Odalen gefunden. 148. Phylloporia bistrigella Hw. Ein Stück aus Siredal. — Im südlichen Norwegen war sie bisher nur auf Dovre (Wocke) gefunden. In der arktischen Re- gion ist sie weiter verbreitet; ich habe sie dort auf Hadsel und in Tysfjorden gefunden (77). BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 173 149. Incurvaria pectinea Hw. cum ab. costimaculata, ab. dorsimaculata, ab. demaculata, ab. analimaculata et ab. plicamaculata STRAND nn. abb. Von dieser Art wimmelte es auf Kirkeøen (Hvaloerne) und zahlreiche (80) Exemplare wurden mitgenommen. Darunter fin- den sich sechsmal so viel Männchen als Weibchen. Von den von ZELLER (86) angeführten Varietäten finden sich in diesem Materiale die folgenden vertreten. Von Var. b Z., welche sich durch weisse verloschene Tröpfchen auf dem Vorderrande auszeichnet, habe ich nur ein einziges Stück und zwar ein Weibchen, das ein weisses Tröpichen bei 2/3 des Vorderrandes hat. Auch ZELLER’s einziges Stück dieser Form war weiblichen Geschlechtes. Ich nenne diese Form ab. costimaculata m. Var. c Z., die keinen Analfleck besitzt, ist durch 4 Männ- chen vertreten. Der Innenrandfleck ist gross und sehr deutlich; die einzige Andeutung eines Analflecks ist, dass die Franzen an der betreffenden Stelle ein wenig aufgeblickt sind. Da diese Form sehr characteristisch ist und anscheinend nicht eben selten vorkommt, möge sie mit vollem Recht einen eigenen Namen tragen. Ich nenne sie ab. dorsimaculata m. Auch die beiden ZELLER'schen Exemplare waren Männchen. Var. d Z., welcher der Dorsalfleck fehlt, die anstatt dessen dagegen einen Plicalfleck besitzen soll, ist mir nicht vorgekom- men. ZELLER kannte davon nur ein einziges Weibchen. Var. e Z., die keine Flecke besitzt, also ganz einfarbig ist, scheint ziemlich häufig vorzukommen, indem 7 meiner Exem- plare dazu gehóren; auch Herrn Zeller war diese Form in Mehrzahl vorgekommen. Aber nur im männlichen Geschlecht ist sie bis jetzt bekannt. Ich schlage den Namen ab. demacu- lata m. für dieselbe vor. Ebenso häufig ist unter meinen Exemplaren eine von ZELLER nicht gekannte Form, die einen; Analfleck, aber keinen Dorsal- 174 EMBR. STRAND. fleck besitzt, und die ich als ab. analimaculata m. bezeichne. Auch nur durch Männchen vertreten. Auch zwei andere von ZELLER nicht beschriebene Formen mögen erwähnt werden. Die eine, wovon ich ein einziges Männchen erbeutete, besitzt keine der oben gedachten Flecke, hat dagegen in der Falte an der Stelle, wo bei der ausgebildet- sten Zeichnung die Spitze des Dorsalflecks ist, ein eiförmiges, helles Tröpfchen. Diese Form stimmt demnach so ziemlich gut mit Var. d Z. überein, nur dass diese letztere sich auch eines Analfleckes erfreut. Diese beiden Formen, die also mit Plical- fleck versehen, dagegen bald mit, bald ohne Analfleck sind, mógen mit dem Namen ab. plicamaculata m. bezeichnet werden. Der Plicalfleck ist offenbar als ein besonders gebildeter Dorsalfleck aufzufassen. Noch eine neue Form besitze ich, die sich dadurch auszeichnet, dass zwischen dem Analfleck und der Falte, dem Saume ein wenig näher, sich ein heller, übrigens sehr verwischter, Fleck findet. Diese Form liegt nur in zwei Männchen vor. Es ergiebt sich also, dass von meinen 80 Exemplaren 22 mehr oder weniger von der Hauptiorm abweichen, während 58 mit derselben zusammenfallen. Die Art dürfte demnach als eine zum Variiren ziemlich geneigte anzusprechen sein. Auch in Betreff der Grösse sind erhebliche Verschiedenheiten wahrnehm- bar. Während die Weibchen gewöhnlich 15—16 mm. messen, finden sich Exemplare, die nur 11 mm. sind; die Flügelspannung der Männchen schwankt zwischen 12 und 15 mm. Die Farbe der Kopfhaare ist in vielen Fällen schwarz oder schwärzlıch. 150. Incurvaria muscalella F. Ein schönes und desshalb sicher bestimmbares Männchen, sowie ein abgeflogenes, unsicheres, Weibchen wurden bei Sire- osen gefangen. Im südlichen Norwegen war diese Art bisher nur bei Vallo (STRAND) gefunden. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 175 151. Adela cuprella SCHIFF. Der Fang dieser Art bei Fredrikstad war insofern von In- teresse, als sie bisher nur bei Kristiania (ScHovEN, (80), Vallø und Skien (STRAND (42, 48)) gefunden war. 152. Eriocrania fastwosella 2. Mehrere Exemplare auf Hvaløerne erbeutet. Sonst nur bei Kristiania gefunden. 153. Micropteryx aureatella Sc. Nur ein Stück dieser, wohl die gemeinste unserer Microp- terygiden, wurde in Siredal gefunden. 176 EMBR. STRAND. COS > C. Verzeichniss der eitirten Litteratur. WALLENGREN: Skandinaviens dagfjärilar. Malmø 1853. TreITscHKE: Schmetterlinge von Europa. HERRICH-SCHÄFFER: Systematische Bearbeitung der Schmetterlinge von Europa. Frey: Die Lepidopteren der Schweiz. 1880. NorckEN: Lepidopterologische Fauna von Esthland, Livland und Kur- land. („Arbeiten des Naturforscher-Vereins zu Riga“. N. F. 2—4 (1868—71)). HzwsEL: Ueber die Argynnis pales-Formen. („Berliner entom. Zeit- schrift", H. 3—4 (1900)). ENGRAMELLE et Ernst: Insectes d'Europe. Paris 1779. SPARRE SCHNEIDER: Tromsø Lepidopterfauna. („Tromso Museums Aars- hefter", 15). — Oversigt over de 1 Nedenes Amt bemerkede Lepidoptera. („Kristiania Vidensk.-Selskabs Forh.^ 1882). Fucus: Macrolepidopteren der Loreley-Gegend u. verwandte Formen VI. („Jahrb. d. Nassauischen Vereins f. Naturk.* 52). MEIGEN: Systematische Beschreibung der europäischen Schmetterlinge. 1829. v. Prirrwitz: Die Generationen und Winterformen der in Schlesien beobachteten Falter. (Stett. entom. Zeit.“ (1861)). JABLONSKY u. Hrnssr: Natursystem aller bekannten in- und auslån- dischen Insecten. Schmetterlinge. 1782— 1804. AvunIVILLIUS: Nordens fjärilar. 1891. Bane-Haas: Fortegnelse over de i Danmark levende Lepidoptera. (4 Naturhistorisk tidsskrift", 3 R. 9, 10, 13). SIEBKE: Enumeratio insectorum norvegicorum. III. Bramson: Die Tagfalter Europas und des Caucasus. 1890. BERGE: Schmetterlingsbuch. Herausgeg. v. SrEupEr. 1876. Scumip: Die Lepidopterenfauna der Regensburger Umgegend. („Corre- spondenz-Blatt d. naturw. Vereins zu Regensburg", 39 und 40). Hormann und Hznnicg-ScmirrER: Die Lepidopteren-Fauna der Regens- burger Umgegend. (ibid. 8 und 9). Havprn: Beitrag zur Macrolepidopteren-Fauna von Oesterreich ob der Enns. Linz 1901. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 177 22, Meyrick: Handbook of British Lepidoptera. Krurikowsky in „Bull. des Natur. de Moscau.^ (1898 u. 1899). Teıca: Vervollständigtes Verzeichniss d. Schmett. d. baltischen Pro- vinzen. („Korrespondenz-Blatt d. Naturf.-Ver. zu Riga“, XLII (1899)). WockE: Ein Beitrag zur Lepidopterenfauna Norwegens. (Stettiner entom. Zeitung“, 1864). Höger: Eine neue Noctua. (Horae Societ. Entom. Rossicae“ VI (1869)). (vacat!) Scuoven: Bidrag til Gudbrandsdalens og Dovrefjelds insektfauna. („Nyt mag. f. naturv.* XXIV). Lampa: Förteckning öfver Skandinaviens och Finlands Macrolepi- doptera. (,Entom. tidsskrift", 1885). ZETTERSTEDT: Insecta Lapponica“. Scgøyen: Fortegnelse over Norges Lepidoptera. („Kristiania Viden- skabsselskabs Forhandl.* 1898). — Oversigt over de i Norges arktiske region hidtil fundne Lepidoptera. („Archiv for math. og naturvid.^ V). Trenestrom: Nykomlingar för finska fjáril-faunaen. (,Notiser ur Säll- skapets pro Fauna et Flora Fennica förhandl.* 14 (1873)). Reuter: Förteckning öfver Macrolepidoptera funna i Finland efter år 1869. (,Acta Societatis pro Fauna et Flora Fennica". IX). Jenner Weir: The Macro-Lepidoptera of the Shetland Isles. („The Entomologist*, XIII (1880)). WHEELER: List of Lepidoptera captured at Rannoch in July, 1876. („The Entomologists Monthly Mag.“ XIII (1876—77)). STAUDINGER: Reise nach Finmarken. Macrolepidoptera. (,Stettiner entom. Zeitung*, 1861). SANDBERG: lagttagelser over arktiske Sommerfugles Metamorphoser. („Entom. tidsskrift*, 1883). Herumws: Note on the Food-plant of Pachnobia hyperborea. („The Entom. Monthly Mag.“ XIII (1876 — 71)). Merx: Larva and Food-plant of Pachnobia hyperborea. (ibid.). SCHNEIDER: Lepidopterologiske meddelelser fra det sondenfjeldske Norge. („Entom. tidsskrift*, 1902. STRAND: Beitrag zur Schmetterlingsfauna Norwegens (,Nyt mag. f. naturv.^ 39, (1901)). — Bidrag til Hallingdals og Lyngørs insektfauna. (ibid. 37. (1899)). SCHNEIDER: Coleoptera og Lepidoptera ved Bergen og i nærmeste om- egn. (,Bergens museums aarbog^ 1901, no. 1). SCHOYEN: Lepidopterologiske undersøgelser 1 Romsdals amt. („Nyt mag. f. naturvid.^ XXVII). Hormuzarı: Die Schmetterlinge der Bukowina. („Verh. d. zool.-botan. Gesellsch. zu Wien", 1898— 99). Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXI. II. 12 178 EMBR. STRAND. 4T. 48. 49. Liz-Perrersen: Lepidopterologiske undersøgelser paa Jæderen 1899, (,Bergens museums aarbog*, 1900). STRAND: Beitrag zur Schmetterlingsfauna Norwegens. IL („Nyt mag. f. naturv.^ 40 (1902)). — Chloroclystis chloërata Ma». v. hadenata Fucus, en for Skandinavien ny geometer. („Entomologisk tidsskrift* (1902)). Hvene: Aberrationen einiger esthländischen Eulen und Spanner. („Berliner entom. Zeitschrift“, 1901). Scuoyen: Nye bidrag til Norges Lepidopterfauna. („Entomol. tids- skrift^, (1890)). — Lepidopterologiske bidrag til Norges fauna. (,Nyt mag. f. naturv.^ XXV). STRAND: Lepidopterologiske undersogelser, særligt i Nordlands amt. (,Archiv f. math. og naturv.^ XXII). Trouvetot: On Monstrosities observed in Wings of Lepidopterous Insects, and how they may be produced. („Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural History“, XI (1868)). ScHoyYEN: Nye bidrag til kundskaben om det arktiske Norges Lepido- pterfauna. (,Tromso Museums Aarshefter“. IV, V). Liz-Perrersen: Lepidoptera iagttagne i Lærdal sommeren 1897. („Ber- gens museums aarbog*, 1897). = Lepidopterologiske notiser fra Nordfjord 1898 (ibid. 1898). Leeen: British Pyralides, including the Pterophoridae. London 1886. WALLENGREN: Skandinaviens pyralider och choreutider. (,Ofv. af Vet.- Akad. Förhandl.“ 1871). STAUDINGER: Die Lepidopterenfauna Kleinasiens. („Horae Soc. ent. rossicae“, XV). LAHARPE: Faune Suisse. Lepidoptéres. („Neue Denkschriften d. all- gem. Schweizerschen Gesellschaft", 1853— 61). STEUDEL und Hormann: Verzeichniss württembergischer Kleinschmet- terlinge. (,Jahresb. d. Ver. f. vaterl. Naturk. in Württem- berg*, 38 (1882)). WALLENGREN: Skandinaviens vecklarefjürilar. | (^Entom. tidsskrift“, 1888— 90). SCHOYEN: Yderligere tilleg til Norges Lepidopterfauna. (, Kristiania Vidensk.selsk. Forh.“ 1887). Buettner: Die Pommerschen, insbesondere die Stettiner Microlepido- pleren. („Stett. entom. Zeit.*, 1880). FREDBERG: Förteckning öfver af undertecknad funna Microlepidoptera inom landskapet Dal. (,Entom. tidsskrift* 1891). Fucus: Mierolepidopteren des Rheingaues. („Stett. entom. Zeitg.“ 1880). JouRDHEUILLE: Calendrier du Microlépidoptériste. (“Annales de la soc. entom. de France, 1869 — 70). 69. 70. TG 72. 73. 74. 79. 76. d. 78. 19. 80. 8t. 82. 88. 84. 85. 86. BEITRAG ZUR SCHMETTERLINGSFAUNA NORWEGENS. 179 Weston: The Tortrices of Surrey, Kent and Sussex. („The Entomo- logist*, XIII). ZELLER: Die Argyresthien. („Linnaea entomologica“, II). WALLENGREN: Species Tortricum et Tinearum Scandinaviae. (“Bihang till Kgl. Vet.-Akad. Handl.*, 3). Tencsrrôm: Catalogus Lepidopterorum Faunae Fennicae praecursorius. („Notiser ur sállsk. pro Fauna et Flora Fennica förh.*. 10 (1869)). Heinemann: Die Schmetterlinge Deutschlands und der Schweiz. Braunschweig 1863— 77. WockE: Reise nach Finmarken. (Stett. entom. Zeit.“ 1862). AwDERSSON: För svenska faunan nya Lepidoptera. („Entom. tidsskr.“ 1897). SCHNEIDER: Lepidopterologiske bidrag til Norges arktiske fauna. (, Tromsø museums aarshefter“, 3 (1880)). STRAND: Bemerkungen über einige norwegische Tephroclystien und Tineinen. („Det kgl. norske videnskabers selskabs skrifter", 1901, no. 8). — | Depressaria arctica Strand n. sp. („Archiv f£. mathem. og naturv.^ XXIV). SCHNEIDER: Sydvarangers Lepidoptera. (,Tromse museums aarshefter*, 18 (1895)). ScuovEN: Om nogle for Norges og tildels ogsaa for Skandinaviens fauna nye Lepidoptera. (, Kristiania Videnskabsselsk. Forh.“ 1881). WALLENGREN: Skandinaviens arter af Tineidgruppen Lithocolletidae (Srr. (Entom. tidsskrift* 1883). SoRHAGEN: Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Gattung Lithocolletis. (“Illustr. Zeitschr. für Ent.^ V, 1900)). .WALLENGREs: Skandinaviens Tineae operculatae. (Entom. tidsskrift", 1881). WzmwEBURG: Beiträge zur Schmetterlingskunde. I-II. Erfurt 1864. SCHOYEN: Tilvæxt til Norges Lepidopterfauna. (,Entom. tidsskrift", 1884). ZELLER: Drei Schabengattungen: Incurvaria, Micropteryx und Ne- mophora. („Linnaea entomologica", V). Trykt den 11te April 1904, 180 EMBR. STRAND. Bemerkninger til Myntmester Münsters Nye norske Coleoptera“. Av Embr. Strand. Hr. Myntmester Münster har i sin opsats om nye norske Coleoptera (i dette tidsskrifts 41. bind, 3. hefte) skrevet en petitanmerkning paa 1'/, side + et par mindre anmerkninger for at paavise, at mine coleopterologiske arbeider har liden videnskabelig verdi. I den anledning skal jeg herved tillade mig at komme med nogle bemerkninger, idet jeg forbeholder mig senere ved given leilighed at komme tilbage til sagen. Da jeg nemlig for tiden opholder mig i udlandet og hverken har min samling eller synderlig av litteratur, i hvert fald ikke av skandinavisk coleopterologisk littera- tur, til disposition og desuden er optaget med ganske andre zoologiske studier, saa kan jeg nu ikke i alle tilfælde give fuld udredning; dette skal der forhaabentlig senere blive anledning til. Jeg har, netop for at sikre mig, at mit materiale kunde blive saa rigtig bestemt som overhovedet muligt, sendt dette til Europas første specialister, som f. eks. Bernsaver og Fauver. Dette er efter hr. Münsters mening ganske forkjert. Hr. Münster hævder den anskuelse, hvorom han vistnok turde være saa temmelig alene, at bestemmelser og faunistiske arbeider kun kan blive paalidelige, naar de udføres av indenlandske fagmænd. Tiltrods for at Fauvel og Bernhauer i lange tider udelukkende har studeret staphylinider og vel at merke staphylinider fra de forskjelligste lande, saa er de dog ifølge hr. Münster ikke kompetente til at give paa- lidelige bestemmelser av norske staphylinider; det kan kun norske fag- mænd. — Konsekvenserne af dette hr. Münsters princip turde blive av en noksaa eiendommelig art. Saaledes vil alt hvad Bernhauer eller Fauvel har skrevet om respektive ikke-osterrigske eller ikke-franske arter blive at anse for upaalideligt; saalænge f. eks. Fauvels bestemmelser af nordafri- kanske staphylinider ikke „er granskede og pány gjennemgäede“ av en afrikaner, tor hr. Münster ikke stole paa dem. Tachinus scapularis Sen. fra Kongsberg og Vefsen skal være T. lati- collis Grav. ifolge hr. Münster. Dr. Bernhauer har bestemt mig vedkom- mende eksemplarer som scapularis og i tillid dertil har jeg optaget dem i min fortegnelse i ,Arch. f, math. og naturv.^ XXII, nr. 3, under dette BEMERKN. TIL MYNTMESTER MÜNSTER. 181 navn. Hvorvidt der foreligger nogen forveksling for de til universitets- museet indleverede eksemplarers vedkommende, og hvordan den kan være foregaaet, fra Bernhauers eller min side, derom kan jeg nu ikke sige noget bestemt. I hvert fald er Münsters „sie!“ i dette tilfælde ganske unodven- digt; thi arterne er ifølge alle forfattere nærstaaende (saaledes opforer f. eks. EmrcHsow: Genera et spec. Staph., pag. 261, Tachinus pallipes var. (= scapularis Stew.) som nr. 98, T. marginellus (= laticollis Gr.) som nr. 31 og sammenligner begge med 7. rufipes; likesaa behandles de som nærstaaende i Desrans Catalogue des Coleoptéres, pag. 80, og i RErrrEns katalog), hvorfor i tilfelde en forveksling vilde være baade lettere for- staaelig og mere undskyldelig. Hr. Münster forteller, at Sresres Tachyporus brunneus er synonym med Tachyporus nitidulus Fer. Dette skulde man saavist ikke have ventet; thi paa Sreskes tid var den almindelige antagelse netop den, at T. brunneus rigtignok var synonym med T. mitidulus Oriv. men ikke med mitidulus Fer. (= hypnorum Fer. if. GEMMINGER og Haroros kat.). (Cfr. herom ERICHSON J. e. pag. 234 og 241; Kraatz: Naturg. d. Ins. Deutsch- lands, II, pag. 423; Gemmincer og Hanorps kat. o. s. v.). At Sırske 1 dette synonymispørsmaal skulde have dannet sig en selvstændig mening, mod- sat nævnte autoriteters, er der ingen grund til at tro, og at han overhovedet opfører arten som brunneus, tyder paa, at han ikke har anset sin form for synonym med mitidulus Fen. da han i saa fald vilde brugt dette, det ældste, navn. Saa det er ganske ugrundet, naar hr. Minster dadler mig for at jeg ikke havde anelse om at Sırsres brunneus var lik min nitidulus Fer.; det bavde heller ikke hr. Münster kunnet finde ud uden ved under- søgelse av Siebkes eksemplar. Saa faar vi vide, at Ocypus globulifer Fourcr. er synonym med Amo- dus morio Grav., at arten allerede var opført av Siebke, og at jeg selv tidligere havde angivet den under navn av Oc. edentulus Br. Til disse oplysninger føier saa hr. Miinster en insinuation om, at jeg ikke kjender Reitters katalog. — Jeg kan fortælle hr. Minster, at jeg kjender meget godt Reırrers katalog (1891), og at der staar aldeles ikke Ocypus globu- lifer og morio opført som synonymer. Likesaalidt i Gritts katalog. Og GEMMINGER og Harorps katalog (p. 584) identificerer heller ikke globulifer og morio, likesaalidt Kraarz 1. c. pag. 556. — Man kan her fristes til at anvende Münsters egne ord om at lidt mere kritik i publikationerne vilde være heldigt. | Med hensyn til Amara torrida lui. saa havde jeg, som allerede an- givet i vedkommende avhandling, ikke selv samlet og etiketteret vedkom- mende eksemplar, saa for lokaliteten kan jeg ikke indestaa. — For Stenus bilineatus og Falagria sulcata gjælder samme bemerkning som for Tachinus scapularis. Fremdeles kjender Myntmester Münster en hel del findesteder for arter, som jeg har betegnet som „sjeldne“. — Jeg tviler ikke paa, at hr. Münster kjender endnu flere findesteder for en hel del av de av SIEBKE som ,sjeldne“ betegnede arter. Hvorfor saa ikke likesaa godt gjøre Siebke bebreidelser som mig? — Hvad der findes, eller ikke findes i Miinsters 182 EMBR. STRAND. BEMERKN. TIL MYNTMESTER MÜNSTER. private samling, det kan man dog ikke forudsættes at have kjendskab til, saalænge derom ingenting er publiceret. Saa erklerer hr. Münster det for „absolut uriktig^, at Otiorrhynchus atroapterus D. G. og Nebria brevicollis Farr. skulde kunne forekomme i Hallingdal, fordi de er begge udprægede maritime former. — At Of. atro- apterus kan betegnes som en maritim form er sandt nok; den kan dog ogsaa forekomme i indlandet. Saaledes staar det i Søruns Revision der europ. Otiorhynchus-Arten, pag. 103, at den forekommer „namentlich (altsaa ikke udelukkende!) an den Küsten“. Naar det er tilfældet i andre lande, skulde det ikke være utænkeligt, at den ogsaa hos os kunde forekomme som en sjeldenhed i indlandet. I hvert fald har ikke Münster fnug av bevis for at min opgave om dens forekomst i Hallingdal er ,absolut uriktig^; lidt mindre bestemte udtryk kunde derfor gjort det. — Endnu mindre holdbar blir hr. Münsters paastand for Nebria brevicollis Fer.’s vedkommende. Det er hr. Minster forbeholdt at opdage, at dette er en udpræget maritim art; andre forfattere kjender ikke til det. Jeg skal anføre nogle opgifter om dens forekomst. — Sturm: Deutschlands Insecten, III, pag. 140, siger: „Fast überall in Deutschland. Ich traf ihn.... in Waldern.... oft in grosser Menge“. — Drsean: Species generale.. II, pag. 234, anforer: „Elle se trouve trés-communément dans toute l'Europe, sous les pierres et au pied des arbres, sous les'feuilles séches*. — ScHAUM: Naturg. Ins. Deutschlands, I, pag. 97, har kort og godt: „Ueber ganz Europa“. — HocmnuvrH: Enum. d. in Kiew u. Volhynien aufgef. Kafer, pag. 9, har fundet den „in Laubwäldern unter Baumrinde und faulen Blättern“. Og GYLLENHAL (JI, pag. 39) skriver: „Habitat in truncis putridis, ad radices arborum et sub lapidibus, locis umbrosis. Fremdeles: i Rerrrers katalog mangler betegnelsen „mar.“ (= maritim) for denne art. O. s. v. Ingen av disse autorer nævner med et ord, at denne art skulde være udpræget mari- tim. — Men hr. Miinster tager ikke i betænkning at betegne min opgift om dens forekomst i et indlandsdistrikt som ,absolut uriktig^! Og det til trods for at han hverken har set mine eksemplarer eller selv samlet paa vedkommende lokaliteter eller har nogetsomhelst andet sikkert at støtte sin paastand til! Hr. Minster omtaler, ovenikjøbet to gange, temmelig umotiveret, at O. M. Reuter har havt noget at udsætte paa et hemipterologisk arbeide av mig. Hertil bemerker jeg kun, at hr. Münster burde have oppebiet mit svar til Reuter (dette var nemlig endnu ikke trykt, da Münsters avhandling udkom), for han opkasted sig til dommer i sagen. For dem som maatte interessere sig derfor henvises til „Entomologisk tidsskrift^ 1903, hvor saa- vel Reuters ,kritik^ som mit svar findes. Marburg 1 Hessen, decbr. 1908. Trykt den 1ite April 1904. Om vegetationen i Granvin. Af S. K. Selland. Som hører til de inderste bygder i Hardanger. Her- redet er 189,04 km.? stort og grænser mod nord og vest til Voss, mod syd til Ullensvang og mod øst til Ulvik. Fra den S km. lange Granvinsfjord, en gren af Hardangerfjorden, og Granvinsvandet hæver bygden sig for det meste brat opover mod de fjeldstrækninger, der fører over til nabobygderne. Det faste underlag dannes især af grundfjeld og blødere skifere. Sidstnævnte er særlig fremtrædende paa vestsiden af Granvinsvandet, samt paa østsiden af dette 1 den fjeldstrækning, der fører over til Ulvik. De høieste fjeldtoppe 1 herredet naar op til over 1500 m. o. h., men dækkes ingensteds af store stedseliggende snemasser. Ifølge de meteorologiske iagttagelser paa den 345 m. o. h. liggende gaard Espeland?, ı et trangt dalføre, som fører over til Ulvik, er aarets middeltemperatur 4,2” C. For de enkelte maaneder stiller forholdet sig saaledes: 1 Tidligere skrivemaade Graven. ? Se „Klima“ 1 J. Vibe, Beskrivelse over Søndre Bergenhus amt. 184 S. K. SELLAND. Januar... — 3,6” C. JDE 4.2. +13,5 Februar .. — 4,1 August... +13,2 Mars . ... — 24 September . + 8,8 April) 295580257] Oktober .. + 3,9 Man + 7,8 November . — 0,1 Js oo 0 6 +13,0 December . — 2,7 Den laveste observerede temperatur er — 23° C. og den’ hei- este + 28,5 C. Den aarlige nedbørmængde er gjennemsnitlig 1442 mm. hvoraf i Januar... 150 mm. Juli .... 133 mm. Februar . 107 , August... 130 , Mars... 101 , September 159 „ April... 55 , Oktober . 161 , Mais eacus November 146 „ June cea LOO. December 148 „ I den ældre litteratur foreligger kun ganske faa og spredte angivelser om plantefund i Granvin. Saaledes anforer MARCUS ScHNABEL i ,Udkast til en Beskrivelse over Hardanger*, udgivet af Hans Strom 1781, fra kjendte steder i Granvin 4 plante- arter, nemlig Lobelia Dortmanna, Prenanthes flosculis quinis (= Lactuca mwralis), Potentilla norvegica og Alchemilla vulgaris. S. C. SOMMERFELT nævner i sine „Bemerkninger paa en botanisk Excursion til Bergens Stift“ (Mag. for Naturv. IX 1898) granens forekomst paa grænsen af Granvin og Voss. I M. N. og A. Brvrr „Norges Flora“ angives kun 17 arter, deraf 7 hieracier, efter iagttagelse af A. Briytt, H. Greve, C. J. LinDEBERG, Mernicu, H. L. Sorensen og N. WULFSBERG. I tre Nye bidrag til kundskaben om karplanternes udbredelse 1 Norge" (Christiania Videnskabsselskabs Forhandlinger 1882, 1892 og 1897) har A. Brytt eget antallet med henholdsvis 1, 12 og 5 arter, fundne af CRAIG, JAN GREVE, J. Havaas, A. LANDMARK, S. K. SELLAND samt ham selv. Endelig nævner S. 0. F. OMANG 1 sine „Hieraciologiske undersøgelser i Norge I* en for OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 185 Granvin ny Hieraciwm, samlet af nærværende forfatter. falt angives saaledes 1 litteraturen kun 41 arter karplanter som fundne i Granvin; disse er 1 fortegnelsen merkede med en stjerne (*). 4 Hieracium-arter er ikke gjenfundne. I en aarrække har jeg leilighedsvis botaniseret 1 min hjem- bygd Granvin. Ved et offentligt stipendium blev jeg sommeren 1901 sat istand til at gjøre undersøgelserne mere fuldstændige. Som indberetning om anvendelsen af dette stipendium frem- kommer nærværende skildring af bygdens vegetation. Eksem- plarer af de merkeligere fundne planter er indsendt til universi- tetets botaniske museum. Til professor, dr. N. WirLE, konservator ved botanisk mu- seum, cand. mag. 0. DAHL, adjunkt S. 0. F. ÖMANG og amanuensis Jens Horms»or, der har bistaaet mig med veiledning og bestem- melse af planter, frembæres min bedste tak. Ligesaa til herr J. Havaas, der velvillig har meddelt mig mange specielle vokse- steder og en del lokalnavne paa planter. Granvins flora tæller 557 kjendte arter af karplanter. An- gaaende vegetationsforholdene ı sin almindelighed kan anføres følgende: Løvskogen dannes særlig af bjerk og graaor; men ogsaa hassel, rogn, ask, lind, asp, heg, alm og tildels ek danner en vigtig del af skogbestanden og dækker de bratte, solvarme lier. Furuen er skogdannende særlig i Nestaas- og Kollenesaasen paa vestsiden af Granvinsvandet og 1 Espelandsdalen med nærmeste omgivelser. Gran findes enkeltvis paa de fleste gaarde, men i større antal kun paa gaarden Moe, som grænser ind til gran- skogen paa Voss!. I Nestaas- og Kollenesaasen, der skraaner mod nord og nordøst, har 1 de senere aar spiret frem en mængde 1 Cfr. A. T. GrernsEN, Vestlandsgranen og dens Indvandringsveie. (Den norske Forstforenings Aarbog 1884). 186 S. K. SELLAND. selvsaaede granplanter, men de hugges væk efterhvert for at skaffe plads for furuen. | Lavlandsfloraen i Granvin har meget tilfælles med den ost- landske, paa samme tid som mange kystplanter gaar ind her. Af strandplanter, som vokser ved Granvinsfjorden, kan nævnes: Elymus arenarius, Carex maritima, Blysmus rufus, Plantago maritima, Armeria maritima, Haloscias scoticum, Cochle- aria officinalis, Silene maritima. Granvins flora teller ogsaa mange kystplanter, f. eks. Polystichum Oreopteris, Blechnum Spicant, Holcus mollis, Carex pulicaris, C. silvatica, Luzula maxima, Narthecium Ossifragun, Taxus baccata, Galium saxatile, Lonicera Periclymenum, Digitalis purpurea, Chry- sosplenium oppositifolium. | De interessanteste botaniske felter 1 Granvin er de bratte styrtninger fra Aadnagavedln mod Granvinsfjorden ved Eide, Granvinsvandet, urerne under Joberget, fjeldet mellem Granvin og Ulvik samt strøget omkring Krokavatnet paa grænsen mel- lem Granvin og Voss. | Aadnagavedln naar op til en høide af omkring 400 m. De bratte styrtninger, der dannes dels af lerskifer, dels af grund- fjeld, vender mod syd og dækkes al en frodig vegetation af løvtrær, de for urer almindelige vekster og en del sjeldnere arter. Allerede tidlig vækkes vaarplanterne af sin dvale. I slutten af mars findes almindelig Saxifraga oppositifolia i blomst 1 en høide af 330—350 m. o. h., og Carex digitata allerede i april. I disse styrtninger vokser Asplenium Breynii, A. ruta mu- raria, Carex muricata, C. silvatica, Epipactis Helleborine, Pyrola media, P. chlorantha, Hypericum montanum, H. perforatum, Orobus vernus. Endvidere Hieraciwm hyalo- trichum ÖMANG n. f. Granvinsvandet er 3,64 km.? stort og ligger henimod 30 m. over havfladen. Det modtager elvene og bækkene fra den største del af bygden og har aflob til Granvinsfjorden ved Eide. Dets storste dybde er 86 m., men flere steder findes storre grunde OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 187 strekninger. Paa disse vokser Eqwisetum flwviatile, Isoötes lacustris, I. echinospora, Phragmites communis i mængde ved Nesheim, Potamogeton natans, Sparganium affine, Calli- triche stagnalis, C. verna, C. hamulata, Littorella lacustris, Lobelia Dortmanna. Paa Nesheim ved Seimselvens udlob i Granvinsvandet vokser Bulliarda aquatica. Langs stranden vokser paa flere steder Carex vesicaria, C. ampullacea, Lysi- machia thyrsiflora, L. vulgaris, Ranunculus reptans, Na- sturtium palustre, N. silvestre, Subularia aquatica. Paa et enkelt sted findes Carex pulicaris, paa et andet Iris Pseuda- corus. Mellem Joberget og Granvinsvandet ligger store sten- urer, dels nøgne, dels dækkede af en frodig plantevekst. De almindeligste urteagtige karakterplanter 1i disse urer er fol. gende: Polypodium vulgare, Woodsia ilvensis, Dactylis glo- merata, Festuca gigantea, Triticum caninum, Carex muricata, Urtica dioica, Polygonum dumetorum, Valeriana sambucifolia, Artemisia vulgaris, Tanacetum vulgaris, Lappa minor, Lamp- sana communis, Lactuca muralis, Asperula odorata, Galeopsis Tetrahit, Calamintha Acinos, C. Clinopodium, Origanum vul- gare, Verbascum nigrum, V. Thapsus, Scrophularia nodosa, Linaria vulgaris, Æthusa Cynapium, Torilis Anthriscus, Se- dum album, Thalictrum minus, Erysimum hieracifolium, Hypericum quadrangulwm, Geranium Robertianum, Epilo- bium montanum, Geum urbanum, Agrimonia Eupatoria, Lathyrus pratensis, Vicia silvatica, V. Cracca, V. sepium, Ervum tetraspermum. Paa fjeldstrakningen mellem Granvin og Ulvik findes en hel del skifer, og vegetationen fremviser flere af de arter, der fortrinsvis holder sig paa de løsere bergarter. Her er to finde- steder for Dryas octopetala, nemlig i Granvin i nærheden af Kvasshovd og paa skraaningen af Ravnanuten i Ulvik, paa førstnævnte sted i en høide af ca. 1100 m., paa sidstnævnte sted 950—1000 m. o. h. Paa begge steder er følgende arter fundne 188 S. K. SELLAND. sammen med Dryas octopetala: Festuca ovina, Salix reticu- lata, Polygonum viviparum, Vaccinium uliginosum, V. vitis idea, Arctostaphylos alpina, Thalictrum alpinum, Silene acaulis, Empetrum nigrum, Alchemilla alpina, Potentilla verna* major. Ved Ravnanuten desuden: Selaginella spinu- losa, Aira alpina, Poa alpina, Carex capillaris, Juncus tri- fidus, Tofieldia borealis, Antennaria dioica, Campanula rotundifolia, Gentiana nivalis, G. campestris, Euphrasia offi- cinalis, Pinguicula vulgaris, Andromeda hypnoides, Phyllo- doce coerulea, Saxifraga oppositifolia, S. aizoides, Parnassia palustris, Cerastiwm alpinum, Alchemilla vulgaris” alpestris, Astragalus alpinus. Ved Kvasshovd: Carex saxatilis, Saus- surea alpina, Solidago virga aurea, Vaccinium Myrtillus, Andromeda polifolia. Krokavatnet ligger 572 m. o. h. og er 0,70 km? stort. Grænselinjen mellem Granvin og Voss gaar omtrent midt over vandet. Dets afløb, der gaar gjennem flere mindre fjeldvande, falder i Granvinsfjorden ved Folkedal. De omliggende fjelde bestaar dels af haardere, dels af blødere bergarter, og særlig paa de sidste udfolder sig en rig plantevekst. I Krokavatnet vokser: Equisetum fluviatile, Isoétes lacustris, I. echinospora, Carex ampullacea, Potamogeton natans, Sparganium affine, S. hyperboreum, Lobelia Dortmanna, Utricularia minor. I flere tjern, som dannes af den fra vandet rindende elv, vokser Nuphar pumilum, ved elvekanten Lycopodium inundatum. Nær Krokavatnet ligger sæteren Nyastol (Sellandsstol), hvor der paa et indhegnet stykke mark findes Equisetum hyemale (kun en enkelt tue; ellers ikke bemerket i Granvin), Hieracium scan- dicum N. & P. (= H. awrantiacum 8 glaucescens) og Dentaria bulbifera. Paa vestsiden af Krokavatnet hæver Skaandalshorgen sig til en høide af 1094 m. o. h. Størstedelen hører Voss til, men en del af dens sydostlige skraaninger ligger 1 Granvin. Skifer, gneis og blaakvarts veksler. Thalictrum minus, der sedvanlig holder sig i de laveste egne, vokser her i en høide af OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 189 800 m. o. h. I samme høide vokser Vicia silvatica, Actæa spicata, Arenaria serpyllifolia, Rosa villosa (med hvide blom- ster), Sedum album, Viburnum Opulus og Verbascum Thap- sus. Her findes endvidere Woodsia hyperborea, Arabis petræa, Draba hirta; paa underlag af blaakvarts vokser den af adjunkt S. O. F. ÖMANG som ny form betegnede Hieracium perlanatum, ca. 300 m. o. h. Nesheimshorgen kaldes den fjeldryg, som gaar fra Kroka- vatnet over til Skjervet ved gaarden Moe. Her vokser Carex rufina, Poa laca (sparsomt), Gentiana purpurea; længere nede vokser Adoxa moschatellina 1 en heide af ca. 900 m. o. h. Paa de nordlige grænsefjelde mod Voss, der for det meste dan- nes af haarde bergarter, findes Carex rufina og Poa laxa i mangde. Her vokser endvidere Luzula arcwata og Viscaria alpina. Fortegnelse over de i Granvin fundne karplanter. Equisetaceæ D. C. Equisetum arvense L. Almindelig. E. pratense Kuru. Sjelden: Ystaas 300 meter over havfladen; ved Granvinsvand. E. sylvaticum L. „Kjeringarokk“!. Alm. E. palustre L. Flere steder. E. fluviatile L. Alm. E. hyemale L. ,Skavgras*. Sj: Nyastøl, 590 m. o. h. Kun en liden tue. 1 De norske plantenavne, der bruges i bygden, er overalt tilfoiede 1 anførselstegn; deres skrivemaade er lagt saa nær udtalen, som det har været muligt. 190 S. K. SELLAND. Filices L. Polypodium vulgare L. ,Siseljerot“. Alm. P. Phegopteris L. „Fuglaburtn“. Alm. P. rheticum L. Alm. P. Dryopteris L. Alm. Woodsia ilvensis R. Br. Alm. *W. hyperborea R. Br. Sj.: Skaandalshorgen og ved Kroka- vatnet. Aspidium Lonchitis Sw. Alm. * 4. angulare W. K. Alm. Polystichum Oreopteris D. C. Alm. P. Filio mas Rotn. Alm. P. spinulosum D. C. Alm. P. dilatatwn Br. Hist og her. Cystopteris fragilis BERNH. Alm. Asplenium Filix femina Berna. ,Burtn*. Alm. („Burtn“ bruges ogsaa som fællesnavn for de fleste bregner). . Trichomanes L. Alm. . viride Hups. Ikke saa alm. som foregaaende. . septentrionale Sw. Alm. . Breynii Retz. Sj: Aadnagavedin. . ruta muraria L. Sj: Ved Krokavatnet; Aadnagavedln; Nestaasgeilane (J. Havaas). Pleris aquilina L. „Einstabbe“. Alm. Blechnum Spicant Rote. Alm. Struthiopteris germanica, Win. Alm. Allosurus crispus BERNH. „Hestaspreng“. „Torrbola“. Alm. B. p pa guo À Botrychium Lunaria Sw. Hist og her. Isoëteæ Ricu. Isoötes lacustris (L.) Dur. Findes baade i Granvinsvandet og flere af fjeldvandene. "I. echinospora Dur. Ligesaa. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 191 Lycopodiaceæ D. C. Lycopodium Selago L. „Lusagras“. Alm. *L. inundatum L. Flere steder. L. annotinum L. Alm. | L. alpinum L. ,Javne^. Alm. L. clavatum L. Alm. (L. annotinum og L. elavatum gaar under navn af „kraokefot“). Selaginella spinulosa A. Br. Alın. Gramineæ Juss. Alopecurus pratensis L. I kunstig eng. A. geniculatus L. Alm. Phleum pratense L. Især i kunstig eng. P. alpinum L. Alm. B commutatum Gaup. Sj: Nesheimshorgen (J. Havaas). Phalaris arundinacea L. Alm. Holcus mollis L. Flere steder paa vestsiden af Granvinsvandet. H. lanatus L. I kunstig eng. Anthoxanthum odoratum L. Alm. Miliwm. effusum L. Paa østsiden af Granvinsfjorden. Agrostis spica venti L. I kunstig eng (J. Havaas). A. vulgaris Wits. Alm. A, alba L. Flere steder. A. canino, L. Alm. A. rubra L. Alm. Calamagrostis Epigeios Roru. Flere steder. C. Pseudophragmites (Link) Reus. Alm. Phragmites communis Trin. Granvinsvandet ved Nesheim. Aira cespitosa L. Alm. A. alpina L. Alm. A. flexuosa L. Alm. B montana L. Flere steder tilfjelds. Vahlodea atropwrpwrea Fr. Mange steder. 199 S. K. SELLAND. Trisetum flavescens P. B. Nesheim i kunstig eng. Triodia decwmbens P. B. Alm. Poa annua L. Alm. P. laxa Haenxe. Paa de hoieste fjelde, især alm. paa de nordlige af dem. P. alpina L. Alm.; 1 Aadnagavedln gaar den ned til 35 m. o. h. P. trivialis L. Alm. P. nemoralis WAHLENB. Alm. P. glauca Vant. Nesheimshorgen. P. cesia Sw. Alm. P. pratensis L. Alm. Glyceria fluitans W AHLENB. Alm. Melica nutans L. Alm. Molinia cærulea MorncH. „Flisagras“. Alm. Dactylis glomerata L. Mange steder. Cynosyrus cristatus L. Af og til 1 kunstig eng. Festuca ovina L. Alm. B vivipara. Alm. F. rubra L. Alm. F. elatior L. Mange steder. F. gigantea ViLLARs. Er funden i urerne under Joberget og i Nestaasberget. Bromus mollis L. Alm. * Brachypodium sylvaticwn R. & S. Mange steder. Lolium perenne L. I kunstig eng. Triticum repens L. Mange steder. T. caninum ScHREB. Alm. Elymus arenarius L. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Nardus stricta L. „Fintopp“. Alm. Cyperaceæ D. C. Carex dioica L. Alm. C. pulicaris L. Sj.: Lines ved Granvinsvandet. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 193 C. C. KMS GS Ea eo. ooo OS Go CO OS Ge pauciflora Licutr. Alm. microstachya Kuru. Sj: En myr nedenfor Nesheimshorgen, ca. 760 m. o. h., 1 selskab med C. dioica, C. canescens, C. vulgaris og C. irrigua. helvola Bu. Funden ved Geituren og mellem Hondalsnuten og Augnasæt i Granvin. . muricata L. Aadnagavedin; urerne under Joberget; Nes- heimslien. . lagopina WAHLENB. Alm. . leporina, L. Alm. . stellulata Goop. Alm. . Persoomii SigB. Alm. . camescens L. Alm. rufina DR. I mængde paa Stavaskardnut ca. 1180 m. o. h.; Kvasshovd; Hondalsnut paa grænsen mellem Granvin og Voss; Nesheimshorgen og Smøreggen (J. Havaas). . alpina Sw. Geituren. . atrata L. Alm. . saxatilis Gunn. Alm. pulla Goop. Kvasshovd og nedenfor Hondalsnuten. . vulgaris Fr. Alm. . juncella Tu. Fr. Især ved Granvinsvandet. maritima MÜLLER. Ved Granvinsfjorden. . pilulifera L. Alm. flava L. Alm. Oederi EnmH. Alm. vaginata Tausch. Alm. panicea L. Alm. . pallescens L. Alm. limosa L. Flere steder. irrigua SM. Alm. . sylvatica Hups. Sj: Aadnagavedln. . capillaris L. Alm. . digitata L. Alm. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXLL. III. 13 194 S. K. SELLAND. C. filiformis L. Flere steder. C. vesicaria L. Granvinsvandet. C. ampullacea Goop. „Störgras“. Alm. Rhynchospora alba Vart. Kun funden i Espelandsdalen og paa fjeldet mellem Granvin og Ulvik. Blysmus rufus Link. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Scirpus cæspitosus L. Alm. S. pauciflorus LiGHTr. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Heleocharis palustris R. Br. Flere steder. H. uniglumis Kocx. Alm. Eriophorum alpinum L. Flere steder. E. vaginatum L. Alm. E. capitatum Host. Alm. E. angustifolium Rota. ,Fivedl“. Alm. Alismaccæ R. Br. Triglochin maritimum L. Ved Granvinsfjorden. T. palustre L. Flere steder. Scheuchzeria palustris L. Flere steder. Juncaceæ AGARDH. Juncus conglomeratus L. Sj: Espelandsdalen; Folkedal. J. filiformis L. Alm. J. castaneus SMITH. Sj: Mellem Krokavatnet og Skaandals- horgen; nedenfor Nesheimshorgen. (J. Havaas). biglumis L. Alm. triglumis L. Alm. trifidus L. Alm. articulatus L. Alm. alpinus Vit. Alm. bulbosus L. Ved Granvinsfjorden. buffonius L. Alm. Se OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 195 J. supinus MokENcH. Alm. Luzula pilosa WırLn. Alm. L. maxima Dzsv. Ved Granvinsfjorden. L. campestris D. C. Alm. L. arcwata Hook. Sj: Stavaskardnut; Hondalsnut paa græn- sen mellem Granvin og Voss}. L. spicata Desv. Alm. Melanthaceæ R. Br. Narthecium Ossifragum Hups. Alm. Tofieldia borealis WAHLENB. Alm. Liliaceæ Juss. Gagea lutea ScHuLt. Alm. Smilaceæ R. Br. Paris quadrifolia L. ,Trodlagras^. Alm. Convallaria verticillata L. Alm. C. Polygonatum L. „Sentögerot“. Alm. C. majalis L. ,Blaosarespire“. Gjeitøyra. Alm. Majanthemum bifolium D. C. Alm. Iridex R. Br. "Iris Pseudacorus L. Sj.: Nesheim ved Granvinsvandet. Den angives af Brvrr i „Norges Flora“ at skulle vokse ved Eide; dens voksested der har det ikke lykkedes mig at gjenfinde. 1 L. hyperborea R. Br. er funden nær grænsen af Granvin paa Grimsnut i Ulvik 1200 m. o. h. 196 S. K. SELLAND. Orchideæ R. Br. Malaxis paludosa Sw. Sj.: Storemyr paa Havaas, ca. 540 m. o. h. Corallorhiza innata, R. Br. Flere steder. Orchis mascula L. Mange steder. 0. maculata L. ,Marihaand*. Alm. Gymnadenia conopsea R. Br. Flere steder. Platanthera bifolia Rcus. Mange steder. Peristylis viridis Linpt. Mange steder. B bracteata. Sj.: Nesheimshorgen. P. albidus Linz. Sj: Aasene. Listera cordata, R. Br. Flere steder. Epipactis Helleborine Cr. Sj.: Aadnagavedln. *Goodyera repens R. Br. Sj: Kollenes- og Nestaasaasen. Potameæ Juss. Potamogeton natans L. Alm. Typhaceæ D. C. Sparganium affine Scunirzt. Alm. S. glomeratum Last. En form i Seimselven ved dens udlob i Granvinsvandet synes at tilhøre denne art. S. hyperboreum Last. Alm. 1 fjeldvandene. Cupressineæ Ricx. Juniperus communis L. „Brakje“. Alm. Abietineæ Rican. Pinus silvestris L. „Füra“. Alm. "Picea excelsa Linx. ,Grön*. Hist og her enkeltvis; 1 større antal paa gaarden Moe, der grænser til granskogen paa Voss. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 197 Taxineæ Ricx. Taxus baccata L. „Barlind“. Barlindskaar paa vestsiden af Granvinsfjord; Barlindskaar paa Haugse; Kjerlandsskaa- rane; Hamre; Folkedal. Kun faa eksemplarer paa hvert sted. Callitrichaceæ Linvu. Callitriche stagnalis Scor. Granvinsvandet. C. verna Kürze. Alm. *C. hamulata Körze. I vasdraget fra Moevandet til Granvins- vandet. Myriceæ Rica. Myrica Gale L. „Post“. Flere steder, især ı den østlige del af bygden. Betulaceæ Bartt. Betula verrucosa Enru. Mange steder. B. odorata BEcusr. Alm. Fællesnavn for Betula-arter: ,Bjørk*. D. intermedia THom. Hist og her. B. alpestris Fr. Hist og her. B. nana L. Mange steder. Alnus incana D. C. „Orr“. Alm. A. glutinosa GÆRTN. „Svartorr“. Sj.: Ved Granvinsfjorden. Cupuliferæ Rıcn. Quercus pedunculata Kuru. „Eik“. Mange steder. Corylus Avellana L. ,Hatl*. Alm. Ulmaceæ Mir». Ulmus montana Sw. ,Alm*. Alm. 198 S. K. SELLAND. Urticaceæ ENDL. Urtica dioica L. „Brennenaata“. Alm. U. urens L. Flere steder. Cannabineæ ENDL. Humulus Lupulus L. ,Humle*. Hunplanten findes flere steder ; blev tidligere dyrket. Salicineæ Ricu. Salix caprea L. „Selja“. Alm. . aurita L. Mange steder. . repens L. Alm. . hastata L. Mange steder. . phylicifolia (L.) Sw. Eksemplarer fra Havaas synes at til- here denne art. AR DRAR in . nigricans Sm. Mange steder. . glauca L. Alm. QAR . lapponum L. Eksemplarer fra Stavaskardnut synes at til- høre denne art. . lanata L. Flere steder. . herbacea L. Alm. . polaris WAHLENB. Sj: Kvasshovd (J. Havaas). . reticulata L. Mange steder. . myrsiniles L. Flere steder. De fleste Salix-arter gaar under navn af „vier“. Populus tremula L. ,Osp*. Alm. o) i i» U On ria Salsolaceæ Mog. Chenopodium album L. Alm. B viride (L.. Alm. Atriplex patwla L. Mange steder. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 199 Polygoneæ Juss. Oxyria reniformis Hook. Alm. Rumex obtusifolius L. Sj.: Nesheim. R. crispus L. Ved Granvinsfjorden. KR. domesticus Hartm. ,Høymola*. Alm. R. Acetosella L. „Taksyra“. Alm. R. Acetosa L. ,Syra^. ,Syrestylk*. Alm. Polygonum aviculare L. Alm. P. Hydropiper L. Alm. P. Persicaria L. Alm. P. lapathifolium L. Flere steder. P. viviparum L. „Bakkarot“. Alm. P. Convolvulus L. Alm. P. dumetorum L. Flere steder i urer. Fagopyrum tataricum Gartn. Flere steder. Plantagineæ VENT. Littorella lacustris L. Granvinsvandet. Plantago major L. ,Lækjesblokka“. Alm. P. lamceolata L. Alm. P. maritima L. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Plumbagineæ Venn. Armeria maritima Witty. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Valerianeæ D. C. Valeriana sambucifolia Mrxan. Alm. Dipsaceæ Juss. Knautia arvensis Court. Alm. Succisa pratensis MogNcH. Alm. 200 S. K. SELLAND. Composita VAL. Tussilago Farfara L. Alm. 3 Solidago virga, aurea L. „Spanskurt“. Alm. p alpestris Reue. Tilfjelds. Erigeron acre L. Hist og her. E. alpinum L. Alm. y leucocephalum Fr. Sj: Nesheimshorgen. E. wniflorum L. Sj: Kvasshovd (J. Havaas). Bellis perennis L. Forvildet paa Eide. Gnaphalium silvaticum L. Alm. G. norvegicum Gunn. Alm. G. uliginosum L. Alm. G. supinum L. Alm. Antennaria dioica GÆRTN. Alm. B hyperborea G. Don. Sj: Skaandalshorgen; Aadnaga- vedln. y corymbosa Hn. Alm., især tilfjelds!. Artemisia vulgaris L. Alm. | Tanacetwm vulgare L. „Reinfann“. Findes plantet paa flere gaarde; vildtvoksende 1 urerne under Joberget. T. Leucanthemum Scnz. Mange steder. Matricaria inodora L. ,Kaunasoleia*. Alm. Anthemis tinctoria L. Af og til 1 kunstig eng. Forste gang funden 1890. Å. arvensis L. I kunstig eng (J. Havaas). Achillea Millefolium L. „Rylık“. Alm. A. Plarmica L. I kunstig eng (J. Havaas). Senecio vulgaris L. Alm. Cirsium lanceolatum Scop. Alm. C. palustre Scop. Alm. C. heterophyllum Air. „Hestablokke“. Alm. C. arvense Scor. Flere steder. ı A. alpina Gærtn. er funden nær grænsen af Granvin paa Midtfjeld 1 Ulvik. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 201 Carduus crispus L. Alm. (Cirsium lanceolatum, C. palustre C. arvense og Carduus crispus kaldes ,tistedl^). Centaurea Jacea L. Alm. Saussurea alpina D. C. Alm. Lappa minor D. C. Alm. Lampsana communis L. Mange steder. Leontodon autumnale L. Alm. B Taraxaci Hartu. Alm. tilfjelds. Taraxacum officinale Wes. ,Kjæsoleia*. „Kvellsveva“. Alm. *Lactuca muralis Fres. Alm. Sonchus asper Vit. Flere steder. S. arvensis L. Flere steder. Mulgedium alpinum Less. ,Turta*. Flere steder. Soyeria paludosa Gopr. Alm. Hieracium. Granvins hieracier er endnu for lidet undersøgte. Jeg har indsamlet følgende arter og former, der er bestemte af adjunkt S. O. F. Omane: H. pilosella L. f. Gaarden Selland. H. awricula L. Selland og flere steder. H. scandicum N. & P. (= H. aurantiacum L. v. glaucescens Lee.). Nyastol og flere steder. H. subpræaltum Lee. Nyastel. H. hyalotrichum Omane mn. f. in litteris. Tilhører gruppen Cymosa. Fra de beslegtede former udmerker den sig ved meget smaa svøb, tæt glinsende haarklædning paa svob og stængelbasis, fuldstændig mangel af glandeler, samt smale svøbblade. Findested: Aadnagavedln. H. perlanatum ÖMANG m. f. in literis. Neer beslegtet med foregaaende, fra hvilken den især afviger ved bladenes form. Den udmerker sig navnlig ved meget tæt, uld- lignende haarklædning paa stængel, kurvstilke og svøb. Findested: Skaandalshorgen. H. glomeratum FRoEL. subsp. Nyastøl. 909 S. K. SELLAND. H. Schmidtii Tauscu. forme. Flere steder. v. Hardangerense ÖMANG m.v. Aadnagavedln. („Udmerket ved grove, mørke haar paa svob og rigelige glandeler paa kurvstilkene“. Omane in litteris). H. Lindebergü Nym. f. Nyastøl; under Joberget. H. saxifragum Fr. v. nemorosum LBG. Ystaas. v. basifolium Les. Ystaas. v. ariglaucum Omanc. Nyastøl. . trichopleum Oman. Under Joberget; Nedre Vatsenden. . stenolepis Arwov. Modif. Aadnagavedin. cæsiiflorum Aımov. f. Gjermundstrædet. . incanatum ÖMANG n. f. in litteris. Tilhører gruppen Sil- valica. Nedre Vatsenden. H. triangulare Atmou. Gjermundstrædet; Aadnagavedln. H. philanthrax Stensrr. Aadnagavedin. H. galbanum Danıst. forme. Havaas; Kollenes. H. gravastellum Dautust. f. Nyastøl. H. basifolium (Fr.) Armov. f. Ystaas. _ H. angustatum Les. Nyastøl; Ystaas. * H. nitens Lac. f. Ystaas; Nyastøl; Kollenes; Kjerland. H. diaphanoides Lae. Gjermundstrædet. * H. subramosum Lonne. v. sanlhostylum Danrsr. Gjer- mundstrædet. A. subrigidum Armov. Selland!. H. rigidum Hw. f. Selland. subsp. Stuvanes; Prestgardstveit. v. spamiophyllum Omane (ad. int.). Kjerland. H. tridentatum Fr. f. Ystaas. H. dovrense Fm. v. pachycephalum Lee. Nyastol. v. lasiolepiwm Omanc (ad. inl.) Nyastøl. * H. prenanthoides Vur. f. Nesheimshorgen. Ej ED E mn 1 Cfr. S. O. F. Omanc, Hieraciologiske undersøgelser i Norge I. p. 248 (N. Mag. f. Naturv. B. 39). OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 203 . alpinum (L. Backe. Modif. Nesheimshorgen. . crispum ErrsrR. f. Stavaskardnut. . corymbosum Fn. f. Ved Krokavatnet. f. hirtellum LiwpgB. Eide (Brvrr). . angustum Les. Ved Krokavatnet. ED OE mq Ed à . wmbellatwm L. Mange steder. v. lineare Lea. Lobeliaceæ BARTL. * Lobelia Dortmanna L. Alm. saavel i Granvinsvandet som 1 - fjeldvandene (f. eks. Krokavatnet, 572 m. o. h.). Campanulaceæ BARTL. Campanula latifolia L. ,Kvita revabjodle". Mange steder. C. rotundifolia L. „Bjedie“. ,Fingerbjor“. Alm. Rubiaceæ Juss. Galium boreale L. „Mauragras“. Alm. G. palustre L. Alm. B decipiens Hw. Aasene. G. Mollugo L. Sj: Kollenestveiten 1 kunstig eng, hvor den har holdt sig adskillige aar. G. verum L. Mange steder. G. sasatile L. Eide; Skaalsæte, 550 m. o. h. G. uliginosum L. Alm. G. Apariné L. „Tene“. Alm. Asperula odorata, L. Mange steder. Caprifoliaceæ A. Rica. Linnea borealis L. Alm. Lonicera Periclymenum L. Ved Granvinstjorden. Viburnum Opulus L. „Beinve(d)“. Alm. ! Cfr. S. O. F. Omane, Hieraciologiske undersøgelser i Norge II. p. 365 (N. Mag. f. Naturv. B. 41). 204 S. K. SELLAND. Oleaceæ LINDL. Fraxinus excelsior L. „Ask“. Alm. Gentianaceæ LINDL. Gentiana purpurea L. ,Søterot*. Mange steder. G. mivalis L. Mange steder. G. campestris L. Flere steder. Menyanthes trifoliata L. „Bukkabla(d)“. Alm. Labiatæ Juss. Mentha arvensis L. „Krusemynta“. Alm. Ajuga pyramidalis L. Alm. Stachys silvatica L. ,Fulendta“. Mange steder. S. palustris L. Mange steder. | Lamium purpureum L. Alm. Galeopsis Tetrahit L. Alm. G. speciosa Mur. ,Dæe*. Alm. G. Ladanum L. Som ugres paa Eide 1903. * Calamintha Acinos Cuamv. Alm. C. Clinopodium Bentn. Alm. *Origanwm vulgare L. „Küng“. Mange steder. Prunella vulgaris L. Alm. Scutellaria galericulata L. : Alm. Asperifoliæ L. Echium vulgare L. Funden flere gange; første gang 1883. Myosotis lingulata Scuuttz. Ved Granvinsvandet. M. silvatica Horrw. Mange steder. M. arvensis Rorx. Alm. * Echinospermum deflexum Leam. Mange steder. Solanaceæ Bart. Solanum nigrum L. Eide som ugræs i en have 1901— 1905. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 205 Scrophulariacee LINDL. Verbascum nigrum L. Mange steder i den nordlige del af bygden. V. Thapsus L. Mange steder. Scrophularia nodosa L. Alm. Linaria vulgaris Miti. Alm. Digitalis purpurea L. ,Røvabjødla*. Flere steder. Veromica arvensis L. Flere steder. V. serpyllifolia L. Alm. V. saxatilis L. Mange steder. V. alpina L. Alm. V. officinalis L. Alm. V. Chamædrys L. Alm. *V. scutellata L. Sj: Sellandshagen. Euphrasia officinalis L. — tenuis (BRENN.) Wettst. Alm. — minima Jacau. Alm. paa myrer tilfjelds. Bartsia alpina L. Alm. Alectorolophus minor W. et Gr. ,Pengagras“. *Engjakadl*. Alm. Pedicularis palustris L. Alm. Melampyrum pratense L. Alm. M. silvaticum L. Alm. Lentibulariaceæ LriwDr. Pinguicula vulgaris L. Alm. Utricularia minor L. Alm.; jeg har kun seet den steril. Primulaceæ VENT. * Primula scotica Hook. Sj.: Smøreggen. P. officinalis Jaco. Lillegraven 1 eng 1903. Glaux maritima L. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Lysimachia thyrsiflora L. Ved Granvinsvandet. 206 S. K. SELLAND. L. vulgaris L. Sj.: Ved Granvinsvandet og elven nedenfor. Trientalis europæa L. Alm. Ericaceæ ENDL. Vaccinium Myrtillus L. ,Blaobær*. Alm. (De sorte, ikke blaaduggede bær kaldes ,ravnabær*). V. uliginosum L. ,Blokkebær*. Alm. V. vitis idea L. ,Tytebær“. Alm. Oxycoccus palustris Pers. 9 microcarpus Rupr. ,Myrabær“. Alm. Arctostaphylos uva ursi SPRENG. Mange steder. A. alpina SPRENG. ,Rjupebær*. Alm. Andromeda polifolia L. Alm. A. hypnoides L. Mange steder. Phyllodoce cærulea Gr. et Gopr. Alm. Azalea procumbens L. Alm. Erica Tetralix L. Sj: Helgasætfjeldet (J. Havaas). Calluna vulgaris SALISB. ,Beiteslyng*. Alm. Hypopityaceæ Krorscn. Pyrola minor L. Alm. P. media Sw. Sj: Styrtningerne fra Aadnagavedln mod Gran- vinsfjorden; Aasene (J. Havaas). P. chlorantha Sw. Sj: Styrtningerne fra Aadnagavedln mod Granvinsfjorden. Monesis uniflora PATzE. Sj: Aasene. Ramäischia secunda Gre. Alm. Umbelliferæ Juss. ZEgopodium Podagraria L. Eide; Holven. Carum Carvi L. ,Karve*. Alm. ! P. rotundifolia L. er funden nær grænsen af Granvin paa Ravnanut i Ulvik. REED EEE OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 207 Pimpinella Saxifraga L. Alm. Haloscias scoticum Fr. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Æthusa Cynapium L. Sj.: Urerne under Joberget. Heracleum sibericum L. Alm. Angelica silvestris L. „Geitaul“. Alm. Archangelica officinalis Horru. ,Fjellkvanna*. Flere steder. *Torilis Anthriscus GmEL. Nestaasberget; urerne under Joberget i mængde; Kløve. Myrrhis odorata Scoe. Sj: Haugse; Kjerland. Oprindelig plantet. Anthriscus silvestris Horrw. „Hundasleikja“. Alm. Araliaceæ Juss. * Adowa moschatellina L. Mange steder, især paa vestsiden af Granvinsvandet; gaar i Nesheimshorgen op til en høide af ca. 900 m. o. h. Cornaceæ LINDL. Cornus suecica L. ,Hønsabær*. Alm. Crassulaceæ D. C. Bulliarda aquatica D. C. Sj: Neshem. Sedum Rhodiola D. C. „Smorbukk“. Alm. S. annuum L. ,Vortegras“. Alm. S. album L. Mange steder. S. acre L. Mange Steder. Saxifragaceæ D. C. Sasifraga Cotyledon L. „Lilja“. Alm. S. stellaris L. Alm. S. nivalis L. Mange steder. 208 S. K. SELLAND. S. oppositifolia L. Alm. S. aizoides L. Alm. B aurantia Fr. D. Hist og her. S. rivularis L. Alm. S. cæspitosa L. Mange steder. Chrysosplenium alternifolium L. Alm. C. oppositifolium L. Sj: Nesheim, ca. 400 m. o. h. Ribesiaceæ ENDL. Ribes Grossularia L. ,Stikkelsbær*. Flere steder forvildet. R. rubrum L. ,Vmmbær*. Ligesaa. Ranunculaceæ Juss. Thalictrum alpinum L. Alm. *T. minus L. Alm.; ved Skaandalshorgen gaar den op til en heide af ca. 800 m. o. h. Anemone nemorosa L. „Symra“. Alm. Ranunculus platanifoliws L. Mauge steder; ved Eide gaar den næsten ned til havets overflade!. . reptans L. Alm. . pygmæus WAHLENB. Flere steder. . repens L. ,Traunskesoleia“. Alm. . acer L. „Smorsoleia“. Alm. . auricomus L. Alm. . Ficaria L. Alm. Caltha palustris L. „Myrasoleia“. Alm. D BU SU DN SU Aquilegia vulgaris L. Sj: Lines ved Granvinsvandet. Aconitum septentrionale Kort. Flere steder i den mod Ulvik grænsende del af bygden. Actæa spicata L. Mange steder. 1 Ranunculus glacialis L. er funden paa fjeldet Oksen i Ullensvang nær grænsen med Granvin. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 209 Fumariaceæ D. C. *Corydalis fabacea Pers. Mange steder. Fumaria officinalis L. Ligesaa. Cruciferæ ADANS. Nasturtium palusire D. C. Ved den ovre del af Granvins- vandet. *N. silvestre R. Br. Langs den ovre del af Granvinsvandet fra Nesheim til Granvins kirke. Barbarea vulgaris R. Br. Flere steder 1 kunstig eng. B. stricta Fr. I kunstig eng (J. Havaas). *Turritis glabra L. Mange steder. Arabis hirsuta Scop. Mange steder. A. Thaliana L. Alm. A. petrea Lam. Sj: Skaandalshorgen. A. alpina L. Flere steder. Cardamine pratensis L. Alm, C. hirsuta L. Alm. C. bellidifolia L. Mange steder. * Dentaria bulbifera L. Nyastol, 590 m. o. h.; nær Skaalsæte, 550 m. o. h.; styrtningerne paa vestsiden af Granvins- fjorden lige ned til sjøen (J. Havaas). * Berteroa incana D. C. Flere steder i kunstig eng. Funden første gang 1888. Draba hirta L. Sj: Steinsætehorgen; Nesheimshorgen (J. Havaas); Skaandalshorgen. D. incana L. Flere steder. Cochlearia officinalis L. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Thlaspi arvense L. Flere steder. * Erysimum hieracifolium L. Flere steder. E. cheiranthoides L. Funden 1890 i kunstig eng. Camelina silvestris WALLR. I kunstig eng (J. Havaas). Capsella bursa pastoris MorncH. Alm. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII III. 14 910 S. K. SELLAND. *Lepidium perfoliatum L. I kunstig eng (J. Havaas). Brassica asperifolia Lam. Funden 18901 en ager. Sinapis arvensis L. Flere steder. S. alba L. Mange steder. Raphanus Raphanistrum L. Af og til som ugræs i agre. De tre sidstnævnte kaldes „mustar“. Subularia aquatica L. Findes baade ved Granvinsvandet og fjeldvandene. Nymphæaceæ SALISB. Nuphar pumilum Sw. I flere fjeldvande. Droseraceæ D. C. Drosera rotundifolia L. Alm. D. longifolia L. Alm. Begge arter kaldes „ringormegras“. B obovata Koch. Sj: Havaas. Parnassia palustris L. Alm. Violaceæ Juss. Viola palustris L. „Kjeringeyra“. Alm. V. biflora L. Mange steder. V. Riviniana Reue. Alm. V. canina, L. Alm. V. tricolor L. „Dag og natt". ,Taksoleia*. Alm. under flere former, f. eks. f. typica Wirtr. og f. versicolor WITTr. En form fra Eide nærmer sig f. aureobadia WITTR. V. arvensis Murr. Eide, som ugræs 1 en have 1903. Portulacaceæ liwpr. Montia fontana. L. a minor GwEL. Alm. B rivularis Fr. Sj: Krossdalen paa Ystaas. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 211 Paronychieæ St. Hi. Scleranthus annuus L. Flere steder. Alsinaceæ BARTL. Spergula arvensis L. Alm. Sagina procumbens L. Alm. S. saxatilis Wımm. Mange steder. Alsine biflora WAHLENB. Sj: Kvasshovd. * Moehringia trinervia Cramrv. Alm. Arenaria serpyllifolia L. Flere steder. Stellaria nemorum L. Alm. S. media VILL. „Vassarve“. Alm. S. graminea L. Alm.; findes især under formen Pacheri Wonrr. =S. Friesiama SER. Sj: Nesheimshorgen; Skjervet. S. uliginosa Murr. Alm. Cerastium alpinum L. Alm. C. trigynum Viii. Alm. C. vulgatum L. Alm. Silenaceæ LINDL. Silene inflata Sm. ,Smedlegras“. Alm. S. maritima Wrrg. Ved Granvinsfjorden og i de lavere dele af bygden. S. rupestris L. Alm. S. acaulis L. Mange steder. Agrostemma Githago L. Af og til som ugræs. Lychnis flos cuculi E. I kunstig eng. Viscaria vulgaris Rorm. Flere steder. V. alpina Fr. Sj: Stavaskardnut; Hondalsnut. Gypsophila vaccaria. Eide, i kunstig eng 1903. Melandrium diurnum Fr. Alm. M. vespertinum Fr. Eide, 1 kunstig eng 1908. 912 S. K. SELLAND. Tiliaceæ Juss. Tilia parvifolia Enr. „Lind“. Alm. Hypericaceæ Linpt. * Hypericum montanum L. Sj.: Aadnagavedln. A. quadrangulum L. ,Harbein*. Alm. H. perforatum L. Sj: Aadnagavedln; Nesheimslien. Polygalaceæ Linn. Polygala vulgaris L. Alm. Rhamnaceæ LINDL. Rhamnus Frangula L. ,Hundabærhegg". ,Trodlabærhegg*. Alm. Empetreæ Nott. Empetrum nigrum L. ,Krækjebær*. Alm. Geraniaceæ D. C. Geranium silvaticum L. Alm. G. Robertianum L. Alm. G. lucidum L. Sj.: Nesheimslien; urerne under Joberget. *G. columbinum L. Sj.: Ved veien langs Granvinsvandet under Joberget. *Erodium cicutarium Herir. Sj: Spilde. Linaceæ LINDL. Linum catharticum L. Alm. L. usitatissimum L. Eide, 1 kunstig eng 1902. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 213 Oxalidaceæ LINDL. Oxalis Acetosella L. „Gaukasyra“. Alm. B lilacina Lee. Sj: Havaas. Balsaminaceæ LinpL. Impatiens noli tangere L. Alm. Onagraceæ LINDL. Epilobium angustifolium L. „Geitskje“. Alm. E. montanum L. Alm. B collinum Koch. Eide. E. anagallidifolium Lam. Mange steder. E. lactiflorum Hausskn. Ligesaa. E. Hornemanni Rcup. Ligesaa. E. palustre L. Alm. Circea alpina L. Alm. Halorageæ R. Br. Hippurus vulgaris L. Flere steder. Myriophyllum alterniflorum D. C. Alm. Pomaceæ LINDL. Pyrus Malus L. „Surapall“. Hist og her. Sorbus Aucuparia L. „Raun“. Alm. S. fennica Karm. ,Asald*. Flere steder. S. Aria Crantz. Flere steder. Cratægus monogyna Jaco. Sj: Urerne under Joberget; Nest- aasberget (J. Havaas). Cotoneaster vulgaris Linpt. Mange steder. 914 S. K. SELLAND. Rosaceæ Juss. * Alchemilla vulgaris L. ,Fedlestakk“. Alm. under flere former: — filicaulis Bus. — alpestris SCHMIDT. — obtusa Bus. A. alpina L. Alm. ' Agrimonia Eupatoria L. Sj: Under Joberget. Rosa camina L. Denne og den folgende art kaldes ,klungr*. Alm. R. villosa L. Alm. Rubus ideus L. ,Bringjebær“. Alm. R. suberectus Anvs. ,Bjødnabær*. Alm. R. cesius L. Ved Granvinsfjorden. Rh. saæatilis L. ,Taogabær*. Alm. R. Chamæmorus L. ,Molta“. Alm. Dryas octopetala L. Sj.: Nær Kvasshovd. Sibbaldia procumbens L. Alm. Geum rivale L. Alm. G. intermedium Enru. Sj: Eide. G. wrbamwm L. Alm. Comarum palustre L. Alm. Potentilla anserina L. ,Mura*. Mange steder. — argentea, Br. Ved Granvinsfjorden. *P norvegica L. Flere steder. P. argentea L. Alm. P. verna L. a) major WanrENB. Mange steder. P. Tormentilla Score. ,Almegras“. „Grisagras“. Alm. Fragaria vesca L. ,Jarbær“. Alm. Spirea Ulmaria L. ,Meurta* (udt.: Me-urta). Alm. Drupaceæ D. C. Prunus Padus L. ,Hegg*. Alm. OM VEGETATIONEN I GRANVIN. 215 Papilionaceæ L. Anthyllis vulneraria L. Mange steder. Trifolium agrarium L. I kunstig eng (J. Havaas). T. repens L. „Kvitklyver“. Alm. T. hybridum L. I kunstig eng. T. pratense L. „Rau(d)klyver“. „Blaohatt“. Alm. Lotus corniculatus L. Alm. Orobus vernus L. Sj: Aadnagavedin!. Lathyrus pratensis L. Flere steder. Vicia silvatica L. Mange steder. V. Cracca L. „Musertragras“. Alm. V. sepium L. Alm. | V. sativa L. Eide, ı kunstig eng 1903. Ervum tetraspermum L. Sj.: Under Joberget. De s. 85 nævnte 4 Hieracium-arter, som tidligere er fundne 1 Granvin, men ikke senere gjenfundne, og som derfor ikke er opført i foregaaende fortegnelse er folgende: H. canescens ScuLEIcH? H. oreades Fr. H. protractum FR. H. crocatum Fn. ! 0. tuberosus L. og Astragalus alpinus L. er fundne nær grænsen af Granvin; den førstnævnte i Ullensvang ved Utnesfjorden, den sidst- nævnte paa Ravnanut i Ulvik. Trykt den 14de April 1904. Motion au Congres international de Botanique Deuxiéme Session. Vienne 1905. I. soussignés se permettent de présenter les dispositions suivantes au vote de l'assemblée: I. II. ITI. Afin d'établir le droit de priorité sur de nouvelles espéces et variétés morphologiques parmi les vé- gétaux thallophytes, 1l faudra à l'avenir publier, non seulement une description, mais une repré- sentation figurée de l'organisme considéré, suffi- samment claire pour faire comprendre la diagnose de l'espéce. Afin de maintenir ce méme droit de priorité sur des genres nouveaux parmi les thallophytes, il faudra, outre la description, présenter aussi (ou se reférer à) la figuration, comme pour l'espéce, dune espéce aumoins parmi celles composant le genre considéré. Ces dispositions entreront en vigueur au 1* jan- vier 1906. Exposé des motifs. Quiconque s'occupe de la détermination d'organismes micro- scopiques reconnait bientót qu'il est souvent fort difficile d'iden- tifier une espéce rien que sur une description, si bonne qu'elle puisse étre. 918 N. WILLE ET V. WITTROCK. Dans certains groupes d'algues, les desmidiacées, les oedo- goniacées, les cladophoracées, les diatomacées etc., il est méme souvent impossible d'identifier une espèce, si l'on n'a pas l'occa- sion de la comparer avec des planches ou avec desexemplaires originaux. Plus à l'avenir parmi les thallophytes, on s'occupera des espéces elémentaires, plus on trouvera de difficultés à les 1den- tifier uniquement sur des descriptions. Le nombre des attribu- tions erronées augmentera dans une proportion inquiétante. Sans vouloir méconnaitre la valeur des exemplaires origi- naux, il convient cependant de faire remarquer que chez les thallophytes, ils ne peuvent pas toujours suppléer à l'absence de bonnes planches. Par la méthode de conservation encore usitée géneralement pour les algues, c. a. d. la dessication, de nombreux groupes d'algues, p. ex. les volvocacées, les ulothri- cacées, les cladophoracées etc. se trouvent fréquemment si modi- fiées qu'il n'est désormais pas possible de les identifier: alors méme qu'on les conserve dans les meilleurs liquides conservateurs, il se produit chez nombre d'espéces des changements tels, qu'il devient difficile ou impossible de les identifier. Ajoutons qu'il peut souvent être difficile d’être fixé sur ce qui constitue lexemplaie original d'une espèce; c'est ce qui a surtout lieu, quand l'espéce en question se présente en peu d'exemplaires dans un mélange composé de beaucoup d'autres algues plus ou moins volsines, comme p. ex. desmidiacées et diatomacées. Enfin, lorsqu'une espèce n'est représentée que par un petit nombre d'exemplaires originaux, elle sera plus exposée à la dé- struction et sera plus difficile à expédier (sans compter que cer- tains musées ne prétent pas leurs exemplaires au dehors) que des planches qui généralement seront imprimée en nombre, et pourront d'ailleurs toujours étre photographiées. Aussi une planche soigneusement exécutée pourra-t-elle, en ce qui concerne bien des groupes de thallophytes, offrir un meilleur moyen d'identification d'une espéce que des exemplaires ori- ginaux. I MOTION AU CONGRES INTERNAT. BOTAN. VIENNE 1905. 919 Il va sans dire que tout cela suppose que l'espéce sera re- présentée d'une facon si exacte, qu'elle soit facile à recon- naitre et qu'au moins les plus importants des caractéres micro- scopiques sur lesquels on fonde la diagnose de l'espéce, seront bien mis en évidence par la figure, dont les proportions devront étre exactes, et dont le grossissement devra étre indiqué en chiffres. Pour les lichens, les grandes phéosporées et les grandes floridées, il est clair qu'à cet égard de bonnes planches analy- tiques prises aprés examen microscopique des conditions de re- production pourront suffire à etablir la priorité pour une espéce, une variété, nouvelles, mais méme alors méme 1l serait désirable qu'on y jolguit aussi une représentation macroscopique exacte (de préférence une photographie). Pour les espéces dites élémentaires qui ont été érigées en dernier lieu dans certains groupes, comme p. ex. les bactéries, les mycédinées etc., on ne peut naturellement pas faire valoir les mémes arguments, ces espéces n'étant pas, basées sur des caractéres morphologiques. Si lon exige désormais que les descriptions de genres, d’especes et de variétés de thallophytes soient accompagnées de planches, il en résultera probablement les conséquences suivantes, favorables au progrés de la science: 1) Il sera bien plus aisé d'identifier les espéces à l'aide de figures qu'à l'aade de descriptions. 2) Ces figures seront à l'avenir exécutées avec plus de soin encore, afin que le nom qu'on leur impose ne perde pas son droit de priorité. On observa avec une précision d'au- tant plus grande les caractéres de l'espéce, et l'on arrivera parlà à des diagnoses plus tranchées. 3) On évitera des ,descriptions provisoires^ destinées à con- vrir le droit de priorité: elles peuvent avoir de l'intérét pour l'amour-propre personnel, mais dans la littérature scientifique, elles font plus de mal que de bien; attendu qu'en général 290 N. WILLE ET V. WITTROCK. elles ne sont pas poussées bien à fond, et sont méme pu- bliées avant que les recherches soient achevées. C’est pour- quoi l'on trouve souvent dans les descriptions accompagnant de pareilles communications próvisoires un certain nombre d’inexactitudes, et qu'il convient de les corriger lorsque parait la description plus approfondie. Christiania (Norvége) et Stockholm (Suéde) Mai 1904. Dr. N. Wille. Dr. V. Wittrock. Trykt den 30te Mai 1904. A study on trout and young salmon. (Report on researches concerning the migrations of young salmon 1898— 1902) by Knut Dahl director of the biological station, Trondhjem. (With 3 plates and 7 tables.) Introduction. Ever since LINNÉ in the year 1766 published his Systema Naturae, the treatment of the genus, to which trout and salmon belong, has thrown considerable difficulties in the way of syste- matical investigation, because these species or forms are very closely related as well in external and internal caracters as in their habits of life. LINNÉ distinguished the following species: Salmo salar — salmon. » erlox = sea trout. » trutta = river trout. » fario = brook trout. » lacustris = lake trout. These Linnés 5 species have in the course of time encoun- tered quite a remarkable fate. During the past century a series of naturalists have occu- pied themselves in investigating their right as distinct species. Swedish scientists principally have closely studied these species, although other european savants if. ex. Cuvier, PALLAS? Agassiz sen. Kroyer, SIEBOLD, GÜNTHER, Day and YARREL 299 KNUT DAHL. also have dealt with them. Among the swedish investigators the principal ones are NirssoN, WIDEGREN, LILJEBORG, FRIES EKSTRÖM and SUNDEWAL, besides F. A. Smitt. I will not here in detail pursue the fate of Linnes 5 species under the hands of all these men. His first species, the salmon, Salmo salar, has endured all trials; contrary to this his 4 species of trout have encountered very variable conditions. The great variation among trouts, which is the fundament of LiwNÉs species has on closer study made the distinction between species and non species very diffi- cult. As every one knows, who has paid attention to these things, the trout of even closely connected waters, may differ considerably in certain respects, for instance in colour and the form of the body. To begin with, this circumstance caused the proposition of still more species than Linné originally did propose. However on this fundament there would apparently be no end to the constitution of new species and very soon we notice a tendency to reduce the number of species, a closer investi- gation showing that the peculiarities whereon the descriptions of the species were founded mainly were peculiarities which every trout under given circumstanees could acquire. The latest swedish naturalists, f. ex. LILJEBoRG, nominate now only two species: Salmon (salmo salar). Trout (Salmo trutta). Still more exacting in his reduction is F. A. Smitt, who only nominates one species, salmo salar, and as a variety thereof s. trutta. LitJEBoRG thus asserts, that the proper salmon (salmo salar) im all stages of its life may be distinguished from any other salmonid form. The Trout (salmo trutta), which is found in the fresh waters as well as in the sea, varies highly and he does not find À STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 993 that it is possible to distinguish its many local forms as diffe- rent species. They must be considered as varieties produced by varying sourroundings. Also, he asserts that the trout in all stages of its life can be distinguished from the salmon. However he admits, that it is the oldest and the youngest stages that are most readily distinguished in the two species. As regards the half grown stages (between fry and grilse, by LiLJEBorG denoted as „forell og öring-stadier*) he acknowledges that they only with difficulty are to be distinguished. F. A. Smitt, probably the man, who up to date has dis- posed of the largest material and who has undertaken very comprehensive examinations in order to sift the system of the salmonidæ, does not find himself able to uphold more than one species, salmo salar. According to the environs of develope- ment the species may appear, now as salmon (forma typica), now os trout (forma trutta), and fry of one form thus have a chance oi by force of circumstances to develop into the other form. Here in Norway, the question remarkably enough newer has been subjected to a thorough serious investigation although fishermen and people interested in fisheries from time to time have subjected it to a lively discussion, and adequate knowledge of this question obviously is fundamental to any rational legis- lation tending to regulate the fishing for these species. In our country there has from olden time, besides the salmon-fisheries proper, been practised a fishery, whose object was the catching of smaller salmonid fishs, so called „sjeorret“ (sea trout) varying in length from 20—40—50 cm. The gear employed was usually small seines and ground nets. As regards the species of these fish, which according to locality were named „smaalaks“, „sjoorret“, „sjoblege*, „kludd“, »høstblege* etc. the opinion of fisherman and people interested in the fisheries has been highly divided. We here encounter 994 KNUT DAHL. the very same views, which have governed scientific research on these matters. While some fishermen assert, that these different names denote just as many species, others again give prominence to the opinion that these small salmonids, named sea trout, are nothing but young salmon. Others have stated as their opinion, that among the sea trout, which they consider a separate species, there is to be found a large proportion of young salmon or grilse, which in these younger stages only with the utmost difficulty are to be discerned from the sea trout. This latter theory, which is also to a certain extent sup- ported by science, has been essential to the deliberations, on which regulations of law concerning the salmon and sea trout- fisheries of this country are founded. When our administration (lastest in the salmon law of 1891) by the aid of different regulations, among these a regulation inforeing a certain minimum-size of mesh in nets and seines, sought to benefit the interests of these fisheries, it was, on account of the difficulty in distinguishing between sea trout and young salmon, considered impossible separately to regulate the salmon and sea-trout fisheries. Accordingly both were in common subjected to the regulations of the same law. By this law the use of a smaller mesh than 6,5 cm. between the knots. (13 cm. mesh) was prohibited, as well in fishing for salmon as for sea trout. The regulation size of the mesh is by later laws and amendments altered to 5,5 cm. between the knots. The law also orders that sea-trout of a smaller length than 40 cm. cought in gear with a smaller mesh. (such as herring seines etc. are to be set free. The smallest allowed size for sale of salmon and seatrout is 21 cm. Under those regulations our sea trout fisheries have not profited, as the size of the fish of wich previously the bulk of the cateh consisted, 1s to small too be retained by the regulation mesh, in other words, it is a fact that a profitable fishing Å STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 995 ———— for sea trout under our present regulations only can be carried out with unlawful gear. The only way in wich our fishermen during the latter years have been able to procure sea trout in quantities worth men- tioning, has been to use ordinary small meshed seines (20—30 fathoms long). The use of these seines for herrings and other sea fish is in most parts of our country unlimited by law. The trout cought during the use of these seines is then sold under protection of the regulation concering the minimum size of 21 cm. for sale of salmon and sea trout. In case the fishermen are not cought in the very act of killing trout smaller than 40 cm.s long taken in seines or nets con- viction is not easy. Hovever there has been no lack of colh- sions between the fishermen and the guardians of the law on this point, and it will be quite well understood, that a fishery, working under such conditions, has no chance of being car- red on rationally. The conditions, here briefly scetched, have occasioned very pointed differences of opinion as to whether the sea trout ought to be cought or not. Foreign sportsmen especially have publicly in sporting your- nals and other press organs asserted, that the salmon fry upon leaving the rivers are ,swept out^ by nets and sold under the name of sea trout, and have also pointed out, that this fact, would imply the certain ruin of our salmonfisheries. The opinion of the ,lawless^ trout fishermen is just the opposite. They strongly assert the innocense of their industry as to harming the salmonfisheries. On the contrary they often give prominence to the fact, that they consider, it a deed of merit to kill the trout who is „a rapacious fish and the foe of the salmon“. In recognition of these facts Mr. A. LANDMARK, inspector of fisheries in 1897 consulted Dr. JoHAn Hsort and the author of this paper, and finally proposed to governement the commen- Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXIL III. 15 996 KNUT DAHL, cement of rational researches as to the relation between young salmon and sea trout in our waters. The storthing voted the necessary means, wich also during the whole progress of the research have been liberally granted. During the 4 years from 1898 to 1902 I have under- taken quite a comprehensive series of investigations concerning the distribution. of different stages of salmon and seatrout in our waters in connection with studies on their specific charac- ters and biological differences. In the following chapters I propose to give an account of these investigations and their results, which, according to my opinion, not only throw new light on the questions mentioned above, but also have importance to other features in legisla- tion relating to salmon and trout-fisheries. Chapter I. The methods and implements of the investigations. Any investigator wishfull of forming an independent opinion based on observation. will to my thinking, on reading the large mass of literature relating to the problems shortly mentioned in the introduction, find a lack of systematically continued resear- ches founded on direct observations in nature concerning the species in question, their wanderings or habitats in different stages of life. From the abovementioned literature it transpires, as far as I have been able to see, that those naturalists, who have treated salmon and trout, have got the essential proportion of their ma- terial from museums. Certainly they have also made indepen- dent collections in nature, but these seem in most cases to have had a casual caracter and been merely supplementary, Among those investigators, who have gained the best knowledge on these species, there is hardly one, who has had the opportunity of undertaking numerous independent fishing experiments over A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 997 great areas of water, through a series of years, and by these means endeavouring to pursue the species during their develope- ment through different stages of life, not only by study and observations on single scattered individuals, but by the investiga- tion of large numbers of fish. Thanks to the generosity of our storthing, the present author has had the opportunity of planning researches differently to previous investigators. As a base of investigation was chosen the Throndhjem fiord with its rivers and the adjacent coast outside the fiord. This district is by far the richest of all our salmon districts, yielding an annual catch of salmon amounting to about the fourth or fifth part of the total yield of the whole country. In this district I have, by systematically continued investiga- tions, endeavoured to solve the problems in question and at the same time or later, by more cursory researches in other lo- calities through all parts of the country, effected a control of my results, as to their general value. During the researches in the fiord and the adjacent strech of coast, I have employed a small sailing cutter with a crew of 2—3 skilful fishermen, besides myself. I was thus enabled, at any tme to move between the different localities, according to the demands of my investigation. In my fishing experiments, which chiefly embraced smaller sizes of fish, than those cought in implements of a mesh in acor- dance with the regulations of law, Danish eelhandseines of large dimensions (30 X 3 fath. were mainly employed. By floating the headrope more and weighting the groundrope less than usual for fishing with the same gear in Denmark, these seines are made very efficient implements for the catching of smaller salmonids. By numerous direct comparisons, I have found them more efficent, than the ordinary type of seine (without a pocket), as used by our fishmen in „illegal“ trout- fishing. Their size of mesh (28—32 knots pr. foot — norvegian —) of course make them a little heavier than the ordinary abovemen- 998 KNUT DAHL. tioned troutseines, who have a little larger mesh, varying in different localities. As supplementary implement, and in order to control my experiments with the eelhandseines, I have also employed seines of different sizes and mesh (from 15—8 knots pr. norvegian foot). These seines have in some cases had the dimensions generally used by the fishermen (30 X 3 fath.), sometimes they have been much larger (45 X 44/2 fath.). Of other fishing gear I have occasionally employed ground nets of varying mesh, according to the object in wiew. Salmon bag nets of the usual dimensions and of the con- struction, commonly used on the coast, have also been employed. In stead of the regulation mesh hovewer I employed a mesh varying from 8 to 11 knots pr. norvegian foot. At such places in the rivers, where net implements could not be employed with advantage, I have used the rod with fly or worm as a bait. With moveable fishing gear principally seines, I have since the spring 1898, mainly in the Trondhjem-fiord and its sourroun- dings, and also in many other localities all round our country, made several thousand hauls and cought thousands of salmon and trout. The predominating proportion of these fishing experiments I personally supervised, and I personally examined the catch. When my presense was prevented, the fishes, regarding the species of wich my assistants intertained a shodow of doubt, were preserved, and later personally examined by me. A small proportion of the fishing experiments have been conducted in other countries than Norway. Besides these my own experiments, I have been present at innumerable houls conducted by active fishermen, and had the opportunitly of examining their yield. My researches have also receiver considerable aid throug fishmongers in Norway, Eng- land and Denmark liberally allowing me to examine their stores of salmon and trout.. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 229 As regards certain important systematical questions, I have in an essential mesure had to fall back on the rearing of young fishes. These rearing experiment were effected in the aquaria of the Trondhjem biological station. The main collections of salmon and trout, belonging to Seandinavian museums, have been examined by me. It is needless to mention, that in all my yournys I have constantly communicated with fishermen and gained knowledge from their experience. : Also from other people interested i these fisheries valuable information and assistance has been obtained. Chapter II. The Investigations. a. Seines. The investigations commenced, in the beginning of May 1898, in the lower course of the Orkla and in the mouth of this river. . Fishing with the eelhandseine, in the river mouth, during the first days of the month, only yielded a few trout. In using a rod with worms as a bait, I succeded in ascer- taining, that the young of two different species of salmonids were to be found higher up the river. One could with certainty be determined as young trout, the other was just as certainly young salmon. Specimens are represented in Pl. I, and I will not here enter into a detailed description of their different cha- racters, as I later will return to this matter. By fishing with the eelhandseine im the same localities I could catch larger numbers of them. By way of example I quote the yournal: Evjen (Evjenskilen) Orkla May 10, 1898. Two houls with the eelhandseine yielded: 13 youg salmon 9,5—12 cm. long. 230 KNUT DAHL. Many young trout same size. Numbers of flounders (very small) and 1 agonus. A couple of days later these small salmon, as well as the trout, commenced appearing in our houls down in the mouth of the river. We also here got great numbers of larger ,trout^, some very much spotted others less spotted and some very shiny. Until the 25th of May, these investigations were continued, in and around the mouth of the Orkla Young salmon occurred only in the hauls effected in the river, or in the very mouth of the river. As soon as we left the river mouth and continued our fishing outward along both shores of the fiord, young salmon were never cought, only larger or smaller numbers of trout, more or less spotted. From May 26 until June 12 we fished in the Gula, the mouth of the Gula and the fiord Gulosen, where a large num- ber of houls were done with the eelhandseine. | In the Gula itsself and in the rivermouth, nearly every houl brought the young of as well salmon as trout, besides large quantities of larger more or less spotted trout, varying in length from 15—20—40 cm. As an example may be quoted: Mouth of the Gula, May 27, 13 houls with 2 seines from both sides of the middle channel, yield: 6 young salmon, ca. 10 cm. long, 28 trout of different sizes. Numbers of young flounders and gobies. 1 mallotus villosus. Mouth of the Gula, May 31. A couple of houls with eelhandseine in the middle channel yielded. 8 young salmon 10—12 cm. 17 trout 12—42 cm. A number of flounders. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 991 Much time and labour was there upon spent in investigating the shores of the fiord Gulosen in order to ascertain, if the young emigrating salmon (smolts) also were to be found along the shores of this fiord. All attempts at fishing the small salmon in these localities however gave a negative result. From Mule on the east side io Lundenaes on the westeren shore I fished in nearly all places where a seine could possibly be employed, without being able to find one single young salmon among tbe hundreds of trout of all sizes wich were cought. These fishing experiments to me clearly estabhshed two facts. ' None of the young salmon (smolts) wich I cought in the rivers Gula and Orkla exceeded 16 cm. m length, and this latter size did only occur as an exception. Generally their size did not exceed 13 cm. ; Young salmon (smolts) larger than these I was unable to procure. In Tab. no. IV will be found a graphical represen- tation of their size. They were all shiny and evidently in their migratory attire, such as it is well known and described by previous investigators. These young were consequently on the point of emigrating. My failures in catching them outside the river might have two reasons. Perhaps they had not yet emigrated from the river mouths or estuaries, or perhaps in emigrating they did not tueh the places wich I could control with my fishing gear. The occurence of the more or less "spotted trout was en- tirely different. They could be obtained in alle sizes in the river. Along the shores of the fiord all sizes from the migration stage and upwards were obtained in every houl. In Tab. no. V column 1, 2, 3 the sizes cought during this fishing period will be found represented. Next I sailed back to Orkedalsoren where a few days were spent in controlling the correctness of my previous researches. 232 KNUT DAHL. I found nothing to contradict my above mentioned experiences, after this the whole fiord was examined from June 18 to August 11. I first examined the outer part of, the fiord right out to Storfosen and the Biugn fiord. Thence I returned examining the whole of the Trondhjem fiord right to the bottom of the Beitstad fiord. Fishing experiments were thus carried out in the following localities: Lensviken, Rissen, Selven, Ørlandet, Storfosen, Biugn, Tautra, Aasenfiord, Frosten, Holsanden, Levanger, Sundnæs, Borgenfiord, Vennæs, Kirknæs and Krogsvaag. Several hundred houls with the seines were effected in these localities. Not one single young salmon (smolt) or grilse was cought, while trout in all stages, excepting those. which only belong to the rivers, were abundant. From August 15 to August 17 the Gula, the mouth of the Gula and the Gulosen were again investigated. We here recorded the same phenomena as were found earlier in the summer. By way of example I quote the journal: „Ihe mouth of the Gula. August 16. 6 Hauls with the eelhandseines yielded: More than 500 flounders. Some Herring fry. | 19 Trout 10—40 cm. 37 Young salmon 9—13 cm." „Gula August 17. 11 Hauls with the eelhandseines from the Uddevold bridge to the river mouth yielded: 84 trout 10—38 cm. 11 young salmon 10--13 cm.“ It was thus evident, that the smolts had not grown and that they consequently emigrated at the above mentioned size. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 939 Later on, during autumn, a series of fishing experiments were carried out, thus at Vik in Nordland, in Leko and at Brønø, later on also on in the neighhourhood of Fredriksværn and in Eidanger on the south coast. The results were perfectly analo- gous to those obtained in the Trondhjemsfjord i. e.: I did not succeed in catching one single smolt in the sea. During the month of July I had the opportunity of for some time accompanying Dr. Hjort on a cruise along Jæderen. In this locality some hauls with the eelhandseme were effected, the results in no respect differing from those above. In the month of October fishing experiments were carried out along the fiord between Trondhjem and Orkedalseren with similar results. In the mouth of the Orkla large numbers of trout were present. They had the same appearrance a those cought during spring i. e., there were more or less spotted. A small proportion had recently spawned. On October 23, 1898, 3 hauls with the eelhandseine in the mouth of the Orkla thus yielded: 187 trout 17—34 cm. Kalstad, Meldal (ca. 40 km. up the Orkla) October, 25, 1898: Many hauls with the eelhandseine through differens pools and rapids yielded: - 11 trout 27—43 cm. 2 young salmon (parr) 6—8 cm. During late autumn of the same year fishing experiments were from time to time carried out in the vicinity of Trond- hjem and at Sundnæs, Inderøen. Results: trout were the only salmonid fishes cought. During the whole of this summer opportunities were availe- able for constantly examining the large qauntities of salmon and trout passing through the stores of several Trondhjem fish. 934 KNUT DAHL. mongers f. ex. M. Thams & Co. During these investigations, when I had the opportunity of examining thousands of fishes, I could not find one single salmon smaller than 50 cm. long. All the smaller fishes were throut. By courtesy of the managers of this large buissiness I was permitted to store a large vessel with preserving liquid in the establishment. The clerks then undertook for me to preserve the smallest specimen of salmon, which could be found during the season. The result was a salmon 49 cm. long. The results of my researches during the first season was shortly this: I could ascertain the presence of trout in all stages in the waters examined. Salmon however could not be found of sizes between 15 cm. (as an exception 16 cm.) and 45—50 cm. in length. The correctness of this result I have during the latter years tried to centrol by all means available to me. The year 1899 was spent in repeating the investigations of 1898 with perfectly similar results. During the same year I visited the main fishmarkets of England, Scotland and Denmark endeaevouring in these countries to find salmon of small size. The results of the examination of large stores of fish was per- fectly like those obtained in this country. A few fishing experiments, undertaken from the Danish Biol. Station in the sourroundings of Fyen, only yielded trout of the same appearance as those obtained here in Norway. In 1900 large fishing experiments with eelhandseines and other seines were effected in the Trondhjemfiord. As regards the fiord, the hauls yielded large quantities of trout, no salmon. In the rivers I obtained the same result as in previous years. Different localities in the Battenfiord were also this year examined with the same result as all my previous investiga- tions, ——À A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 935 As examples from the hauls of this year my be quoted a nights catch in the Beitstadfiord, illustrating the abundance of trout. May 28, 1900. Kirknesvaag. 12 hauls with the eelhandseine from 9 pm. to 1 am. on the strech Kirknæsvaag—Galgsøen, yielded: 97 trout 19—58 cm. (total weight 45 kgr.). -9 wrasse (labrus rupestris) 9—14 cm. 1 cod, 21 cm. 1 Pl. limanda, 17 cm. 10 Sprats, 12—15 cm. Ca. 4/4 barrel of herrings, 20 cm. In 1901 a few hauls with the seine were effected 1n Finmar- ken and Nordland. A few hauls were also made in the Trond- hjemsfjord. None of these experiments exhibited any differenee from the results of previous years, excepting a few of the hauls made in Finmarken yielding specimes of sea-char. In October 1901 investigations were undertaken in the Mandal river. In this river, besides other southern rivers, the population has asserted that large numbers of quite young sal- mon during autumn ascended the river. The local name of these fishes is ,blege“ Mr. A. Land- mark, inspector of fisheries, desired me to investigate this matter. Upon a closer examination of the lower parts of the Mandal river however it 1mmediately transpired, that the conditions in this river were perfectly like those I had observed during autumn in northern rivers. Thus 10 hauls with the seine at Lerkjær, Mandal river, October 25, 1901, yielded: 178 trout, 10—45 cm. 5 young salmon (parr), 10—11 cm, long. 936 KNUT DAHL. The smallest trouts were brownish, those above 20 cm. shiny, quite like the trout I used to get during autumn in the Gula and Orkla. These latter were by the people considered as young salmon. b. Finemeshed bag mets. Fishing experiments with bag nets were effected in 1899, 1900 and 1901. In 1899 a bagnet was constructed of 9/1? cotton twine, 51/2 fathoms deep, 11 knots pr. foot (Norw.). The net was fixed in a good bag-net locality at the island Garten, Ørlandet, in one of our best bagnet districts. The net was fixed July 10 and remanied in position. (with larger or smaller intervals) until August 9. The yield was: 6 salmon, 58—64—69—65—70—52 cm. 11 trout, 34—40--43 — 44—429— 99. — 34—32—27—32—26 cm. 19 cod, 30—80 em. 11 seithe 30—40 cm. 9 lythe 30—50 cm. 1 ling 56 cm. 2 lumpsucker 15—48 cm. During the winter 1899—1900 the same bagnet was em- ployed at Inderøen through several mouths. Only one single trout was cought, no salmon. In 1900 and 1901 a bagnet of hemptwine was used. The mesh was 8 knots pr. foot (Norw.). It was fixed at the bio- logical station, Hegdalen, Trondhjem and during the year 1900 it was fixed from July 1—September 28, with a few intervals. The yield was; 4 salmon, 63—85—59—49,5 cm. 5 trout, 42—40—52—36 cm. 392 lythe, 35—74 cm. 13 seithe, 37—48 cm. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 937 6 cod, 35—51 cm. 10 haddock, 32—40 cm. 6 lumpsucker. 1 whiting, 40 cm. 1 gurnard (érigla gurnardus). 9 plaice, 30—60 cm. 1 large angler (lophius piscatorius). In 1901 the net was fixed in the same localıty and remained, with a few interwals occasioned by accidents and repairs, from April 12—July 10. The yield was: 5 salmon, 101—90—51—50—48 cm. 16 trout, 95—30—32 —35—939—33—55 —99—32 —36—31— 32—32—38—34—38 cm. 21 lythe, 34—65 cm. 49 cod, 33—65 cm. 3 seithe, 34—38 cm. 8 flounders, 10—27 cm. 1 herring, 54 cm. 5 lumpsucker. The main proportion of the catch was captured in April and May. Not even during these experiments with fixed fishing en- gines I succeeded in procuring young salmon of the missing sizes, no salmon smaller than 48 cm. in length being cought in my bagnets. c. Fishermens catches. During the past years innumerable opportunities have been offered of examining the catches made by those fishermen, who employ seines and during their work catch sea trout, sometimes in considerable quantities. These catches have been examined by me, sometimes in the possession of the fishermen them- 938 KNUT DAHL. selves, sometimes in the hands of those fishmongers, who buy their catch. Among the many thousands of fish thus examined I have found nothing to contradiet the results of my own experiments. The catch of the seiners consists besides other seafish of trout only. An occasional grilse or salmon of the larger sizes may occur. On numerous occasions I have endeavoured, by the aid of the bagnet-fishermen, to ascertain, if salmon smaller then 45— 50 em. in length or less weight then 1,2—2 ker. accidentally are caught in their nets, which as a rule only are capable of retaining grilse down to 49 cm. in length when the fish is of ordinary thickness. The only result of my efforts in this respect are 2 salmon of 45 cm. length, which ‘kindly were sent me by Mr. Krane, Brevig, Sørøen. ‘They were retained in the meshes of his bag- nets, wich are fixed on the outer side of the Sørøe by the open ocean. Mr. KRANE will also according to his statement have seen smaller salmon, who have passed through the nets, some- times in considerable numbers. d. Rearing-experiments and investigations on the systematism of the salmon. The results arrived at during the first season of my re- searches, has thus been confirmed by experiments and experience during several years. During these years I have thus not been able to catch or to procure through the aid of other fisher- men salmon of sizes beiween 13—16 and 45—50 cm. in length in those walers where in our country fishing gear is used for the purpose of catching salmon. ; In the face of this negative result I have considered myself obliged to test its correctness as far as my means have reached. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 939 Two courses of reflection have in this connection strongly asserted themselves. One has forced me to effect the strongest possible control as to the correctness of my specific determinations. The other has urged me to endeavour by positive results to illustrate the real habitat of the young salmon in the missing stages. When I have not been able to find those stages of the salmon, which a number of other scientists have described, this fact would clearly seem to contain a contradiction fatal to the correctness of my investigations, and this chain of thaught caused me to begin with no small amount of trouble. When I laid before me a collection of salmonids, it was by no means difficult, the works of systematical authors (f. ex. LizseBorc) in my hand, closely to distinguish the young of salmon and trout up to 16 cm. in length. No more did the distinguishing between salmon and trout above 45—50 cm. in length occasion the least difficulty. However, if I laid before me fishes between 24—40 cm. in length, I found to my great astonishment that they ad libitum might be determined as sal- mon or trout and that on the strength of the printed descriptions by the different authors. In other words mere judgement appa- rently had to decide. It also seemed to me as if mere judge: ment must have formed the base of the diagnostic description. I laid before me seperate series of these two species in their different stages avaibable to me In one species i. e.: the trout, I could follow it through its developement through all sizes from 10—40 cm. and more. In the salmon, quite contrary to the trout, the series was broken at 16 cm,, and could not be continued before a length of 45 cm. was reached. Those very pregnant characters, distinguishing the young of the salmon (parr and smolts) from those of the trout, were found suddenly at 16 cm. length to cease. 240 KNUT DAHL. Just as suddenly the characters sharply and concisely distinguishing grownup salmon from trout asserted themselves from 45 cms. length and upwards. Surely, the systematical works, especially the swedish ones, ewerywhere contained remarks upon the difficulty in di- stinguishing between salmon and trout in just these middle stages; but this circumstance did by no means satisfy me. How could the young of one species, so different from those of another species, that even children easily may learn to distinguish them, how could the young, upon reaching a certain length suddenly become like those of another species and then again after some lapse oi time and upon reaching a more ad- vanced stage of growth become like itself. The contradictions contained in this chain of reasoning seemed to me to point to the possibility that previous authors on this subject might have confounded trout, especially shiny slender and rounded trout with young salmon, and that other investigators no more than myself had been able to procure for examination salmon between 16 and 45 cm. in length or salmon between the smolt stage and the grilse stage. In other words I was compelled to adopt for preliminary use the working hypothesis, that salmon of the above mentioned sizes were unknovn or at least undescribed. To solve this problem two things have been necessary. First I have had to catch and further rear in seawater the young salmon (smolts) when emigrating from the rivers, and further during their developement compare their characters with those of trout of corresponding size. Secondly I have had to examine those collections of young salmon on which the systematical descriptions of salmon in the abovementioned stages (16—45 cms.) are founded. Most of these are as far as I know to be found in the *Riksmuseum” in Stockholm, and the late direktor of this museum, professor F. A. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 941 Smitt, has with great liberality and kindness forwarded to me for examination the specimens needed. Besides, the collections of salmon in the museeums of our university, Bergen, Trondhjem and Tromsø, have been exa- mined. The result of these investigations proves my working theory to be correct, as I will endesavour to show. In the middle of june 1900 I cought in the mouth of the river Gula some 150 emigrating young salmon (smolts). In saved--off barrels or tubs they were kept about 1 week on board of my sailingvessel. About 25 were kept in each tub (new ones) the water being changed 4—5 times in the 24 hours. The vessel was towed to Trondhjem, and June 17, 150 smolts and about 20 trout of different stages were placed in separate freshwatertanks. As the tanks, tubings and aquarea for salt water were not yet in order, I had to keep my fishes for nearly a fourthnight in freshwater. By transferring à few to seawater and letting them stay there about a day, I satisfied myself that no trouble was likely to arise from their passing from fresh to salt water. In the mean time a considerable mortality occurred among my young salmon. They would greedely eat ordinary rainworms besides gammarids, which latter in large numbers were to be had under de stones at lowtide. By and by however they were attacked by the common freshwater fungus (saprolegnia) which alfected their gills, fins or those places of the body where scales were lost. The fish once infected, this saprolegnia woud spread with incredible rapidity. Thus I noted that the fungus in some cases in about half a day would spread from a small point, just di- stinguisheable, to an area of about 2 square centimeters. Many fishes succumbed during this period. On July 1 the aquaria for saltwater were ready for use. I had then no more than 70 smolts left. These were in some Nyt Mag. f. Naturv XXXXII, III. 16 9 49 KNUT DAHL. cases still suffering from the saprolegnia some were reconvale- scent and some were healthy. During the first days after the transfer to saltwater (about 10 9/o, gradually increasing to 33 oo salinity) ca. 50 died. However the 40 fishes, which were left, got on very well. They were fed partly on worms, partly on gammarids. Later on during summer their main food was the young of Gobius Ruthensparri of which quarts of living specimens might be taken in every haul with a small seine of mosquitonetting. A supply of living food was thus constantly kept in the aquarium with the fishes, who might eat as often as they liked. Through autumn, when this source of supply ceased, chopped fresh herring or herring roe was used. Their appetite however stagnated during winter with the sinking temperature. Only a few casualties occurred during summer and autumn, but the months after christmas 1900 de- manded about 55 vietims. In spring 1901 when their appetite again began to assert itself only 15 were left. As will be understood it has not been possible directly to measure their growth during this period but it was evident, that they did not grow anything worth mentioning during the winter months. During the first summer however they grew very rapidly. None of them measured more than 13 cm. when they were transferred to the saltwater aquarium. In autumn the largest were nearly 20 em. long. During the second summer their growth was very rapid and they increased enormously in bulk. The fishes were killed off on October 18, 1901 and were measured ofter having been kept a few days in a preserving fluid consisting of water, spirits of wine and formalın. The measurements ran as fellows: A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 943 e 3 93 cm. 21,5 cm. 23,5 , Se QNUM 95,5% „ DE, DID ye 2 , 30:106 IS DSD DONS The largest one weighed kgr. 0,60. During their growht in the aquarium a large proportion of these fishes have suffered larger or smaller læsions to the fins of the hindpart of the body. In some the ventrals and the anal fin are a little worn as à consequence of the ravages of the saprolegnia previous to their transfer to salt water. In some the caudal fin is more or less hurt. Not a few have regenerated the fins affeced. During the whole of their developement these, young salmon have been higly differing from any trout I have ever cought. They distinguish themselves not only by peculiarities in the structure and relations of several important parts of the body, besides also in the colouring from all those fishes which I have cought during my experiments and named trout. Their whole deportment and their habit in the aquaria also shows a specially marked difference from those of the trout which I have captured and kept in confinement for compa- rison. All the trout, which I have kept in captivety, will keep very still in the aquarium, suspended in midwater without hardly any molion all day through, occasionally when gorged with food resting motionless at the bottom. Off and on they will suddenly dart forward catching their food when they are hungry. The salmon on the contrary are constantly in motion, nearly unseasingly swimming round and round in the aquarium night DAA. KNUT DAHL. and day. In this respect it has been very instructive to let a trout of corresponding size down to the salmon. All day through I could then see the trout remain nearly in the same place suspended in midwater, while the shool of young salmon lively svimming constantly circulated round the aquarium. Specially striking has also been the different way in which their appetite asserts itself. The appetite of the trout is not strong every day. Often it will assert itself only within intervals of several days. Given the opportunity to eat as much as they like the trout will then gorge themselves until the food hangs out of their mouth, yes even to such a degree that they will drop to the bottom and motionless digest for several days. | The salmon eats as a rule several times every day. They do not gorge themselves to the same degree as the trout, and they digest very rapidly. Thus after the lapse of a few hours they are very often prepared for a new meal. Respecting the colours a considerable difference has been noticeable in the two species. Excepting the gradual disappearance of the parr marks and the red lateral spats, the colour of the salmon has not changed. During the whole time I have kept them they have been of a strong shining sivercolour with a blueish green undercoating on the head and back, a few lavge black spots scattered mainly on the dorsal side of the body. When exposed to strong light, their colours have paled a little resuming their ordinary hue as soon as the light was subdued. The trout have been quite different. Even the most shining and silvery trout, taken directly from the sea, have very soon assumed quite other colours varying in blue, blueish green brown and yellow. Also they have always grown very much spotted. These changes have also taken place when trout of the same A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 945 sizes as the young salmon have been kept in the aquarium where the latter were reared. The fænomenon however is in good harmony with the well known propensities of the trouts for variation. Before entering into a closer description. of the younger stages of salmon, compared with trout of the same sizes, I will shortly relate the result of my search in those of Scandi- navian museums whose collections of salmon I have had the opportunity of examining. In Norwegian museums I have only succeded in finding 4 salmon between 16 and 45 cm.'s length. None of these have ever been described. In the Bergen museum I found 2 young salmon resp. 20,5 cm. and 21,5 cm. long. They were reared in a freshwater dam in Jederen and by Mr. Grude presented to the Bergen mu- seum. They both closely resemble the fishes reared by me in salt water. In the university museum in Christiania I also found 2 sal- mon resp. 23,9 cm. and 28 cm. long. They had not been sub- jected to any closer examination or been described. According to professor Collett they were found among mackerel in the Christiania fish market. Also these closely correspond with the fishes reared by me and differ, as also do the fishes from the Bergen museum, most decidedly from any salmonid fish of similar size wich I have ever cought in the sea. In plates I, II and III will be found drawings representing as well these young salmon as trout of corresponding sizes. In my opinion a superficial glance is quite sufficent in order to discover the considerable difference between then. Later on a closer description will be given. Before doing this however we need to review the collec- tions, forming the base of the diagnostical descriptions issued 246 KNUT DAHL. by the swedish systematists and critically revise the material at hand in the descriptions of different authors. The main body of the collections, upon which most of the independent investigations in Sweden bave been based, are pre- sumably to be found in the „Riksmuseum“ in Stockholm. At all events the collections on which F. A. Smitt and Hjalmar Widegren have founded their descriptions are kept in this mu- seum. Excepting Nilsson, whose collections I presume mainly are to be found at the University of Lund, only the two authors mentioned above may be said to have in any marked degree based their diagnostic descriptions on independent rescarches and examinations of specimens. Most of the other authors have chiefly compiled faunistic works, the diagnostic descriptions of which, as regards the species in question, mainly seem com- posed from. the diagnosis of original authors and only in a small degree based on independent examination of specimens. At all events no distinet specification of the the specimens form- ing the base of description is to be found. By good will of prof. F. A. Smitt, the not inconsiderable material of young salmon stored in the collections of the „Riks- museum" has been forwarded to me. Upon examination of this material I found to my great astonishment, that even this collection did not contain speci- mens of sizes, by means of which it would be possible to fill the gap in the description of young salmon, the exsistance of which my own investigation indicated. It transspired, upon examination, that these collections did not contain salmon between 17,9 cm. and ca. 38 cm.s lenght — with a couple of exceptions — exceptions of quite a remarke- able character and exceptions which, in my opinion, throw a certain light on some of the difficulties which the swedish authors have experienced in distinguishing young salmon and trout in the intermediate stages. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 947 The sizes mentioned above, differ quite inconsiderably from the size limits of the salmon found by me in our waters. However it is just the intermediate stage, between smolt and grilse, or the so-called ,Forell*-stage, which has occosioned the difficulties in discerning salmon and trout. In his great work on the salmonids ,Kritisk fórteckning öfver de i Riksmuseum befindtliga salmonider“, Professor Smitt has compiled a table on this stage. As his method of examina- tion demanded as large numbers as possible, of course he must have mustered all the specimens availeable. On revising this table however one will be astonished at finding only the following salmon; Pg. 50 we thus find: 167 | 161 Tab. N | | 2 I D DANN DR | Length in cm. | 90.4. | 17,8 | 15,9 | 17,2 | 16,0 | 14,5 By looking up his metrical tables (the Tab. No.s above re- fering to these) I observe, that the specimens all are from the „Motala ström“ by Norrköping with exception of No. 161 which is from the lake Venern (Kannikenäset). Upon closer examination I find that these salmon in no mean degree differ from those kvown from other places. The 3 smallest differ considerably from the smolts of our rivers and also from smolts from other swedish rivers of which the collection of the Riksmusmuseum contain many of a little smaller size. The 2 largest ones No. 173 and No. 172 are higly different as well from the salmon I found in the Bergen museum as from those I have reared myself. They possess many characters reminding of those of the trout. Thus the form of the body is clumsier, the tail shorter, the fins larger and the scales smaller than in salmon. The 948 KNUT DAHL. only salmon-characters of a safer nature, which they possess, is the relatively short upper jav and partly the size of the breastfins. The specimen No. 173 is not yet sexually mature and differs as may be seen above (ca. 4 cm.) so little in length from the largest known smolts from norwegian rivers, that this solitary specimen hardly can be considered as material for a description of the stage in question. Specimen No. 172 1s in a state of sexual maturity and in this state possesses several characters, f. ex. prolongation and thickening of pectorals ventral and anal fin, which renders it con- siderably different to immature fishes. Consequently it is very little fit to form a base of description of such fishes. In determining the importance to be attributed to these prof. Smitt 6 specimens as material for a description of sal- mon between the emigration and the grilse stage, two facts must, according to my opinion, be held in view. First it must be remembered that the last one of them is taken in Venern, and that all the other fishes are taken in the Motala, a water course, which according to the explicit reports of an investigator as f. ex. Widegren is supplied with fish from the lake Vettern and is connected with nearly the whole of the lake complex of middle Sweden, a locality wich, as is well known, possesses a ,landlocked* variety of salmon, whose main characteristic is the union of several, salmon and trout characters. As for myself, not having had the opportunity of systema- tically investigating the fishes of these waters, I will not express anything definite regarding these young fishes. I will only give prominence to the opinion that in all probability they belong to the middle Swedish relict variety the Vener- or Vetfer-salmon. At all events they are not oceanic salmon (salmo salar). Secondly I draw attention to the fact that one of these fishes No. 172 is in a state of maturety, a circumstance, wich A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 949 of course renders is unfit for a description encompassing imma- ture fishes, especially when this description, as in the case of prof. Smitt, is founded on metrical characters. The facts here mentioned, besides the small number of die specimens, are in my opinion well adapted to throw some light on the difficulties which prof. Smitt has experienced in distin- guishing the ,forell^ stages of salmon and trout. By comparing: certain metrical characters and demanding the continuity of these characters through all stages as professor Smitt has done, the difficulty is obsiously extended to the two species during the whole of their developement. It is to me perfectly clear, that the introduction of only one or two specimens in the mature stage, wil be sufficient to disturb the final mean of metrical characters when the work is carried out according to the system which prof. Smitt employes. It will be remembered that the proportions of as well salmon as trout are considerably altered when in a state of sexual maturity. Itis just as evident, that a collection of a few individuals of young Vener-salmon, cannot possibly form the base ofa diagnostic description of the young of the salmon of the ocean. Also the trout-characters of these specimens would be higly efficient in confusing a description, where even real salmon were used as material. From the facts above mentioned, it must, as far as I can see, follow that this material, and the descriptions based there- on, hardly may be considered as rendering any satisfactory contribution towards filling the gap, which, according to my ex- perience, exists in the description of salmon between the emi- eration stage and the grilse stage. The investigations of Hjalmar Widegren will be found de- scribed in „Öfversigt af Kgl. Vetsk. Ak. Handlingar" 1869 and 1864 ,Bidrag till kännedomen om Sveriges salmonider^ and „Nya bidrag til etc.” 450 KNUT DAHL. In the first of these works the author describes the young salmon during transition from the ,stirr* stage to the ,forell, stage. Also he describes their appearance during the ,forell* stage. He also admits the difficulty in distinguishing salmon and trout in these stages. He is of the opinion that the young salmon at about 20 cm. length pass into the ,forell^ stage and he expli- citly states that the young of the salmon only after reaching 40 em. in length acquires the typical characters of the species. He notes that young salmon in transition between „stirr“ and ,forell^ often are to be found as well in the Motala by Norrköping as in the rivers of Norrland, (äfwen i Norrlands elfvor), and that their length is 20—22 cm. As far as can be seen however his descriptions are founded only on specimens from Motala. He thus mentions only 3 specimens from Motala stream by Norrköping 21,5—25,2—26,7 cm. long, even the very locality, the dangers of which for the present purpose 1 have mentioned above.. In support of his description of the young salmon in this stage he refers to one of the plates, accompanying the paper representing a fish, which in the explanation of the plates ex- pressly is stated to be a female of „Venerns blanklaks“t (the relict Vener or londlocked salmon). Whether this specimen is identical with one of the 3 spe- cimens measured and mentioned above, is not stated. This drawing is, as any one may satisfy himself higly dif- fering from the representations of salmon in the same stage given by me, (Vide pl. II and IIL) In this latter paper he also gives à drawing representing a salmon in the „forell“ stage, even from Motala. (Vide Wer. ,Nya bidrag etc.^ pl. XIV fig. 1. This fish which I have had the opportunity of personally examining, and which exists in the ‘Vide pl. in Widegrens work tab. V fig. 2 („Bidrag till kännedomen etc.“). A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 951 collection sent to me from the Riksmuseum, differs however highly as well from the young salmon reared by me as also from those found ind our museums, exhibiting the same mixture of trout and salmon characters as all the specimens I have seen from middle swedish localities. From other locahties than the middle svedish lake and river complex, where Vener and Vetter-Salmon is to be found Wiedegren evidently has not had youg salmon for examination. The conclusion thus would seem justifiable, that all his descrip- tions on Salmo salar in this stage have been prepared with the relict lake form of Middle Sweden as material. Turning to the classical descriptions by Nilsson 1 his ,oScandimavisk fauna" Lund 1855, we find, that the smallest „laksberling“ or grisle, described by him, is a little more than 20 inches long (Norw.) accordingly more than 50 cm. long. The next size is „a youg salmon 11!/2 inches long,“ a little more than 30 cm. However this latter size has not been examined by Nilsson, but the description is prepared on the streugth of a drawing in Sir Jardines work on british fishes. Sir Jardine had procured the specimen „on the sea-coast^ presumably the coast of England. Quite briefly he mentions a specimen of 91/2 inches (24 cm.) collected by adj. Lilljeborg on the norwegian coast. It is kept at the Lund museum and I have not seen the specimen. Respecting these two specimens I am thus not able to speak from personal experience. However the very imperfect descrip- tions of Nilsson seem to indicate, that Sir Jardine's specimen possibly has been a real salmon. Regarding the other speci- men, from Norway, it is not possible to express any defiente opinion. However, Nilssons remark that „it is much fatter and plumper than trout of the same size", seemes to make it doubt- full whether it is à salmon, these on the contrary being much more slender and elegant in shape than trout of corresponding size, Locally the specimen was named ,Blankøre*, a name 959 KNUT DAHL. wich in many localities in this country is applied to the sea trout. This circumstance also throws some doubt on the case. In the works of Fries, Ekstróm and Sundewall, Liljeborg, Kroyer and other scandinavian faunists as well as in those of british. authors such as Couch and Yarrel. one will in vain. search for specifications regarding the material, on wich their deseriptions are based. As mentioned before, their works are mainly faunas with diagnostic descriptions and biological notes chiefly founded on the works of other investigators or on revision of the collections, wich in the course of time, throgh the efforts of these investi- gators, have been desposited in the museums. Only in one work I have found reliable accounts of salmon of a httle larger size than in the young salmon emigrating from our rivers. Vide „Neuere Lachs und Maifisch-Studien* by P. P. C. Hoek. 1899. The author has examined the young salmon wich during the month of may emigrate from the Rhine and graphically described their size. From his graphical table it will be seen that these young on the average are a little larger than the smolts of norwegian rivers. The more southerly location of the Rhine probably accounts for a more rapid growth. The am- piltude of his curve mainly reaches from 10 to 18 em. with a couple of exceptions of a little larger size, while my curves (cfr. tab. IV col. 1, 2, 3) average a little lower with one excep- tion of 16 cm. His drawing Pl. I fig. 4 in all essential respects resembles the largest smolts cought by me and has still got the parrmarks and the red spots along the lateral line. According to my oppinion the abovementioned facts are sufficient to show, that earlier descriptions of young salmon between the emigration stage and the grilse stage are not foun- ded upon sufficient material. In examining the large material, collected through about half a century or more, wich the swe- Á STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 953 dish authors have disposed, we have not been able to find more than about !/2 dozen specimens of young salmon, above the emigration stage. Most of them belong even to the lowest of the sizes desireable, and they are all taken from a watercourse inhabited by the Vener-Salmon. Direct examination has shown them to possess the peculiarities ot this form. In the works of all the swedish authors we have further not been able to find one single drawing of one single young salmon of the missing sizes not beeing taken from the obove mentioned water- complex or expressly stated to be ,Vener or Vetter-Salmon“. In my oppinion we are therefor justified in drawing the con- clusion, that the descriptions of swedish authors of youg salmon between the emigration and the grilse stage are founded on the relict or landlocked form of middle Sweden and consequently are of no value for the distinction of oceanic salmon. Even supposing that some authors like f. ex. Nilsson or Jardine have had a real young salmon of the abovementined sizes for examination, a possibility wich I will not deny, the walue of such a single and imperfect diagnosis must obviously disappear when, during the preparation of later descriptions, it is confused with descriptions of a material possessing quite other characters. My working hypothesis has thus proved to be correct. Salmon between the emigration stage and the grisle stage are not properly described and consequently must be considered as unknown. At this juncture I must allow myself the pleasure of ex- pressing my acnowledgement of the works of msrs. Smitt and Widegren, wich undoubtedly are executed with great care and conscientiousness and in a manner, wich even now, after the lapse of more than 30 years, enables present investigation largely to control their results by examination of the original specimens. The excellent manner in wich they have effected 954 KNUT DAHL. the reduction of the innumerable „Species“ of salmonids, flooding the systematical literature of former days, deserves every aknowledgement. As I have shown, the lack of material of the „forell“ stage of the real salmon has prevented a perfect distinction between salmo salar 'and salmo trutta, a gap wich according to my experience has been very difficult to fill. This deficenecy and supplementing it with specimens be- longing to the relict salmon form of middle Sweden in my opinion suffices to explain, how professor Smitt, undoubtedly the scientist, who on this subject has excercised the greatest care and drawn the utmost consequences from his researches, has not been able to separate the two species. In the following pages I will describe the youger stages of the salmon compared with trout of corresponding sizes. I will commence with the stages in wich the fishes leave the rivers and further describe them during their developement. The larger stages from ca. 45 cm. and upwards are not worth describing, as they easily my be distinguished by people not wholly ignorant on the subject. Certainly previous investigators have given quite accurate descriptions of fry and emigrants belonging to thise species; but for sake of completeness and in order that this work my be useful to those who might wish to use it for the specific deter- mination of such fishes, I also incclude the fry. To begin with however I wish from a general point of wiew to discuss some principles, wich according to my opinion are fundamental to the specific description. Describing a species, the scientist is hardly able to do more than as accurately as possible to detail the image wich the peculiarities of the species in question, presents to his senses, and by means of wich he may recognise the species in single individuals. À STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 955 In description of the general image of the species, the means, by wich the description is to be effected, will consequently be dependant on the nature of the peculiarities and give due consi- deration to these. If we place before us an adult salmon and an adult trout, place them side by side and ask. by wich means we distinguish them, I should decidedly answer: by means of ,habitus*, the image, presented by the total of their exterior characters. The main difference by means of wich I am able, even at first sight, to distinguish between them is shortly this: The body of the salmon is considerably more slender and spool- shaped than that of the trout, wich is more plump and clumsy. The tail of the salmon is considerably longer more coniccylin- drical and lower than that of the trout, wich is shorter higher and more compressed from the sides. The caudal fin of the salmon 1s more cut out than that of the trout. The anal fin of the salmon 1s smaller and the scales of the body are larger than those of the trout. The trout is not so shiny and silver coloured and has more dorsal and lateral spots than the salmon. Behind the dorsal fin the salmon is spotted only above the lateral line. The trout is spotted also below the lateral line. The upper jaw of the salmon is shorter than that of the trout. All these factors and their mutual relations form the main features of the image, wich at all times enable us to distinguish the two species. Even in the fry (parr) stage and when in a state of maturety, stages in wich the fishes considerably differ from the species as grown up, but not yet mature, a number of the abovmentioned factors, such as the lenght of the upper jaw, the form of the body, the ralations of fins and tail besides the size of the scales, form a valueable clue for distinction, a clue wieh is also strengthened by other factors peculiar to these stages. 256 KNUT DAHL. In two species, so closely allied as trout and salmon, one must however obviously expect the different relations of the body to vary, especially so, when at least one of the species is known to be disposed to variation. When man, apes, birds etc. show individual variation vithen the limits of the species, we must also in the present case be prepared to meet it, and in the examination of large numbers of individuals the variation vill sone be observed. Every form, every relation in an organism may be metri- cally described and expressed by figures. A series of investi gators have largely employed and still employ the metrical method. In this however I think they very often are wrong. : The main object of a diagnostic description is to be practical, and now there is nothing, wich in a more unpractical way denotes the form, at least in fishes, than the figure. As professor Hervig once said, there is nothing to prevent us from correctly describing the face of a man metrically, but undoubtedly we should find it difficult and unpractical to recognise our friends by means of such a table of figures or formula. I openly confess that great difficulties are in the way of finding aedquate expressions for a difference in specific form wich mainly is brought to our brain through the eye; but an adequate carefull representation in words aided by exact draw- ings is undoubtedly in most cases preferable to figures. When I in the fallowing have availed myself of measure- ments, it is not with the intention of preparing a table of figures by means of wich salmon and trout may be distinguished. I only wish to produce a graphic, through the eye easily perceptible, representation of the progress of a few of the abor- mentioned characters in salmon and trout, the individual varia- tion considered. Among the peculiarities and different relations wich destin- guish salmon and trout may be mentioned 1) the different size of the scales, 2) the different size of the anal fin or if we like ai A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 957 to express it that way, its relation to the length of the tail, 3) the more or less prominent slenderness of the tail. The size of the scales may be determined as other investiga- tors have done, by counting their number in a row over a cer- tain measured portion of the body and referring this length to the length of the fish. However as I find this method too imprac- ticable, I have deemed it better to count the number between two definite points on the body e. g. in the oblique row of scales running from the hindpart of the base of the adipose fin down to the lateral hne. I have included the perforated scale of the lateral hine. The relation of the anal fin to the length of the tail may be brought out by dividing the latter by the length of the anal fin. The result will be a coefficient which I call “Tail coefficient I.” The more or less pronounced slenderness of the tail may also be expressed as a relationship between the length and mini- mum altitude or depth of the tail — “Tail-coefficient IL" In the subjoined illustration (fig. 1) these different lines of measurement are indicated and explained. The method employed in examining the specimens is illu- strated by the following example. Total length of uns teh. EEE | 95 em. | 15 | 2,5 cm. | 2 cm. | : C Tail coefficient I — Fm sen 0,80. & = 1,38. In this way large numbers of salmon and trout have been measured. Of course they have all been immature fish. To see if the relationship of these different characteristics altered Nyt Mag. f Naturv. XXXXII. III 17 958 KNUT DAHL. throughout development the fish have been classified in 5 stages: 1) fishes of a smaller length than 16 cm. (including the largest emigrating smolts, 2) fishes between 16 and 50 centimetres long comprising in the case of the salmon, mainly the “missing stages", 3) fishes above 50 cm. (the sizes of salmon common by caught). A = The number of scales in the oblique row of scales from the posterior " base of the adipose fin up to and including the scale on the lateral line. B = The altitude of the anal fin 2: the distance from the base of the first ray of the anal fin to the point of the longest ray of the same fin. C = The length of the tail, measured from the posterior base of the anal fin to the sharp heel formed by the first auxiliary rays of the cau- dal fin. D — The minimum altitude of the tail. This classification has been adopted mainly on account of the salmon. In order to produce the correctest possible com- parative representation of the alterations during development, corresponding annual classes of both species ought to have been compared. 'However this has been impossible. From the figures thus obtained I have represented graphi- cally the course of the abovementioned 3 characters in the two: species compared. (Vide Tab. I-III). Every 0 in these tables denotes an individual examined. The Ordinates respectively represent the number of scales, figures for Tail-coefficient I, figures for Tail-coefficient II. From these tables it is evident: 1) That the scales of the salmon are larger than those of the trout. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 959 2) That the anal fin of the salmon is smaller than that of the trout compared with the tail. 3) That the tail of the salmon 1s more slender than that of the trout. However, it is also obvious that these relations vary, and to such an extent, that the amplitudes of variation in the two species vaguely meet or even overlap each other. However on this latter point it ought to be noted, that some of these overlappings are caused by the introduction of specimens, which, in size, differ only inconsiderably from the previous class or group; the character in question alters in fact, during development. If we scan the table giving the scale-number, we find that this character remains practically constant through all groups. Upon examining table II (on Tail-coefficient I) however, we remark that this coefficient in the salmon slowly rises during early growth; in other words that the anal fin of the young salmon gets smaller and smaller as the fish grows, while that of the trout remains nearly unaltered. Excepting the youngest group the curves representing this character in the two species run nearly separated, with one single exception, a salmon of the group 16—50 cm. This fish measuring only 17,5 em. was captured in the ocean outside Christianssand, as will be mentioned later, and only the size destinguished it from ordinary emigrating smolts. The coefficient of the youngest group beeing low, the introduction of this specimen will in some degree alter the real course of the curve of the second group. : The same phenomenon also occurs in the table on Tail-coeffi- cient II (the slenderness of the tail), which in both species rises a little with the age, especially between 16 and 50 cm. (cfr. Tab. III a and b). A classification in sizes separated by sufficiently large inter- vals would possibly have yielded a more strikingly typical result. . 960 KNUT DAHL. The material measured by me however, has not been large enough to allow of this method. The abovementioned facts seem to me to show clearly, that any characteristic body relation in these two species might have been treated in the same manner and would have yielded similar curves of variation. By way of example we have now seen how some specific characters apply to the species in general. I have previously given prominence to the fact that the above- mentioned investigations are not intended to establish characters which might be expressed by figures or formule and separately employed in determining the species of a given individual. In itself, this would be unnecessary, because the accurate specific distinction of all the individuals on which these tables are prepared, must needs have been known previous to my investi- gations on the variation of the different characters in the two species. Thus none of the characters investigated, has separately been fundamental to my distinction; but the sum total of these, in addition to many other characters I have before called ,, habitus“ has in all cases enabled me to distinguish the two species. Supposing that we tried to determine the species of an individual solely by means of one of the 3 characters whose variation has been investigated, e. g. the scale fugure. By examining table I we find, that an absolutely certain determination is in a large number of cases possible. Just as large a propor- tion however, leaves room for doubt. If we examine table II (Tail-coefficient I) we find that a fish belonging to the youngest group is only in about half the cases with certainty determined by the value of Tail-coefficient I. As regards the two older groups it will be seen that the curves run almost quite separated. Consequently the species of a fish may in the great majority of cases be determined solely by the value of this character, when the fish is not smaller than 16 cm. in fact neither a parr nor a smolt. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 961 Examination of the 3rd relation as represented in tab. III (Tail-coefficient II) will yield a similar result. None of these relations detached from the others whose course has just been described, or from the other, „habitus“- characters of the fish suffice as a fundamentally safe diagnosis embracing all cases. If however the course of these 3 relations of form or character is examined in the isolated individual, they will be found, if compared with other characteristics, to present a valuable support to specific determination. The youngest group (below 16 cm.), belongs to the stage, where these 3 relations are most similar in the two species. However, other body relations yield destinctions so pregnant and so easily observed, that there never is any doubt as to which species the individual in question belongs. An examination of the large number of individuals by means of which the tables (I—IIT) on the two older stages, have been constructed, has shown that the same individuals never cause the curves to meet or overlap each other in regard to all three characters. As I have mentioned above, the tables show, that the salmon has large scales (small scale-figure) small anal fin in relation to the tail (tail longer than anal fin) and a very slender tail, while these characters in the trout are just the opposite. When the tables now show that the amplitudes of the variation of these characters in the two species overlap each other, we are not justified in inferring, that there needs must exist individuals of the salmon species which in themselves unite all the lowest values of the salmon curves or trouts possessing all the highest values of the trout. The curves thus do not shew that salmon exist which e.g. possess 15 scales, Tail-coeificient I 0,90 (anal fin longer than tail) and Tail-coefficient II 1,30, or a short and thick tail. No more do they show that trout exist which e. g. possess 14 scales, Tail-coefficient I 1,0 or an equally 262 KNUT DAHL. long anal fin and tail, and a Tail-coefficient IT 1,60 or a very slender tail. In examining the course of these relations in the single individuals of the above-mentioned tables, I have found quite the opposite to be the case. As a rule only one of the three characteristic relations, if any, is situated within those values of the curves which are common to both species. When a salmon possesses a very high scale-figure, one or both tail-coefficients have been situated outside the values of the curves, common to both species or vice versa. When a trout e. g. has possessed a tail-coefficient ranging among the highest values of the species, the scale-figure has not been among the values, common to both species. The most interesting examples I have been able to find among my material on trout, are 3 specimens of which Nr. 1 was caught in the Orkla, Nr. 2 in the Battenfiord, Nr. 3 in the ocean a few miles south of Christianssand (S). They are respectively 34,5, 36 and 45 cm. long, all very shiny and slender. The course of the 3 relations was: Tail- Tail- .| Length. -figure. | Denn Nr. 1....| 345 em. 17 0,99 1,56 a opo Be 17 0,99 1,60 8 15 009 16 1,00 1,53 Nrs. 1 and 2 are undoubtedly the most shiny, slender and salmon-like trout I have ever come across among the fishes examined by me. In the case of the salmon I may refer to some of the most striking cases that have occurred to me, A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 263 Tail- Tail- h. ls le-fi ; : Lens; | SE coefficient I. |coefficient II. Nr. 1 17 em. 13 0,85 1,91 MD 801) 14 1,57 2,32 SE Ce 15 1,33 > SOM 88 , 13 1,00 = 5 108 , 13 0,92 - In the face of my experiences I will however not deny the possibility that an examination of still larger numbers of indi- viduals might produce salmon or trout which in all 3 relations possess values corresponding to those values of the curves, which are common to both species. As I have not in the sifting of my relatively large amount of material met with such specimens, the conclusion however seems justifiable, that such specimens are extreemely rare. In all the cases examined, the total of the values of these 9 different relations combined, always points clearly in the direc- tion of one or the other of the two species. Thus the examination of these 3 characters, yields a good means of specific distinction. In most cases it is quite sufficient, and when other characters are also taken into consideration, there is no room for error. e. Description of young salmon and trout. The distinction between the young of salmon and trout at that stage of developement, when they leave the rivers, is effec- ted by means of the differences observable in the form and relations of the body — those of the head, the size and form of the scales, the colour, and, when the fish is living, its habits. 264 KNUT DAHL. In specific determination however, I would not advise anybody to attach importance to any one of these characters isolated, but only to a careful examination of them all. Pl. I represents two fishes in natural size. The upper one is a trout, the lower a salmon, both caught in the river Gula (the mouth). If we compare them the great difference in form of the body 1s obvious. While the trout is more plump and has a shorter and clumsier tail, the salmon is more finely pointed and spoolshaped in form, and has a very slender and relatively long tail. The salmon is not so much laterally compressed as the trout, which however cannot be shown in the drawing. The shape of the head is utterly different in the two spe- cies. The head of the young salmon is low and slender, while that of the trout is higher and clumsier. The head of the trout is relatively larger than that of the salmon. At first sight the head of the salmon seems specially long. In comparing the fishes it will however be seen, that the head of the salmon seems long, because its facial region (the nose and the mouth-region) is considerably shorter than that of the trout, the gillcovers being longer. The eye of the salmon, proportionally larger than that of the trout, is pushed very much forward. The nose is specially short and the mouth small. This latter character is expressed in the upper jaw of the salmon being exceedingly short. If a perpendicular line 1$ drawn downwards from the posterior part of the pupil of the eye, the posterior edge of the upper jaw will as a rule, not reach far enough back to touch this line. Often it will only reach as far back as to touch a perpendicular line drawn downwards from the centre of the pupil. In the trout however the frontal part of the head is considerably longer, the nose being proportionally longer and the mouth region heavier. The mouth is larger, and the upper jaw consequently longer. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 265 Although the nose region of the trout is longer, and the eye pushed further back, the upper jaw as a rule reaches a good deal further back than tot he posterior edge of the pupil, in many cases even further back than the posterior edge of the eye itself. Thus a perpendicular line drawn from the poste- rior margin of the pupil downwards will in nearly all cases cut the posterior part of the upper jaw. The form of the upper jaw is also somewhat different in the two species, that of the salmon being considerably broader in proportion to its length and generally more finely rounded at the posterior margin than is that of the trout. If the heads of the two fishes are seen from above, it is at once obvious that the forehead of the trout is broader than that of the salmon, the forehead of the latter being shorter and more pointed. All fins, excepting the adipose fin, are at this stage larger in the salmon than in the trout. The size of the caudal fin and the pectorals is specially conspicuous, the caudal fin of the salmon possessing consider- ably longer and more finely pointed flukes than that of the trout. The pectoral fins of the salmon exceed by far those of the trout in size, being longer as well as broader. If the pectoral fin is folded along the side of the fish, its posterior point will in the salmon be as a rule situated a little in front of or right below the anterior edge of the dorsal fin, and it will often reach even further back. Thus if a perpendicular line is drawn down- wards from the anterior base of the dorsal fin, this line will as a rule touch or cut the pectoral fin. In the trout this fin is stri- kingly shorter. This difference causes the two species to act quite differently on dry land. If a bucket of water containing living specimens of the two species is poured out on a sloping deck, the fishes when left dry will act quite differently. The salmon will all turn on 266 KNUT DAHL. their belles and prop themselves up on their broad pectorals, while the trout as a rule remain helplessly sprawling on their sides. Respecting the size of the scales in salmon and trout be- longing to this stage vide tab. 1 and my previous remarks upon this subject. The colours and their destribution and patterns in my opinion, afford considerable support in distinguishing between salmon and trout in the emigration stage. When leaving the river in this stage of developement both species possess a shiny silvery coating over the underlying frv or parr-colours. This coating may be more or less pronounced, the colours of the parr being more or less plainly seen through or being only distinguishable at certain angles of light. As a rule however, the colour patterns show very plainly. Generally the young salmon is more intensely silver coloured than the trout and the silvery hue is mixed with à remarkably beautiful mother-of-pearl tinge. The silvery hue of the young trout is mixed with a more yellowish- sometimes copper-coloured tinge. The main undercolouring consists in the salmon, of a blueish- green pigment. In the trout this pigment is more brownish or brownish-green, with a hardly perceptible blue touch. When the fishes are kept in a weak solution of formaline, the pig- ment of the salmon turns blueblack, that of the trout more greyish brown with a weak blueish touch. The distribution of the pigment is very different in the two species. In the salmon the back is greenish blue with a few black spots. This pigment reaches down the sides and the tail of the fish, arranged in several (8 —12) scallops or flukes contrasting strongly with the pure white of the ventral parts of the body. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 967 Sometimes these flukes are quite lightly parted from the pigment of the back, by small intervals of a little lighter colour. Small marks or spots of a light bluegrey colour may sometimes occur between the lower points of the flukes. Between every one of these flukes, which faintly resemble marks from fingers soiled with blue lead paint, is a bright red spot, the colour of red sealing wax. This spot is as a rule situated right in or by the lateral line. Sometimes red spots may occur higher up or lower down on the body; but, in this case, they are not arranged in any regular order and their number 1s never great, the highest number within my experience being 2 or 3. The dorsal fin has the colour of the back with a couple of irregular rows of dark spots. The caudal fin is greyish blue, semitransparent with blackish flukes. The adipose fin has the colour of the back. The anal and ventral fins are white. On the side turning towards the body the pectoral fins are bluish-black. On the outer side they are whitish towards the base, but gradually become more bluish-black towards the points of the finrays. In the trout the back is more brownish-green-grey. This pigment of the back is not as in the case of the sal- mon, continued scallop- or fluke-wise down the sides of the fish; itis always interrupted. In the trout large oval spots thus correspond to the flukelike markings in the salmon. These spots are always separated by relatively large intervals from the pig- ment of the back. Between these spots are found smaller spots dorsally as well as ventrally. None of these large side spots are as distinct and sharply limited as in the salmon. Along the lateral line runs a row of small red spots. As well above as below this line, runs a similar line of small red spots arranged just above and below the intervals between the spots along the 968 KNUT DAHL. lateral line. Small black spots are scattered over the back and the sides of the body. The dorsal fin bas the colour of the back. The adipose fin as a rule is orange-coloured. The caudal fin is as a rule yellowish-brown, semi-transparent. The anal fin is mostly yellowish-brown with blackish fore- part and a creamy streak along the first ray. The ventral fins are whitish-yellow-brownish and the pectoral fins have the same yellowish-brown, semi-transparent colour as the caudal fin. The different colours however, may vary a good deal ac- cording to the locality. Even the size will afford some aid in distinguishing the two species in the emigration-stage, the salmon according to my experience in northern rivers only exceeds 13 cm. in length in one case in a hundred, while the trout in this stage not rarely reaches 18—20 cm. in length. (Vide Tab. IV and V). f. Description of young salmon in the oceamic stage, compared with trout of the same size. After the young salmon have left the rivers the characters gradually undergo considerable changes. This 1s also the case with the trout, although the changes in this species are not quite as great as in the salmon. Judging from my aquarium experiments these changes eannot be said not to occur when the fish reaches any certain or fixed length. They are evidently dependent on the time of emigration, no matter whether the fish belongs to the largest or to smallest of the sizes peculiar to the emigration stage. Only gradually and during a long lapse of time do the fishes lose their juvenile characters. Thus one may very well meet salmon individuals of the same size, some presenting many juvenile characters, while others of the same size may present A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 969 characters mainly belonging to salmon of more advanced develop- ment. This phenomenon is explained by the above-mentioned facts. I only mention it here to prevent the presumption that the sal- mon, once emigrated, must needs present the following characters. This will specially relate to the sizes between 10 and 20 cms. As an illustration of the appearance of salmon and trout, after the juvenile characters have been discarded, the drawings on Pl. II and III may serve. Salmon and trout are here re- presented, in pairs for closer comparison. The upper figure in Pl. II is a trout 21 cms. long, the lower one a salmon 21,5 cms. long. The trout was caught in a seine in the Trondhjem fiord; the salmon is one of two, I found in the Bergen museum, reared by Mr. Grude in å freshwater-pond at Jæderen. The upper figure on Pl. III is a trout 25,5 ems. long, caught in the Trondhjem fiord, and the lower one a salmon 928 ems. long reared in my aquarium at the Trondhjem Biol. Station. The drawings in these as well as in Pl. I are executed by Mr. A. Dircks taxidermist to the Academy of Sciences in Trond- hjem. All relations are carefully measured by compasses, redu- ced and entered on the drawings; they have been also twice tested and corrected in the same manner by me. The caudal fin in the salmon drawn on Pl. II was worn, somewhat, during life in the aquarium and the flukes were smaller than represented in the figure. The points of the flukes are constructed with the aid of one of the specimens (28 ems. long) I found at the University of Christiania and which had been kept so long in spirits as to render it in other respects less fit as material, for a representative drawing. The principal characteristics of distinetion between sal- mon and trout at this stage will be found under the following features. 270 | KNUT DAHL. E The shape, relations and relative size of the head. The lenght and slenderness of the tail. The relation of the anal fin to the length of the tail. The shape of the caudal fin. The size of the scales. EIS OUS E The colour. Most of these characters will be quite plainly observed on inspection of Pls. II and III. As wil be easily seen the head of the salmon is smaller, more shapely and narrower than that of the trout. The eye of the salmon is situated closer to the forepart of the head than that of the trout; the nasal region is shorter and the mouth smaller than in the case of the tront. The upper jaw is also at this stage (as in the previous stage) considerably shorter in the salmon than in the trout. Thus the posterior margin of the upper jaw only seldom reaches as far back as to a perpendicular line drawn downwards from the posterior margin of the pupil of the eye.. The upper jaw of the trout on the contrary, reaches mostly as far back as to the posterior edge of the eye itself and even further back; only in a few cases will its posterior edge touch the limit peculiar to the upper jaw of the salmon. The upper jaw of the salmon is also as a rule, a little more drooping than that of the trout. The head of the salmon is also of a more conical, rounded form than the more laterally compressed head of the trout. Thus the cheeks of the salmon as also often the gillcovers are more bulging than in the trout. When the salmon has stayed some time in the sea and has grown somewhat, one will find that the frontal part of the head still retains the arch also observed in the smolts, and that this arch will even become more pronounced. Thus salmon of a length of between 20 and 30 ems. actually possess a depression in the occipital region of the head, while the arch of the forehead A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 971 curves smoothly over the eyes and precipitates itself towards the nose. | Seemngly this peculiarity is produced by the quick growth of the body, the region behind the occipital part of the head putting on flesh quicker than the latter. In the salmon on pl. II this peculiarity is only indicated. In the other specimen sent me from the Bergen museum it was however, more pronounced. In the salmon represented in Pl. III as well as in the other specimens reared in my aquarium, this feature was constantly present. Also the two specimens from the University museum plainly presented traces of the same peculiarity notwithstanding that they were considerably shrivelled up from being kept for years and years in spirits. This rounded forehead, the small short nose, the drooping upper jaw and the small mouth gives a much more „beaky“ appearance to the face of the salmon than that of the trout. The arch of the forehead seems to get less pronounced, as the salmon approaches the grilse stage. In a specimen 39 ems. long caught in the Skagerrack off Christianssand only faint traces of the arch are present. It seems to disappear as the nose gets more developed. This seems to take place from about 30 em. length and upwards. The difference in the length and slenderness of the tail 1s at once obvious upon closer examination of Pls. II and III, and as regards the variation of the slenderness in the two species I refer to tab III and my previous comments. From the figures of the above-mentioned plates it will also be seen that the relation between length of anal fin and length of tail is utterly different in the two species. The anal fin of the salmon is also proportionally smaller than is that of the trout. Tab II and my comments on this table will sufficiently illustrate the relation between the length of anal fin and length of tail. 972 KNUT DAHL. Needless to say, only fishes whose anal fin was quite unin- jured have been employed in the construction of this table. The main difference in shape consists in the caudal fin of the sal- mon having long and more pointed flukes than that of the trout. Also the basal part of this fin is less broad in the salmon than in that the trout. Respecting the size of the scales vide tab. I. The colour at this stage, at least in more advanced de- velopment, differs considerably from that of the emigration stage. The metallic lustre in both species gradually gets more prominent as the juvenile markings more and more disap- pear. The undercolouring in the salmon is still blueish-green, while that of the trout is more brownish-green. In the case of the trout however, great variations occur ac- cording to surroundings. The salmon however, seems to be constant in this respect. The trout possesses a large number of black spots, densely distributed. These spots extend far below the lateral line as well in front, as behind a perpendicular line drawn downwards from the posterior base of the dorsal fin. The black spots of the salmon on the contrary, are very few and large, and only a few are found below the lateral line. Very rarely do black spots occur below the lateral line behind a vertical line drawn downwards from the posterior base of the dorsal fin. The black spots below the lateral line are mostly limited to the triangle produced by a line drawn from the upper base of the pectoral fin to that point in the lateral line, where a perpendicular line drawn from the posterior base of the dorsal fin would cut the lateral line. g. Capiure of young salmon in the ocean. The positive material I have succeeded in procuring to illustrate the habitat of the young salmon between the emigration stage and the grilse slage is not very large. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 973 During the first summer of my investigations I discovered in the collections of our university museum 2 young salmon in the emigration stage, which professor G. O. Sars had taken in the Trondhjem-fiord from the stomach of a large saithe (gadus virens) during the summer 1891. Being aware of this fact I have continually examined the stomachs of large numbers of saithe without being able to find any young salmon. On one occasion however I have found trout. On reading a report prepared by Mr. Simonnaes, assistant to the inspector of fresh-water-fisheries I was aware of his mentioning the fact, that the mackerel-fishermen from Flekkerøe, Christianssand professed to get in their driftnets small salmon the size of a large herring. He further mentions, that he him- self had the opportunity of once seeing the remains of an indi- vidual 40 cm.s long caught in the Skagerrack by the mackerel- fishermen from Flekkerøe. | During a visit to Flekkerøe in 1901 I arranged with Mr. Thomas Thomassen, Skaalvik, a man possessing influence among the fishermen, that the young salmon caught during the summer 1901 should be forwarded to me. I offered a reward of 50 kroners for each salmon between 15 and 45 cm. length forwarded to me. At the end of the fishing season I received from this source 6 specimens caught in the driftnets in the open ocean up to 30 miles off any shore. 3 proved to be trout, 3 salmon. The following table shows their species and size also the date of capture and distance from land where they were caught. Nr. Species Length Locality Date 1901 in em. 1 Salmon 39 18 miles S. off. Oksø 1/, 2 E 17,5 SER —»-— 25/6 3 * 43 30 , —»— 5/6 4 Trout 38 Sa: —»— 6/6 5 ” 42 26 „ FACE Je 6 » 44. 8 » It 21/6 Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII. III. 18 974 KNUT DAHL. German herring-fishers inform me, that young quite small salmon during antumn often are caught in their driftnets in the North Sea. h. Summary of the results of the investigations. The investigations described in the present chapter have shortly yielded the following results: 1) That young salmon may be caught in the rivers and river mouths up to a size of 13—16 cm.! 2) That young salmon of sizes between (193—106) cm. and (45—50) em. have been caught by me neither in the rivers nor in the fiords, nor those parts of our seas where gear is employed for the purpose of catching salmon. Neither have they been found by me in the catches made by the fishermen, nor in the fishmarkets of Norway, Great Britain and Denmark. : 3) That young salmon between the emigration stage and the grilse stage (some 40 cms. length) are not at all previously known nor accurately described; that examination of the collections of the majority of Scandinavian museums, only yielded 4 — four — individuals between these sizes, all undescribed. 4) That young salmon of sizes between the emigration stage and the grilse stage have been caught in small numbers many miles at sea and above large oceanic depths. Young salmon of the abovementioned sizes must evidently be considered as very rare specimens of natural history. I therefore consider myself justified in drawing the conclusion that the young salmon after emigrating from the rivers, disappears from the fiords, the belt of islands and the immediate neighbour- ! My investigations in certain southern rivers have later proved that the smolts in these rivers may occasionally reach ca. 20 cm, in length. Auth. Rem. 1904. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. | 275 hood of the coast, and enters upon a pelagic life in the open ocean. I must consider this as a peculiar lawbound passage of its lifehistory. This fact I now consider so well founded by the investi- gations described above, that I desist from all further comment. On the strength of this fact I will not claim, that young sal- mon of the abovementioned sizes cannot be found in our waters, but it is evident, that such finds would only be exceptional. For all practical purposes my result may thus be expressed in the sentence, that salmon between ca. 16 and ca. 45 cms. length or salmon between the smolt stage and the grilse stage do not occur in those of our waters where salmonfishing is carried on. In this connection I wish to propose a single reservation which, however, does not impair the correctness of the above- . mentioned results. My investigations have not, in any considerable degree, been extended to Finmarken, and I do not feel certain that my results correctly express the conditions peculiar to the fiords of this vast portion of our country. Some of these fiords have indeed more the character of open bays of the ocean than of fiords, and may possibly, on account of their more oceanie character, be the habitat of young salmon. Also I do not feel certain that young salmon, somewhat smaller than the smallest grilse generally caught by the fisher- men may not be caught in a few places on our coast near the open ocean. I mean however, that this latter phenomenon, if occurring, must be regarded as a casual aud sporadie visit paid by these sizes of salmon, which undoubtedly belong to the open ocean and lead a pelagic existence there. The abovementioned results are obviously in no small degree important to the solution of practical problems relating to our 276 KNUT DAHL. salmon and troutfisheries. In some respects they offer a wholely new base far deliberations fundamental to measures calculated to promote the interests of these fisheries. Before proceeding to a closer description and a critical re- vision of my results in relation to the principles of law tending to promote these fisheries, I propose in separate chapters to describe some investigations of a more special nature regarding the growth and other biological features in salmon and trout, | which also have some importance in legislation relating to the species in question. Chapter III. On emigration and growth of young salmon. As is well known the maturing salmon during spring and summer ascend our rivers. During autumn the large ova (ca. 6 mm. in diameter) are deposited among gravel and sand in the spawning beds. Spawning in the northern parts of our country, as a rule, takes place in September and October. In southern rivers it may be extended to November and even to the first half of December. | heposing among the gravel and sand of the bottom partly also buried in it, these eggs develop during winter and hatch from the latter end of February to the last days of April the larva, about 2 em. long bursting the egg-capsule and emerging. To begin with this larva lying practically helpless on the bot- tom, is nourished by the large yolksack. After the lapse of about 6 weeks the young fish commences taking nourishment from the outer world, consisting of smaller insects, insect larvæ and crustaceans. It also acquires the form and locomotory faculties of the fry. | A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 977 These fry abide in the river until reaching a certain size, when, acquiring the silvery eoat of the emigration stage, it leaves the river. My investigations showed that, as a rule, the size of the emigrating young salmon of our rivers varies from 9—13 cm. (Vide Tab. IV). In the following pages I will endeavour to throw some light on the question of the age of these fishes, counting their age from the time of hatching, viz. ca. April 1. Most authors, who have treated the system as well as the bio- logy of the salmon, agree quite unanimously that the young salmon (smolts) emigrate from the rivers during spring (April, May) in schools. This is described as a phenomenon limited to a relatively short space of time. | The general idea seems to be, that the young salmon at a certain time of the year is suddenly smitten with the migratory instinct, resulting in an emigration in masses analogous to the migration of our migratory birds. When, during the first summer of my investigations I found in the latter half of August emigrating young salmon in the mouth and lower parts of the Gula, I was consequently not a little surprised. These young fish were not in the least different from the emigrants of spring (Vide Tab. IV col. 3). This experience has been confirmed by all later investi- gations. At any time during summer I have been able to prove the oecurrence of young emigrating salmon in the mouth and the lower parts of the Gula as well as the Orkla. In order to gather experience on the occurrence of young salmon in the different stages of development right from the spawning places down to the sea I effected a series of fishing experiments in the river Orkla, from the river mouth up to the spawning beds in Meldal. On the 16%, 17 and 18'% of July 1901 I fished with the rod at the following localities: Kalstad (Meldal ca. 40 km. from the river mouth), Aarlivold (20 km. lower down), Bak, Forve, and the mouth of the Orkla, 378 KNUT DAHL. I employed the smallest trout flies obtainable or minute Japanese flies without a barb. In all these localities the young of the salmon abounded. High up the river they appeared to be most numerous. Shoals of them could here be seem everywhere swarming in all pools and rapids, especially the large quiet and relatively shallow pools. Throwing my small flies along the shore and dragging them towards me, shoals of young salmon as well as trout were enticed to come so close that the two species, even in the water, were clearly distinguished. The young salmon however by far outnumbered the young trout. Each cast made dozens of fishes rise to the flies, which however only the largest ones were able _ to swallow. The fishes denoted in the last column of Tab. No. IV re- present the sizes caught on my flies at Kalstad. As it will be observed, they are a good deal smaller than the young, emigrat- ing in spring from the Orkla (vide first column of same table). However, there were in the river considerably smaller fishes which I could not catch with the fly. Not one single young salmon in the silvery coat of emi- gration was here observed, a fact also stated by the British sportsmen fishing the river. They said that „The parr did not become smolts“. All the young observed by me in this locality had the coating and colours peculiar to the salmon before acquir- ing the emigration coat, viz: a greenish-yellow a little copper- hued and faintly iridescent colouring, forming as it were a coating over the other characteristic pigment markings and spots. At Aarlivold (20 km. lower down), the same phenomenon as above mentioned was observed. However a few young of a slightly larger size and in emigration colouring, were observed. At Bak midway between Aarlivold and the mouth of the river, young salmon in the emigration garb were the only ones found. These young, the size of which may be seen in A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 279 the second last column of the table (Table No. IV), correspond in all respects to the emigrants of spring (vide 1st column of the same table). The same facts were also observed at Forve, in the lower reaches of the river and at the river mouth which is subject to the tides and alternately possesses fresh and brackish water. From these experiments it transpires, that the young salmon during growth migrate down the river, and during migration gradually acquire the coat of colours peculiar to them when finally leaving the river. During all summer there is a constant migration of young salmon down the rivers and into the ocean. : This migration commences in the rivers Gula and Orkla in May and ceases in autumn because the young in the river then practically cease growing. Thus, as my fishing experiments show, I have during late autumn (October) found the mouths of both these rivers devoid of young salmon. When May or spring time has been considered as the annual time of mugration, this view 1s probably derived from the fact that the spring floods quite mechanically convey large numbers of young salmon down the rivers. It is of course very difficult to judge at which time of the emigration period, the number of emigrants is largest. However I have the impression that May and June in our rivers, are the months when most young salmon may be caught in the river mouths. During these two months the large floods of the Gula and Orkla generally occur, and this fact would afford sufficient explanation. I mention with regret that the material collected by me for illustrating the age of these young salmon is not as large as I should have wished it to be. In order correctly to determine their age, very large numbers of individuals are wanted, and catching the smallest stages in the stony reaches of the rivers 980 KNUT DAHL. is so slow work, that I have not found time enough to enter into this work. | However one may with certainty start from the fact that the young leaving the river during spring are at least 11/4 years old, because their hatching cannot have taken place later than February — April of the previous year. Whether the young, which during summer continually emigrate are the smallest of the young hatched in the previous year or the largest of the fry of the year, I am not in a position to determine with sufficient accuracy. In my opinion it is not improbable that both annual classes are to be found among them. This latter supposition does not seem to be confirmed by the experience gained at the rearing establishments of our government, where the fry from March to October only grow from 2 to 8 ems (maximum) (Vide report of the inspector of freshwater fisheries 1895—1896, pg. 14). However it would seem probable that the growth of the fry in nature would be a good deal quicker than in hatching- boxes, where thousands are penned together. Researches made by P. P. C. Hoek (comparing the size of limited numbers of artificially reared young salmon with those caught in the river Prüm.) confirm this presumption. Also during the excursion to the Meldal, July 1901, I did not succeed in observing (in the water) numbers of very small young salmon, whereas the larger size of fry (parr) occurred in countless numbers and could easily be caught and also ob- served everywhere in the shallows and pools. The sizes are denoted in the last column of Tab. IV. I regret to say that this column does not correctly represent the lower size limit of the fry, because I could with certainty discern young salmon down to 5—6 cm. length rising in numbers to my flies, unable to swallow them. It is quite certain, that the group in the last column of the table would have included at least the 6 cm. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 981 % sizes if I had been able to secure these smaller fishes. Then it is very improbable that a smaller group exists between 2 cm. and 6 cm. as late in the summer as in the middle of July. Consequently it becomes most reasonable to consider the group in the last column as 0-group or the fry of the year, viz: fry hatched ca. April 1, 1900. For the same reason it is not impossible that the emigrants represented on the second last column, may belong to this group which gradually, during growth, migrates down the river. | If however the results from our state rearing establishment at Ullern should be a correct gauge of the normal growth of the salmon fry, a group smaller than the smallest I have found must exist in our rivers in summer. This fact, if existing, would clearly retard emigration for one year. The emigrating smolts, which leave the rivers in spring would thus be 21/4 years old because they could not possibly grow from maximum 8 cm. (which the reared fry reach in October) to maximum 13 cms. which is peculiar to the emigrants of spring. Without expressing any definite opinion as to the final decision on this question, I admit, that at present I feel most satisfied and think the groups represented in tab. No. IV are best explained, if the matter is considered from the point of view, that the emigrants of spring are ca. 11/4 years old (,I-group^). Those emigrating during summer are partly the young belonging to the I-group, the fry of the previous year which have not developed so” quickly as those previously emigrated. These emigrants of the summer also belong partly to the fry of the year, or the ,0-group*, which in July and August have grown large enough for emigration. The rest of the 0-group remain during winter in the river and emigrate next spring and early summer as „I-group“. It seems to me that this view is feaseable considering that hatching and consequently also development, have an amplitude of several months. 289 cM . KNUT DAHL. This fact in connection with the varying conditions of nu- trition, which undoubtedly occur in the rivers, will inevitably cause the fry of each year to represent a series of different stages of development. Thus a phenomenon like the emigra- tion, which evidently is dependant on a certain stage of deve- lopment, can only be realised during a longer space of time. Evidently no large error is committed if the age of the emigrating young salmon is valued at 11/4 years. Undoubtedly it would be important to know how long time is required before these young, as grilse, return to our fiords or rivers. A final solution of this question I am unable to present. Conclusions as to the progress of growth of the young salmon, cannot directly be based on my rearing-experiments. Only when we are able to fish large numbers of small salmon after emigration will a final knowledge as to the growth of young salmon be obtained. However I feel obhged to com- municate my experiences as to the growth of the fish in my aquaria, and by means of a comparison with known facts, endeavour to prepare a representation of the rate of growth of the fish, which at the present time may be considered most probable. In the adjoined graphical representation (Fig. 2) I have drawn curves reduced to forms representing the size of the fish, and. with figures denoted their probable age. The upper one of these curves or groups represents the size of the young salmon when introduced into my aquaria. In con- sequence their age, estimated at 11/4 years, cannot possibly be lower. The lowest group represents the lowest values of the grilse group as found in our waters during summer. Only the lowest part of this curve is drawn, and it is compiled according to Mr. Landmarks report for 1891—1896 in which paper suf- ficient evidence is given as to the fact that the grilse consti- tutes a separate annual class or group of growth. The middle group denoted by an unbroken line, represents the size of the young salmon reared in my aquaria and killed A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 983 October 18, 1901. These are thus at least 2'/2 years old. The upper one of the two groups denoted by broken lines, repre- sents the estimated size of these same salmon during the first autumn in the aquaria, when their size could not of course be measured. Jun: /900 Further, as a gap then exists between 30 and 40 cms., a gap of such a size that a group evidently must exist between these sizes, I have drawn a curve in broken lines representing such a group about the sizes found in the young salmon caught by the mackerel fishermen in the Scagerrack and forwarded to me during May and June. | For clearness I have provided the different groups with current dates. 984 KNUT DAHL. According to this, the grilse caught in our waters during summer would be ca. 41/4 years old, and the emigrating smolts would thus, during 3 years in the ocean, develop into grilse. As I have mentioned above, our knowledge as to the growth of young salmon must necessarily be to a large extent theore- tical as long as we do not possess a sufficient number of young specimens caught in the ocean. | At present there is nothing to guarantee that the growth in my aquaria has been quite normal. In order to judge, if other fish grow normally in the aquaria, a sufficient supply of food granted, I have kept numbers of young saithe (gadus virens) in a special tank. Their growth very well corresponded to the growth of the same group of saithe in the sea, which from time to time I easily caught for comparison. I do not however think, that these experiments with the saithe justify any definite or final conclusion as to salmon. Although I believe it to be probable, that really no large dis- proportion exists between the growth of salmon in my aquaria and in the sea. Chapter IV. . On the growth and migrations of the trout. like the salmon the trout of the sea ascend our rivers to spawn. The trout run as a rule during late summer and autumn. The ova are deposited in sandy places in the rivers. Spawning occurs in most places in September— October. During winter the embryos develop. From the end of February and towards the beginning of May the eggs hatch, the ca. 11/2 cms. long larvae emerging. Like the salmon they are provided with a yolk-sack. Reposing among the gravel of the bottom these larva during development use up the A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 985 contents of the yolk-sack, become fry and during summer ra- pidly grow. How quickly this fry of the year grows 1n our rivers I am unable to state, my researches only encompassing the trout from the stage when leaving the river and migrating into the salt water. As shown in table V the size of the young trout, when leaving our rivers for the first time, varies between 10 and 20 cms., average about 15 cms. The age of these emigrating young trout I do not pre- cisely know; but counting the age of the fish from the moment of hatching, they must be at least 1!/4 years old, and conse- quently have spent one spring, one summer and one winter in the river. However, I am inclined to believe that they may be one year older. This is only conjecture, and I must expressly state, that I have not acquired material for an independant and definite opinion on the matter. As will be noticed my tables only com- prise fish down to 10 cm. length. In the tables V, VI and VII the size of trout caught during my investigations is graphically represented. These tables comprise a great number of the fishes caught. However they are founded mainly on larger catches, made in single localities during a short space of time. Poorer catches made during a longer space of time, over a large area, I have not used as material for these tables. If we look at the groups in Tab. V, we observe that two groups of sizes may be distinguished in the 2 first columns of the table, one group between 10 and 20 em., the other between 20 and some 30 em. The fishes constituting the groups are the fishes taken in nearly all the hauls made in the lower parts and mainly in the mouths of the Orkla and the Gula, during May and the first days of June 1898. Both these groups represent fish emigrating from the rivers during these months. As I propose to show, later on, the groups 986 KNUT DAHL. represent the fry of two different years or two annual classes of growth, and the presence of the older one is dependant on a biological peculiarity, distinguishing the trout from the salmon. The young trout, indeed, after the lapse of the first summer in the sea return to the river in autumn, spend the winter there and again emigrate in spring. This phenomenon however, seems mainly to apply to the larger rivers and streams. Thus if we examine the next two columns of tab. V which are based chiefly on fishes caught in the mouth of the Bors- elven in Gulosen and the ,Skougdalselven* in Rissen, we find only the smallest group of emigrants represented. The first of these streams is hardly more then a brook, and it is perfectly clear, that numbers of larger fishes cannot spend the winter there. Neither is the second stream an important watercourse. As an example I propose to describe my results from one river, the Orkla, which at all times of the year has been exa- mined by me. If the first column of table V be compared with table VI it will be observed that the smallest group, which in May 1898 was 10—20 cm. long, in October of the same year had grown to a size varying between 18 and 30 em. and at this latter time of the year occurred in large masses in the mouth of the Orkla. All the fishes (between one and two hundred) by means of which the first column of table VI is constructed, were taken in 3 hauls with the eelhandseine and it was evident, that the trout were ,thick as herrings* in the lower course of the river. As wil be seen in the table, only an insignificant minority of these fish were sexually mature, and consequently their object was not propagation. On this same occasion also a stretch of the river at Forve, 7 kms. up the river, was examined. Not a fish was caught. At Kalstad in the Meldal about 40 km. up the river, a number of hauls were effected in a larger stretch of the river. In these hauls I obtained the fishes denoted in the next column of table kin PPP A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 98] VI (Kalstad October 24, 1898) Nearly all these were grown- up fishes, belonging to older stages and in a state of sexual maturity. — Thus the upper reaches of the river were evidently devoid of the younger group filling the mouth of the river: That this group afterwards must have ascended the river in shoals, I was able to prove in May 1899. I then made a haul at Forve, where no fish had been ob- tained in October. This haul yielded 175 trout represented in the last column of table VI (Forve bridge, May 3 1899). These fishes clearly belong to the same group which, during late autumn 1898, ascended the river, and clearly they also constitute the larger of the two groups which would emigrate from the river during the same spring (compare table V, 1st column). By way of example, this fact is also clearly illustrated by looking up the size of trout which in May occurs in the fiord. The size of this trout 1s very well shown in table VII, column 1, representing fishes caught in the Beitstadfiord, May 1900. I have also satisfied myself that this group does not occur „en masse“ in the Orkla during summer. Thus in July 1901 fishing right from Kalstad down to the mouth of the Orkla brought nothing but quite young trout, and as mentioned, a few quite young salmon. Only very rarely a larger trout would be seen rising to the flies, and evidently the river was to all prac- tical purposes devoid of larger trout. This fact was also corro- borated by British sportsmen, who for 10 years had fished the beats at Kalstad. They acknowledged it as a characteristic peculiarity of the river, that sea-trout, excepting fry, during sum- mer was extremely scarce. These facts are also characteristic of the Gula. This is partly shown when the second and last columns of table V are compared. In August 1898 we find the smallest emigrants of spring grown up to 20—30 cm. length, and prepared to re-enter the river. Also in August a group is found between 10 and 988 KNUT DAHL. 18 em. Its occurrence in the table is caused by the fishing also being carried on a little up the river. Consequently the smaller fishes, which next spring would represent the youngest group of emigrants, were also caught. Also in October the fishes which constitute the smallest emigrating group of spring, invade the Gula. This is shown in table VII, second last column. In my opinion, similar facts will be found in most rivers, although I am inclined to believe that larger or smaller excep- tions and variations may occur especially respecting the dates of emigration and return. It seems very probable that the cli- matic variations in this respect would assert themselves, and that some difference would be noticeable as to southern and northern latitudes in our vast country. That such difference, however, cannot be great, is clearly shown by table VII, last column, which represents trout caught in the Mandal river, October 25, 1901. There is no doubt, that this autumnal immigration of trout as regards most large rivers, is a general phenomenon. Reports to this effect, are present from many different parts of the country, especially the surroundings of the lower parts of the larger rivers, These reports are also interesting on account of the fact, that these masses of trout which appear in the river mouths in autumn, have very often been considered as young salmon. At this time of the year, having spent the summer in the sea among the herring fry, they are really very fat, shiny and silver- coloured; however, as described in Chapter II, they are easily distinguished from salmon. These immigrating trout are in most places in this country named ,blankøre*, „hostblege“, „blege“, „lakseyngel“ a. s. f. When leaving the river in spring, the people around the Orkla and the Gula, and also many other rivers, call them ,is-fisk“ (icefish) evidently because they are caught when the ice is breaking up. As I have mentioned they A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 989 are by many people considered young salmon. From several localities such trout have been kindly forwarded to me for exa- mination, by men, who either took an interest in getting the species of these fishes determined, or acted in the belief that they were sending me those sizes of young salmon, which I had not been able to catch. I must admit, that the real cause of the trout returning to the rivers during autumn, to me seems a mystery, and I can offer no contribution towards a solution. Considering the numerous reports as to the trout being injurious to ova and fry of salmon, I was led to suppose that the trout in question perhaps ascended the rivers in order to devour ova and fry. In order to test this supposition I have examined the con- tents of large numbers of stomachs. In the trout, which has spawned during autumn, the stomachs as a rule contained ova and fry of salmon and trout, sometimes in not inconsiderable quantities. The stomachs of the fat and shiny fishes, belonging to the immigration group of autumn, did, during autumn 1898, not contain ova or fry. On one accasion I examined ca. 100 stomachs, taken from the fishes which on May 5, 1899 were caught at Forve bridge (vide table VI). Among these, only one contained a small salmon iry; the rest were empty. Thus these fishes would not seem to remain in the river on feeding pur- poses. On the contrary it is highly probable that they eat next to nothing. As I propose to show later on, they hardly grow at all during winter. While ascending the river in autumn they are fat and in splendid ‘condition, they are in May, when emigrating again, much more slender; they are in fact very lean; the flesh is not so red; they do not fetch the same price, and are also not so good eating as prime fish. As mentioned before, not all fishes belonging to this group, ascend the rivers in autumn. Some remain in the sea Nyt Mag. f£. Naturv. XXXXII, IV. 19 290 KNUT DAHL. during winter. Although I am not in a position to determine definitely their places of resort in the sea during the winter months, I believe their habitat to be nearly the same as during summer. The only time of the year, when I have not been able to catch them along the shores, where they live in summer, is the space of time between the latter end of No- vember and the end of February; but during this time I have not made many hauls. As early as in the first days of March, I have nearly every year been able to procure, trout, as well singly, às on some occasions in large quantities, in. single hauls. These fish have been of the same size as the emigrating ,isfisk“ of spring, but have been fat. As I have mentioned above, these trout scarcely grow at all during winter. Also the trout kept in aquaria at my station have refused food during winter, reposing quietly on the bottom or among stones. These facts have conveyed to me the notion, that the trout of these sizes (between 20 and 30 cm.) only eat very little during winter, keep quiet in a sort of half-torpor, the reduced processes of life being maintained on the fat accumu- lated during summer. The tables V—VII very plainly show the growth of the fish from the moment it leaves the river for the first time 10—20 cm. long, until it returns to the river in autumn, hibernates, and re-emigrates. If we observe the progress of growth as regards the fish of the Orkla and compare the first column of tables V and VI, it transpires, that the youngest emigrants of spring, during summer have grown from 10—20 cm. to a length varying from 10 or 20 to some 30 cm. When these fishes during the following spring re-emigrate, their size is nearly unaltered, as will easily be observed by comparing table VI, first and last column. As regards the Gula, comparison of column 2 and 5 table V will show the same progress of growth. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 991 If we examine the groups in table VII last column, repre- senting fishes from the Mandal river, it is obvious how well this table agrees with those of the two northern rivers, the upper group representing fishes, which are going to emigrate next spring, the lower one, fishes who left the river for the first time during spring 1901, returning during autumn. As regards the growth of the trout after it has left the river a second time as ,isfisk*, these tables do not give exhaustive information. The only fact which, upon this point is clearly established by the tables, is that a definite grouping of the growth after the second emigration ceases to be perceptible. Thus the further growth of the fish must undoubtedly be very irregular and highly varying in different individuals. This fact is obvious if we look at column 1 table VII, Beitstadfiord May 1900, a table representing the sizes of a large number of fishes caught during a short space of time in one locality. The fact also is in good accordance with the experience gained by Mr. A. Landmark, inspector of fisheries, in experiments with the labelling of trout of similar sizes. This irregularity of growth, which is however observed in most fishes as they grow older, may to some extent be con- nected with the fact, that the trout in these stages becomes more wandering and thus encounters considerably differing con- ditions of nutrition. Also the fact, that the larger proportion of the trout attain sexual maturity only after the second emigration, may to some extent account for the subsequent irregularity of growth. As will be observed in the tables, where fishes, sexually mature, are denoted by a 9, the group immigrating in autumn very rarely contains mature fishes. Thus, a careful exami- nation of more than 150 trout caught in the mouth of the Orkla, October 23, 1898 (vide table VI) yielded only one mature fish below 30 cm. length, while not a few above 30 cm. had not yet attained maturity. DH KNUT DAHL. Among the fishes caught in the upper part of the river during the same excursion (vide table VI, col. 2), and all of which with a single exception, were sexually mature, only one was below 30 cm. in length. The same fact will also be observed if the 3 last columns in table VII are examined. They represent fishes caught, during the breeding season, in the Battenfiord, the Gula and the Mandal rver. We also here notice the fact that there is no absolute size limit at which sexual maturity is attamed. At the same time however it transpires, that the majority of trout spawn when they have reached a length of 30—35 cm. If we examine those columns in the tables which are con- structed upon the results of fishing experiments conducted during the spawning time, it is obvious how exceedingly scarce the mature fishes are, compared to the number of immature fishes in the rivers during autumn. This fact however must not be considered as contain- ing a correct representation of the real relation between the numbers of mature and immature individuals in this species. The fact, that sexually mature fishes rarely occur in the catches, is to a large extent due to the hauls being effected in the main courses of the rivers. These do not to any large extent seem to afford spawning beds for the trout, the mature fishes pre- ferring to enter side-rivulets and brooks of even quite incon- siderable size and water-volume, localities where the use of seines is excluded. Not only does this refer to the brooks and rivulets joining the large watercourses, but nearly every small water- course oreven gutter, which directly joins our fiords or the open sea, forms spawning places where trout breed in autumn. In the immediate neighbourhood of the mouth of such small water- courses one may during autumn always be sure to find large trout, who only ascend the brook, when in the last stages of maturity. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 993 In these small watercourses the spent fish of course never remain long. However I have considered it too slow work in such localities, to catch so large numbers of individuals, that their introduction in the tables would be in any marked degree illu- strative of the relative abundance of mature and immature fishes. On the whole it seems to be a peculiarity of the trout, at least in the rivers examined by me, that the mature fishes do not remain long in the river either before or after spawning. They run quickly up the river or watercourse, spawn and return to the sea. In my opinion this fact is rendered evident if on one hand we remember, what I have remarked above on the scarcity of large trout during summer in the Orkla and the Gula, and on the other hand note, that during late autumn, October and November, I have often in my seines in the sea caught recently-spent trout. Thus it will easily be understood that the tables from the rivers are fallacious as regards the numeric relation between mature and immature trout. If any of the materials collected by me might be supposed to illustrate this relation, it would be table VII col. I Beitstad- fiord, May 1900. This table may be considered as illustrative of the usual catches of trout in the sea at this season. Later on, during summer, the upper group will move down, as the fish grow. Even here however, as is usual in. the tables, the larger fish (above 30 cm.) are few, compared to the younger group. A careful examination of the measurements of about 500 _ trout, which some years ago were effected by Mr. Simonnæs — in western Norway (vide report of the Inspector of Fresh-water fisheries 1895—96) shows the same result as my tables. This relation. between the numbers of larger and smaller trout must evidently thus be of general value, and clearly the 294 KNUT DAHL. size of the great proportion of the trout, which can be caught in our waters, is smaller than the size at which the majority of the individuals of the species attain sexual maturity. Whether this fact is a correct expression of the really existing relations in the natural economy of the species, I am of course unable in any satisfactory way to illustrate. However I wish to draw attention to the fact, that the trout, having reached the sizes peculiar to the mature stages, becomes much more roving and wandering, partly resorting to localities where our ordinary fishing implements are insufficient. The labelling experiments effected by Mr. Landmark in one of our western fiords seem indeed to show that the trout do not wander much. However if we consider, that I have procured large trout from the mackerel driftnets as far as 26 miles off Oksö in the Scagerrack, and further, that nearly all mackerel fisher- men from the Scagerrack and Kattegat state that trout are caught in their driftnets miles at sea, it is at all events evident, that some trout must wander considerable distances away from the rivers or brooks where they were reared. ‘Thus knowing that larger trout may occur as pelagie fishes many miles from land in the open ocean, we cannot possibly expect them to be plenti- full in the fiords at the same time of the year. Further conclusions as to the progress of reproduction and the economy of the fish I do not consider justified by the material at hand. I can only state, that the trout in all the waters investigated by me is ‘exceedingly numerous. In this connection I also wish to draw attention to the fact, that the economy of the trout of the sea cannot be considered to be dependant solely on the reproduction of this form. In my opinion the freshwater forms of the trout also con- tribute to the abundance of trout in the sea. "Thus, trout con- tinually descend from the fresh waters to the sea, trout which are not direct descendants of the trout form of the sea, but belong A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 295 to the various trout forms of the fresh waters. Having reached the sea these fish become sea trout. First of all I was made aware of this fact by obtaining in my nets in the sea, especially in or around river mouths, trout which differed considerably from the sea trout. These trout differed in colour considerably from the general colouring of the sea trout and possessed more of the gay and bright colours peculiar to the trout forms of the fresh waters. For comparison I have several times in mountain lakes caught trout and satisfied my self as to their similarity to the sea trout. Whether fry or young of the fresh water forms are to be found among the young trout emigrating in spring, I have been unable accurately to decide, as no marked diffe- rence is noticeable between the young of the sea trout and the young of other trout forms. On this occasion I have com- pared the young of mountain or lake trout as well as the young of trout from brooks where sea trout cannot ascend, with the young sea trout emigrating from our rivers in spring. I have been unable to find any marked difference between them, and the colours especially are in the main features strikingly alike. Even such a detail as the anal fin being olivegreen or brownish yellow with blackish forepart and a creamy streak along the front edge is constantly noticeable in all such young which I have examined. Only after having reached the sea and for some time lived there do the young of the sea trout acquire the strong silver colour and in other respects become distinguished from the other trout forms. Thus a recently emigrated freshwater trout may clearly be recognised as such in the sea, only when it belongs to older stages. However I deem it highly probable that such an emigration of freshwater trout to the sea also includes younger stages, and further that this emigration may take place to an extent not unimportant to the economy of the sea trout. 296 KNUT DAHL. It is indeed a phenomenon known in any river, that strong floods in spring and autumn generally convey not inconsiderable quantities of fish from the upper to the lower portions of the river. Especially obvious is this fact in rivers, the lower parts of which are poor in fish, while the upper parts are exceedingly rich in fish, or head from lakes where fish abound. From my own experience I very well remember a river in Southern. Norway, where the downward migration of fish during the floods was obvious. Thus the common lake char, which only lived in a single remote lake at the head of one of the tributaries of the river, might, after heavy floods, be caught in the river. It is then perfectly clear, that these fish, as they gradually get transported by floods down the river, must finally reach the sea. Whether these, the trout forms of the fresh waters, can live in the salt water is a question which I have endeavoured to solve by experiment. In order to secure as unfavourable conditions as possible for my experiments, I chose for experimental purposes the trout form, which undoubtedly is most different in habits of life from the trout of the sea, viz. the brook-trout. My material was pro- cured from a small mountain brook which runs into the sea at the Trola iron works just outside the biological station at Trondhjem. Sea-trout cannot on account of insurmountable obstacles reach the upper parts of the brook, and it is here inhabited solely by „fingerling“ trout, which even at a length of 14—16 cm. attain sexual maturity. They do not grow larger in the brook, and are thus typical brook-trout. Of these I caught by angling a small number, 14 specimens. | Arrived at my station I put the smallest and the largest one into an aquarium containing water of a salinity of ca. 33 oo. The smallest one died after 12 hours, the largest one after 24 hours. The others were kept for some time in a small fresh- A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 997 water tank, into which was allowed to run a small stream of sea- water of 33 9/oo salinity. In the course of a couple of days the supply of saltwater was increased, until the aquarium contained almost only seawater. The fishes then commenced to die. On this - account the supply of saltwater was reduced to a very small volume and by and by in the course af 3—4 weeks, again gra- dually increased. It was then evident that a salinity of 10 9/oo even 15 9/00 did not in the least affect the fishes. Only when the salimty was suddenly increased to 20 9/oo did a few die. The 2 remaining fishes were again subjected to a reduced salinity and 2 recently caught brook trout added to them. The salinity was again gradually increased during about 1 week. All passed 159/o without inconvenience. When 209/o was passed the 2 recently added died, while the 2 veterans lived and even spawned in the aquarium. As the seawater-supply of the station at this time was stopped, the experiment was broken off. By these experiments I consider the fact established that even brook trout, which undoubtedly must be considered as the fresh- water form, whose properties are most highly specialised, can live without difficulty in water of a salinity of 15 %0 and may even endure a salinity of 20 9/00. In most of our rivermouths, at any rate the larger ones, the salimty however is considerably lower during spring and summer, at least in the upper water- layers, and the distribution of this low salinity is very often wide. Thus the emigrating freshwater-trout here evidently en- counter more favourable conditions than in my aquaria, especially if we consider, that, in nature, the changes from fresh to salt- water are much more gradual and afford the fish more choice than the relatively rough experiments in my aquaria. It is also my opinion, that this emigration must not neces- sarily be effected by one single- individual; but that it may be performed in one or more generations. As far as I can see the main thing, which is important to the economy of trout in the sea, is the fact, that trout from 298 KNUT DAHL. remote fresh waterstreams and lakes continually and gradually migrate into the sea. In other words a very little noticeable, and very little noticed development from the freshwater forms to the sea form of the trout takes place in our waters. I need hardly add, that this phenomenon though common applies only to a proportionally small number of individuals of the freshwater forms. On the other hand however it is perfectly clear, that the economy of the sea-trout is influenced thereby. It is also not improbable that the phenomenon may influence locally the economy of the trout forms of the fresh waters, Chapter V. Praetieal conclusions. a. Protection of young fish in general. From my investigations, more fully deseribed in chapt. II, il appears, that it must be considered an established fact, that young salmon between 13—16 and 45—50 cm. in length are practically speaking not to be found in those of our waters where : people fish for salmon and trout. Evidently then regulations tending to protect these stages are unimportant to the economy of the salmon and the salmon fisheries. With the practical problems, mentioned in the intro- duction in view, it is however just as obvious, that these regulations must be altered in favour of the trout-fishery, which certainly may be predicted to yield considerable profit as soon as a rational working of this fishing is facilitated. The only question is, by what means and in what degree this may be effected by legislation. In the following pages I will endeavour to develop the views which in my opinion are justified by the scientific material at hand. If we examine the regulations by means of which our legis- lation has intended to provide for the protection of small salmon A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 999 and trout, we find, that these provisions may mainly be classi- fied under the following heads. 1) Prohibition of the employment of net gear with a smaller mesh than 5,8 em. between the knots (when wet). 2) Prohibition of the catching and sale of salmon and sea- trout under 21 cm. in length. 3) Order to set free salmon under 55 and sea-trout under 40 cm. length, provided they are caught in gear with a smaller mesh than 5,8 em. between the knots or are acci- dentally caught in the annual close time. 4) Protection of river mouths and their immediate surround- ings, by prohibition of any sort of net fishing gear of a smaller mesh than 5,8 em. between the knots. (Some exceptions for large herring-seines). The 3 first of these prohibitions are fixed by law; the last one is effected by ,Royal Resolution* upon petition from district and county councils. The first prohibition is mainly intended to regulate the large industry. The other is mainly directed against sport- fishing or fishing with hook gear generally. The third chiefly aims at limiting the accidental or occasional catching of salmon or trout occurring in the fishing for other seafish with other gear than that permitted for catching salmon or trout, and finally the fourth prohibition aims at protecting the young salmon in such localities where they are supposed to be easily caught in numbers during fishing with net gear for other fish. These regulations are, excepting the difference in the size limit at which. salmon and trout are to be set free, mentioned under 3), uniform for salmon as well as trout and apply to salmon as well as to trout rivers. b. Protection of young salmon. In the introduction I have mentioned that these regulations almost totally prevent a lawful fishing for sea-trout. 300 KNUT DAHL. Now in what degree may these regulations be altered or repealed, so as to forward the fishing for sea-trout without in- juring the interest of the salmon fisheries? If I now, with the results of my investigations in mind, con- sider the practieal value of the provisions generally sketched under heads 2) 3) and 4), I find that as regards the salmon their value must be said to be very small. My investigations clearly enough show that only a fraction of a percent of the young salmon emigrating in spring from our rivers, at any rate the northern ones, exceeds 13 cm. in length (vide tab. IV in which only a minor part of the young salmon caught are represented). Excepting herring seines, and in some localities, eel traps, there does not in our country exist any kind of net gear, which possesses the power of retain- ing or entangling in its meshes these emigrating young salmon. It is perfectly evident, that the latter easily pass through all the different forms of ground nets employed in this country. The value of the regulations sketched under head 4) is thus limited to refer only to the use of seines and traps. The seines which in our country are employed, or may be thought to be employed at or in the neighbourhood of river mouths, are however as regards the majority of them, very little adapted to retain the emigrating young salmon. In the mouths of southern rivers, f. eks. the Glommen, a seine fishing is carried out for gwyniad, roach, and other freshwaterfishes; but the seines used are of a mesh much too large to retain young salmon (smolts) As regards the mouths of most northern rivers, fishing (excepting for salmon and trout) with net gear can only have the object of catching cod, haddock and saithe, which during summer are occasionally plentiful in the river mouths. Fishing for herrings is carried on during autumn in river mouths, f. ex. the Gulosen. This kind of fishing however requires only net gear, which as I have explained above, is perfectly innocent of the destruction of young salmon. Ground seines of the A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 301 ordinary kind are also employed. These seines, the dimension and mesh of which are very varying in different parts of the country, very rarely possess a mesh as small as the ordinary mesh of herring seines, 15—20 knots pr. foot (Norw.) When a small mesh is used, the points of the seine as a rule are of a large mesh, the small mesh only occupying a short stretch in the middle of the seine. A description of the groundseines commonly used in the Trondhjem fiord will be found in my paper on the fishing with groudseines in the Beitstadfiord in ,Aarsberetning vedk. Norges Fiskerier“. 3. 1900. These seines must be regarded as types of the seine gear, commonly used in this part of the country, and which may come into use in fishing for saltwater fish in a river mouth. More cursory examination of the seine gear of other distriets has convinced me that the majority of such gear, which might be used for such fishing as above mentioned, does not, as regards the mesh, differ to any important extent from the above mentioned seines. Finally, respecting the employment of finemeshed eeltraps, I may remark that the use of such gear in river mouths is in most parts of our country, unknown. As such fishing gear may be employed with advantage only during autumn, when our river mouths are devoid of emigrating young salmon, a prohi- bition against their use will only put obstacles in the way of the fishing industry without furthering the object in view viz: the protection of young salmon. That fishermen with the intention of fishing for young salmon, would procure gear of such a fine mesh as those seines which I have specially provided and employed for my fishing experi- ments, is out of the question. And even with gear of such small mesh and such fishing power, only a relatively small number of young salmon are caught. 302 KNUT DAHL. According to pt. 3) salmon not exceeding 55 and trout smaller than 40 cm. are to be set free when caught during the annual close time or in gear of a smaller mesh than that permitted by law. A closer consideration of this provision will show, that the advantage gained for the salmon fisheries by this regulation is exceedingly small. The difficulty in distinguishing between salmon and trout in the younger stages has been the main cause of this regulation. Working under the presumption, that numbers of young salmon occurred among the ,sea-trout*, the authorities have not dared to fix the size limit for sea-trout lower than 40 cm. However in fixing the size limit, at which salmon should be set free, one has also laboured under a delusion. The object of this provision of course was to prevent the fishermen from retaining salmon of a smaller size than the smallest caught in gear possessing the minimum mesh allowed by law. However, if we examine the tables on the individual size and weight of the salmon caught in our waters, prepared by Mr. LANDMARK, we observe that not inconsiderable quantities of salmon smaller than 55 cm., are caught in lawful gear and are sold in accordance with the regulations. In the comparative table on the relation between length and weight in salmon, which is published by Mr. LANDMARK in his report for 1895—96 doc. nr. 6, the minimum length of the salmon proves to be 50 cm. I myself have not rarely measured salmon of 49 and 48 cm. in the fish stores of Mr. Tuaws in Trondhjem. Upon rare occasions I have found fishes as small as 45 cm. All these fishes are caught in gear of the lawful mesh. If we now keep in mind, that I have not during my re- searches in our waters succeeded in procuring salmon of a smaller size than the above-mentioned (excepting fry, emigrating young and young salmon in the open ocean) clearly the pro- A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 303 tection offered to the salmon by the regulation in question is quite illusory. First of all, the cases in which salmon of a smaller size than 55 cm. should be set free, occur so rarely, that even this fact renders it indifferent whether these few fish are set free or not. Secondly, the fish thus set free, may in the next instant be caught in a fishing engine with a lawful mesh and be sold in accordance with the law. That fish accidentally caught during the annual close time should be liberated or at any rate not be killed, is presumably a consequence of the regulation inforemg an annual close time. Presumably these kinds of cases are, on account of their rare- ness, of small consequence, Further as regards the regulations scetched under head 2) the prohibition against the sale of salmon under 21 cm. in length is of no importance when we remember that the length of emi- grating young salmon practically speaking does not exceed 13 cm. Sale of such fish certainly touches the borders of im- possibility. The prohibition against the capturing of salmon smaller than 21 cm. in length is in our salmon low expressed as ,pro- hibition against the employment of fishing methods or fishing gear, by means of which salmon of a smaller length then 21 cm. may be caught". As regards the sea, this prohibition is entirely valueless. This 1s clearly enough shown by, my experiments. In all the hundreds and thousands of hauls with seines effected by me in the sea, not one single emigrating young salmon (smolt) has been caught, except in the immediate vicinity of river mouths. As regards the rivers, such prohibition would seem justi- fied, if it is considered necessary to stop sportsmen from kil- ling the salmon fry accidentally caught in fishing for larger fish, or to prevent boys from wantonly destroying fry, parr and smolts. If these sources of destruction to salmon should 304 . KNUT DAHL. be considered important enough to demand special regulations, a minimum size of 13—16 cm. however would include all the sizes demanding protection. As we now have seen, it transpires, that'all the regula- tions, by means of which the authorities have intended to protect the young of the salmon, such as protection or closing of river mouths enforced liberation of salmon and trout caught under certain circumstances, prohibition aganst the sale of under- sized salmon, prohibition against the capturing of the young etc. may without the slightest injury to the interests of the sal- mon fisheries be reduced to a prohibition against the killing of salmon fry, parr and smolts. This prohibition covers all the sizes of salmon which in our waters, may justly demand «the protection of law. As the size of these young salmon, only in exceedingly rare cases exceeds a length of 13 cm. any colli- sion with the interests of the trout fisheries is excluded. Even if we proceed to relax in a considerable degree the present exacting regulation. for trout-fishing, these relaxations cannot in the interests of trout fishing be extended beyond endeavouring to afford some protection to trout fry. As all stages of trout occur in our waters the term ,fry* or „young“ will however, as regards this species, be insufficient. Evidently in respect to this species there must be fixed a size limit at which the protection of the young must commence. Later on, I will return in detail to this question; but even at the present moment it is clear, that this limit in the interest of trout fishing must in reason be fixed at a figure protecting the maximum length of salmon fry or emigrating young salmon. Then clearly a prohibition against the killing of salmon fry (parr and smolts) does not offer any chance of evasion and thus sufficiently protects the interests of salmon. Thus as no chances of collision are present between the interests of salmon and trout fisheries in this respect, separate A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 305 regulations relating to the different fisheries may without much difficulty be formed. c. The protection of young trout. As shown above, it is the interests of the trout and not those of the salmon, which must be the object of regulations aiming at the protection of young fish under the forms men- tioned on page 299. In the framing of such regulations a special value 1s attached to the fixing of a size limit at which the protection of the young fish is to commence. I admit that a correct estimate of this size limit with due regard to the demands of the fishing industry and the economy of the fish in question, presents a problem not easily solved. Especially difficult is the solution when, as in the present case, the question refers to a species of fish, which practically speak- ing is only caught *on the sly", and to a fishery, the value of which is an unknown figure, and the development of which belongs to the future. As starting points I here recommend an endeavour to rea- lize what sizes in the present species, represent the fry or young fish. At the same time we must endeavour to sift the distinc- tion fry = non edibie, non-marketable fish. In connection with these investigations, we must next attempt to make clear how high the size limit may be fixed without injury to future fishing industry and local fishing-interests. For illustration of these points I have gathered some material. If we e. g. look up table V and observe the groups of fishes contained in the different columns, it is clear that the members of the upper groups from 10—20 cm. must be regarded as the ,fry^, representing the individuals emigrating for the first time into the sea. If we now consider the size (about 20 cm.) at which trout become marketable we find, that the non-edible, non-marketable fish, are represented by the fry. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXIL IV. 20 306 KNUT DAHL. Thus if we further examine my tables we will in table VT last column, find a group of trout caught in one haul in the Orkla. These fishes were, after the ,fingerlings* were thrown out, by my fishermen, sold for Kr. 0,70 pr. Kilo. If now we we look up table VII, first column, Beitstad-fiord, May 1900, we observe that scarcely any of the fishes are smaller than 20 cm. According to the above-mentioned experience it is also clear that these fishes are marketable in the practical sense of the word. They quite agree in size with tbe fishes in the catches made by the seine fishermen during this time, catches which were sold at high prices, and which in numbers were examined by me. It is to me evident that practical reasons also, are in the way of fixing the size limit higher than 20 cm., because the fishermen thereby would be deprived of a large and remune- rative portion of their catch and constantly be tempted to disobey the regulation by getting this portion in their gear. Even if we would endeavour to regulate this matter by means of enforcing a regulation minimum mesh, we would only remain in the same difficulties as at the present time, when trout is caught in gear also or mainly intended for the capture of other seafish. Due regard to sport-fishing also speaks in favour of not fixing the size limit of „young fish“ higher than at 20 cm. This limit. corresponds fairly well to the minimum size of marketable fish, which for a long space of time has been fixed by law in our country (21 cm.) and thus to some degree must have established itself in the public feeling. Eventually this limit would protect the young non-marke- table fish and not injure the practical industry as regards the catching of sea trout. Such size limit must of course also apply to freshwater trout in such parts of rivers or waters, in which sea trout run. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 307 The fixing of the size limit at 20 em. will however in my opinion be dependant on the form of regulation by means of which, protection of the young trout is to be effected. If we are going to protect sea trout under 20 em., by a prohibition against kiling such fish, no inconvenience worth mentioning will be incurred in the case of the larger rivers, because the capture of small fish is here of small importance. If however we consider the large number of small rivers or brooks, which in our country fall into the sea, such a prohibition would be unjust. A very large proportion indeed of these rivers is inhabited not only by sea trout but by large numbers of fresh- water trout, mainly brook trout and this latter form, in nume- rous rivers, rarely exceeds 20 cm. in length. As an example of such a rivulet may be mentioned the little Øre-elv in the Sheidsdal in the Batten-fiord, which river has been specially investigated. It heads from a small tarn about 7 kilometers from the sea. The whole of its length is inhabited by a freshwater trout-form which only in rare excep- tions exceeds 20 cm. in length. Of this fact I was convinced after I had measured specimens caught in all parts of the river. They attained sexual maturity at a length of 15 cm. Graphically represented, their measurements run thus: Each dot represents a fish. cm. 10 00 1100000 12000000000 13000000000000 1400000000000000000 15000000 1600000000 1700000 180/00 sexually mature 308 KNUT DAHL. About 500 metres from the mouth of the river was a little waterfall which prevented the further ascent of sea-trout. Of this latter form fullgrown individuals in no small number occurred in this lower stretch of the river mingled with trout of the above- mentioned sizes, right down to the river mouth. Undoubtedly some of the fishes in the above representation, which are not sexually mature, are the brood of the sea-trout, which in time would emigrate and develop in the sea. As will be observed these facts are very complicated. However, a prohibition against killing trout under 20 cm. in the lower part of this river, where sea-trout run, will deprive the people living on the surrounding farms of the whole catch of freshwater-trout. Certainly this catching of smaller trout cannot be termed specially important, except as offering chances for sport fishing or fishing for food; but it will be easily understood that a pro- hibition against killing fish under 20 cm. will be difficult to obey. Such rivers are plentiful in our country, even to such a degree, that most rivulets or brooks running into the sea may probably be said to possess similar conditions. Provided it should be deemed necessary to secure the pro- tection of young trout by means of a prohibition against kill- ing such fish, consideration. of the conditions peculiar to these rivers would prompt us to fix the size limit as low as 15 cm. Smaller fish would be of no value for food or sporting purposes. If the authorities however would be satisfied with protect- ing these young fish by means of a regulation prohibiting the sale of sea-örout under 20 cm. in length., the interests of these rivers presumably would be served. However in forming such a regulation it must be strongly kept in mind, that such a provision, to be effective, must also refer to freshwater-trout. As I have before mentioned, it is generally quite easy to distin- guish sea-trout and freshwater-trout, excepting the young and the sexually mature fishes. Now the sizes below 20 cm. are just A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 309 „the young“ and there are, in the great majority of cases, no means of distinguishing the two forms at these sizes. Thus it is clear, that the young of sea-trout may easily be caught and offered for sale as freshwater-trout. To prevent the sale of freshwater-trout under 20 cm. would be unjust, as countless smaller lakes, tarns, rivers and brooks in our country possess irout, the majority of which do not exceed a length of 20 cm. The fish of these waters would thus be rendered entirely valueless. If however the limit is lowered to 15 cm., presu- mably all inconvenience would be avoided. I should recommend that this be done, as I am strongly of the opinion that a future law ought to contain a regulation tending to prevent the sale of trout under a certam length. It is to me evident, that this lowering of the present size limit, 21 cm. to 15 cm., would not produce any effect on the economy of the sea-trout. As I will show later on, trout under 20 cm. are of no importance in the catches made in the sea, and in the sea the real fishing for sea-trout will have to be carried out. And even if smaller fishes than 20 cm. were caught to the same extent as larger stages, clearly a lowering of the size limit by only 5 or 6 em., will only make the fishes liable to be fished 2 or 11/2 months sooner than would have been the case if the limit was fixed at 20 cm. This fact may be directly realised. from my tables on trout. It will be seen that a fish which in May is 15 cm. long, in August is about 25. Thus about 11/2 summer months will suffice for a trout of 15 em. to pass by growth the size limit if this is fixed at 20 cm. The insignificant loss in weight which the catch of trout in the sea would thus be liable to, may in my opinion be con- sidered as counter-balanced by the above-mentioned advantages to the freshwater fisheries and by the benefit of a regulation, the observance of which may be controlled. 210 KNUT DAHL. If a regulation was issued, prohibiting the sale etc. of sea- trout and freshwater trout under 15 cm. and at the same time there existed a prohibition against the sale of salmon fry, clearly the sale of salmon fry would be impossible on the pretext of their being young trout. However if it should be desirable to prevent the killing of salmon fry (parr and smolts) when accidentally caught on hooks or in other ways, a prohibition against wilfully killing salmon fry would not be sufficient. Although anybody, even children, may easily learn to distinguish the young of the salmon from the young of the trout, such knowledge is by no means common. According to my experience very few people, even including fishermen, know the difference between the young of the two species. It is thus evident that a prohibition against wilfully killing salmon fry (parr and smolts) would have very little effect un- less accompanied by a corresponding prohibition relating to trout, when both species occurred in the same river. As already men- tioned, no objection would be raised by the trout-fishers against the eventual regulations containing a prohibition against wilfully killing in salmon rivers young salmon and trout under 15 em. in length. By these means a sufficient protection would presu- mably be offered to the young of both species. The only points relating to the protection of young trout, which have not yet been discussed, are the closing of river- mouths, and the provision which previously has been considered most important, viz: the enforcing of a regulation minimum mesh in net gear. In my opinion these 2 points may most con- veniently be discussed simultaneously. Under the heading „Protection of young salmon“ I have not discussed the effect of the regulation as to the protection of the infantile salmon; this 1 have omitted because it will be perfectly clear from other arguments under that heading, that no effect exists. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 311 d. The mesh. The main object of our investigations must now be to determine the degree in which our present regulations as to a minimum size of mesh may be modified ın the interests of trout fishing. It is here of importance sharply to distinguish on the one hand, what the interests of salmon fisheries demand in order not to be injured, and on the other hand, what may be offered the trout fisheries without inconveniencing the salmon fisheries. I have previously shewn that salmon of sizes between (15—16) and (45—50) cm. practically speaking do not occur in our waters. Further I have also mentioned that 45—50 cm. forms the lower limit of the sizes of salmon caught at the present tme in gear with a mesh in accordance with the law. When we further remember that I previously have advised the lower- ing of the size limit, for protection of the young trout and salmon, to 15 cm., the sum of these facts would seem to admit of the conclusion, that any regulation of the mesh would be in general unnecessary as well for salmon as for trout. Provided the authorities were able to organise the administ- ration of our salmon and trout fisheries in a wholly rational and ideal way, — a question to which I shall later on return, — I should principally impress on them the correctness of the above conclusion. However I am quite convinced that a£ the present time regulations relating to the mesh of net gear cannot wholly be discarded by legislation relating to these fisheries, considering the development of the latter during the last 2 or 3 decades. If the authorities are not prepared to foster the development of these fisheries on new lines, this question. need not, at the present time, be discussed in general, but the importance of mesh regulations must be conscientiously considered for each of the present fishing methods. Thus our deliberations must 312 . FA KNUT DAHL. relate separately to moveable and fixed fishing engines as well as to the fishing in the rivers and in the sea. Of moveable fishing gear for the purpose of catching salmon and sea trout in our country, only driftnets, growndnels and seines are used. The driftnets are only employed for the purposes of catching salmon, and accordingly ther mesh must be very large, even larger than the minimum size at present allowed by law. Reduction of the mesh is thus, in regard to these nets, quite immaterial. As regards groundnets a reduction of the mesh is for the same reason immaterial, provided the purpose of the nets is the catching of salmon. A reduction of the mesh, however, would render them adapted to the catching of trout, and reduce their efficiency for salmon. They would not be able to catch salmon of a smaller size than those caught in the present mesh, as such salmon practically do not exist in our waters. As the nets are intended for *meshing" the fish, their mesh could never with any advantage be made so small as to imperil the size of irout, which demand the protection of the law. If finally we consider the seines, we find that in the sea they are employed almost exclusively for the purpose of catching trout. In the rivers or in the neighbourhood of river-mouths their present object is the catching af salmon. In the seines used in the sea salmon are rarely found. In the thousands of hauls which I have made or seen other fishermen make in the sea, with seines of a smaller mesh than the legal one, not a single salmon has been caught. Nor do any of the fishermen who for a part of the year get their living by this half illegitimate fishing for sea-trout, profess to catch salmon, but as rare exceptions. They state unanimously that a few grise of 2—3 kilo weight may occur as rareties in a summers catch. The occasions upon which large salmon A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 919 have happened to be caught in the seines of the fishermen, are considered as remarkable incidents in their lives. Thus without doubt the question of a reduction of the mesh in favour of these seines, which are employed in fishing for trout, does not, as regards the sea, imply any collision with the interests of the salmon-fisheries. We have only to consider the benefit to the trout-fisheries. The question in regard to these implements then, is: Ought a certain minimum size of mesh to be established by law, or is it advisable to leave it to the fishermen themselves in perfect freedom and according to the varying conditions of the fishing industry, to arrange their fishing gear in the way, which experience in every case teaches them to be profitable? I am of the opinion that the latter solution is to be pre- ferred, and will undoubtedly prove to be rational and economical as regards the whole fishery in the sea with this kind of gear. It those seines were only employed for the purpose of catching seatrout, no inconvenience consequently would be occasioned, if it should be decided to fix a regulation mesh possessing the power of retaining only fishes down to the size limit for sea- trout permitted to be sold. A large number of the present seines used for seatrout, thus have a mesh which totally excludes the capture of trout as small as any of the minimum regulation sizes suggested by me above. The mesh of these nets varies as a rule from 8 to 11 knots pr. foot (Norw.. Many fishermen see an advantage in using these relatively large meshed seines, as they are consider- ably easier to handle than finer meshed seines. Other fishermen, however, are inclimed to renounce this latter quality in preference to a smaller mesh, by means of which herrings and other small seafish may be captured with the trout, in cases or at times when no trout are to be had. Others take the middle course and employ in the middle part of their large meshed seine (8—11 knots pr. Norw. foot) a 314 KNUT DAHL. piece of netting of finer mesh and adapted to retain herrings. This latter case is e. g. in the Trondhjem fiord very common. In this respect I may refer the reader to my paper: “Om Fiskeriet med Strandnot i Beitstadfjorden*, Aarsberetning vedk. Norges Fiskerier (3) 1900. It is to me evident, that such phenomena are not due to chance. They are in accordance with natural laws created by the conditions of the fishing industry itself and the measures which each fisherman in each locality has had to adopt in order to bring his gear into accordance with the demands and needs of his trade. A regulation enforcing any sort of minimum mesh would then clearly render the majority of the gear employed at the present time unfit for the catching of trout. The fishermen would have to procure special trout-seines, and in using these seines they would, in large numbers of cases, have to renounce the capture of the shoals of herring or other seafish which at the present time adds largely to their catch. Unless obstacles of a quite compulsory character are present, it is thus irrational to charge this industry with the burden of a regulation mesh. I cannot find that such obstacles are present. My fishing experiments and the tables representing the fish caught, clearly show that the rivers, river-mouths and their immediate sourroundings must preminently be regarded as the habitat of the young fish, while the young fish in the sea are much more scattered. Certainly the young emigrate into the sea and thus to some extent may be caught, but it must be remembered that they live more scattered in the sea, and that the majority in the course of a short time, during summer, all grow to sizes which must be considered as fit for food. Thus there is no scientific reason for establishing any mini- mum mesh for this sort of gear on account of the trout. In this connection I also wish to point out the fact, that a regulation, enforcing a minimum mesh for trout-fishing with A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 315 seines, will only result in the present half-lawful, half-lawless state of the fishery. The fishermen cannot be forbidden the use of fine meshed seines ın fishing for herrings and other fish, and in employing these seines they will take what trout they get, law or no law, as long as they can sell or eat it. These are the present con- ditions, and a law, which is not kept, has no chance of being kept and clashes with the demands of the very industry, ior whose benefit it is instituted, is worse than no law. As regards the rivers, river-mouths and their immediate surroundings the question of a reduction or abolition of the mesh regulations will be essentially different. A total abolition of the mesh regulation would in the above-mentioned localities imply drawbacks, not to be disregarded. Clearly rivers, river-mouths and their immediate surroundings offer a far better opportunity than the sea, of capturing with smallmeshed seines large numbers oi young trout, about the regulation size, which I have deemed it advisable to adopt as a limit for trout to be sold. It will be remembered that my suggestion as to the size limit of 15 cm. was given more from considerations the interests of freshwatertrout than to those of seatrout, and mainly in order to secure uniform regulations, which could not be evaded. My intention is that capture of the smaller sizes in the rivers should mainly be carried out with hook gear as used by sportsmen or by people fishing to obtain food. Thus it would never attain dimensions worth considering. However, there is no doubt, that an unlimited license to employ seine gear oi any mesh in rivers and river-mouths would lead to abuse, because the opportunity of capturing very small fish is. here so ample. There is consequently no doubt, that such a relaxation of earlier regulations is totally wrong and inad- visable. A mesh, which would prevent abuse and retain marketable trout might of course easily be determined if, in the rivers, the 316 | KNUT DAHL. interests of trout and salmon-fisheries were quite separable. This is, however, not the case in salmon-rivers, and the introduction of full liberty as to mesh would inconvenience the fishing of both species. As regards those salmon-rivers which wholly or nearly wholly are let for sporting-purposes, and as regards the smaller trout-rivers, where net gear can not easily be employed, the question of mesh is of very small importance. Respecting those rivers, the lower parts of which are fished by numerous seines, while the upper reaches are hired by sportsmen, e. g. most northern rivers, a reduction of the mesh will to some extent cause fewer grilse than usual to reach the upper reaches. The present mesh certainly retains grilse, down to the smal- lest sizes occurring in our enclosed waters. Nevertheless a few grilse break through, either bursting the mesh or being so slender that they are able to wriggle through the mesh, even though being of the same length or weight as many of the smallest caught. This fact is shown by a few of the grilse, caught in the upper parts of the rivers, being marked by the meshes. Attention is very often drawn to this fact by sportsmen, and I have also myself observed it in the rivers. Thus in the upper parts of the Orkla I once examined the catch made in a day by British anglers. About 25 9/o of the grilse were marked. Clearly this marking of fishes will to some extent occur, no matter what size our mesh is; but I deem it also probable that this phenomenon at the present time must be mainly attributed to the use of seines in the lower parts of the rivers. In these limited stretches of water, where the fishes are hunted with net after net, as they ascend the river, obviously the chances of a majority of the ascending fishes coming in contact with net gear are greater than in the sea, where the fish move in à considerably wider area and the room for escape is far greater. . A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 317 A reduction of the mesh would thus in some salmon-rivers clearly result in less grilse reaching the upper reaches and falling a prey to sportsmen, or increasing the number of spawning fish. However the provision of our law concerning a minimum mesh was never intended to regulate this side of the industry. The object of mesh regulation has been the protection of young salmon, nonmarketable and unripe fish. Equalising of the catch and protection of the spawning, heads to which the above mentioned features must be referred, has always indeed been aimed at, by regulations enforcing weekly and annual close-times. Thus the drawbacks, eventually caused by a reduction of the mesh in the rivers, would have to be amended by regulations concerning weekly and annual close- times and would also have to be discussed and considered under this head. Consequently the motives fundamental to mesh regu- lations in general should not now prevent a reduction oi the mesh in the rivers. But perfect liberty as to the choice of mesh would not as I have said before be advisable on account of the young trout. If therefore the interests, which would profit by a mesh reduction in the rivers, were found worthy of consideration, there are no objections in the case of young-fish protections, as long as the reduction is kept within limits protecting the non-saleable trout. Presumably the reduced size of the mesh ought not to be fixed by law in any general form. According to my opinion a lowering of the mesh ought only to be effected by the ad- ministration, upon petition, and it ought only to be lowered to a degree which special investigation in each locality, proved justified. Also it should be left to administration to define the term river or river-mouth. This is on account of special or singular fisheries which occur in a few places in the neighbourhood of rivermouths. In a juridical sense they would be sea-fisheries while really having the character of river-fisheries. 318 KNUT DAHL. The very same considerations as above, must in consequence also apply to all fixed fishing gear and engines, in rivers and river-mouths, and not only to gear and engines made of twine or thread but also to those made of rigid material. Finally we have to discuss the conditions relating to reduction of the mesh in fixed fishing engines in the sea. The main types of such gear, as used in this country, are “kilegarn” (net ending in an open corner), “bundgarn” (stake nets) “kilenot” (bag net) besides “laksevarp” (fixed seines with bottom). All these fishing engines are almost exclusively intended for the capture of salmon. The only exception is in the case of stake nets, the yield of which also consists of trout and other sea-fish besides salmon. These latter fishing engines may also, under certain conditions, be exempt from some of the regulations relating to mesh and weekly close-times, provided it is sufficiently proved that their main catch consists of fish other than salmon and sea trout. | Respecting that kind of gear which is intended to “mesh” the fish, viz. the kilegarn or corner nets, the question of a reduction of the regulation minimum mesh or even total liberty as to the choice of mesh, 1s perfectly indifferent (vide my previous remarks upon the mesh question relating to moveable net gear especially driftnets intended to entangle the fish). All the other fixed fishing engines are so uniform as to their effect that they may all with regard to the mesh question, be treated as bag nets. The bag net undoubtedly must be considered as the engine typical to our salmon-fisheries in the sea. When considering if we may venture a reduction of the mesh or even permit free choice as to the mesh in this kind of gear, two points must in my opinion be kept in view. On the one hand we will have to acknowledge, that the mesh question regarding bag nets or other fixed engines in the sea, does not only refer to the salmon. On the contrary it is A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 319 only subject to a clear understanding when viewed in con- nection with the interests of all other sea-fisheries. On the other hand we must consider the effect of mesh regulations as to the protection of young i. e. non-saleable salmon and sea trout. To any man who has studied our bag net-fishery, it will be obvious that the ever increasing employment of this fishing apparatus in our country is most closely connected with the fact that this fishing engine is admirably adapted to the conditions of our waters. What the pots and stake nets are to Denmark, the bag nets evidently are to our country. It is also obvious that this apparatus is not only adapted to the catching of salmon, but also others of those kinds of fish which, along our coasts, and also in our fiords, lead a pelagie wandering life. Of such species may be mentioned: Trout, herring, mackerel, saithe, pollack, whiting also haddock and cod. This fact is also to some extent shown by the experiments which have been effected by me with fine meshed bag-nets, and which are described in detail in chapter 2. As will be remembered I could get as many as 100 other seafish and even more to each salmon caught. This fact is also shown by the catches of ordinary bag nets. Even with the present enormous mesh, large numbers of cod and saithe are caught in places, and it is evident that a reduction would mean an increase in the capture of other seafish. Bag-net fishermen in the southern parts of our country have often reported to me that the bags of their nets, possessing the large regulation mesh, are filled with mackerel, which do not pass the meshes as long as the net is not touched, but all go through, when the net is tended. It is to me evident that free choice as to the mesh in bag nets and similar engines would be a great benefit. Undoubtedly the fishermen in many places would see the advantage of 320 KNUT DAHL. reducing their mesh, according to the demands of the locality, and in this way they would essentially increase their own incomes, and also the national income, by catching trout and other sea- fish along with the salmon. Thus I do not for one moment doubt that free choice of mesh would be a great blessing. The question, however, as before mentioned, also refers to the amount of power, which mesh regulations possess of protecting non-saleable salmon and trout. The original motive of mesh regulations in our salmon legislation, was the protection of the young, non-saleable fish. The mesh was then 11/4 inches (Norw.) between the knots. The law of May 23rd, 1863, which fixed the minimum size of the mesh at 5'8 em. between the knots, also aimed however, at protecting the grilse, also including the seatrout, the specific distinction between grilse and seatrout being a question of doubt. Experience, however, showed that the grilse in large numbers were caught by this mesh, and in the law of 1891 the mesh was enlarged to 6:5 em. between the knots. This regulation, however, met with such opposition on the part of the fishermen that the legislating powers were forced to suspend the operation of this regulation and suffer the old mesh regulation to remain in force. The idea of enlarging the mesh and sparing the grilse is rejected by the fishermen as well as by the special law- commission appointed in 1896. Even the original mover in this matter, our inspector of fisheries, has, in his criticism of the regulations proposed by the latter commission (Christiania 1901) renounced the idea, at least temporarily, of enlarging the mesh. When we now consider that even fine meshed bag nets cannot, as my experiments show, catch grilse of smaller size than those caught in the present regulation mesh, clearly our reasons for mesh regulations must remain the same as before A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 321 the law of 1965, viz.: the protection of the young or non- marketable fish. As mentioned before, some of the grilse caught in the upper reaches of rivers are marked by passing through the meshes of net gear. I expressed as my own opinion that this must be caused principally, by seine fishing in the narrow rivers. But even supposing, that part of these marked grilse are fish which have passed through bag nets in the sea, the importance of this fact would, in my opinion, be small compared to the prospects offered to our other sea-fisheries by the employment of fine meshed bag nets. It will be remembered as my investigations have shown that salmon of sizes between 16 and 45 cm. cannot be caught in our waters. If this result is compared with the tables published by Mr. LaNDMark in his report for 1891— 1894, showing the size of grilse caught by the present mesh, it is evident that at all events only a very small portion of the grilse group would have any chance of penetrating the present mesh of the bag nets and would consequently be retained by a smaller mesh. Consequently it is evident that mesh regulations, as a means of protecting voung non-marketable salmon, are a failure. If, however, upon introduction of adlibitive mesh in the sea, any inconvenience to sportsmen should arise from the fact, that a few of the smallest grilse would be withdrawn from the rivers, I think that a remedy could easily be found. As I have mentioned before, this kind of inconvenience comes under the head of regulations tending to equalize the catch and protect the spawning. In deliberations as to weekly and annual close-times the above mentioned inconveniences may at any time be considered according to their value. I will therefore recommend that the mesh regulation Should, as regards all fishing gear in the sea, be abolished. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII, IV. 21 399 KNUT DAHL. In chapter II I have given prominence to the fact that I did not feel wholly convinced that certain points of our outer coast might at times be visited by young salmon in the oceanic stage. I also mentioned that I did not feel satisfied, that some of the open fiords of Finmarken might not harbour such salmon. In order to take precautions against the possibility of such chances of local destruction, I should think it would be sufficient if the future law left the remedies against such possible cases in the hands of administration, charging it with the power of e. g. enforeing the use of a certain mesh, locally. In case the abolition of mesh regulations, as regards bag nets, should raise the question of extending the weekly close-times also to the seine-fishing for trout in the sea, I wish to point out that the very nature of this latter industry does not offer any parallel to the bag-net fishery for salmon. The seine-fishery for trout is indeed not in a position to suffer the economie pressure of a weekly close-time. Nor does it present the same scientific and national economic grounds, which have urged the weekly close-time for salmon. In the seine fishing for trout there cannot possibly be any chance, by a weekly close-time, of destributing the yield of the fishery, nor promoting the access of the fish to the rivers, as the wanderings of the seatrout are not analogous to those of the salmon. Neither will it be possible to have a weekly close- tme for fishing with this kind of gear, as the seines will then certainly be used "for the purpose of catching other sea- fish" and will catch trout, which is very difficult, if not impossible to prevent. This is shown by the present conditions. e. Annual and weekly close-times. Protection of the spawning fish and the equal distribution of the yield of the fisheries have been aimed at by regulations enforeing annual and weekly close-times. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 399 In my opinion the first of these provisions (the annual close- time) is only justifiable as regards the rivers. In the sea the present annual close-time (August 25—April 15) is immaterial, provided the intention is to protect salmon. Practically speak- ing there is no chance of capturing salmon in the sea during the present close-time. The bagnets are indeed mostly taken ashore as early as the end of July. Tf however we intend to allow free choice of mesh and thereby create possibilities of employing the bagnets for other fish, evidently the present annual close-time in the sea is not only unnecessary but even objectionable. The second of these provisions, (the weekly close-time) un- doubtedly is the regulation, which most heavily hampers the industry and has created the greatest discontent. Looked at from the fisherman's point of view, it is evident, that a weekly close- time of 72 hours or even more, must be a great burden to any fishing industry. This method of protection is however closely connected with the development of our salmon fisheries, and is a logical consequence of the principles of our previous legislation. As long as these principles are followed, I do not venture to pro- pose any alteration in the present method of protection by weekly close-time. f. Change of System. I think however, that our knowledge of our salmon fisheries, and of the lifehistory of the salmon during the last 10 years, has developed to such an extent, that the question comes more and more to the front: Is it not now the time to re- consider the very principles upon which legislation in our country hitherto has been founded? My previous views and propositions have in general been founded on the current principles, and this is on account of the fact, that any radical change of system can only be subjected to 394 KNUT DAHL. general deliberation, as its consequences may only be judged with aecuracy, when the manysided preliminary work and in- vestigations have been performed by government. Until this has taken place, clearly the present system must be fundamental to law regulations, and this I have assumed in my above review of some of our leading regulations. Those who have attempted to study the development of our salmon fisheries during the last 5 or 4 decades, will have observed that a total revolution has taken place. In earlier days our salmon-fisheries were principally river-fisheries. Now how- ever they are mainly sea-fisheries. This developement has proved to be the canse of an ever increasing struggele between opposing interests. To begin with, the main object of our legislation was the promotion of our salmon-fisheries through maintainance of the supply of young fish, However during the process of the above development of the fisheries, legislation has been forced in an ever increasing and predominating degree to attend to the sepa- rate interests of the different owners, fishermen, or bodies of fishermen. The main and ideal object of the state, relating to salmon legislation, must, in my opinion, consist in providing that no disproportion arises between the fisheries and the natural pro- pagation and maintenance of the species, and if possible to increase the number of the species. Now, the struggling fishery-interests have gradually forced the state to endeavour more and more to produce an equal distribution of the yield and if possible allow enough fish to reach the spawning beds. During the increasing fishery and the increasing struggle of interests, the state has gradually had to enforce regulations of great severity which considerably hamper the fishing industry, as well in the rivers, as in the sea. There is nothing to indicate, that the evolution of the later decades will not continue, and the contest between the à A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 395 interests of river and sea fisheries will in consequence increase in fierceness. As this most certainly will take place the state will, a logical consequence, be driven forward on the same course of legislation, unless there is some possibility of changing the system. I believe as before mentioned, that such a possibility exists, and in the following pages I will endeavour to hold forth the opinion I have gradually formed on the matter. To any man, who has thought on this matter it must be evident, that it would be a great advantage to the work of improving the salmon fisheries, if the present numerous con- testing interests might as much as possible be combined. If e. g. all our salmon fisheries could be amalgamated into a general syndicate, clearly, the work of improving these fisheries would be infinitely more simple and would have a much better chance of being effective. This idea is not new, and our present inspector of fishe- ries has on several occasions, advised an amalgamation of interests, especially in the rivers. Such amalgamation has really to a large extent taken place in the case of the rivers, these being more and more let for sporting purposes and fishing rights becoming more and more the property of single owners. Thus it is not impossible, that our river fisheries for salmon may gradually assume the character of one or more syndicates each with the same purpose. However it is obvious, that a voluntary amalgamation of the two main contesting interests, the river and the sea fisheries for salmon, never will take place. The only way in which this may be imagined to take place, is through the medium of the state. If e. g. the state secured grater influence over one of these interests in order to secure the highest possible development 326 KNUT DAHL. of the other, this would be equivalent to having only one interest existing. This object, the state has long ago attempted to attain in other European countries where salmon fisheries are important. As an example may be mentioned Great Britain and specially Ireland, where the main object of the state has been to concen- trate the salmon fisheries as river and estuary-fisheries, while the opposite interest, the fishing with fixed engines in the sea has been put down, or allowed only when the rights were of a very early date. I believe, that in regard to our country it is also right, that the state should endeavour to simplify the conditions relating to salmon fisheries and if possible attempt to create only one interest. For this purpose it will be in vain to seek a model in the system of other European countries, as the evolution of our salmon fisheries has been essentially different from that of all other countries I know. The question of which interest is to be supported and which interest must be subjected to the increased control of state may only be answered by a closer examination of the development of our own fisheries. It must be exactly calculated, which fishery, that of the river or that of the sea offers the greatest prospects of improvement. - For this purpose I believe that we possess good material in the statistics collected by our inspector of salmon and fresh- water fisheries, and I also believe that the results got from my investigations will be able to afford some support for a decision. In order to obtain a clear general view of the progress of our salmon fisheries during the period im which reliable sta- tistics are available, I have constructed graphical tables which are based on Mr. LANDMARKS statistical tables and which repre- sent the total yield of all our salmon rivers, the total yield of the salmon fisheries in the sea, the total yield of the salmon | | | | T PONI 3217 A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. All agnets. fisheries of the country and finally the number of b and and to, ? the year 1882 3 these results are from, and includin ineluding the year 1898. 'Seururmeiso[U[ 0007 = uo} ; '868T— OSST SIBA oq] 107 (suoj ur) £eMION JO Solos uoures oy} uro:j Park [210] au Surjuose1dor gaa) (e 'S681—088] SsteoA ay) 107 (suoj ur) tas eq] ur sorreqgsy uour[es uro1ij p[otÁ oy} Suruesaido: Am) (G '868E— OSS| sreoÁK oy} 107 (, Suoy ur) sxoArr uowpes jo/pjork OY) Surjussa1dor anm) (F 'g ‘SLT en This is represented in Figs. 3 and 4 2:7] OO, a 0n Oro] AT oe wg) ven az e| or) Deg we ORAL OO ee WE og ver] OM "7 328 KNUT DAHL. At the same time I have, based on the same statistics, attempted to obtain a general view of the progress in the most important salmon district of our country viz: the Trondhjem district. With this object in view I have summed the annual returns of the statistics for 1880—1898 for all salmon rivers, which run into the sea in the shrievalties (fogderi) Fosen, Strinden and Selbu, Stjør- and Værdalen, besides Inderöen. po Fig. 4. Curve representing the number of bagnets in the years 1859—1898 (in thousands). Also I have summed the annual returns for the yield from the salmon fisheries in the sea in the above-mentioned shrivalties. Also I have summed the annual numbers of bagnets in these shrievalties. ; The graphical tables constructed from this material are re- represented in Figs. 5, 6 and 7. 329 A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. '(suoj ut) g6ST—08ST Sree ay) 107 ueciepu seprseq 'uo[epreA pue -104S 'nqpeg pue uepurgg 'ueso;p serj[eAens ur ees OY] ur sertegsg uouies WOLF PPIÅ ej Furuasoadar aAın) 'G ‘SLY wel wel Å ogå UN o OP OM 06) De DÅ DA DA] _O8| A __ KNUT DAHL. 330 T7 92 154 186 188 |o 172 | Load He VEG Fig. 6. Curve representing the yield from salmon fisheries in the rivers Orkla, Gula, Nidelven, Stjordalselven, Værdalselven, Figga and Stenkjærelven in the years 1880—1898 (in tons). A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. These figures and their curves are in many respects instruetive. If we look at fig. 3 we will immediately observe that the yield from our salmon-fisheries during the whole of the period has been constantly increasing, yea, that their yield has even more than doubled itsself since 1880. The curve representing the catch from the rivers presents after a rise in the first of the eighties a nearly even course, oscillating about the same figure, while the curve representing the sea presents the same course as the curve of the total catches. EEE ARDT 77 Vj yt 15 py /88/ /382) /383 Curve representing the number I pm in Fosen, Strinden and Selbu, Stjór- and Verdalen besides Inderéen in the years 1880— 1898 (in hundreds). When we view the main arguments generally propounded by those having river-interests, the course of these curves is must greatly surprise us. Supposing the fact which is asserted by those having river interests to be true, that the sea-fisheries have developed and exist at the expense of the river-fisheries, the curve representing the catch in the rivers must needs have 339 KNUT DAHL. a continually sinking course, while the curve representing the yield of the sea must rise. It must here, however, be remarked, that the number of rivers which are taken account of in the statistical tables, has gradually been increased without the total yield of the rivers presenting a corresponding rise. The number of the rivers counted in the statistical tables was: in 1880—1883: 55 rivers - 1884—1886: 79 , - 1887—1890: 89 , - 1891—1894: 93 , - 1895—1896: 108 , - 1897—1898: 122 , If however, we, examine the quahty of the catches from the rivers, we find, that the main ones are included in the returns for 1886. This is in good harmony with the rise of the curve during this period. (Vide fig. 5, 1). The rivers, added to the statistical returns after 1886, will upon examination be found to be less important. If we further remember that year by year more and more rivers have been let for sporting purposes and their yield in salmon- flesh consequently lowered, it must be taken as granted that the curve of the rivers as represented in fig. 5, is reliable in the same degree as the other curves based on our statistics. At all events it is obvious that there is no reciprocal proportion between the yield of the fisheries in the sea and those in the rivers. If the curves of the Trondhjem district are examined (fig.s 5 and 6) the same facts will be observed. Far from presenting any decrease in the yield, the rivers on the contrary show a large inerease, while the yield of the sea has constantly been increasing. | ———O7ÓÁ—————— A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 333 If we now examine the curve in fig.s 4 and 7 representing the annual numbers of bag nets, there is not the slightest doubt that the constant increase in the number of fishing implements, is the only clear and obvious source of the progress of our salmon-fisheries. Accordingly it seems to me perfectly evident, that if all fishing, in the sea were prohibited, this would not result in à proportionally large yield in the rivers. I have no doubt that the total yield of our salmon-fisheries would then be much smaller. The scientific explanation of this fact 1s another matter. Personally I am inclined to believe that the phenomenon is to be attributed to the circumstance that a large proportion of the catch in the sea consists of grilse which are not yet sexually mature and consequently do not ascend the rivers. Possibly also, numbers of the large salmon caught in the sea are resting fish, which would not have spawned in the year when caught. Such investigations as would solve these questions (this could easily have been done by opening large numbers of salmon in the market) I have not been able to effect, on account of the large expense thus entailed. Supposing, however, for the sake of argument, that we stopped all fishing in the rivers, and thus could spare the 250 000 kilos of sexually mature salmon which are annually caught in the rivers, spare it exclusively for the purpose of spawning, clearly we. would possess an immense power of increasing the yield of the fisheries in the sea, supposing always the fundamen- tal theories of the propagation of salmon to be correct. The general opinion on this point at the present time is fairly unanimous, namely that an increase in the numbers of spawning fish and consequently that of fry would result in a corresponding increase in the numbers of individuals of the species. In other words a direct relation exists between spaw- ning and the increase in the stock of fish. Whether this, generally 994 KNUT DAHL. viewed, is correct, I personally entertain some doubts. Probably the progress 1s proportional up to certain point; but when this point is reached, the production of each new individual will demand a proportionally larger and larger number of eggs. lt is even probable that this question as regards the salmon will be highly dependant on the power the rivers have of sustaining and nourishing the fry and young. If the young fish could only reach the ocean, this would evidently present greater chances of development and provide food for essentially. larger numbers of salmon than at present. It may, however, be taken as granted that the spawning in the rivers could far surpass the present spawning, before the young produced would not be able to find sufficient food. Even if this should ever happen, one might resort to artificial rearing. Thus I have no doubt, that we possess the power of essentially increasing the yield of the fisheries in the sea by increasing the spawning in the rivers. Consequently I entertain no doubt that the rational course for the state would .be to secure greater influence over the fishing in the rivers. In this opinion I feel all the more confirmed when I consider the results of my own investigations. Only when the state was in possession of the power of fully regulating the spawning in the rivers and was more independant of the demands for an equal distribution of the catch, the possibilities which I have previously pointed out of an improvement of our sea-fisheries for salmon, trout and other sea-fish could be brought into full play. Clearly the whole legislation relating to salmon- and trout- fisheries might then be considerably reduced. In order to attain a realisation of the thoughts here men- toned, it will obviously be necessary to undertake a large preliminary work in order to collect material iliustrative of the means by which it would be possible to bring the rivers more under the influence of the state. The influence of the state must then, in my opinion, first of all, and in a more effective A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. 399 degree than hitherto, be directed towards procuring the greatest possible production of fry and young fish principally by natural reproduction, and secondly by hatching and rearing to the extent which occasion really demands. As the special object of the above mentioned preliminary investigations would be the collection of material in order to decide whether fixed fishing engines, veirs etc. and seines may be totally abolished or their employment be essentially reduced. These sorts of fisheries must indeed at the present time be said to represent preeminently the river interests, as the number of pounds caught is much more imporlant to these fisheries than to sportsmen, and it 1s just these fisheries which possess the power of putting the greatest obstacles in the way of ascending salmon. Quite another view would presumably apply to the much less destructive sport fishing. The question, of the way in which the total measure might most practically be effected, and of the means by which the economie part of the matter might be arranged by the state, is not within the scope of my present commission. It is, however, not impossible that the matter might be arranged even with relatively small pecuniary efforts, and I should strongly recommend our administration to undertake the collection of the material necessary for an accurate estimate of the scope and nature (besides also the economic part) of the measures which eventually would have to be taken. g. Recapitulation. According to what I have stated in this paper I would draw special attention to the following measures: 1) Protection of the young salmon and trout effected by a prohibition against the sale of trout under 15 cm. in length and a prohibition against wilfully killing salmon and trout smaller than 15 cm. in length in rivers where both species occur. 336 2) 3) KNUT DAHL. Entrusting administration with the power of reducing the size of mesh in rivers and river-mouths. Total abolition of mesh regulations relating to all fishing gear in the sea, moveable and fixed. Entrusting administration with the power of locally interfering if occasion should arise. Abolition of annual close-times in the sea. Protection of the spawning process, and distribution of the catch to be effected by an annual close-time in the rivers and by a weekly close-time in the rivers as well as in the sea, pro- vided the same principles, on which our present legislation is founded, are to be followed. The necessity of effecting the collection of material, consisting of information, calculations etc., necessary to the clear understanding of the question, of whether it will be possible for the state to regulate and limit the fishery in the rivers in a degree essentially more effective than at present and in the rivers to adopt more effective means of securing and increasing the spawning, and consequently the growth and supply of young salmon. A STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. Son List of Literature. C. Linnzus: Systema nature, Stockholm 1766. W. Yarrett: A history of British fishes, London 1835. H. Kroyer: Danmarks fiske, Kjøbenhavn 1843—1845. S. Nitsson: Skandinavisk Fauna, Lund 1855. H. Wipzcren: Bidrag til kännedomen om Sveriges Salmonider, Ofvers. "^ Vetsk. Ak. Hdl. 1862. —»— Nya bidrag til kännedomen om Sveriges Salmonider, Öfvers. Vetsk. Ak. Hdl. 1864. F. A. Smitt: Kritisk Förteckning öfver de 1 Rigsmuseum befindtliga Sal- monider, Kgl. Svenska Vetsk. Ak. Hdl. Bd. 21 no. 3 Stock- holm 1886. —»— Skandinaviens Fiskar, Stockholm 1895. W. Lim;EBoRe: Sveriges och Noriges fiskar, Upsala 1891. P. P. C. Horx: Neuere Lachs und Maifisch-Studien, Tijdschr. d. Nederl. Dierk. Vereen. 2 VI 3 1899. A. Lanpmark: Fiskeriinspektorens indberetninger om ferskvandsfiskerierne 1880 —1898. —»— Fiskeriinspektorens indberetning angaaende Storbritanniens og Irlands ferskvandsfiskerier, Kristiania 1883. Jou. O. Smonnas: Undersogelser om Blege 9: sjoorretfiskerierne 1 det vest- lige og sydlige Norge. (Fiskeriinspektorens indberetning 1895 og 1896). JoHAN Hyorr og Knur Danur: Fiskeforsog i norske fjorde, Kristiania 1899, —».— —»— Fishing experiments in Norwegian Fjords, Rept. Norw. Fish. Inv. Vol. I 1900. Knut Dax: Beretning om fiskeriundersøgelser i og omkring Trondhjems- fjorden, Kgl. norske vidensk. selskab skr. 1898 nr. 10. —»— Om fiskeriet med strandnot i Beitstadfjorden, aarsberet. vedk. Norges fiskerier 1900. Odelstings prp. nr. 13 (1888): Angaaende udfærdigelse af en lov om fredning af laks og sjoorret m. v. Indstilling fra den ved kgl. resol. af 15 august 1896 nedsatte kommis- sion til revision af lovgivningen om laks og sjøørret (Kri- stiania 1898). Fiskeriinspektorens erklæring om lakselovkommissionens udkast til lov om lakse- og sjøørretfiskerierne (Kristiania 1901). Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII, IV. 93 338 KNUT DAHL. STUDY ON TROUT AND YOUNG SALMON. Contents. Page Introduction. TLL SENGENE EE 221 Chapter I. Methods and implements of the investigations. . . . . 226 = I The investreatons JE 229 a)j'Seimesuteud s. tiu ot wr PB E MESE 229 b) “Exaemeshed "bag: nets ORNE EE ER 236 € Fishermens/catches SPE M PTS 237 d) Rearing-experiments and investigations on the sy- Stematisin, ofsther Salmon er eee er 238 e) Description of emigrating young salmon and trout . f) Description of young salmon in the oceanic stage compared with trout of the same size . . . . . . . g) Capture of young salmon in the sea ....... h) Summary of the results of the investigations . . . 274 — III. On migration and growth of young salmon . . . . . . 273 — IV. On the growth and migration of the trout . . . . .. 284. — Mo ePractical/conelusions;cuec- SR nee 298 a) Protection of young fish in general . . . .... ^3 BES b) Protection of young salmon) 272 5404) ee ee 299 c)sRrotections of: young trowt CREER uev. 21A dj Fkemesh SS voe URS NUCLEUS 311 e) Annual and weekly close-times .......... 3292 f) Change of syste. (ARR SNE 323 =) Recapıtulation of propositions! «NE 335 Appendix. 7 tables. 3 plates. Trykt 15. December 1904. . Lappiske Navne paa Pattedyr, Krybdyr og Padder, Fiske, Leddyr og lavere Dyr. Ved J. Qvigstad. Mine Kilder ved Udarbeidelsen af folgende Fortegnelser har foruden de almindelige lappiske Ordboger og mine egne Opteg- nelser væsentlig været: Å. ANDELIN, Kertomus Utsjoen pitåjåstå (Beretning om Utsjok Sogn), p. 191 ff. (Opregning af Pattedyr, Insekter og Fiske i Utsjok) i Suomi, XVIII, Helsingfors 1859. J. FELLMAN, Bidrag til Lappmarkens Fauna i Suomi, VII, Hel- singfors 1848. K. Lrem, Beskrivelse over Finmarkens Lapper. Kiobenhavn 1767. A. J. Mena, Vertebrata fennica. Helsingfors 1882. S. Nırsson, Skandinavisk Fauna. Däggdjuren. Lund 1847, (fork. Nirss.). E. Rostep, Om Steen-Kobben (i Nye Samling af det kgl. norske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrifter, II, Kiøbenhavn 1788), (fork. Rost.). J. W. ZETTERSTEDT, Insecta Lapponica. Lipsie 1840, (fork. ZETTERST.). 340 J. QVIGSTAD. I de lappiske Navne udtales: c som ts, cc som tts. t som engelsk th 1 thing. € som ts], € som tts]. x som tysch ch 1 ach. d som engelsk th 1 father. z som engelsk s i pleasure. 3 som ds, 33 som dds. à som en Mellemlyd mellem a 3 som dsj, 33 som ddsj. og æ. g som spirantisk (beaandet) g. i som russisk y (Jeri). n som n 1 norsk Enke. o som aaben o. 3 som sj, 88 som ssj. Forkortelser. Arj. = Arjepluog i Pite Lap- Le. — Lyngen. mark. Lnv. = Lenvik. Bls. = Balsfjord. Lul. = Lule Lapmark. E. = Enare-lappisk. Nb. = Nesseby. Fld. = Folden. OL 2 Oioten! Hf. — Hammerfest. | Pasv. = Pasvik. Hm. = Hammerø. R. = Russisk-lappisk. Ht. = Hatfjelddal. S. — Svensk-lappisk. Ib. = Ibbestad. Sors. = Sorsele. Jmt. = Jemteland. Sdv. = Sydvaranger. Kar. — Karesuanto. Ter. = Ter-lappisk. Kl. = Kalfjord nær Tromsø. Trond. = Trondhjems Stift. Kr. = Karasjok. | Ts. = Tysfjorden. Kt. = Koutokæino. Utsj. = Utsjok. Kv. = Kvænangen. Vst. = Vesteraalen. Hvor intet andet er bemerket, tilhorer de lappiske Ord den finmark-lappiske Dialekt. I [] er tilfoiet den ordrette Oversæt- telse af de lappiske Navne, hvor saadan er mulig. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 941 A. Lappiske Navne paa Pattedyr. 1a. abmo-aëce (S.), Ursus arctos, L. Navnet indeholder Ordet aéée, Fader. 1b. aféo, pl. avéok (Finmarken), Phoca vitulina, L. 9 adulta; 2, 10. LA 12. s. Rost. p. 187. aggja, pl. agjak | S. addjus, [Bedstefar, Gamling]; Ursus arctos, L. 5°; s. 1a. 5. 136. 141. ainne, pl. ainek (Finmarken), Halichoerus grypus, (FABR.) Q 1. Erignathus barbatus, (MüLL.) ©; se Lern, p. 212 f. Hannen heder dævok. Efter Rosr, p. 188 er aine = Havert. | R. (Ter) aine, — russisk: morskoj zajáts, der efter A. Popvisorskr, Slovar oblastnogo archangelskago nareäjja, p. 55 er Hrignathus barbatus.. | aka (R. efter Fris), [gammel Kone], Rangifer tarandus, (L.) 9; sml. akai l. akh (R. efter Fris), = (fera). akko, pl. akok (Of), [Bedstemor], Ursus arctos, L, 2;s.2. albas, pl. albbasak | S. (Lul.) alpas, pl. al*pasah, Felis lynæ, L.; s. 87 a. 181. alddo, pl. aldok | S. aldo, (Lul) alltu, (Arj.) alldo, (Ht) aldu, (Trond.) alldo, allda | E. aldu | R. (Ter.) alta, (Notozero, Pasv.) ald, Rangifer tarandus, (L.) 9 (voksen, der almindelig kalver hvert Aar). appe-njuorjo, [Havkobbe], Erignathus barbatus, (Mürr.) ; s. 9. 116. 153 a; 1 Talvik — 10. ard (R. efter Frus), Rangifer tarandus, (L). avjor (Finmarken), Cystophora cristata, (Erxı.). Navnet afledes af avjo (en Egg) paa grund af Næsens Form. S. 82. 54. 160. avskar-gatte I. avskar-gubbo, [Auskjerkobbe], Phoca foetida, Mit. (om unge Individer); se Rosr. p. 189; s. 60. 104. pa'ldes, g. paltazi (R.: Ter.), (Notozero) peildes, Canis lupus, L.; s. 42. 56 b. 58. 85. 90. 91. 92. 139. 145. 161. 342 J. QVIGSTAD. 185. 208. 221. 999. 998. 999. 239. 943. 948. 958. 961. 279 b. | 13a. bavdagas (Leem), Catulus phocæ adhuc lactens. 13 b. biela (dat. biellaga) (Pasv.), = 28. 13c. peurek (S), — 80. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. il); 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. bierdna l. birdna, pl biernak l. birnak, (Ib. Of.) benna, (Vst) bienna | S. berdn, (Lul) pir°na |. pier*na, Ursus arctos, L.; s. 2. 5. 15. 16. 17. 19. 22. 27. 29. 37. 39. 42. 46. 95. 98. 124. 156. 141. 142. 145. 186. 210. 993 a. 995. 959. 269. 268. 283. 284. bierdne, pl. biernek (Finmarken) — 14 (om Ungen) | S. berdn, = 14 (om aarsgammel Unge) | R. (Pasv.) biern 1. guóbée-biern, = 14 (om Ungen). bire (S.), (Hm.) birre, = 14. bir*fe (Hm.), = 14. boaco, pl. boecuk | S. poco 1. pocoi, (Lul) pocui, (Arj.) bocui, (Sors. Ht. Trond. Jmt.) buce, (Sors. Trond. ogs.) buée, (Jmt. ogs) boaca | E. poaco | R. (Ter.) poazai g. piecci, (Kildin) poaz, (Pasv.) boaz, pl. boacco, Rangifer tarandus, (L.) (domitus) (Tamren); s. 4.7. 9. 65. 70. 73. 75. 77. 78. 87 b: 88. 110: 111. 120. 129. 133. 144. 146. 162. 164. 168. 170. 176 a. 178. 179. 182. 192. 198. 206. 218. 220. 930. 231. 232. 938. 251. 958. 257. 260. 266. 274. 276—978. 279 a. 980. poba (R. efter Fris), = 14. bokka 1. bukka | S. (Hm. Arj.) bokko, (Sors.) buökkie, (Ht. Trond.) buókke, Caper, Gjedebuk; s. 69. 84. 108. bosso, pl. bossok, [Blæser], Balenoplera. Sml. Hvalens Navn paa Shetland: blower; s. 51. | peunok (S.: Lul.), = 14. Navnet afledee af pou*no, Tue. bovlek 1. bovle-sapan (Helgø), [Flekmus], Myodes lem- mus, (L.); s. 82. 125. pritte (Trond. Cervus alces, L. Å; s. 40. 87 c. 119. 196. 197. 258. i 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 9. 96. 31. 98. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 943 bulle (Fnus), Bos non castratus. buoida, pl. buoiddagak | S. puoitek, (Lul.) pueita(k) | E. puoidah | R. (Ter) piejtegaj, (Notozero) pujtij, (Pasv.) buidi, Mustela erminea, L.; s. 56 a. 71. 244. puoldakaé (S.), (Lul.) puöltak 1. puóltakaé, (Sors.) buéldakuééa, (Trond.) buéldguéée, = 14. Disse Navne paa Bjørnen afledes af puold, puóllta, Bakke, Li. Heraf afledes ogsaa folgende Navne paa Bjernen: puöllta- kuötu (Gellivare), [den som beiter i Lien], buóld-ajja (Ht), puolde-aija (v. Düsen, Lappland, p. 280), [Bakke- bedstefar], puolde-podnje, [Bakkegubbe], puolda-cuobbo, [Bakkefrosk], puold-ossek (v. Düsen, p. 280). buovja, pl. buovjagak (Östfinmarken), Delphinapterus leucas, (PALL.); s. 13 b. puöunje I. puöunjak (S.: Lul), = 14. buovnjak l. buovnjat, ogs. buovnjat sapan [Mus af brunsveden Farve] Arviccla; (Lg) gukkes-sæibat- buovnjat, [langhalet buovnjat], Arvicola amphibius (L.). burrok, (Varanger) burro, Juvencus wnwm vel duo annos natus; s. 163. burs-njunne (Sdv.), [Pungnese], = 10. bussa, (Ks.) busse-gatto, (Nb.) bus-gatto, (Sdv. Tn.) busa, (Senjen, Of) busse, Felis domestica; s. 62. 64. 68. 86. bæisko-njunne (Kt.), [Ødelægger-næse], Sorex minutus, L. bena, pl. bædnagak | S. pena |. piena I. piænja I. piednak, (Lul.) pena, pl. pætnakah, (Sors) bienja, (Ht. Trond.) bienje, (Jmt.) biena | R. (Ter) pienni'g, (Kildin) pienneg, (Notozero) piannag, (Pasv.) biennaj, Camis; s. 41. 58. 61. 72. 93. 99. 100. 106. 107. 108. 158. 165. 174. 209. 249. daiber (Fris), Martes sylvatica, Nitss. tall (R.: Kildin, Notozero), — 14. damma (Lg), Equa. 344 39. 40. 41. 42. 43. 44. 45. 46. #7. 48. 49. 50. 51. 52. J. QVIGSTAD. tarfok (S), = 14. „Ita interdum dicitur, quia cæspitibus sibi lectum sternit, aut quia subnigro est colore* (Lindahl, Lex. Lapp.). Navnet afledes af tarfe, Torv, og har vel Hensyn til Bjørnens Farve. tiev*na (Jmt.), (Trond.) deevna, = 24 9; s. 197. tiks l. tikse (S.), (Lul.) tiku, (Fld.) diko, (Trond.) teika l. dæks 1. dikse, Canis 9. divrre, pl. divrek (Tromsø, Senjen, Kar), = 14 | S. djur 1. éur, (Lul.) éiura, (Sors. Trond.) éure, (Jmt.) cu"ra, = 12; (Ht. Trond.) dure 1. dävrie, = 14. tomp (S.), (Sors.) dempe, (Tärna) duómpa, Equus. dullja, pl. duljak (Frus), enslags Sel. dulsse-njunne (Frits), enslags Sel. tusse (S.: Lule), = 14 (et Navn paa Bjornen, fordi den eder Beer). dællja, pl. dæljak, l. dællje, pl. dæljek | R. (Pasv.) dallj Phoca groenlandica, Mitt. — suvja-dællje (Nb.), [Sule-dællje], id. (med lange sorte Render, der fortil lober sammen som en Sule). S. 187. tære (S), Canis; (Trond.) dere l. dere, Canis g^. dævok, (Hf) dævak, (Helge, Kl. dævkka | R. (Pasv.) dævatj, Halichoerus grypus, (FABR.) c^, maaske ogsaa Erignathus barbatus, (Mórr.) Hunnen heder ainne. Det var denne Sælart, som tidligere fangedes paa Hen- oerne vest for Fiskeroen i Slutningen af November, naar Selerne var gaaet iland for at yngle; den skal have Yngle- plads paa Bondø udenfor Sørøen; s. 127. 169. fakan, (Ib. vakan, (Lnv.) stavrra-vakan, Orca gla- diator, (la Crp.). fales, pl. fallak | S. fales, (Lul.) svales, (Arj.) falis, (Ht) fales | E. valis | R. (Ter., Kildin) vailes, (Pasv.) vales, Balenoptera ; s. 21. farro-goaigge (Lerm), Lutra vulgaris, ErxL. o^ (aars- gammel). LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KBYBDYR ETC. 345 53. farro-snakka, pl. -snagak (LEE), = 52 9 (aarsgammel). 54. fatte-njunne, [Blærenæse], I. fattenjunne-njuorjo' [Blærenæse-sæl], 1. fatte-njuorjo (Rost. p. 188), = 10. 55 a. filla (Ib. OF), (Lnv. Bls.) fulla, (Bls. ogs.) fallja | S. (Lul.) fela, (Hm. Ts.) svallje, (Fld.) svalljo, (Arj.) felo, (Ht. Trond.) fulle, Pullus equinus; s. 112. 265. 55b. kafaé (E. efter FELLMAN, p. 237), Mustela nivalis, L. s. 147. 201. 56a. gadfe (Lrgw), = 26 9. 56 b. gaidne, pl. gainek (Lerm, Nb. obsol), = 12. 57. gaicca, pl. gaicak | S. gaica, (Lul.) kai*ca, (Arj.) gaica, (Ht. Trond.) gaice | E. kaic | R. (Pasv.) gaic, Capra, Gjed. 98. gakSo, pl. gavsok, = 12 © L 35 29 | S. kauso, (Lul) kakksu, (Arj.) gavSo, = 35 2. 99. galbbe, pl. galbek | S. kalbe, (Lul.) kal°pe, (Ts. Hm.) galebi (Ar. Ht) galbe | R. (Pasv. galb, Vitulus, Ko- kalv; s. 153 b. 280. 60. gatte, pl. gatek, (Lerm), gatti, Phoca foetida, Mürr., norsk: Iskat (Varanger), Havkat (Leem, Lexikon, sml. Be- skrivelse over Finmarkens Lapper, p. 215); s. 11. 156. 224. 61. kass 1 koss (R.: Notozero), = 35 9. 62. gatto, pl. gatok | S. katto, (Lul.) kattu, (Hm. Ts. Fld. Arj.) gatto, = 33. 63. kau*ke (S.; Lul), Vulpes lagopus, (L.). 64. kieiske (R.: Ter.), = 33. 659. kiev-pieille (R.: Ter.), = 18 29. 66. girdde-sapan (Kr), [Flyvemus], Vesperugo borealis, (Nirss.); s. 216. 282. 67. kirreke (S.: Jmt.), = 18 (fireaarig, ugildet). 68. kissa, pl. kisah (E.), = 33. 69. gicce | S. (Lul) kici, (Hm. Ts) gieci, Hædus, Kid; s. 90. 70. kiæka (S.), (Sors.) giekka, (Ht. gi*ka, = 7. 346 71. 79. 73. 74. 15. 76. J. QVIGSTAD. — goaigge, pl. goaigek, 1) Lutra vulgaris, Enxr. c^ (voksen); s. 52; 2) (Leem) = 26 ©. goairre (Kt. sjld.) | S. koire, = 35. goaistas |. goaistus | R. (Pasv.) goistas, = 18 g^ (Daarig); s. 75. koanzai, g. kianei (R.: Ter.), enslags Phoca, = russisk konzuj. goassotas, (Kt. ogs.) goasohus | S. kosetes I. kosetus l. kosets, (Lul.) kosetus, (Artj.) gosites, (Sors.) gosets, 205 goaSSko, pl. goaSkok, Crossopus fodiens, (ScHREB.); s. 919. 246. 247. . goddas 1. geddodas | S. koddotes I. koddets, (Lul.) koddutis, (Arj.) guddodes, (Sors) guddets | R. (Noto- zero, Pasv.) goddas, = 18 > (Aaarig). . geddas-ald (R.: Notozero, Pasv.) = 18 9 (4aarig). goddas-godde, (Leem) goddos-godde, = 77 (Vildren); s. 80. . godde | S. kodde, (Arj) godde, (Ht. Trond) gaddie, (Jmt.) kattie | E. kodde | KR. (Ter) kointe, (Kildin) koint, (Notozero, Pasv.) godd, Rangifer tarandus, (L.) (ferus); 19 c. 131. . godde-alddo, = 80 > (adulta); s. 7. 80. . gedde-sapan | R. (Ter) koïnt-saplink, (Pasv.) godd- sapeli, [Vildren-mus], = 23. . godde-sarves | R. (Ter.) kointe-sairves, = 80 cg. . gokka, pl. gokak (Senjen) = 20 | S. (Gellivare) kokes, pl. kokkok, Ovis; (Ts. Fld. gokko, Capra 1. Ovis. kom (Sy, = 1. 86. koss (R.: Kildin, Notozero) (Pasv.) goss | E. kasi, = 33- 878. kris (Pasv.), = 6. 87 b. kris (S.), nyfodt Renkalv. 87c. krovóke (Trond., = 196. 88. kræuva (Jmt.), (Trond.) krieva, = 18. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. Die 98. 99. 100. 101. 102. 103. 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 347 guiggo, pl. guigok | S. kuoigo, (Lul.) kuigo, Hm. Ts. Arj.) guigo, (Ht.) goigo, Juvenca; s. 256. gumppe, pl. gumpek | S. kumpe 1. kumpek, (Lul.) kumpek, (Arj. Fld gummpe | E. kumppe | R. (Noto- zero) kuimp, (Pas.) gummp, = 12. kunnka (Gellivare), = 12. guenée (Trond.), (Jmt.) Skuonéa, = 12. kuoe (R.: Notozero), = 35 ©. kuovse (S. Castor fiber, L. (aarsgammel); s. 198. guovééa | S. kuopéa I. kuobéa | E. kuopé | R. (Ter.) kimé, (Notozero) kuepé, (Pasv.) guébé, = 14. I Kr. kaldes Hanbjernen guovéca-aggja; små. 2. kurja (R. efter FRus), Lepus timidus, L.; s. 152. gussa, pl. gusak | S. kuss I. koss, (Lul.) kussa, (Hm. Arj) gussa, (Ht. Trond. Jmt) guse | E. kussa | R. (Pasv. guss, Vacca; s. 121. 176 b. kussnjepele (S), — 14 9. kuece (R. efter Frus) | S. (Trond.) skuóéée, = 55 (Hvalp). guéas (Pasv.), = 35 ©. gædge-njuorjo | R. (Pasv.) gædge-nuerj, [Stenkobbe], Phoca, vitulina, L.; s. 1b. 153a. 154. 177. 204. 269. gætke I. gærkke | S. ketke |. kerrke, (Lul.) ker*ke, (Arj.) getke, (Sors.) gerkie, (Ht.) girkie, (Trond.) gerke I. gierke | R. (Notozero) kiaitk, (Pasv. gætkj, Gulo luscus, (L.); s. 115. 211. 237. harves, pl. harvvak | S. habres 1. habra, (Lul.) habres, (Hm. Ts. Fld. Arj.) habris, = 90. havskar-gubbo, [Auskjerkobbe], — 11. hessen (S), Vespertilio, efter Feıım. p. 213 Vespertilio murinus, L.; s. 205. holjo 1. holjo (S.). (Sors.) hulljos, Canis magnus. hortte, pl. hortek | S. horte, Canis pregrandis. huikko, pl. huikok (KL), = 35. 348 109. 110. 111. 112; 115. 114. 115. 116. 117. 118. 119. 120. 121. 122. 123. 124. 125. 126. J. QVIGSTAD. hullun (Gellivare), (Hm.) ullon, (Trond. obsol.) ullunje, [den uldklædte], Ovis. huréo (S.: Sors), = 18 c^ (2aarig). hærgge, pl hargek = 18 g^ (kastreret og dresseret) | S. herke, (Lul.) her*ke, (Arj.) hær°ge | E. ærge | R. (Ter) jierke, (Kildin, Notozero) ierk, (Pasv.) jergj = 18 g^ (kastreret), (R.) (6aarig eller ældre). — (Ht. Trond.) hirgie, (Jmt) hirkie, Equus. hassta, pl. hestak | S. hest, (Lul. Hm. Ts. Fld. Arj. Sors.) hæssta, (Ht) hieste, (Trond.) hieSte, Equus; s. 55a. 111. 113. 134. 265. hevos, pl. heppuSak | S. hæpos | R. (Pasv.) hevas, = 9 jallobævrre | E. jalopævrre, Leo.; s. 118. jer?va, pl. jervah (Lul. Fld.), (Arj.) jærva, = 102. jeges, pl. jekkasak, l. jieges, pl. jiekkasak | R. (Kildin) jiges, g. jiekkas, (Pasv.) jæest, = Erignathus barbatus, (MüLL.); s. 8. I Helgø og Kalfjorden kaldes denne Sæl paa Norsk Grønsæl, og der skilles mellem éappis (sort) og vilgges (hvid) jeges. labbes, pl. labbak, (Kar. Bls. Senjen, Of.) libba |S. labbas 1. libba, (Arj) lammba | E. labis | R. (Pasv.) labbes, Agnus. — laimbes (R.: Ter) g. lampazi, (Notozero) laibbes, g. lappaz, Ovis. legjon | S. lejon, (Lul. Hm.) læddjan, = 114. lessvier (R. efter Fnus), Cervus alces, L.; s. 94. 40. liepel (R.: Ter), = 18 (4—7 Maaneder gammel). limme (R.: Ter.), (Kildin) leiym, (Notozero) leay m, = 97. limme-jieirke (R.: Ter.), Bos. loptur (Fld.), Delphinus. luodoi ædne (Frus), [Vildmarkernes Moder], = 14 o. luomek (S.), (Gellivare) sluöp mak, (Trond.) Sluömege, = UP, luöpek (Varanger), Juvenca (mellem 1 og 2 Aar gammel). 197. 128. 129. 130. 131. 132. 133. 134. 135. 136. 137. 138. 139. 140. 141. 142. 143. 144. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 349 luöste, [hvid Stribe], aarsgammel Unge af devok (s. 49) | R. (Pasv.) luest, Unge af devatj (s. 49) eller af je est (s. 116). magjeg | R. (Ter) majjeg, (Kildin) majeg, (Notozero) majij, (Pasv.) majej, Castor fiber, L.; s. 94. 191. 255. 273. makan, (Kr. ogs, FELLM.) makanajes | S. makanes, = 18 & (6aarig). mart (S.), (Arj Sors.) marta, Martes sylvatica, NiLss.; s. 155. 234. mientus (R.: Ter.), = 80. mieri-virre (R.: Ter.), [Sødyr], Phoca. miesse, pl miesek | S. mese, (Lul.) messe, (Arj.) miesse, (Sors) miessie, (Trond. Jmt) miesie, = 18 (om Renkalv); s. 257. I Gellivare kaldes en laarıg Ren- kalv keéos messe, [en Renkalv der vogtes]. morme (S., = 112 (om Fol). morssa, pl. morSak | R. (Pasv.) mors, Rosmarus arc- ticus, PALL. muödda-addja (Kt.) | S. (Fld. muödd-addja, [Mudde- gubben], (Arj.) muottak, (Jmt.) m?atka, [den pelsklædte], = 2, muoldak, Arvicola; (Kr., FELLM. p. 260) Avvicola gre- garius, (L.); (Meta) Arvicola glareolus, Scures. 1. Arvicola rufocamus, (Sunp.). Aavnet afledes af muoldda, Muld. muoldda-sapan, [Muldmus], Arvicola ratticeps, Krys. & Bras. mutte-karvon (R. efter Frus), [Hamskifter], = 12. mærro | S. merro, Equa. mecce-addja (Of), [Vildmarkgubben], = 2. mæccekas l. m&ccehas, = 14. mæcce-sapan, [Vildmark-mus], Skovmus. namma-lapa l. -lapag l. lappe | S. namma-lappeje, (Lul.) namma-lappe, (Arj.) -lapig | R. (Notozero) nem- loaptekj, (Pasv.) namma-loptakj, = 18 & (7aarig). 990 145. 146. 147. 148. 149. 150. 151. 152. J. QVIGSTAD. Navnet betyder egl. „den der mister Navn“, da Renoksen senere ikke faar noget Særnavn for hvert Aar. navdde, pl. navdek (Kt. Kv. Lg. Bls. Kar), = 12 | R. (Pasv.) ores-navd, = 14 4; s. 284. nirnjai g..nirnja (R.: Ter), = 18 c^ (Aaarig). nirppi (Mera), Mustela nivalis. L.; s. 55 b. nisso | S. (Ts) nisso | R. (Ter) nisse, (Pasv.) ness, Phocena communis, Less. njaféo (Leem), Phoca (nyfødt) (kaldes saa for Spog). njag (Leem), Lutra vulgaris, Enxr. (kaldes saa for Spog). njalla, pl. njalak | R. (Ter. Notozero, Pasv.) njall, Vul- pes lagopus, (L.). I Kt. skjelnes mellem 1) ranes njalla, [graa Fjeldrev] 2) éappis njalla, [sort Fjeldrev]), = Blaaræv (FELLM. p. 225, Mena), 3) vilggis njalla, [hvid Fjeldrev]; s. 226. njoammel | S. niommel, (Lul.) njommel, (Arj.) njomela, (Sors.) njemel, (Ht) njuammele, (Trond.) njoammele l. Snjoame, (Jmt.) njuamele | E. njoammel | R. (Kil- din) njueimmel, (Notozero) njuaimmel, (Pasv.) njoam- mel, = 96. 153a. njuorjo l. nuorjo | S. nuorjo I. nurjo, (Lul.) nuór*ju | R. (Ter.) nierje, (Kildin, Notozero) nueirj, (Pasv.) nuerj, Phoca; s. 8. 101. 153 b. njebéo I. njepéué (S.: Lul.), nyfødt Kalv; s. 59. 154. 155. 156. 157. nuorros (Lrew), = 101. nætte, pl. nædek | S. nete | E. nete | R. (Ter.) niette, (Kildin) nieitt, (Notozero) niet, (Pasv.) n°æt, = 130. oaido, pl. vidduk, |. oaiddo, pl. oaidok, antagelig = 60 (om voksne Dyr); (Nb.) oaido-gatte, en hden oaido; s. 60. oarre, pl. oarrek | S. erre, L orrev, (Ht.) oarr°va, (Trond.) oarr*ve, (Jmt) orava | E. oarre | R. (Ter.) vieirrev, (Kildin) ueirrev, (Notozero) uairrev, (Pasv.) oarrev, Sciurus vulgaris, L. 158. 159. 160. 161. 162. 163. X LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 351 qddok (S.), (Hm.) edok, (Lul.) etek, (Ar. odog, = 35 (Hvalp). odge (Lerm), Vulpes vulgaris, GRAY (nondum adultus). Qineg (R.: Kildin) = 10. olgobus (Leem, sjld.), [som er lidt længere borte], = 12. orrek I. urrek I. orak (S), = 18 c? (2aarig); (Lul.) orek, = 18 g (fra Høsten 1 dens 2det Aar til Vaaren i dens 4de Aar) | R. (Notozero) oarekj, (Pasv.) orekj, = 18 c^ (Zaarig); s. 260. ortok (Finmarken), = 31. 164a. rabra (S.), = 18 ©. 164 b. radn (S.), Vitulus rangiferinus, recens et primo vere natus. 165. 166. 167. 168. 169. 170. 171. rakka, = 35 (liden), (Kl. Vst.) = 35 c | S. (Ht.) rako, = 95 Q. | randivr (S), Cervus elaphus, L. ravdde (Kt. Lrzm), (alm. ravdde-rievan | S. (Lul.) rau*te, [Smed], Vulpes vulgaris, Gray, var. C. cruciatus, L. (Korsrev) (Leem, Frus); id. var. C. ferrugineus, I: (Brandræv), (FELLM., p. 221); id. var. C. nigro-argenteus, Nizsson (Svartræv) (Lul.); s. 171. rebbié (S.), = 18 © (meget gammel); (Ht.) rebée, = 189 (som har Kalv). redde (Leem) = 49 (2 til Saarig); (Sdv.) rædda, (Frus) rædde, Phoca (om Unge). remste (Lul.), = 18 (aarsgammel, om Vaaren). rieban |. rievan, (Kl. Helgø) revnjes, (Senjen) rebes, pl. repehak | S. repel. repeha, (Lul.) repi, pl. repihah, (Hm. Ts. Fld. Arj) rebe I. riebe, Sors.) riebie, (Ht.) rebe I. rebSe, (Trond.) rieve l. rievo, (Jmt.) riævoe | E. riemnjis I. riebnjis | R. (Ter) rimnje, (Kildin) rimnj, (Notozero, Pasv.) riemnj, Valpes vulgaris, GRAY; 8. 159. 167. 189. 203. 241. Der skjelnes mellem dolla-rieban (Kt.), [Ildraev], var. C. ferrugineus, L. (Brandræv); golle- rieban (Kt), [Guldræv], sort Rev med skinnende Haar; 352 J. QVIGSTAD. 172. 173. 174. 175. ranes rieban (Kt), [graa Rav], (Leem) ranak [et graat Dyr], efter FELLM. p. 228 var. C. nigro-argenteus, Nizsson (Svartræv); rissta-rieban l. ruossa-rieban, (Lul.) ruóssa- repi, [Korsræv], var. C. cruciatus, L.; éappis rieban (Kt.), [sort Rav], (LEEm) éapok, [et sort Dyr], var. C. nigro- argenteus, NiLsson; @uörre-rieban, Sølvræv; vilggis rievan (Sdv.), [hvid Rev], — 270. riekko, pl. riekok, antagelig Halichoerus grypus, (FABR.). rievddo, pl. rievdok (Leem), = 83 (naar Parringstiden er forbi); (Frus) godde-rievddo, = 83 (stor) | R. (Ter.) riefta, g. rievda, — 83. roaksu (Ht.), (Sors.) rokso*, = 35 o. roatto, pl. roatok, (Sdv. Ks) rotta | S. (Ts.) roatto, Mus decumanus, PALL. 176a. rodno, pl. ronok, — 18 9 (som enkelte Aar har Kalv, andre ikke) (Kt. Of.) (som ikke har kalvet, eller som har mistet Kalven om Vaaren), (Of. ogs.) — 18 o (ufrugtbar) = æme-rodno | S. rodno I. ronno, = 18 9 (1) ung, 2) som ikke har Kalv), (Lul.) rottnu, = 18 9 (3aarig eller ældre), (Arj.) runo&, (Sors.) rudngée, (Trond.) rodnuée I. rudnaée, = 18 9 (3aarig, (Ht) rednu, = 18 9 (som i det Aar ikke har kalvet), (Jmt.) rottnaéa, == 18 © (Zaarig, som ikke har kalvet) | R. (Ter.) run-alt, (Notozero) ron- alt, (Pasv.) ronn, = 18 © (ufrugtbar). 176b. rodno-gussa | S. (Ht) rednoke L rodnu, = 97, ite 178. (ufrugtbar). rokka, pl. rogak | R. (Ter) rokk, = 101 c? (adultus). rennéo® (Sors), = 18 4; (Lul.) ronnéu, = 184 (om et gammelt Trækdyr). . renus (Gellivare), = 18 9 (2aarig, om Sommeren); ronuS- rottnu, id. (om Vinteren). . rosse, pl. rossek (Ib.), Equus (stor og sterk) | S. (Hm. Ts.) ressi | R. (Ter.) roisse, Equus. 181. 182. 183. 184. 185. 186. UT. 188. 189. 190. 19% 192. 193. 194. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 353 rottem 1. rotem (S), (Arj.) rottim, (Sors) retem, (Ht.) roaddem, (Trond.) roadde, — 6. rui°pe (Lul): vuöras [gammel] r., = 18 © (gammel). ruksis sapan, [rød Mus], Arvicola rutilus, (PALL.). ruolla-bosso, [Troldhval], Megaptera boops, (FABR.). ruomas, pl. ruobmasak (Ib. O£), — 12. ruomse-kalles (S., [Mosegubben], l. ruomsek, — 14 („quia muscos lichenesque autumno colligit sibi lectum sternens hibernum*). ruossa-njuorjo | R. (Pasv.) ruöSSa-nuerj, [Russe- kobbe], = 47. ruóvdde-gazza, [Jernklo], en liden Art Seel. ruovsok, [et rødt Dyr], Vulpes vulgaris, Gray; hilla- ruovsok, [et glorødt Dyr], en ildrod Rev. ryca (S.), (Ht) ruce, (Trond.) róce, Arvicola amphibius, (L.); s. 945. 247. rebbares (S), = 128 (2aarig). ræi*na (Of. Vst.) | S. (Lul. Hm. Ts.) ræi*na, = 18. sagge-njunnje-saipak (Gellivare), [spidsnæset Langhale |, Sorex (minutus?), L. saidde-bosso, [Seihval], Balenoptera laticeps, GRAY. 195 a. sapan | E. sæplig | R. (Ter.)saiplinke, (Kildin) safplenk, (Notozero) saiplig, (Pasv.) sapeli Mus. 195b. sapan-éoavje, [Musebug], en Rev, som har Musens 196. 297. 198. 199: Farve under Bugen. sarva, pl. sarvvagak, I. sarvva, pl. sarvak |S. sarv, (Lul. Arj. Ht.) sar*va | E. sorv | R. (Ter.) sarv, (Kildin) serv, (Pasv.) sórv, Cervus alces, L.; s. 94. 40. sarva-alddo, — 196 o. sarves, pl. sarvvak | S. sarves | R. (Ter.) sairves, (Notozero) seirves, (Pasv.) sörves, = 18 Å (non ca- stratus). savcca, pl. savcak | S. sauca | E. savca | R. (Pasv.) sauce, Ovis. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII, IV. 23 954 J. QVIGSTAD. 200. 201. 209. 203. 204. 205. 206. 207. 208. 209. 210. 211. 212. 213. 214. 215. 216. 217. 218. 219. 220. 221. 222. seibbun (Ib.), [langhalet Dyr], Storfæ. seibuS (Leem), (Utsj.) seibbelakke, = 55b. sinnka (Kl), = 35 ©. skaingo (S), = 35 9, undertiden = 171; (Arj.) bæna- skanjgo, = 35 (ung); (Ht) skannje, (Sors) Skannja, (Tärna) skanna, = 35 (Hvalp). skavddo, pl. skavdok, = 101 (paa 2det Aar). skiléak (S., Vespertilio, svensk: nattskata. skippa (S), = 18 ©. skovva-njunne (Frus), enslags Mus. Slukke (Vst.) | S. (Gellivare) slokke, = 12. smalla, pl. smalak, (Ib.) smallo, (Ib. ogs., Bls. Of) smoallo | S. smala, Ovis. smalde (S), = 14 9. smeg*li (Lul.), = 102. smiril (Frs), = 76. snakka, pl. snagak, Lutra vulgaris, ERxL. © (voksen); s. 53. snatte, g. snate (Gullesfjord, Vst.), Lutra vulgaris, ERXL.; s. 954. 963. snurkka, pl. snurkak (Ib.) | S. snorka, (Ht) snorka, (Trond.) Snurge |. Snorga, (Jmt.) snar?ka, Sus, (Ht.) 4; Sor le soadje-sapan (Kv.), [Vingemus], = 66. sokke (Leem sjld.) | E. Sahe, g. Save, l. sohe | R. (Ter.) Saikke, (Kildin) Sa!kk, (Notozero) Sakj, (Pasv.) Sakje, Sus; s. 915. 219. spailek 1. spailak, = 18 & (gildet, men utæmmet) | S. svailek, = 18 d (utæmmet). spidne, pl. spinek | S. svine, = 217. stainak | S. stainak, = 18 9 (som aldrig føder eller har fedt Kalv); (Kt.) bipo-s., id. stakke (Of) | S. stakke, — 12. stalppe | S. stalpe, = 12. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 955 223a. stuör-muödda (Fld.), [Storpels]. = 14. 993 b. stuöt (Trond.), = 196. 224. 295. 226. 227. 228. 229. 230. 231. 232. 233. 234. 235. 236. 237. 938. 239. 240. 241. stuora-fiééo (Helgø), [Storsveiv], = 60. suokok (S.), [den haarrige], = 14. svala (S.), (Lul. Fld. Arj) svalla, (Ht.) svale, (Trond.) Svale, (Jmt.) Svala, = 151. sviddek (S.), (Lul.) svitek, (Ht.) sverre (akk. sverregeb), (Trond.) 8verreke, Sorex. sæibak 1. sæibag, [langhalet Dyr], 1) Storfæ, 2) = 12; (Senjen) sæibek | S. seipeg |. seipek, (Lul.) sæipak, (Jmt.) seipike, (Trond.) gukkes sieibe, [Langhale], — 12. sæibbe-navdde (Ib. sjld.). [Haledyr], = 12. semel (S.), = 18 ©. Salmaite (R.: Ter), = 18 4 (Saarig). Saimait-vaiz (R.: Ter), = 18 9 (Saarig). Sevak (Frus), enslags Mus, = 240? | S. (Lul) Gepak, Sorex. Skakée (Jmt.), = 130. Snekala |. Snjakala (Jmt.), Vespertilio. Snjierra, pl. Snjierak, (Kv.) snirra l. snirre-sapan, (Vst.) sneris, g. snera, (Fnus) snjiras l. snjieras-sapan | S. snjæra, (Lul.) Snjerra, (Arj Sors) Snjierra, (Sors. ogs.) Snjieris, (Ht) snjierra, (Trond) Snjiæra |. $njearra, 1) Mus musculus, L., 2) Mus sylvaticus, L. Snubbe (Trond.), = 102. Snurra (Jmt.), = 18 (2aarig). Snölke 1. Snuölke (Trond.), (Jmt.) snölke, (Ht.) snol*ka, = 12. ciebak I. cievak I. ciebag | S. cæpanje, (Sors.) ciebaga, [Gnaver], Sorex arameus, L.; s. 259. emia (lb), — 171. 242 a. ciko | S. (Lul.) eiku, (Gellivare) cika | R. (Pasv.) ceik, = 39 o. I Kt. ogsaa om Hun af Rev, Fjeldræv, Ulv, Bjørn, Jerv. J. QVIGSTAD. 949 b. cohha (Ht. Trond.) = 35, (Trond.) 3. 243. 244. 245. 246. gk (Ra Were), = 12 éaske (S.), = 26. @ace-veSek (S.), [Vand-vesek], = 190; s. 267. éacce-boassto (Kv.), = 76. 947a. Cacce-goaSSko, pl -goa8kok (Varanger), (Sdv. ogs.) -goasko pl. -go88kuk, (LEEM) -guSkos, (Fairs) -go8ka | R. Pasv.) éace-guótkjes, = 76, efter FELLM. p. 260 = 190. 8 J p 247 b. Gacce-maSSko, pl. -maSkok (Tn.), = 76. 248a. Gelp (R.: Kildin), = 12. 248 b. Giermma (Sdv.), (KL) &irmma | R. (efter Frus) Gierma, 249. 250. 251. 252. 259. 254. 255. 256. 257. 258. (Pasv.) Côrm, = 12. äipe (R.: Ter), [en som skjærer], = russisk kosatka (Orca gladiator, (la Crp.) ?). @oarvve-buovja, [Horn-buovja], Monodon monoceros, Wn? & Ad; €oavées, pl. éoakéak, = 18 9 (en Rensimle om Høsten, som har mistet Kalven om Sommeren eller Hosten) | S. &opées 1. €opéa, (Lul) éopées, pl éopéah, = 18 9 (som har mistet Kalven). odde (Lul.), = 14 (1aarig). éærmak |. éerbmak | S. éerbmak 1. €ærmuk, (Lul.) éærmak, (Sors. éurmu, (Jmt.) éorma, (Trond.) éurma l. &ermake | R. (Pasv) éermakj, = 18 (laarig), (Sors. Jmt. Trond.) 9. éævres, pl. éevrrak, (KL) éaures | S. keura 1. ézura l. ésures, (Lul) &eures, pl éæu*°rah, (Arj) @evris, (Sors. Ht. Trond.) &evra | R. (Ter) Gairves, (Kildin) Gievres, (Notozero) Gevres, (Pasv.) €ævres, = 214. vadnem (S.), = 128. vadok, Juvenca (1 3dje Aar) | R. (Pasv.) vadakj, Juvenca. vaz (R. efter Frus), = 133. vaise (Arj.), (Sors. vaiSie, = 12 (egl. vildt Dyr); (Trond.) vaise |. raves [graa] vaiSe, (Jmt.) vaisie, = 196. 259. 260. 261. 262. 263. 264. 265. 266. 267. 268. 269. 270. 271. 212. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KBYBDYR ETC. Søn vandes, pl. vanndak, (Bls. Of.) vadda, pl. vaddagak, Lnv. Ib. vadda, pl. vaddak | S. (Arj.) vondo, (Sors. vonda, = 240. | | varek | R. (Ter) vieireg, = 18 å (2aarig), (Ter.) (fra Dyrets 2den Sommer til Mai 1 det Aar, da det bliver 2 Aar); s. 162. vargga, pl. vargak (Kl. Ib. Vst.) | S. varg, (Hm.) v arja, (Fld. Arj.) varga, = 12. vari-ajja (S.), [Berggubben], = 14. var-lagges, pl. -laggak. (Leem), = 214 (ikke aars- gammel). | varra-navag (Sdv.), [som har blodig Navlel, Catulus phocæ (1 à 2 Dage gammel). varssa l. varsse, (Kr) hesta-varssa, = 55a. vaéa, pl. vaéamak (Kt. Ib. Of), = 18 9 (2aarig eller ældre, som følger Moderen) | S. vaga IL. vatev = 18 9; (Lul. Ar.) vaéau, pl. vaéamah, = 18 9 (3aarig eller ældre (Lul) som har Kalv (Arj.)), (Sors) vaéo = 18 9 (ung) | R. (Ter. vaZ, g. vaééime, (Pasv) vaj, = 18 9 (ung). vesek (S.), = 190; s. 245. vibe (S.), = 14 3. viekse I. viefse, pl. vievsek, = 101 (ikke aarsgammel, men som har ophort at die). vielgok, [hvidt Dyr], = 171 (hvid Rev med sorte Øren, sorte Fodder og sorte Haar paa Enden af Halen) (Leem, p. 194). vielpes, pl. vielppak, (KL) goalp | S. felpes I. felpa, (Ht) fíelpa 1. guolpa, (Trond.) kuölpa, (Jmt.) kuolpa | E. vielpis |R. (Pasv.) vielpes, — 35 (Hvalp). viercca, pl. viercak, |. fiercca | S. verca, (Lul) ver*ca, (Hm. Ts. Fld. Sors.) vierca, (Arj) verca, (Ht. Trond.) vierce | E. vierca | R. (Notozero, Pasv.) vierc, Aries. 358 273. 274. 275. 276. 277. 278. J. QVIGSTAD. viækes l. viæka (S.), = 128 (stor). vuöbers I. vuóvers, (Kr. ogs.) vuóves, (Ib.) vuöbes | S. vuobberes, (Lul.) vuöpes 1. vuöperis, (Arj.) vuöbires, (Sors. vuöberse, (Jmt.) vuæprs, = 18 4 (3aarig, (Lul.) om Høsten) | R. (Ter) vibers, = 18 d (2aang) (Pasv.) vuevers I. vueres, (Notozero) vueres, = 18 4 (Saarig). vuöksa I. vuöfsa, pl. vuövsak | S. vuokses I. vuoksa, (Lul.) vuökksa, (Hm.) vuöusis, (Ts. Fld. Arj. Ht.) vuöksa, (Trond.) vuæksa, (Jmt.) vueksa | E. vuoksa | R. (Pasv.) vuöys, Bos d. vuonjal, pl. vuodnjalak, — 18 9 (2aarig) | S. vuonjel, (Arj. Sors) vuonjal, (Trond.) vuenjele, = 18 9 (i 3dje Aar) (Lul) vuónjal, = 18 9 (fra Hosten af dens 2det Aar til Vaaren i dens 4de Aar), (Jmt.) vuænele = 18 9 (Saarig, som endnu ikke har kalvet) | R. (Ter.) vinjl, g. vinnjili, = 18 9 (fra dens 2den Sommer til Mai det folgende Aar), (Pasv. Notozero) vuönjal, = 18 2 (2aarig). vuonjal-alddo, = 189 (2aarig, som har Kalv om Vaaren) | S. (Lul.) vuönjal-alltu, = 18 © (3aarig, om Vaaren) | R. (Pasv.) vuónjal-vaj, = 18 9 (3aarig, Ter.) vinjl- va3, = 180 (Zaarig). vuonjal-rodno | S. (Lul.) vuönjal-rottnu, = 18 0 (2aarig, (Lul.: 3aarıg), som ikke har Kalv, om Vaaren). 279a. vuöperis-Cor-take (Lul), [en vuöperis, som arbeider paa sine Horn], = 184 (Saarig, om Vaaren); s. 274. 279 b. v"ornese (Jmt.), = 12. 280. 281. 282. 283. 284. vuöse (E), = 59 | R. (Ter.) visse, (Kildin) vuiss, (Noto- zero) vua!ss, (Pasv. vues, — 18 (Renkalv, for den faar nye Haar). vuóvdde-sapan, [Skovmus], Arvicola rufocanus, (SUND.). veigge-cicas, [Skumring-spurv], = 66. ænak (Lzgw) | S. ænak, = 14 d. este (Lem) | S. (Lul.) esteu, pl. estemah, (Fld.) esteu, pl. esteva | R. (Pasv.) jest-navd, = 149; s. 145. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 359 Tillæg. A. Rennavne. Rensdyret har efter de forskjellige Alderstrin forskjellige Navne!. De almindeligste er: iic ruksis miesse, (Lul.) ruópsis messe, (Ts) ruöpsok, [rod Renkalv], nyfedt Renkalv; den kaldes saa, fordi dens første Haar er rodbrunagtige. muovjak l. muovja-miesse I. muovjadam-miesse, (Lul.) muivak, en Renkalv, som har begyndt at miste de forste Haar og faar nye. Naar Renkalven har mistet de første Haar, kaldes den 1 Lul. pil*sa messe. borgge-miesse, (Lul.) por*ke messe, en Renkalv i dens förste Aar, naar den har faaet nye Haar. Naar de nye Haar om Høsten er blevne tette, kaldes Renkalven Cæp- bor(gge)-miesse. éærbmak |. éerbmat, en Renkalv fra Nytaar til Som- meren 1 dens 2det Aar; (Lul) €ærmak, en Renkalv om Vaaren i dens 2det Aar. — Det kan hende, at en €ærb- mak © faar Kalv, og den kaldes da Gerbmak-alddo. smavas, pl. smavvasat (Kt.) kaldes Renen, fra den har skiftet Haar om Sommeren 1 dens 2det Aar, Hannen, til den bliver vuöbers, og Hunnen, til den faar Kalv; (Lul.) sma- vas, Ren om Sommeren i dens 2det Aar. En smavas c? kaldes i Finmarken varek, en smavas 9 vuonjal. I Lul. er orek en Hanren og vuónjal en Hunren fra Hosten i dens 2det Aar til Vaaren i dens 4de Aar. — Naar en Hunren har fyldt 2 Aar, kaldes den om Vaaren i sit 3dje Aar, hvis den har Kalv, vuonjal-alddo, og hvis den ikke ! Om Rennavne se G. von Düben, Om Lappland och Lapparne, p. 296 f., J. Fellmann i Suomi, 1848, p. 965 f. og 968, Stockfleths norsk-lappiske Ordbog, p. 532 b (Ren). Se ogsaa foranstaaende Fortegnelse No. 4. 7. 9. 18. 65. 70. 73. 75. 77--81. 83. 87 b. 88. 110. 111. 120. 199. 131. 193. 144. 146. 162. 164. 168. 170. 173. 176 a. 178. 179. 182. 192. 198. 206. 218. 220, 230-232. 938. 951. 253. 957. 260. 966. 274. 276—278. 279 a. 280. 360 J. QVIGSTAD. har Kalv, vuonjal-rodno. I Lul er vuönjal-alltu en Hunren, der har Kalv, og vuónjal-rottnu en Hunren, der ikke har Kalv, begge 3aarıge, om Vaaren. — Senere faar Hunrenen ikke nye Navne, men kaldes 1 Finmarken, naar den folges af Kalv, alddo. Kalven pleier at folge Moderen, t] der kommer en ny Kalv; nogle Kalve folger Moderen 3—4 Aar, endog efterat de selv har faaet Kalv; en saadan Hunren, som selv har Kalv og dog følger sin Moder, kaldes 1 Kt. vaéa. En Hunren, som ikke har kalvet, eller som har mistet Kalven om Vaaren, kaldes rodno; en Hunren, som har mistet Kalven om Sommeren eller Høsten, kaldes €oavées: gesse[Sommer]-6oavées eller éakéa[Host]- Coavées. 6. Naar Hanrenen begynder sit 3dje Aar, kaldes den 1 Kt. vuöbers, naar den begynder sit 4de Aar, goddodas, naar den begynder sit bte Aar, goasohus, naar den begynder sit 6te Aar, makan, og naar den begynder sit 7de Aar, namma-lapa. Senere faar Hanrenen ikke noget Særnavn. Se videre No. 73. 78. 79. 87 b. 110. 111. 120. 146. 164 b. 168. 170. 179. 231. 232. 238. 257. 279 a. 280. Vildrenen kaldes godde, og dette Ord kan nærmere bestem- mes ved at tillegge Renens Navne paa de forskjellige Alders- inn, f. Eks. godde-miesse, -éærbmak, -vuonjal, -alddo, -varek, -vuóbers, -goddodas osv. Der gives desuden mange Rennavne, som er hentede 1) fra Forhold vedkommende Parring og Fødsel og Moderens Forhold til Kalven, 2) fra Haarbeklædningens Farve og Beskaffenhed, 3) fra Hornenes Form, 4) fra Legemsform og Legemsfeil, 5) fra eiendommelige Egenskaber og Vaner, 6) fra Rensdyrets Anven- delse. Her følger en Opregning af de Navne, som ikke allerede er anførte 1 det foregaaende: 5. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 361 . aidnavalddo |. ainovalddo, den sterkeste Renokse, som i Parringstiden tilkjæmper sig Herredommet over Simlerne. Der kan være flere saadanne i en Hjord, og de holder de smaa Grarener borte. . arakes alddo | S. (Lul.) arrak, Simle som føder tidlig om Vaaren. . batte, Simle, som lidt for Kalvningen altid soger hen tl det Sted, hvor den for har kalvet. . gaskek l. gasket, gildet Ren (kaldes saa, til Vinteren er forbi); den kaldes efter Alderen vuóbers-gasket, goddodas-gasket, goasohus-gasket. Almindelig gildes Renen som goasohus. I Lul er kaskek en 4aarig gildet Renokse. En Ren, der er gildet om Som- meren, kaldes gæsse-gasket, en, der er gildet om Høsten, Gakéa-gasket. golgok | S. kolkok, efter Parring udmattet Renokse. 6a. gudoldak guödde, Simle, som føder tidligere end de andre. 6b. gæsek 1. gæset, 1) Simle, som føder sent paa Vaa- 12. 18. ren, = gæset-alddo I. gæset-guödde, 2) Renkalv, som fødes sent paa Vaaren, = gæset-miesse. . luotvar I. luædvar, (S.) Renko, som føder gode Kalve. . luovas, pl. luovvasak, Losren, som ei har Kalv, Gjeldren. I Kt. er luovvasat, pl. Hanrener, som om Vaaren skilles fra Simlerne. _ . miesse-alddo | S. mesek-aldo, (Lul.) mesak, 1) drægtig Simle, 2) Simle som har Kalv. . ragak |. ragat, Renokse, som gaar i Brunst, = rakke sarves | S. rakkeje sarves. . sarak |. sarat, mindre Renokse, som af Frygt for de større ikke tør komme til Simlerne. suoppa | S. suoppa, Simle, som ikke vil vide af sin nyfødte Kalv, men spænder den fra sig. Coavjek I. Coavjet, dregtig Simle, som snart skal føde. 362 J. QVIGSTAD. 14. éuódde, Hanren, som lober omkring og søger efter Hunren. 15. vuölltu (Lul.), (Fid.) vuölldo 1. vuölldo-sarvis, den sterkeste Renokse 1 Hjorden. II. 1. biddojuölgge | S. (Gellivare) pittuk, (Jokkmokk) pit- tus, Ren med hvide Ben fra Knæet nedover. DO . duór88e-gallo, Ren, som er hvid 1 Panden og ellers hvidgraa. . gabba, snehvid Ren med hvide eller sorte Klover. . gabbanulppo, snehvid, kollet Ren. . gairrejuölgge-boaco, Ren med hvid Rand paa Foden. . galbegazza, Ren med hvide Klover. . galbegallo, Ren med hvidt Blis i Panden. Qo “I © TK CO . galbenjunne, Ren med en hvid Flek fra Panden ned- over til Næsen. 9. garek, liden ugildet Renokse om Vaaren, naar den har mistet Dækhaarene paa Halsen. 10. kepak-sica (Lul), ganske sort Ren med hvide Flekker om Snuden. DEN 11. gilgan: jevja (@appis)-duodnjas-gilgan (Kar.), Ren, som har en hvid (sort) Flek paa Siden. 19. girjenjunne, Ren med hvide Flekker paa Næsen. 13. guorban, Ren, hvis Haar er afsvedne eller afnyggede. 14. gucak l. gucat, Ren, som har Haar med lys T'op eller ind- sprengt lys Farve, og som i Regelen ogsaa er langhaaret. 15. jevja |. jievja | S. (Jmt.) jouje, hvid Ren. 16. lidne-oaivve, Ren med hvidt Hoved. 17. linak 1. linak-stalek (Lul.), Ren med hvidt Hoved og hvide Fodder. 18. luostag 1. luostak | S. (Lul.) luóstak, Ren, som har en lys Stribe langs Siden. 19. mosag (Of), hvidgraa Ren. 20. mosat-jevja (Kt), sort Ren med hvide Haar iblandt og med hvidt Hoved og hvide Fodder. 21. mosat-mucet (Kt.), sort Ren med hvide Haar paa Siden. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. 33. 34. 35. 36. 31. 38. 39. 40. 41. 49. 45. 44, 45. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 363 mossQ (Lul.), lysegraa, næsten hvid Ren. musstur (Ib. Of.), sort Ren. mucek l. mucet, sort Ren (uden hvide Pletter). rajak (Lul.), hvid Ren med hvidagtige Øine og Klover, men med brune Flekker paa Skindet (meget sjelden). ranat l. ranok, graa Ren. ranat-jevja (Kt.), graahvid Ren. ri$Sagabba, snebvid Ren med hvide Klover og hvid- gule Pine. ruSke, Simle med graabrune Haar. ruskot (Kt.), Ren med graabrune Haar. siednja-njunne, Ren med hvide Næsevinger. sica (Lul.), Ren, som har smaa hvide Flekker om Snuden. sica-Gudsek (Lul) blisset Ren, som har smaa hvide Flekker om Snuden. sledda (Lul) ganske hvid Ren med hvidagtige Øine og Klover. slekkna (Lul.) = sledda. stalek (Lul), Ren med ganske hvidt Hoved. seite-njunne (Kr., Ren med en eller flere hvide Flek- ker omkring Næseborene. Snjilééa, Ren som har mistet de gamle Haar og derfor er snauhaaret. Selgok |. Selgot, Ren med tætte, vakre Haar. éesskis-jevja, ganske hvid Ren. Ceskis-pæjuk (Gellivare), ganske hvid Ren med hvide Øine og Klover. éeskok (Gellivare), = Geskis-pæjuk. @uoivag |. Cuoivat, hvidgraa Ren. I Kt. skjelnes mellem duolvva[skidden]-&, ranat[graa]-G, Selggis [skinnende]- €. @uösse-njunne, Ren med en hvid Flek paa Næsen. éæpborgge, en Ren med nye Haar, der begynder at blive tætte; naar de nye Haar er tynde, er Renen 364 15. 16. J. QVIGSTAD. borgge | R. (Ter) Giepifrke, Renkalv indtil 15de Au- gust, gammel Stil. . Cæskok, ganske hvid Ren. IS abmel I. abmel-bælle | S. abmel, (Lul.) appmel, Ren, som af Naturen kun har 1 Horn (alm. Simle) | R. aimmel-akaj 1. -vaiZ, hornlos Simle. . duólb-oaivve, Ren, hvis Horn spriker; sml. (Lul.) tuôlp-oi°ve, Gevir med udbredte Horn. . giellan-oaivve, Ren, paa hvis Horn Enderne bøier sig sammen bagtil. . goalla, Ren, som aldrig faar Horn; (Kr.) kun om Simler. . gobmaras-éoarvve, Ren, hvis Horn er krogede og foroverbøiede; smi. (Lul.) kobbmoris g1°ve, Gevir, hvis Horn er bøiede 1 en Halveirkel. . gærdo-Coarvve, Ren, hvis Horn begge vokser op fra samme Rod; sml. (Lul.) kærtus g1°ve, om saadant Gevir. . honka (S.), kollet Simle. . jolle hærgge, kollet Kjøreren, som aldrig faar Horn; jelle alddo, kollet Simle, som aldrig faar Horn. . liedme-oaivve, Ren, hvis Horn forgrener sig lige ved Roden og er mangegrenede (Fris); Ren, hvis Horn 1 Enden bar flade, pladeformede Takker. . lenco-oaivve, Ren, hvis Horn spriker. . nalak | S. (Lul.) nalak, Ren med afkappede Horn. . namme-herggel. namme-éoar-hergge |. namm(e)- oai-hærgge, I. namm-oaivve l. namm-oai-éoar- vag, en Kjøreren, som endnu ikke har skuret Huden (namme) af Hornene. . njaggo, Ren med bagoverbøiede smale Horn (mest om Simler). . njaidd-oai-hergge, Ren, hvis Horn gaar langt bag- over. njarbbis-oaivve, Ren, hvis Horn har faa Grene. njavc-oaivve, Ren, hvis Horn har mange Grene. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 2E 28. 29. 90. 91. mv ct. QU & © SS) LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 365 nulppo | S. nolpo, (Lul.) nul pu, Ren, som har mistet Hornene; nulppo-hargge, kollet Kjoreren; nulppo- alddo, kollet Simle. roéo-oaivve, Ren, hvis Horn ikke spriker, opp. læneo- oalv ve. ruóbba, Ren, som har feldet sine Horn uden at faa nye igjen. ruossa-éoarvve, Ren, paa hvis Horn en Gren gaar fremover og en bagover, saa der dannes et Kors. reenc-oaivve (Of), Ren, hvis Horn gaar ud til Siderne. sagge-6oarvve, Ren, hvis Horn ikke har Grene eller Takker. sarvva-Coarvve, Ren, hvis Horn ligner Elgens. snarre 1. snarre-oaivve, Ren, som har lave eller smaa Horn med mange Tagger. snog(o)-oaivve |. snogo-Coarvag, Ren, som har sterkt fremoverbøiede Horn. snuoggo-oaivve, = frg. spa@o-Coarvag |. spaéo-oaivag, Ren med hoit- ragende Horn. sukkis-oaivve, Ren, hvis Horn har mange Takker. cægg(o)-oaivve, Ren med ret opadstigende Horn. éal(o) (6ala)-oai-hsergge I. éalo (Cala)-Coar-hærgge» Kjøreren, af hvis Horn Huden er skallet ai. @ig-aimmeil (R.: Ter.), Simle med 1 Horn. bævrek, et hoibenet og slankvoksent Rensdyr | S. peurek, 1) Vildren, 2) Ren, som er Afkom af Vildrenokse og tam Renko; (Lul.) peurek, hoi og statelig Ren. . guögge-boaco, sveirygget Ren. . kurg (S.), enoiet Ren; Ren, som tager feil af Veien. . gurmak, Ren, som har Larver af Oestrus tarandi. . gæigo-bællje, Ren, hvis Ørespidser ved Merkningen ikke er skaaret af, men staar ud. 366 J. QVIGSTAD. . hubak 1. hubat, (Of) hubar, Ren, hvis Øren næsten er afkuttede paa Grund af Merkning. . janhek (Kr.), stor, fed Renokse. . napak (Lul.), Ren med Nappa-merke (afskaaren Ørespids). .njalppe- L njoalppe-boaco, Ren, hvis Bagdel er afrundet og lavere end Ryggen. . rovvak (Lul.), Ren som halter. . Skarjak (Lul), Ren med Skarja-merke (Udsnit i Øre- spidsen). . skurre-éalbme, enøiet Ren. . urkka, Ren, som er ualmindelig liden af Vekst. . bedo-boaco, Ren, som gaar udenfor Flokken. . dildan, Ren, som bærer Bjelde. . kallok (S.), en temmet Ren, som lader sig lede. . gavlok, Ren, som springer hurtig afsted, skjønt man holder Kjøretømmen paa dens venstre Side. . kur*ja (Gellivare), Ren, som altid slikker op Urin. .Jaskak, stad Kjøreren, som under Kjeringen legger sig ned. . lidnja-boaco, Ren, som gaar og sjangler eller vakler. . lojak, en Ren, som er saa tam og folkegod, at den kan tages med Haenderne uden Lasso. . luovdak l. luovdat, Ren, som under Kjoringen mod- villig legger sig eller kaster sig ned. . manne l. mannes boaco, Ren, som af sig selv gaar i Spidsen for Flokken. .nappe-reggan, Simle, som har den Uvane at sparke til Melkekoppen. . nirro 1. njirro, Hunren, som ei vil holde sig til andre Rener, men helst gaa alene. . rates skonka (Lul.), Ren, som altid vandrer hid og did paa Veiene. .ravdat I. ravdda-ælak, Ren, som altid vil holde sig i Udkanten af Hjorden. 15. 16. du 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. VI. RR © F9 HA Js LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 967 ravnok |. ravnot, Ren, som er modig til at trække sit Læs. rievtag, Ren, som let lader sig styre bent under Kjor- selen. skilan, Simle, som bærer Bjelde. skindeg, Ren, som ikke lærer at lade sig lede; Ren, som er urolig under Melkningen. cissa-banne, Ren, som følger Mennesker for at grave op Sneen og slikke op deres Urin. éuovvo I. éuovvos boaco, den Ren, som gaar først 1 Renflokken efter den Ren, der ledes foran. udamag, utæmmet Ren. visa, Vildren, som gaar 1 Spidsen for og leder Ren- flokken. . raiddo-hærgge, Kjøreren, der trækker Læs i en Række. . ronk |. runk (S.), gammel Kjøreren. . ronéo (S.), Kjøreren. . Coanohas I. éanatus, Ren, som bindes bag en anden Ren for at holde igjen og stoppe Farten under Kjørsel; Stopperen. . vuógjem-hergge, Kjøreren. . vuójan, Kjereren. . varre-hærgge, Reserveren. FELLMAN bemerker p. 268: „Alle Simler har sine Navne, 1 Utsjok almmdelig efter Fugle og andre Dyr, som de ligner med Hensyn til Farve, Kvikhed m. m., saasom Koalse (Mergus), Lahul (Eudromias morinellus, Njalla (Vulpes lagopus), Njoammel (Lepus timidus). De hvide benævnes almindelig efter de 2 sidste. Renokser kaldes ofte efter sine Mødre, saasom Lahul hærgge (Lahuls Renokse); men i nedre Lapmarken har de andre Navne, ofte efter Eieren m. m.* 368 J. QVIGSTAD. B. Hundenavne. bajan (Kt. en Hund, som altid gjor. . bavges (Kar), (Ib. bavgge-dæbet, en Hund, som er hvid om Halsen. benne (Kt.), (Kr. Nb. bennu, en liden Hund. biddos, Tispe, som er hvid paa en eller flere Fodder ira Knæet nedover. darra (Kt.), en kort, liden Hund. dielkko (Nb. Kr.), (Kt. Kv. Kar.) dilkko, sort Hund med hvide Flekker. tigga, (Kt.), en Hund med smaa Flekker. diggal (Nb. Kr), en Hund med en liden gul Flek over hvert Øie, (Frus) en Hund med brune Øienbryn. duérsse (Kt), en Tyksak. . faS8ko, en kjælen Hund, der pleier at logre med Halen. . flinko (Kv), Hundenavn. . gaires, en Hund med hvid Snude og hvide Fodder. . girjes, en flekket Hund (hvid- og sortflekket). girjo (Kv.), en flekket Hund. gugat (Kt.), en lang Hund. guééa (Sdv.), Hundenavn. guvge, en Hund, som er guovggad (blakket, lysebrun). habba (Kt.), (Kar.) habo, en liden mager Hund. haippa (Kt.), en stor taabelig Hund. . jevja, en hvid Hund. . jerbbe (Kt), (Kar.) jerbbo, en Hund, der er født uden Hale. I Kt. fodes mange saadanne Hunde, der kun har en liden Antydning til Hale; det skal være en egen Art. . jælpper, en Hund, der er til Hjælp. 23. lino, Hundenavn. lummbo (Kt.), en Hund med nedhængende Øren. . lurffo l. lurvve, en Hund med tykke Haar. . lejjo (Kar), en Hund, der allerede som Hvalp er kvik og modig. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 369 97. musste, en sort Hund. 28. nasste, [Stjerne], Hundenavn. 29. njalla, [Hvidræv], Hundenavn. 30. njirbbe (Kt.), en meget tyndhaaret Hund. 31. ranne, en graa Hund. 32. ra$8ko (Kt), en tyndhaaret Hund. 33. rinngo (Kar. en Hund med krum Hale. 34. runne, Hundenavn. . 99. ruövsot (Kt.), en rod Hund. 96. siegges, en Tispe med hvide Haar bag paa Fodderne. ' 37. skoalddo, en Hund med stor, krum Snude. 38. skuölife, en hvid Hund med nedhængende Øren. 39. spartte (Kr), Hundenavn. 40. Saikke, en Hund, som altid gjør uden Grund. 41. Suvon | S. Sovonja I. Suovonja, (Lul.) Suóvun, (Gelli- vare) éuóvun, (Ht.) Sevunje, dresseret Renhund, (S. ogs.) Hyrdehund. 49. cigga, en sort lidenvoren Tispe. 43. cigan, Tispenavn. 44. cırkko (Kv.), Hundenavn. 45. cobbe, en kort liden Hund. 46. Gainne (Kt. Kar., en Hund med spids Snude. 47. &almo, en Hund med rode Flekker over Øinene. 48. éappe, en sort Hund. 49. @ebu, en Hund, der er hvid om Halsen. 50. Gierges, en Hund, som har hvid Krave om Halsen. 51. éopparas (Nb.), en Hund med en hvid Ring i Nakken. 59. Cuöres, en rod Hund med lidt brune Haar iblandt. 53. éurre (Hm.), en graa Hund. 54. Cævan (Lul.), en liden Hund. 55. virkko, en kvik Hund. 56. vuóvdda, en graadig Hund. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXIT, IV. 94 370 NM bo D BB bo RER å RP må å > RP Re eS QUE DNF © cO Qo -10» QUE WSF © [NS] I NO © du = © D -1 D I E» WIN HH J. QVIGSTAD. C. Konavne. . aprila, Ko født i April. . berju (Nb. Kt. Kr.), (Kv.) bærja, Ko født paa en Fredag. bona, en rød Ko. buna-gorvva, en Ko med røde Øren. . davleg I. davllo, en Ko, der er flekket paa begge Sider. . duorek I. duoret, Ko født paa en Torsdag. dædet, en Ko med store Flekker. . girjo, en flekket Ko. . goalla, en kollet Ko. . goalsse (Maasø), en Ko graa som en goalsse (Fiskeand). . gommaras (Nb.), en Ko med foroverbøiede Horn. . gulda-gavla (Kt.), en Ko med rød Hals. . helbmo, [Perle], en Ko, der er hvid om Halsen. . 1dda-rusa, (Kt.), en sort Ko. . jelle, kollet Ko. . lavga, Konavn. . lavgger, Ko fodt paa en Lordag. . lette-gorvva (Kt. hvid Ko med rode Øren. . letik, Konavn. . lieppa, en Ko hvis Horn kun er fæstede i Huden. . linat (Kt.), en Ko med hvidt Hoved. . linu, en hvid Ko. . lumet (Kt.), en snehvid Ko. . mai-rusa (Kt. Ko født i Mai. . manne, Ko fodt paa en Mandag. 26. . mussta, en sort Ko. 28. .nassta l. nastat, en hvid Ko med sort Flek i Panden muórja, Ko med meget smaa Flekker. mussta-gorvva (Kt), en Ko med sorte Øren. eller omvendt. . njoammel, [Hare], en ganske hvid Ko. 91. . riekko, en flekket Ko. njæmma, Konavn. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 371 . rus8ke, en brun Ko. 34. 35. . vilggon, en hvid Ko. rusa (Kt.), en hvid Ko med meget smaa røde Flekker: sunnek, Konavn. | B. Lappiske Navne paa Krybdyr og Padder. . deéalagges l. deZalagges L stæ33alagges, pl. -lag- gak, (Ib. stazzalaggo, (OE) ste3Zolaggis | S. tydéol, (Lul.) tæ3Zula(ka), (Fld.) de33ola, (Arj) diz£ol, (Sors.) diééol | R. (Frns) tanslensk |. teinslink, (Pasv.) daezzeli Lacerta vivipara. gukkes guóle (Trond.), [Langfisk], Serpens; s. 3. 4. 7. guóvdde | S. (Jmt) kuutie, (Trond.) guevde | E. kuovdde | R. (Kildin, Akkala) kuvt, Serpens, (Finmarken) Seorm; kacklas kuvt (Akkala), [bidende Slange], Vipera Berus, L.; s. 11. germas, pl. gerbmaSak | S. kærbma I. kærbmas I. kermesk, (Lul.) kærmai, pl. kermahah, (Ts.) germai, (Arj.) gerbma, pl. gerbmaha, (Sors.) giermas, (Ht. giermuSe, Serpens. lisme-kuele (S.), [Dyndfisk], Rana temporaria, L.; s. 6. 9. 10. 12. 13. malani (Pasv.), = 5. mixxe (R.: Ter.), Serpens. mera-germas, Søorm; s. 3. njecée-denéée (Helgø), = 5. runta-kuölas (Lul) [liden Vandpyt-fisk], = 5. . sudem-kærbma (S) [Giftslange], (Arj) sude-kulle, [Giftfisk], Vipera Berus, L. Slubbo-oaivat, pl. -oaivagat (Kv.), [Klubbehoved], — 5 (som Unge), norsk: Rovetroll. cuobbo, pl. cubbuk | S. euobbo, (Lul.) cuébbu, (Fld.) @uöbbui, (Arj) cuóbbo, (Sors.) eubbo, (Ht) cobbo | R. 312 16. 17. J. QVIGSTAD. (Ter) ciembai, g. cimpi, (Kildin cuemp, g. cumpu, (Notozero) cuab, g. cueppu, (Pasv.) cuöbba, demin. cuöbbagaz, = 5, €. Lappiske Navne paa Fiske. . akabiddo, [Kjærringbukse], (alm.) Cottus scorpius, FABR., (Varanger) Cyclopterus lumpus, L.; s. 4. 6. 89. 90. . akali (R.: Pasv.), Scymnus microcephalus, (SCHNEID.); s. 3. 5. 28. 116. 118. akas, pl. akaéak (Tromsø), [liden Kjærring], = 2. akacinco, Cottus scorpius, FABR., (Leem, Hf. Ks.) Cyclop- terus lumpus, L. akkolagges l. akkalagges, pl. -laggak, = 2. akobiddo (Varanger), [Gammelkjærringbukse], Cottus scorpius, FABR. | akSonadda, [Økseskalt], Hunlaks, som har lagt Rogn. alli (R.: Pasv.), Seimort; s. 38. 40. 59. 71. 137. allpesk I. albas (S), Coregonus lavaretus, L.; s. 50. 68. 69. 70. 91. 110. 126. 197. 136. . baldes, pl. balddak | S. (Hm.) =, Hippoglossus vul- garis, FLem.; s. 11. 23. 27. 45. 67. 81. 82. 83. 96. . bipo-oaivve, [Pibehoved], = 10 (overmaade stor, mindst paa 180 Kg.). . biSarke (Varanger) Ammodytes tobianus, L.; s. 73. 112. 124 a. . bodnek |. bodnet 1. bonnet, [Bundfisk], Pleuronectes; s. 19. 25. 30. 31. 33. 34. 35. 56. 44. 78. 98. 99. 103. 109. brugda, Selache maxima, (L.); s. 129. dabmok | S. tabmok, (Lul.) tapmuk, (Arj.) debmuk, (Ht. dobmug, Salmo eriox, L.; s. 46. 48. 143. dalvek, [Vinterfisk], Laks, som staar Vinteren over i Elven; s. 17. 144. dalvve-@uogok, [Vinterstöing], = 16. ETT 18. 19. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 913 didde, liden Elvelaks | R. (Pasv.) didd, „Titlinglaks“. Ordet er vel — russisk tinda, Laks paa 5 Pund og derunder. | diggel-bodnet (Lg), [Flek-bundfisk], Pleuronectes pla- vessa, le? s. 19. 35. 30. 109; . dikso 1. difso, pl. divsok | R. (Ter.) tiksa, (Notozero) teys, (Pasv.) deks, Gadus æglefinus, L.; s. 58. 85. . dorske | E. torska | R. (Ter.) torske, (Pasv.) doraskj, Gadus morrhua, L.; s. 39. 43. 57. 88. . duóvve, pl duóvek, Rognlaks. . faccabælle, [Vante], = 10 (liden), norsk: Kveitelap. . fikan, en Søfisk af Størrelse som Smaasild og lig Silden; men den har større Hoved og lever i dybt Vand. . findar, (Kr. Ks. Sdv. Vst.) flindar, (Of) lendar | R. (Pasv.) lendar, = 18. . fital, Gadus merlangus, L. . gadda, — 10 (middelsstor). . gazz-akali (R.: Pasv.), [Klo-haakjærring] en mindre Art Haakjærring; s. 2. . kaito (S), Esox lusius, L.; s. 39. 55. 79. 131. . gaicca-bodnet, [Gjede-bundfisk], en Art Flyndre; s. 13. . gaicca-guormat (Kv.), [Gjedeskrubbe], Plewronectes mi- croc phalus, Donov.; s. 44. . gakran, = 91 (liden), norsk: Modd. . kambel, pl. kambalak (Sdv.) | R. (Ter) kambel, g ee kampali, = 13. . garra-bæsk (R.: Pasv.), [Haardpels], Plewronectes flesus, L.; s. 44. . girje-bonnet (Kv.), [Flek-bundfisk], = 19. . girje-kambel (Sdv.), [Flekflyndre], = 19. . goagjem, voksen Hanlaks | S. (Lul.) keddjem, Hanlaks. . koja (Ks.), Seimort 1 1ste Aar; s. 40. . goles, pl. gollasak (LEE) | S. kolla, = 29 (meget stor). . golnet (Lg. = 38. 314 41. 49. 43. 44. 45. 46. 47. 48. 49. 50. 51. 59. 53. 54. 55. 56. BT. 58. 59. 60. 61. 62. 63. J. QVIGSTAD. koms, pl. komsak (Leem), en Laks, der er sort paa Skindet. gugjor (Kr), Salmo trutta, L. (Søørret, der er bleven stationer 1 Elven); s. 47. guólle-gonagas, [Fiskekonge], — 21 (med misdannet Hoved), norsk: Torskekonge. guormak I. guormat, [som har grovt Skind], = 34; (Kr.) Perca flwviatilis, L.; s. 111. guovdda-éalaSak, pl. (Fris), = 10 (mindre). guovéur (E.), = 15. guvééa, (Lg. Bls.) guvéée | R. (Ter) kuvée, Salmo trutta, L.; s. 49. guvéur (Sdv., — 15? gedge-noarsse I. -noarssa, [Sten-noarsse], Phoxinus aphya, (L.). : keéuk (Lul.), = 9 (middelsstor). hakka, pl. hagak | S. (Hm. Ts.) —, Sebastes norvegicus, (Ascan.); s. 54. 142. ham mir (Kv.), (Lg.) hoabmir, Lamna cornubica, (GMEL.). harre | S. =, Thymallus vulgaris, Nizss.; s. 117. | havgga, (Leem) hav, pl. havak, = 51. havgga | S. hauk, (Lul) hau*ka, = 99. hoakka, pl. hoakak, Acanthias vulgaris, Rısso. jadda (Senjen), (Vst.) jadde | S. (Hm. Ts) jadde = 21 (liden), norsk: Gjedd. jukso I. jufso, pl. juvsok, = 20. lagga (Nb.), Smaasei; s. 100. laggo | S. (Hm. Ts.) =, Molva vulgaris, FrEw.; 79. loakka, pl. loakak (Tromsø), Brosmius brosme, (Ascaw.); s. 74. loddol. loaddo, Mallotus villosus, (Mórr.); s. 77. 107. 125. luossa, pl. luosak | S. luosa, (Lul. Arj.) luóssa | E. luos | R. (Kildin) luss, (Notozero) luoss, (Pasv.) luóss, Salmo salar, L.; s. 7. 16. 17. 18. 99. 37. 41. 64. 65. 87. icm d NN NM 64. 65. . 66. 67. 68. 69. 10. ale TE 73. 14. 15. 16. Hin. 78. High 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 375 152. 135. 159. I Karasjok kaldes Laksen efter sin Stør- relse 1) didde, 9) luossa-juölgge, 3) luossa-giera, 4) jotto-luosa, [Vandrelaks], 5) luossa (fuldvoksen Laks), hvoraf goagjem er Han, duövve Hun. = luossa-giera, pl -gierragak (Kr), [Lakse-top], = 63 (mindre). luossa-juölgge, [Laksefod], = 63 (mindre). luossa-nering (Frus), Lampris guitatus, (BRUNN.) læppadak, = 10 (dog ikke af de største). majhk (R.: Kildin), = 9 (større). maiv (R.: Pasv.), = 9 (Unge). moanji (R.: Pasv.), = 9; moanjigaz, — 9 (liden). murtto l. mortto, Seimort 1 3dje Aar; (Nb. ogs.) Torsk- og Hyse-mort. | navaig (R.: Ter.), Gadus nawaga. navllo, pl. navlok, = 12. njakka, pl. njagak | S. njaka | E. njåhe | R. (Pasv.) javre-njatj, Lota vulgaris, Jen. I Finmarken er njakka ogsaa = 61, der i Pasvik kaldes m*æra-njatj [Sø-njatj] til Forskjel fra javre-njatj [Indsø-njatj]; s. 140. njoavdnja, Salmo alpinus, L. (meget ung). njunne-sildde, [Nebsild], Belone vulgaris, FLEm.; s. 133. njuorjo-SakSa (Lern), [Kobbelodde], = 62 (fordi Kob- ben gjerne æder den). njuvvak (Frus), Pleuronectes limanda, L. nuikkes (R.: Kildin), (Notozero) nu‘hkes, (Pasv.) nutjes, = 29; i Pasv. er m°æra-nutjes, [So-nutjes], = 60. næzzeni-guöll (R.: Pasv.), [Kvindefisk], Anarrhichas, L. (Hun). oaivvadak, — 10 (stor). oaivve-Cargas, pl. -éargaéak, = 10 (mindre). radke-guölle, [Rav-fisk], = 10 (noget storre end 27). ravddo, pl. ravdok | S. raudo, (Lul.) rau°tu, (Hm.) rav*do | E. ravdu | R. (Ter) ravta, (Pasv.) ravd, 316 85. 36. 31. 88. 89. 90. 91. 92. 93. 94. 95. 96. omg J. QVIGSTAD. Salmo alpinus, L., (Hm. Pasv.) om Hunnen; s. 75. 114. 134. 138. ribsik (S.: Hm.), = 20. riepas (R.: Kildin), enslags Coregonus; s. 97. rips kiille (R.: Ter), [Redfisk], = 63 (Sølaks). rudnok I. rudnog | R. (Pasv.) runnag, = 21 (liden). rundiermes, pl. -diermak (Fnus, Sdv.), (Nb.) -dærmes, pl. -dermak, 1) Cyclopterus lumpus, L. (Fris, Sdv.), 2) Collus scorpius, Farr. (Nb.); s. 1. runéufso, pl. -éuvsok (Hf), (Tn.) runéeksa, pl. -Cæv- sak, Cyclopterus lumpus, L. ruotak (S) = 9; (Lul.) ruótak, Coregonus albula, L. (middelsstor); s. 95. ruövdde-gulmek, [Jern-gulmek], Gasterosteus aculeatus, Li; s. 93. 94. 128: ruövdde-laiggo (Skjervø) = 92. ruévdde-éilla, pl. -éilat (Lg), = 92. ræsska, pl reskak (Nb. Utsj.), Coregonus albula, L. (Meta); s. 91. 128. reSek, = 10 (meget liden); (Lnv.) Plewronectes | S. (Hm.) reSek, Pleuronectes; s. 13. revas, en Indsøfisk med større Hoved og større Øine end Siken (Frus), = 86? 98a. revéak (Sdv.), [Utleirfisk], = 13. 98 b. saddog (S.: Hm.), [Sandfisk], — 18. 99. 100. 101. 102. 108. saddo-lindar (Ib.), [Sandflyndre], — 54. saidde | S. saide, (Lul) sai*te, (Hm. Ts.) sai*de | R. (Ter.) saite, (Pasv.) said, Gadus virens, L.; s. 8. saivva-guölle, (Nb.) savja-guölle, Ferskvandsfisk, især Laks og Søørret. salled | S. (Lul.) sallet, (Hm. Ts.) sallid, Clupea haren- gus, L,; s. 106. 108. sandok (Hf. Ks), = 13. Der skjelnes mellem gedge-s., [Stenflyndre, Flyndre der lever paa Stenbund] saddo-s., ee SI IP PP 104. 105. 106. 107. 108. 2109. 110. TE 112. 113. 114. 115. 116. i 118. 119. 120. IL 122. 123. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. oui. [Sandflyndre, Flyndre der lever paa Sandbund], jokka-s., [Elveflyndre, Flyndre der lever i Elvemundinger], starra-s., [Tareflyndre, Flyndre der lever mellem Tare], ruksis-s., [rød Flyndre], = 19. sappe g (S.), Leuciscus rutilus, (L.); s. 122. savja-findar (Nb., [Ferskvandsflyndre], Flyndre, som holder sig i Elvemundingerne. sieltte (R. efter Fris), = 102. sieppa (Lg), = 62; jekka-sieppa, [Elvelodde], norsk: Vaslodde; ape-sieppa, Havlodde. sildde | S. sillda | E. sildde | R. (Ter. silte, = 102. sinekj (R.: Notozero), = 13. sirkke, pl. sirkek, — 9 (Unge). sittek (S.), Perca flwviatilis, L.; s. 44. 115. 142. sivllo, (Kr. Tn.) s1vlla, (Kv. Lg.) sila, = 12. skatto, pl. skatok | S. (Hm.) = | R. (Pasv) skat, Raja, L. skiddo, — 84 (Han) | S. skito, — 84, (Gellivare) hvid- agtig do., (Hm.) skido, = 84 (Han). skodek (S), = 111 (liden). snuölgga-junne (Helgø), [Snotnæse], = 2. soavvel (Tn. Polmak) | R. (Ter.) sivel, g. sievvali, (Kil- din) suevvel, (Notozero) soivvel, (Pasv.) soavvel, = 53. spælg, pl. spielgak (KL) = 2: staggos, [liden Stang], Centronotus gunnellus, (L.); s. 194 b. stainir l. stainar, pl. staidnarak | R. (Pasv.) stainar, Anarrhichas, L. Anarrhichas pantherinus, Zourgw kal- des i Kv. bovlle-stainir, i Tn. girjag-stainir, [Flek- stenbit]. stevel, [Stovle], = 2 (af 4—5 Fods Længde). sergge | S. serg, = 104. sævnjat, pl. sevnjahat (Kt.) | S. (Jokkmokk) siunna, pl. siunnakah, (Fld.) sievna, pl. sievnaga | R. (Kildin) sivn, g. sivneg, Leuciscus idus, (L.). 378 J. QVIGSTAD. 194a. saggas |. SaggaS (Sdv. | R. (Pasv.) Sagas, = 12; (Notozero) sages = 12? 194b. Sago8, (Nb. SagguS | R. (Pasv.) sagga3, = 119. 195. SakSa 1. Saisa, pl. SavSak, 1) = 62 (Varanger); ordde- SakSa, Hanlodde (af ordde, Kant); mæddem-8ak8a, Rognlodde; ruövdde-SakSa (Lerm), [Jernlodde], Lodde, der har Jernfarve. 2) = 12 (Kr. Hf. Lg.). 126. 3all (R.: Ter), = 9 (større). 127. Sappa, pl. Saba (R.: Ter.), (Kildin) Sapp, = 9 (mindre). 128. silla, pl. Silat (Lg. Helgø) = 92? | S. Silah, pl., Smaa- fisk; (Lul.) Silla, = 95 (liden). 129. Suorja, = 14. 130. coakan (Tn.), Trigla gurnardus, L.? 131. farva (Bh: Ter), = 29. 132. éoarran (Fnus) Laks, som har gydet og er gaaet til Søen, men straks er vendt tilbage igjen; (Kr.) Soarran, Laks med solvblankt Skind, uden Melke eller Rogn, aldeles mager og uspiselig. 133. éoarvve-sildde, [Hornsild], = 76. 194. @oavéak (Kr), = 84 (Gjeldrøe uden Melke eller Rogn). 135. GuonéGéa (Kr. = 63 (Gjeldlaks uden Melke eller Rogn). 136. Guovééa, pl. Guovéak.| S. éuouée, (Lul. Arj.) éuóuca, = 9, (Lul.) (meget stor). I Kt. kaldes Sik efter sin Stør- relse: 1) gila-sirkki (se 110), 2) gasskan-sirkki, [mid- dels-sirk kil, 3) luóbbot-laikko, [middelsstor Flekkefisk ]. 4) stuora-laıkko, [stor Middelsfisk], 5) Coavjebælle, [Bugside], 6) stuora-Cuov&£a, [stor Sik]. 197. @usska, Seimort i 2det Aar; s. 8 | S. Cussk, Smaafisk; (Lul. Fld. &usska, = 9 (mindre end 136). 138. valas, pl. vallasak (Kr. Varanger), blank Ørret (rod under Bugen) | R. (Pasv.) völas, = 84 (Han). 139. vailéer (R.: Ter.) = 63 (Ferskvandslaks). 140. visne (R.: Ter.), (Kildin) vu!Sn, (Notozero) vueSn, Lota vulgaris, JEN.; s. 74. 141. 142. 145. bo ee 10. ll, LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 379 vuorro, pl. vuorrok L vuorok (Kr.), = 16. vuosko, pl. vusskunak (alm) l vusskumak | S. vuoskon, (Lul.) vuöskun 1. vuöskui, pl. vuösskunah | E. pusko | R. (Ter) viezvan, g. visvine, (Kildin) vuesk, g. vueskan, (Notozero vuask, g. vuaskan, (Pasv.) vueska (dem. vueskanaz), = 111, (Nb) = 51. I Finmarken er mærra-vuosko, [So-aborre], = 51, diff. savja-vuosko, [Ferskvandsaborre], — 111. væjek | S. vejek, en liden Fiskeunge, (Nb.) = 15 (Unge), (S.) især om Laksyngel; (Nizss.) kadde-vejek, Beekforell. D. Lappiske Navne paa Leddyr. arkko, pl. arkok (Nb.), etslags stikkende Insekt. acatj (Pasv., Edderkop; s. 42. acci$-ædne I. hacci8-edne I. a&i£&-ædne, (Tn.) hatte- cen, (Nb.) haceéan | S. aciée, (Lul.) hacek, (Arj.) aéié- hætne, Carabus, Bille; (Sdv. Kr. Thanatophilus lap- ponicus, (Kt) Thanathophilus thoracicus, L.; s. 69. I Lule-Lapmark er efter L. L. Læsrapius aéié-edne Navn paa „den stora dagsländan“. acen-gaicca (Lg. Krl. KL), [Risegjed], Carabus. aéen-guss (KL), |Riseko], Carabus. balgatægje (Nb.), [som bringer til at skjene], — 7. batta-bosska |. -boskan | S. patta-poske I. pattok, (Arj.) bidok, (Jmt.) spæhta I. spahta, (Trond.) Spætta, [en der stikker med Bagdelen], Oestrus tarandi; s. ZETTERST. p. 622. S. 6. 15. 36. 37. bismar-batta (Tn.) [Bismer-bagdel], Æschna juncea, Øienstikker; s. 18. 19. 20. 91. 22. 97. 74. 87. 89. 113. boalddahas (Tn.), [som brænder], etslags Insekt; opgives at være = finsk polttiainen (Knott). poarmas (R.: Ter.), Larva oestri tarandi?; s. 36. boaro, pl. borruk, (Kv. Lg.) boarro, pl. boarok | S. 380 J. QVIGSTAD. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17% 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24, 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. porev 1. porrev | R. (Ter) poara, (Kildin) poara, g. purru, (Notozero) poar, g. poarro, (Pasv.) boara, demin. boarragaz, Oestrus, i Finmarken især Oestrus trompe; (Lg. Kv.) Tabanus. boaéi (Pasv.), [som skyder], Renbremse. bogge, etslags Seiaate (en Krebsart?). boronj (Arj), [som æder], Oestrus trompe; s. 11. 24. 43. 67. 83. 91. bot-bolkan (Lern), etslags Insekt, vel = 7. bureke (Trond.), Renbremse, Klegg, Spyflue. bæivve-lodde | S. (Hm) bæivaë-lodde | R. (Pasv.) bæive-lodd, [Solfugl, Dagsommerfugl; s. 28. 44. belije-boskan (Helgo), [Ørestikker], = 8. bællje-navlag (Frus), (Of) -navlahak, [Ørestikker], = 8. bællje-roggan, |[Øregraver], = 8; (Lee, Kr. Kv.) Tipula, Høyhest; s. 22. bællje-skuran (Kt. Vst), = 8. bællje-skurban | S. (Ht.) biellje-skurbadakke, [Øre- kradser], = 8; (Kv. Kt.) Tipula, Hoyhest. dikke | S. tikke | E. tikke | R. (Ter) tike, (Kildin, Notozero) teke, (Pasv.) dikj, Pediculus; s. 41. 101. trumpi (S), = 14. dzeé&alma (Ht), Hæmatopota pluvialis; s. 49. 110. gaskat, pl. gaskahat (Kt), [Bider], Musca domestica. gaéas, (Kr. ogs.) skaéas | S. (Lul) ka@uk, = 8. giesie-laddie (Ht.), Sommerfugl; s. 17. gifsa l. giksa, pl. givsak | E. kifse, et sort Insekt, der odelegger Skindklæder (Larva thanatophili lapponici? I. Thanatophilus lapponicus ?), (Of.) Staphylinus maæxillosus. koabjo (E.) | R. (Kildin) kueiy, Mol. gobba-laféo I. -lakéo, pl. -lavéok, Dytiscus. gollebat-éurruk (Utsj. efter Anperın, p. 192), [Guldbag- flue]; (Kt.) golle-batta, [Guldbag], Musca sarcophaga, Spyflue; s. 95. 107. 33. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 381 gotka 1. gedka I. gorkka | S. kotka 1. kotakes, (Lul.) korko, (Arj.) gotko, (Ht.) garke | R. (Ter.) kotk, (Pasv.) gotk, Formica. 34a. guöledikke, [Fiskelus], Caligus; s. 102. 34b. guóle-éoakkal (Hf), Gjelleorm (en Snyltekrebs i Fiskens 35. 36. 37. 38. 39. 40. 41. 49. 49. 44. 45. 46. Gjeller). guosta-hævdne, [Tøveir-Edderkop], et Insekt af Størrelse som en Husflue, der i Slutningen af Vinteren kan findes 1 Mængde paa kram Sne og er et Tegn paa Tøveir (Opilio?). gurbma, pl gurmak | S. kurbma 1. kormes, (Lul.) kur?ma, (Arj.) gurbma, (Ht) gorma, Larva oestri tarandi (ZETTERST. p. 622); s. 10. gurbma-lodde (Kt. [Gormfugl], = 7. gærp (Pasv.), Musca. hidas, pl. hittaéak, (Kt.) hittat, pl. hittahat, Cerato- pogon pulicaris; s. 56. 60. 61. 84. hins l. hens (Sors.), etslags Insekt, norsk: Skorva. horse (S.), Pediculus, proprie quibus ægrotantes afficiun- tur; s. 93. hævdne I. hevnne, pl. hevnek | S. heune, (Lul. Hm.) heu?ne, (Arj. hevdni, (Sors.) fievni, (Ht. hevnie | E. ævnne | R. (Ter) jeavnai, g. jievni, (Kildin) eavnané, (Notozero) eavnis, (Pasv. svn, demin. ævnaz, Ara- neus; s. 2. jorbba, pl jorbat (Lg), (Kr) jerbba boaro, [rund Bremse], — 14. labiok (S.), Sommerfugl; peive-lablok, (Sors.) bieivie- lublok, (Ht) biejje-lable, [Sol-sommerfugl], enslags Sommerfugl; s. 17. lafes |. laffes, pl. laffak | S. lafa, (Lul.) lafes, pl. laffah, (Arj.) lafis, Pulex irritans; s. 46. 47. 99. lappes, pl. lappak, 1. lappo, pl. lappok | S. (Sors.) loppó, (Ht.) lappo, (Trond.) lappe | R. (Pasv.) lap, demin. lappas, = 45. 382 J. QVIGSTAD. . lavkes, pl. lavkkak, — 45. . lavééa, pl. lavéak, (Sdv. ogs.) lavééo, (Kv. Tn. ogs.) lavéis, (Kl. Bls. Lnv. Ib. Of) slavééa | S. klaéée 1 slaéée I. slauéa |. lauéa, (Lul) slau?éa, (Ht.) glaéée), (Trond.) klaéée, Tabanus, Oestrus, Klegg. . lidda (Fris), (Kv.) liddan, (Kl. Lnv. Ib. Of.) liddam, = 25. . lokk (S.), Græshoppe; s. 70. . luttak 1. luttek, (Tn.) luttekas, (Nb.) luttehas, (Kar., Tromsø) ludas, pl. luttahat, (Ib) ludag | S. lude, Cimex, Væggelus. | main-kieitte I. main-koadai (R.: Ter.), en Insektpuppe, som findes 1 Birkens Grene, og som holdes i Munden mod Tandpine. makka, g. maga (Gullesfjord), en liden Myg. mie dis-adne (LEEm) [Mjed-moder] | R. (Notozero) miedas, (Pasv.) miedazaz, Bombus; s. 109. . moatta, pl. moatak (Tromsø, Senjen), Mel (større end 59). . mueiva (S.), (Gellivare) moivo, = 39 (ZETTERST. p. 821). . muöger, pl. muökkerak | S. muoker I. muokker, (Lul.) muöker | R. (Notozero) mækjer, (Pasv.) muevver, Simulia reptans (ZETTERSL. p. 802); s. 69. . muösk (Pasv.), Knott. . muoco, pl. muccuk, I. muocco, pl. muocok, (Ib. Of) muöcce | S. muece, (Lul.) muóce, Mol, (Lul. hvidt Mol 1 Boger o. lıgn.; s. 55. . namek (S.), = 39. ma ble (KR.:: Mer), = 392 . njavalak (S.), Mol. . njaves-ædne (Kt), Thanatophilus lapponicus, FABR.; S. 3. njivnja, pl. njivdnjagak, (Kv.) njievnja, (Kr.) njivd- nje, pl. njivnjek | S. (Arj.) Snjimnja, Psocus. . njunne-boaro (Utsj. efter AxpELIN, p. 192), [Næsebremse], Oestrus. 66. 67. 68. 69. 10. 11. 12. 13. 74. 75. 76. 11: 18. 19 80. 81. 82. 83. 84. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 383 njunne-@uoikka (Kt. Kar, Helgø), [Snabelmyg], (KL) njunodak, Culex; s. 105. nurpa (Jmt.), (Trond.) Snurbe, = 14 (ZETTERST. p. 622). nóika l. naika (Trond.), en liden Myg. orbmes I. urbmes (S), = 57. rasse-lokko, pl. -lokkok | S. grase-lokk 1. rase- kappan l. -kappanis, Pezotettix, Græshoppe; s. 50. rivte-poara (R.: Ter), (Kildin) ruivt-poara, [Jern- bremse], Oestrus; s. 11. roude-goaSkos, pl. -go$Skusak (Ib.), en Bille større end 77, — 74? route-konk (S.), Scarabæus, Tordivel. ruövdde-garanas | S. (Ts.) ruöude-garranes [Jern- ravn], Carabus, ogs. Carabus glabratus; (Lg.) = 8. ruóvdde-gaéas (Kr. Le.), etslags Insekt; s. 27. ruóvdde-gobba, (Kr. -gobbas, (Varanger) -gubbas, Carabus; (Lg.) Chrysomela. ruóvdde-gomp (KL), (Env. Ib. Of.) rqude-gompa | S. (Lul.) ruóut(e)-kompo, (Hm.) roude-gomba, Carabus, (Hm.) Skarptrold. ræbba 1. gazza-ræbba, [Klokrabbe], Hyas araneus; s. 97 b. sadeu (akk. seddemau) (Arj., Larva oestri trompe; s. 80. 82. 90, sadkem (S.), (v. Düsen, Lappland, p. 49) sarkem, (Trond.) sargelma, = 79 (ZETTERST. p. 622). sakke, pl. sakkek l. sagek, (Kv.) sakkit, pl. sakki- hat | S. sakke, et hdet Insekt med stort Hoved, der op- holder sig 1 Vand, norsk: Vasskolp, Vasskvalp. savla, pl. savllagak | S. (Lul.) saula, pl. sau*lakah, = 79 (ZETTERST. p. 622). savla-lodde, [savla-Fugl], (Kar) savla-batta, = 14. sicca, pl. sicak, (Kt. Sdv.) cieca, (Kr.) cicok, (Ks.) cico, pl. ciconak, (Sdv. ogs.) cisag | S. (Lul.) sica, pl. 384 96. J. QVIGSTAD. _sicakah, bittesmaa Myg, der i stille Veir svæver 1 Sværme over Vandet, og som ikke bider. Efter v. Düsen, Lapp- land, p. 85 er sicca i Lule Lapmark = 59. . Skoarppa (Kl) et sort mangefodet Insekt, norsk: Bal- skroppa. . Skoattag (Of), Tabanus bovis. . skodde-cice (S.: Lul), [Snauskind-spurv], = 8. . skrotta, pl. skrottak (Hf), (Of) skroatto, Omiscus, norsk: Skrotte. . Skurban, = 22; (Kv. Kt.) Tipula. . snavlle, pl. snavlek (Frus), (Nb.) snavla, pl. snavlla- Sale, = 79 . snompat (S.), = 14. . Sonsar I. soamsur (E. = 45. . suin-njuékei (R.: Kildin) [Græshoppe], = 70. suoksa, pl. suovsak | S. suoksa, (Lul.) suökksa | R. (Ter.) siks, (Kildin) suks, (Notozero) sueys, (Pasv.) suöys, Larva sarcophage. . suoksa-éuruk, [Maddikflue], (Nb.) suoksa-batta-éur- ruk, (Gullesfjord) suóksa-éuóikka | R. (Pasv.) suöks- bat-@ueras, = 32. sæidne-ravdde, [Vægsmed], Anobium, et Skaldyr. 97a. Sırra l. hirra, Gammarus locustus. 97b. cuobbo, pl. cubbuk (Lern) | R. (Pasv.) juelgj-[Fod-] 98. 99: 100. 101. cuóbba, — 78. éakkalagges, pl. éakkalaggak (Lern), et lidet Dyr, som efter Lappernes Udsagn har sit Tilhold i dybe Vand- kilder og fanges ved Smør, som paa et Fad sættes ved Bredden. | éam-bokkal, (Leem) Sambukel, (Sdv.) Sam-boggal, (HE) éalme-bogge, Thysanopoda inermis. Cacce-@uoikka (Lern), [Vasmyg], Tipula. éivros, pl Givrrusak, (Nb) Givru, pl. éivrruk | S. éuros, (Lul) Giurus | R. (Ter) éuivres 1. éuirves LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 335 (Kildin) éivres, (Notozero) éevres, (Pasv.) éevres, Ovum pediculi; s. 23. 102. Goakkan, = 34a. 103a. &orve-navva (Lul) [Horn-haar], en Art Myg (meget liden). 108 b. @oarve-vevses (Pasv.), [Hornhveps], Sirex? 104. éuoika-ædne|S. (Lul.) éueikan-eddne, [Mygmoder], Tipula, Hoyhest. 105. @uoikka, pl. Guoikak | S. éuoik, éoik, (Lul.) éuöi*ka, (Ar.) Coaika, (Jmt) éuoika | R. (Ter.) éiSk, (Kildin) éuSk, (Pasv. éuóSk, Culex, (Helgo. Ib. Of, Gullesfjord ogs.) Musca; (Jmt.) kittien éuoika [Eng-Cuoika] Oestrus; kota-&, [Hus-éuoika], Musca. 106. @uruk I. éurruk, (Tn.) Guro, pl. éurrukak | S. @urok, (Lul. Hm. Ts.) éiruk | R. (Ter.) @iires, g. éierrazi, (Kil- din) Gueras, (Notozero) Cuaras, (Pasv.) Gueras, Musca. 107. &uro-@uoik (Kl, Helge), = 32. Å 108. ussa I. ussek I. ossok (S.), (Ht) husseg, Fællesnavn paa alleslags Insekter og Orme 1 Vand. 109. uvllo, (Tn.) huvllo, (Kv.) ulv va, (Senjen, Of.) ublo |S. oblo, oblo, (Lul.) hub°lu, (Arj.) hublo, (Sors.) ublo, (Ht.) oblu, (Trond.) obla, = 54. 110. valppo (Lg.): éalmehes [blind] valppo, = 25. 111. vannca-divrre (Kt.), [Baad-insekt], etslags Insekt, som løber paa Vandet. 112. vievses, pl. vieksak |S. vepses, vepsa, (Lul.) vepses, (Sors. Arj) viepsis, (Ht. Trond.) væpsa | HR. (Ter. veazvas, (Notozero) vefsaz, (Pasv.) vævses, Vespa. 113. vuöpta-bagan (S.: Hm), = 8. Nyt Mag. f. Naturv. XXXXII, IV; ; 25 386 J. QVIGSTAD. E. Lappiske Navne paa Orme, Bleddyr, Pighudede EN ED DX Ge 10. 1. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19) og Tarmlose. . akale-lied (Pasv.), [Haakjærring-slim], Oyanea capillata, Manæte; s. 3. 4. 18. 26. akkar-guölle, [Akkerfisk], (Ib. Of.) akkar, (Lg.) ankir, Ommatostrephes todarus: s. 23. akkolag-Sliedda (Varanger), [Haakjærring-slim], = 1. bosso-éolgga, [Hvalspyt], = 1. garanas-batte (Kr.), [Kraakegryde], Echinus. garanas-ruitto (Varanger, Ks.), [Kraakegryde], — 5. garja-batte, (KL) garja-gritto, [Kraakegryde], = 5. garra I. karra (Nb. Cardium, norsk: Renskjel. gavdnjaragges, pl. -raggak, (Nb.) gainaragges, (Kv.) gavnjeriegges, (Lg.) gavnrinnga, (Helge) gamrigges, (Kl) gamleggesl. gevnjerigges, (Bls. gævnjarigga, Ascaris, en Traadorm der findes 1 Fisk; s. 30. go22a-guólle (Kv.), [Pis-fisk], = 2. govva, pl. govak (Sdv,), hvidt, stort Skjel med glinsende Inderside, Cardium?, (Leem) gov, pl. govak, Sneglehus paa Stene 1 Fjeren.. guiske, Musling: bokka-g., [Bukkeskjel; gaica-g. [Gjedeskjel], Mytilus; hæsta-g., [Hesteskjel], Pecten is- landicus; spine-g., [Svineskjell, Mya; s. 20. 24. matto, pl. madok | S. mato I. matok, (Lul.) matu | E. matu | R. (Notozero) mat, g. mad, Mark, iser Lumbri- cus; s. 25. mer-sopt (R.: Akkala) [Havskum|, Svamp, Spongia; Sh 27. ribun (Lg.), enslags Snegl. ripu, (Kv.) ripa, Snegl. ruossa-ræbba, [Korskrabbe], Asterias, Korstrold. siedak, Manæte; s. 1. skadna, pl. skanak, Balanus. LAPPISKE NAVNE PAA PATTEDYR, KRYBDYR ETC. 387 20. skalééo | S. skaléo, (Lul.) skalléu | R. (Pasv.) skalé, 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 20. 21. 28. DL 30. 31. 32. Muslingskal. De norske Lapper skjelner mellem: boccu-s. |. boaco-s, [Renskjel], Mytilus edulis; bukka-s. |. bokka-s. [Bukkeskjel]; gaicca-s., [Gjedeskjel, Mytilus modiolus; garanas-s., [Kraakeskjel|, Echinus; gussa-s., [Koskjel, Cyprina islandica; hæsta-s. l. hævo3-s,, (Kv. ogs.) rossel. rose-s., [Hesteskjel], Pecten islandicus; savcca-s, [Sauskjel], Astarte; spine-s., [Svineskjel], Mya; s. 12. I Kv. Ib. bruges bednag-s., [Hundeskjel], om Sneglehuse, der findes i Fjæren. skeléim (Sdv.), Pecten islandicus; s. 12. 20. 22. skiréeg (Nb.), = 21. skuftar (HE), = 2. skuiske, Muslingskal; s. 12. skuörva (S.: Sors), = 13. snuolgga, [Snot], — 1. spielder-facca, [spielder-vante], = 14. &erggim (Leem), Pecten (med hvidt og stribet Skjel). @ıvrre, en brandgul Mark, som sidder ved endel Fiskes, iser Torskens Mave, ogs. paa Leveren; Ascaris. éoalle-gaimrigges (Pasv.), [Tarm-gaimrigges], vel =%,. varfa (Gullestjord), Mytilus modiolus. vuöddas-cærv (Pasv.), [Sandmark], Arenicola piscatoria. Trykt den 20. December 1904, 0 0 0000 00 oO 000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000 000000000 qjSuoe[ s'ur oc 1940) å q1S8ue[ SUD QG 140 (0) 0000 00000000 000000 00 00 (DASHES (0) 0000000 00000000000000000 00000 (0) Yysue] STI YG—9] WOIY q1Sue[ SUD QE—g] WOL (0) 0 0 00000000 0000000000 00000 00 0000000000 (0) 0000000000000000000000000 0000000 00000 oT SL TI ST GI IT Yj} sus] suo 97 dopup Yyysue] s'wd 97 Jepug (DYN. OWS) JNO], : (40j0S owos) UOWIeS "]no01] pur uouies ur einSg-e[peos ay) Jo uonerreA oY} SUIMOUS epqe], ‘I 'qEL RE Tab. II. Table representing variation of taileoeffecient I 9: The lenght of the tail: the altitude of analfin. Salmon (salmo salar) Trout (salmo trutta) Under 16 cm.s length Under 16 cm.s length 1,30 1,20 | o 00 1,10 | 00000 00 100|0000000000000000000000000 0000 0 090 | ooo 0 0 [0] 00000 0,80 00000 000000000 0,70 000 0,60 From 16—50 cm.s length From 16—50 em.s length 00 1,40 | o 00 1,30 | ooo 000 1,20 | 0000 1,10 | o 1,00 00000 0000000 0,90 000000 D 000000000 0,80 000000 000 0,70 Over 50 em.s length Over 50 cm.s length 1,60 1,50 | o 000 140 | oo 00000 130 | 00000 0000000000000000 1,20 | 00000000 0000000000 1,10 | 0000 000 1,00 | o 00 0,90 | o 000 0 0 0,80 o 0,70 Mois dg ay” pr FE PSOE a c m PA “+ ni d ve à wk is 2,32 he Sih fo mf b. er Bike 1 Å [i 2 E i SEEN 1 "n Tab. III. Table shewing variation of tailcoefficient II. 2: Length of tail: minimum altitude of tail. ho salmon (salmo salar) | Trout (salmo trutta) | Salmon (salmo salar) | E rout (salmo trutta) , Under 16 em.s length | Under 16 cm.s length Over 50 cm.s length Over 50 cm.s length 9,10 2,50 q 0 9,00 | o 9 40 199 | oo 2,30 fo) (0) 2,20 o o 00 9,10 000 | 000 2,00 000 o 000 1,90 | o o 00 o o 1,80 | o o 0 000 0000 1,70 | o 00 0000 0000000 1,60 | ooo 0000000 000 00000 1,50 | oo 00 00 1,40 000 16-50 em.s length | From 16-50 cm.slength 1,30 | o lg D 1,20 = 1,10 | 1,00 0 0 o o 000 00000 0000 0000 1,80 | oo b. 0000 71,70 | 000 | 1,60 | 00 o (0) 000 00 00 00000 00 0000 Tab. IV. Table representing the sizes of emigraling young salmon. Orkla and the mouth of the Orkla 8/,—13/4 1898 Eelhandseine. - 000 00000000 0000000 The mouth of the Gula 26/,—°/, 1898 Eelhandseine. 16/,—17/, 1898 Eelhandseine. 00000000 0000000000000000000000 000000000 00 00000 0000000000 1000000000000000000 0000000000000 00 Gula and the mouth of the Gula The mouth af YU the Gula 15/ 9/, 1899 Fl : | Eelhandseine. | Y | | 0000 00 | 0000 0000000 |000000 oO 00000 Uddevold, Gula Bak, Orkla 161. 1901 Fly. o 000 000 0000 o Kalstad, Orkla 71. 1901 Fly. 00 00000 on o ESESERESEZSEGUSNEUENIE Böse BASSEIEH SIEAFHEE Orkla !9/, —'*/, 1898 Eelhandseine. [uU 000 000000000 0000000 000000000000000 0000000000000000 00000000000 0000000 00000000 00000 0000 000 00000000 000000 000000000000 00000 000 0000 no 0 o 00 00 000 o oo oo oOoooooooooooooocococoocoo 09000000000000000000 090000000900 000 © © Tab. V. Orkla and the mouth of the | Gula and the mouth of the Gula oooo 23/. —*/, 1898 Eelhandseine. 0000 00000 00000000 00 00000 o 00 0000 000 0000000000 0000000000000 00000000 0000000000 00 00 ooocoococococoooco o Borselven and Børsbugten 0-19, 1898 Eelhandseine. 00000 000000000 (plus 14) 000000000( — BA) 000000000(— 18) 000000000( — 14) 000000000 0000000000 Lensviken, Rissen and Selven o o0000000009 o 00000000 Table representing the size of the trout caught during the researches '7/,—27/, 1898 Eelhandseine. 0 x 0 000000000 0 000000000(plus 8) o 000000000( — 98 0 000000000( — 17) 0 000000000(— 8) o 0000 jo 0 |o 00 0 0 0 0 o [n o o Oo [o |o 0 |o |o |o o [o [n Gula and Ihe mouth of the Gula 14/ 17 la . 18065 Pelhandseine. 000 000000 0000 0000 00 0 0000 00000 0000000000000 0000 000 o Tab. VI. Table representing the size of the trout caught during the researches. 9 = spent or sexually mature fish. The mouth of the Orkla 23/,9 1898 Eelhandseine. ococodvcoooococoo ° 0000000000 0000000000 000009000 ooooooooo ooooooooo ooocooco ooocooo o o coooo oooco 000000000000 9000000000 90 oooooooo coooooo 090000 02000 090000 00000 000000 0000 oO Orkla Kalstad 24/,9 1898 | Eelhandseine. 1 9 (od Ü 9 9 9 o o 0 Orkla, Forve bridge 1599 Eelhandseine. Oo [n [n 0 o Tab. VII. Table representing the size of the trout caught during the investigations. 9 = spent or sexually mature fish. © 00000000000000000000000000009200909000 000000000000000000002000000000© 000000000000 3000000000 ©0000 o 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 o o 00 The Beitstadfiord may 1900 Eelhandseine and ordinary seine. oO 000000000 000000000000000000000000 000000000000000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000000000000000000 00000000000000000000000 0000000000000000000000 00000000000 000000 000 00000 o00000000 Beitstadfiord august 1900 Eelhandseine. 000000 0000 o [uU 00 The Batten- fiord !*/, 1900 | Eelhandseine. The Gula Eelhandseine. 0 Le] (Sundet) 12/,, 1900 0000 00 0000 0000 woo Lerkjær, Mandalriver 0 0 0 25 / /ıo 1901 Eelhandseine. 0000 0009 0 0000000 0000000 000000000000 0 0 — 4 5 I Lae " = aa "n^ Pr. rv. ‘azIS "yeu (Jjows) uoures SunoÁ SuneiSIurg ‘G ‘SLA FEE 1 Nyt Mac. r. Naturv. B. 42, Pi AG Nyt Mac. r. Naturv. D. 42. '"Suo[ "WO GTZ uowpes | ‘SM "Suo[ “WD QZ MOIL °T ‘SLA oo... As ^ Nyt Mac. r. Naturv. B. 49, Trout 25,5 cm. long. Fig. 1. Pi. VI. Salmon 28 em. long. Fig. 2. NYT MAGAZIN NATURVIDENSKABERNE DEN PHYSIOGRAPHISKE FORENING I CHRISTIANIA BIND 42, Hefte 1 REDAKTION: H. Monn, Tu. HiortoaAnL, W. C. Brocesr, F. dede Hoveprepaxrer N. Wie, BR CHRISTIANIA I KOMMISSION HOS T. 0. BRØGGER A. W. BROGGERS BOGTRYKKERI 1904 I Aaret 1904 vil der af „Nyt Magazin for Natur- videnskaberne* udkomme Bind 42 med samme Udstyr og lignende Indhold som B. 41, idet „Nyt Magazin for Natur- videnskaberne“ herefter kun optager Afhandlinger over natur- historiske Emner inden de botaniske, geografiske, geolo- giske, mineralogiske og zoologiske Videnskaber. Tidsskriftet nyder nu en Statsunderstøttelse af Kr. 2000 aarlig, men dette er ikke tilstrækkeligt, hvis det ikke tillige støttes ved Abonnement af Personer og Institutioner, som har Interesse af Naturhistoriens Fremme i vort Land. ht | Saasnart Tidsskriftets Økonomi tillader, er det Meningen ikke alene at udstyre Afhandlingerne rigeligere med Afbildninger, men ogsaa at lade medfølge de paa norsk skrevne Afhandlinger et Resumé paa et større Kultursprog. | Forfatterne vil erholde 50 Separataftryk gratis. „Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne* vil udkomme med 4 Hefter aarlig, hvert paa 6 Ark og Abonnementsprisen GE er 8 Kr. om Aaret, irit tilsendt med Posten inden de skan- dinaviske Lande. Tidsskriftets Kommissionærer er: For Norge, Sverige, Danmark og Finland: T. 0. Brøgger, Carl Johansgade 19, Christiania. — LE "Jy. For andre Lande: R. Friedländer & Sohn, Carlstrasse | 11, Berlin N. W. For Redaktionen N. WILLE. N in, d DIE UMSCHAU . BERICHTET ÜBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE UND BEWEGUNGEN DER WISSEN- SCHAFT, TECHNIK, LITTERATUR UND KUNST IN PACKENDEN AUFSATZEN. Jährlich 52 Nummern. Illustriert, »Die Umschau“ zählt nur die hervorragendsten Fachmänner zu ihren Mitarbeitern. Prospekt gratis durch jede Buchhandlung, sowie den Verlag H. Bechhold, Frankfurt a. M., Neue Kräme 19/21. BERGENS MUSEUM. Prisbelenning af Joachim Frieles legat. og Legatets fundats bestemmer bl. à, at der af renterne hvert 3die aar udredes en prisbelønning bestaaende af en guldmedalje af 400 kroners værdi, for det videnskabelige arbeide med emne hørende under Norges land eller havfauna, som museets bestyrelse, efter udstedt opfordring til konkur- rence, finder værdigt til saadan belønning. Ligeledes udredes af legatets renter det fornødne til udgivelse af det prisbelønnede arbeide. I henhold hertil opfordres videnskabsmænd, der ønsker at konkurrere om denne prisbelønning, til inden udgangen af september 1905 at indsende sine konkurrencearbeider til Bergens museum. Saafremt noget af de ind- sendte arbeider findes værdigt til åt prisbelønnes, finder uddelingen sted . den 18de december s. a. i ; x i | Afhandlingerne, der kan vere affattede paa et af de nordiske sprog, jaa tysk, fransk eller engelsk, indsendes som manuskript og skal være orsynede med et motto samt ledsagede af forseglet brev med samme motto og indeholdende forfatterens. navn og adresse. — | Bergens Museum den 12te oktober 1903. G. A. Hansen. = Brunchorst. Indhold. se E W. C. BRØGGER, Uber die chemische Zusammensetzung des Xenotim (PLI) IG 005g LM d Ga ats tet e LSU QE US RES P. HENNINGS, Beitrag zur Pilzflora der Umgebung Christiania (Hal- binsel Bygdø 5 NE P. SCHEI, On some New Oecurrences of Titanite from Kragerø . . . 5 OSKAR SCHULTZ, Beiträge zur Gattung Papilio L. und Colias Leacn 39 F. G. GADE og JENS HOLMBOE, Aarsberetning for Det biologiske selskab. 1 Kristiania 41908 SSR ee - HANS KIÆR, Dyrelivet i Drøbaksund (Med Pl. I, IH) . . . . . . 61 H. N. DICSON and W. E. NICHOLSON, Bryological notes on a trip in Norway... GEN ee a Bidrag til Magazinet bedes indsendt til Prof, Dr. N, WILLE, Teien, Kristiania, ; | M FERNE Forfatterne er selv ansvarlige for sine Afhandlinger, Optordring. Fra 1903 har Undertegnede paataget sig at referere til „Just’s botanischer Jahresbericht al i Danmark og Norge publiceret botanisk Litteratur, For at dette kan blive udfert saa hurtigt og fyldigt som muligb tillader jeg mig at opfordre de Herrer Forfattere og Udgivere til at sende mig Særtryk af deres Skrifter. | På Botanisk Museum, København. Br Morten P. Porsild. NYT MAGAZIN | NATURVIDENSKABERNE "DEN PHYSIOGRAPHISKE FORENING I CHRISTIANIA BIND 42, Hefte 2 | REDAKTION: -— H. Moun, Ta. Hiortpaut, W. C. BrøGGER, F. NANSEN, HOoVEDREDAKTOR N. WiLLE. CHRISTIANIA I KOMMISSION HOS T. 0. BRØGGER À. w. BROGGERS BOGTRYKKERI - 1904 is bestemn Bs bl. a, T ae SE ne ee die Qm bestaaende af en guldmedalje af 400 kroners arbeide med emne hørende under Norges land ‚til saadan belønning. Ligeledes udredes af legatets — dgivelse af det prisbelønnede arbeide. | pfordres idenskabsmzend, der ønsker at konkurrere : 1 udgangen af september 1905 atindsende ^ | Bergen museum. Saafremt noget af de ind- u at. cene dpud finder uddelingen sted kan være ade paa et af de nordiske sprog, : ngelsk, indsendes som. manuskript og skal være . | forfait rens nayn og adresse. | [useum den 19te oktober 1908. G. A. Hansen. - Brunchorst, : Se seets bestyrelse, efter udstedt opfordring til konkur- — B samt ledsagede af forseglet brev med samme motto i = 1 es M SER ee NT CY NICE er D Er aw er ER East ge AR Indhold. — LX H. N. DIXON and W. E. NICHOLSON, Bryological o on a E in Norway (contin.) . . ^ 97 71 EMER. STRAND, Beitrag zur Sheen NorweRenge In. 1090-00 EMBR. STRAND, Bemerkninger til ut Münsters RANN norske ! Coleoptera“ . Fr ee Le . S. K, SELLAND, Om vegetationen. i Gran vin: EE M Iu a S fe SDS Anmeldelser 04 2 (er EN TR A iene aici TUM E EE Side Bidrag til Magazinet bedes indsendt til Prof. Dr. N. WILLE, Teien, . : Kristiania, Forfatterne er selv EE for sine Afhandlinger. Opfordring. Fra 1903 har Undertegnede paataget sig at referere til „Just’s États Jahresbericht“ al i Danmark og Norge publiceret botanisk Litteratur, For at dette kan blive udført saa hurtigt og fyldigt som muligt, tillader jeg - mig at opfordre de Herrer Forfattere og en til at: sende "ug Særtryk |. af deres Skrifter. . Botanisk Museum, Kobenhavn. Morten P. Porsild. NYT MAGAZIN NATURVIDENSKABERNE DEN PHYSIOGRAPHISKE FORENING | I CHRISTIANIA BIND 42, Hefte 3 .REDAKTION: or H. Moun, Tu. HioRTDAHL, W. C. Broccer, F. Nansen, : | HovgpREDAKTOR N. WILLE. EIET ES CHRISTIANIA I KOMMISSION HOS T. 0. BRØGGER ‘A. W. BRØGGERS BOGTRYKKERI 1904 : a, Bern N w gnes ved postanstal- i, Kjøbenhavn. Forfattern er ù . mig at opfordre de Herrer Forfatte 3 af deres Skrifter, m NYT MAGAZIN NATURVIDENSKABERNE > GRUNDLAGT AF . .. DEN PHYSIOGRAPHISKE FORENING EE I CHRISTIANIA BIND 42, Hefte 4 Po | REDAKTION: H. Moan, Tu. Hıortpauı, W. C. BrøcGGEr, F. NANSEN, dcs. HovEDREDAKTOR N. WILLE. CHRISTIANIA ~ I KOMMISSION HOS T. 0. BRØGGER ÅA. W. BRØGGERS BOGTRYKKERI 1904 I Aaret 1905 vil der af ,Nyt Magazin for Natur- UM videnskaberne* udkomme Bind 43 med samme Udstyr og | À lignende Indhold som B. 42, idet „Nyt Magazin for Natur- M videnskaberne* herefter kun optager Afhandlinger over natur- om historiske Emner inden de botaniske, geografiske, geolo- E giske, mineralogiske og zoologiske Videnskaber. 4 Tidsskriftet nyder nu en Statsunderstottelse af Kr. 2000 aarlig, — E men dette er ikke tilstrækkeligt, hvis det ikke tillige stottes ved E Abonnement af Personer og Institutioner, som har Interesse af å E. Naturhistoriens Fremme i vort Land. E Saasnart Tidsskriftets Økonomi tillader, er det Meningen : ikke alene at udstyre Afhandlingerne rigeligere med Afbildninger, - | men ogsaa at lade medfelge de paa norsk skrevne Afhandlinger x et Resume paa et sterre Kultursprog. | : Forfatterne vil erholde 50 Separataftryk gratis. | „Nyt Magazin for Naturvidenskaberne* vil udkomme med 4 Hefter aarlig, hvert paa 6 Ark og Abonnementsprisen | er 8 Kr. om Aaret, frit tilsendt med Posten inden de skan- | dinaviske Lande. Tidsskriftets Kommissionærer er: 3 For Norge, Sverige, Danmark og Finland: T. O. Brake : Carl Johansgade 12, Christiania. | = For andre Lande: R. Friedlander & Sohn, Carlstrasse M 11, Berlin N. W. | | For Bedaktionen N. WILLE. DIE UMSCHAU BERICHTET ÜBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE «HUND BEWEGUNGEN DER WISSEN- SCHAFT, TECHNIK, LITTERATUR UND KUNST IN PACKENDEN AUFSÂTZEN. Jäbrlich 52 Nummern. Illustriert, „Die Umschau“ zählt nur die hervorragendsten Fachmänner zu ihren Mitarbeitern. Prospekt gratis durch jede Buchhandlung, sowie den Verlag H. Bechhold, Frankfurt a. M., Neue Kräme 19/21. PHARMACIA TIDSSKRIFT FOR KEMI OG FARMACI redigeret af Ervinp Koren udkommer 2 gange om maaneden. I første halvaar 1904 har følgende herrer leveret bidrag: V. Bjerknes, W. C. Brogger, P. Farup, O. Frich, H. Gold- schmidt, Kr. Grøn, S. A. Heyerdahl, Aug. Koren jr., Haa- vard Martinsen, C. Nicolaysen, J. Sebelien, Knut T. Strom, S. Sæland, S. Torup. Abonnement — kr. 5.00 pr. aar — tegnes ved postanstal- terne og hos boghandlerne samt i tidsskriftets expedition, Munke- damsveien 78, Kristiania. Telefon 88131. Tidsskriftets kommissionærer er: i Danmark: universitetsboghandler G. E. C. Gad, Kjøbenhavn. i Sverige: Nordiska Bokhandeln, Stockholm. Finland: Edlundska Bokhandeln, Helsingfors. Indhold. j Side KNUT DAHL. A study on trout and young salmon. With PI. IV, V, . VI. (Slutn.) ; J. QVIGSTAD. Lappiske Navne paa Dunn Krybdyr og p Fiske, Leddyr og lavere Dyr. . . . . 339 Bidrag til Magazinet bedes indsendt til Prof. Dr. N. WILLE, Tøien, Kristiania. Forfatterne er Selv ansvarlige for: sine Afhandlinger. pe Fra 1903 har Undertegnede paataget sig at referere til ,Just's botanischer Jahresbericht* al i Danmark og Norge publiceret botanisk Litteratur. For at dette kan blive udfert saa hurtigt og fyldigt som muligt, tillader jeg — mig at opfordre de Herrer Forfattere og Udgivere til at sende mig SE af deres Skrifter. Botanisk Museum, Kebenbhavn. Morten P. Porsild. Botanisk literatur udkommande i de Skandinaviska länderna, Finland . och Ryssland, refereras af undertecknad i „Botanical Gazette", Chicago. Resp. författare ombedes att för undvikande af tidsspillan sända sina ar- - beten direkt till undertecknad. i Dr. Pehr Olsson-Seffer. Stanford University, California. — U. S Are TT 5 WHSE 05801 fe ares — A tto Mar rio mea EG eher ann re ee